CX2600-200 Instruction Manual v7.6B Eng PDF

CX2600/200
Multi-Service Aggregation Switch
Instruction Manual
Notes
Read this manual in advance thoroughly to use this product correctly.
Keep the manual at hand for quick reference.
MADE IN JAPAN
Corresponding versions
Version 07.06
Revision History
Revision History
Rev.
Published date
May 2009
Description
First edition published
Revision History
(Blank page)
Preface
Preface
This section describes the points to be
checked before using the CX2600/200 series.
About This Product iii

Safety Precautions
vi
Document Structure xii

Ver. 7.6 Unsupported
Functions xiv
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the CX2600/200.
The CX2600/200 comprises three models, CX2600/220, CX2600/210, and CX2600/202.
In this manual, the "CX2600/220" is sometimes used in equipment setting examples and so on.
In such a case, the contents are also applicable to the "CX2600/210" and "CX2600/202". Special
explanation is provided for the sections specific to a particular model; however, the contents are
applicable to the "CX2600/210" or "CX2600/202" accordingly unless otherwise indicated.
Read this manual in advance thoroughly to correctly use this product.
Keep this manual at hand for quick reference.
The manual gives descriptions required to install, set, and service this equipment.
The manual is intended for persons who know basic operations and settings of a personal
computer and network. For operations of a personal computer and general network settings, see
the manual of the equipment used or commercially available books.
Note
(1) This manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without consent of NEC.
(2) The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
(3) Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Any
discrepancies, errors, and missing information should be reported to the distributor of the
product or the NEC account sales person.
(4) NEC assumes no responsibility for the result of the operation, regardless of the description of
(3).
(5) We are ready to replace a manual book having a missing page or incorrect collating with a
perfect one.
ii
Preface
About This Product

Information about Voluntary Control Council for Interference by
Information Technology Equipment
This product is classified as information technology equipment complying with the standards of
Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment Class A. If the
product is used in ordinary home electric environments, it may cause interference.
The user may be required to take a proper action against interference.
EU Emission (EMI) Standards

Warning
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
FCC Warning
FCC Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the users authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Statement:
The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices;
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful Interference to radio
communications, Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Safety Standard (FDA) for Laser Products

Complies with FDA performance standards for Laser products except for deviations to Laser
Notice No50, dated June 24, 2007.
iii
Preface
Power Supply Connection
If the equipment has been designed to connect an IT power distribution systems, the integrity of
protective earthing shall be ensured.
Use in Medical Institutions

This product is not intended for use as (or use as a component in) equipment involving human
lives or equipment required high reliability, such as medical equipment, nuclear equipment,
aerospace equipment, or transportation equipment.
NEC assumes no responsibility for physical injury, fire, or social loss caused due to a failure with
this product used as such equipment or a control system.
In equipment or a control system, all possible measures must be taken for safety design such as
redundant design, fire spread prevention design, and malfunction prevention design.
Precautions
NEC assumes no responsibility for net economic damage, caused by lost communication
opportunity due to the equipment failure, malfunction, and other trouble, as well as external factors
such as blackout of commercial power.
Precautions on Export
Anyone who wishes to export this product is required to follow the necessary procedure including
an export license application according to the Export Trade Control Order. Any specific
documents that are necessary for obtaining the license should be requested to the distributor of the
product or the NEC sales office.
iv
Preface
Product Disposal
In the European Union
EU-wide legislation as implemented in each Member State requires that used electrical
and electronic products carrying the mark (left) must be disposed of separately from
normal household waste. This includes all of CX2600 product or electrical accessories,
such as various function modules or cables.
When disposing of used products, you should comply with applicable legislation or
agreements you may have. The mark on the electrical and electronic products only
applies to the current European Union Member States.
Outside the European Union

If you wish to dispose of used electrical and electronic products outside the European Union,
please contact your local authority and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Regarding Software License Agreement

By using this product, you agree to be bound by the clauses of this license agreement. If you do
not agree this agreement, NEC will not grant you a license to use the software or make a copy of
the software. The software license agreement is provided at the end of the document.
Regarding Trademarks
The company names, product names, and service names in this document are registered
trademarks or trademarks of their respective owners.
Preface
Safety Precautions
Safety has been taken into account in design and manufacture of this product. However,
mishandling or operation errors by the user may lead to a serious accident. To avoid such an
accident, please read this manual carefully to understand the contents before using the product.
There are many 'items that are not possible' or 'items that are prohibited' and it is not possible to
include all the items in this manual. Therefore, assume the items as 'not possible' unless
otherwise described as 'possible' in this manual.
Safety marks
The marks and legends used in this manual
and their meanings are listed below. Before
reading this manual, keep the following in
mind.
The touching of a rotating object may cause

an injury.
Transceiver that radiates laser rays
WARNING
Indicates that the prohibition of the use of

the equipment near water for safety.
Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this

mark may cause a fatal or serious injury to a human
Indicates that the prohibition of the
body.
disassembly of the equipment for safety.
CAUTION
The handling of the equipment with a wet
Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this
hand is prohibited for safety reasons.
mark may cause injury to a human body and damage

The wetting of the equipment is prohibited
to physical equipment.
for safety reasons.
NOTE
Indicates that the prohibition of general
Indicates the supplementary explanation that is not
actions that are not specified.
related to personal safety or equipment damage.
Be sure to disconnect the power cord from

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause
the power terminal (main body) for safety
fire.
reasons.
(This mark is commonly applied to both the
AC power supply module and the DC power
electric shock.
supply module.)
Gives a direction for surely connecting the
injury.
ground cable to equipment having a ground

terminal.
vi
Preface
Precautions Regarding Power
Supply
Connect or disconnect the power cable

from the power terminal according to the
procedure and precautions that are
WARNING
described in this manual.
When using a DC power supply module in
Mishandling may cause fire or electric
this equipment, make sure that only a
shock.
voltage range of DC-40.5V to -57V is used
Always disconnect the external power
as the input range and when using an AC
source before connecting/disconnecting the
power supply module, AC100V, 120V,
power cable from the power terminal.
220V-230V, or 240V is used as the input
Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be
voltage range.
caused.
Be sure to connect the ground wire to the
caused.
ground terminal.
Securely insert the power cable into the
Otherwise, electric shock may be caused.
power terminal (main body).
Connection of the ground wire reduces
If metal or the like makes contact with the
damage during lighting or prevents noise.
power terminal, fire or electric shock may

be caused.
Do not use a damaged power cable.
Do not put any object on the power cable.

caused.
Damage to the power cable may cause fire

or electric shock.
Do not pull or insert the power cable from or

into the power terminal (main body) with a
For the DC power supply, securely connect
wet hand.
the DC power cable to the power terminal at

the rear of this equipment, by correctly
identifying -48V side and RTN(G) side and
When the power cable is connected to the
avoiding mutual contact.
power terminal (main body), do not touch
A connection error of the power cable on
the main body with a wet hand.
the -48V side and the RNG(G) side or
mutual contact may cause fire, electric
Before connecting or disconnecting the
shock, or some equipment malfunction.
ground wire, be sure to disconnect the
Properly tighten the screws that are
power cable from the power terminal (main
attached to the power supply module when
body).
installing the power supply module in the
If the ground wire is connected or
equipment.
disconnected while the power cable is
Loose screws may cause fire, electric
connected to the power terminal (main
shock, or some equipment malfunction.
body), electric shock may be caused.
vii
Preface
Precautions Regarding
Installation, Transportation,
Storage, and Operating
Environments
<AC power supply type> The power cable

specified for this equipment is designed
specifically for this equipment only. The
cable cannot be used for any other
equipment.
WARNING
Otherwise, fire, electric shock, or some

equipment malfunction may be caused.
Do not place a container with liquid such as
<AC power supply type> Do not use any
a flowerpot, glass, cosmetics, chemical
cables other than the power cable specified
near the equipment.
for this equipment.
If liquid is spilled over the equipment, fire or
The use of an incorrect cable may cause
electric shock may be caused.
fire, electric shock, or some equipment

malfunction.
Do not use this equipment in a humid
NOTE
environment (humidity 85% or higher) or in
An aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for the
the environment that causes condensation
power supply module of this equipment. The storing
such as in a bathroom or in the vicinity of a
of an aluminum electrolytic capacitor for a long period
humidifier.
of time without charging causes performance
deterioration. Charge the capacitor by turning on the
caused.
power supply for around two hours once a year for
The contents of the CD-ROM of this manual
safety reasons even if it is not used for a long time.
are not voice data. Use it only with a
When not using this equipment, always disconnect the
CD-ROM player. Otherwise, the loud
power cable from the power terminal (main body) for
noise may impair the hearing function or
safety reasons.
damage the speaker.
<AC power supply type> The shape of the power outlet
Never overlay one unit on another during
varies depending to the country.
installation.
Use a correct power
cable for the shape.
If the unit falls, you may suffer
serious injury such as fracture.

When one unit needs to be overlaid on
another, be sure to use a rack.
When installing the equipment units at the
top and bottom, always mount them on the
racks.
The equipment has a weight of 20 kg or
more (depending on the configuration). If
you lift the equipment by yourself, you may
hurt your low back. The equipment should
be carried or installed by two or more
persons.
viii
Preface
Keep the equipment and power cable away
Store each module by wrapping it with an
from fire or flame such as a heater.
insulated sheet.
Damage to the cover or power cable may
An electrostatic discharge failure or
cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
accumulation of dust on the product by

storing without protection may cause fire,
Do not place the equipment in a location
electric shock, or some equipment
where oil splashes, steam generates, or
malfunction.
much dust is present.

Otherwise, fire, electric shock, or
malfunction may be caused.
CAUTION
Do not place the equipment during

operation in a location exposed to direct
The temperature and humidity ranges that
sunlight or a high temperature (45C or
are specified in this manual must be
higher).
observed at transportation and storage of
Otherwise, the temperature inside the
this equipment.
equipment rises excessively, probably
Otherwise, the equipment may be
causing fire.
damaged.
Always take a measure to handle
Do not cover the ports of this equipment.
electrostatic discharge before handling the
Otherwise, the internal temperature rises,
equipment.
possibly causing a fire.
The touching of the equipment without

taking such a measure causes electrostatic
Do not place this equipment on an unstable
discharge failure, thereby causing fire,
location (unstable or sloping stand).
Otherwise, the equipment may drop or tip
malfunction.
over, causing an injury or some equipment

malfunction.
Do not touch the components when

handling each module.
Do not place this equipment in the
Otherwise, the components may be
environment of high vibration or impact.
disengaged from the substrate, causing fire,
Otherwise, the equipment may drop or tip
over, causing an injury or some equipment
malfunction.
malfunction.
As this product is susceptible to impact, do
This product has many angles.
not drop or hit the product with a hard
Handle the product with the utmost care to
object.
avoid any injury.
Otherwise, the product may be damaged,
NOTE
causing fire, electric shock, or some

equipment malfunction.
If the equipment is used near a radio or TV, the noise

from the equipment may affect the radio or TV. If a
device that generates a strong magnetic field is present
near the equipment, the equipment may be affected by
noise, resulting in malfunction.
In this case, keep the
equipment away from other units.
ix
Preface
Precautions Regarding Fault
and Trouble
When detecting smoke or abnormal odor

from this equipment, turn off the power,
disconnect the power cable from the power
WARNING
terminal (main body), check that smoke is
When the equipment is dropped or
no longer emitted, and report the incident to
damaged, turn off the power, disconnect the
the distributor of the equipment or the NEC
power cable from the power terminal (main
sales person.
body), and report the incident to the
Leaving the equipment in service may
distributor of the equipment or the sales
person.
CAUTION

When liquid such as water enters inside of
Do not carry out electrical construction
the equipment, turn off the power,
during a thunder storm.
terminal (main body), and report the
caused.
incident to the distributor of the equipment

or the NEC sales person.
Precautions for Maintenance
CAUTION
When a foreign object enters inside of the

equipment, turn off the power, disconnect
Before starting any maintenance of this
the power cable from the power terminal
equipment, always turn off the power and
(main body), and report the incident to the
distributor of the equipment or the NEC
terminal (main body) for safety reasons.
sales person.
After the purchase of this equipment,
consult with the distributor or sales person
for regular cleaning of the inside of the
When the power cable is damaged, replace
equipment.
it with a normal cable according to the
Dust accumulated inside of the equipment
procedure and the precautions that are
for a long period of time may cause fire or
described in this manual.
some equipment malfunction.
When replacing a FAN module after the
power is turned on, make sure that the fan

stops rotating before replacing it.
The touching of a rotating fan may cause an
injury.
Preface
Cautions on Handling the
Transceiver Accessories
Other Warnings and Cautions

WARNING
CAUTION
Inspection, adjustments, cleaning, and
As laser beams are used, do not look
repair of the inside of this equipment by
directly through the optical transceiver
anyone other than the NEC authorized
section after the transceiver is installed in
parties must be strictly prohibited as such
the main body and the power is turned on.
activities are dangerous.
As the surfaces of some transceivers
Some internal sections of this equipment
become hot during use, handle them
bear a high voltage, which may cause fire
carefully.
or electric shock.
Mishandling may cause a burn injury.
The customer must consult with the

distributor of the equipment or NEC sales
Before connecting the optical fiber cable
person for inspection, adjustments,
and each transceiver, check for any
cleaning, or repair of the inside of this
connector damage, bent connector pins,
equipment
stains, or dust.
Disassembling and remodeling the inside of
Any connector damage or dust or stain on
the equipment by anyone other than the
the connector may cause a short-circuit,
NEC concerned parties are strictly
thereby causing a fire. A stain on the
prohibited.
transceiver section or end of the connector

of the optical fiber cable may prevent
normal communication.
Use the transceiver specified by NEC.
Handle this equipment with care to prevent

any liquid from entering this equipment or
The use of any other transceivers may
the equipment from getting wet.
hinder normal operation or cause a failure
of the main body.
CAUTION
Do not insert metal objects or flammable
objects into the internal section from the
openings of this equipment such as ports.
The use of the equipment with such objects
may cause fire, electric shock, or some
equipment malfunction.
Do not place any object on this equipment
or climb on the equipment.
Such behavior can cause some equipment
malfunction or an injury.
xi
Preface
Document Structure
Describes the points to be checked before
using the CX2600/200 series.
1 Features and Configuration

of the CX
Describes the features and device

configuration of the CX2600/200 series.
2 Commands
Describes how to operate CLI (Command

Line Interface).
3 Settings for Network

Connection
Describes the procedure for installing the

CX2600/200 series and connecting the line
and power and the procedure for setting
consoles.
4 Setting of Basic Functions
Describes the procedure for setting basic

functions such as VLAN, QoS, and link
aggregation.
5 Setting of ATM Functions
Describes the procedures for setting basic

functions such as PVC registration, ATM
shaper, and OAM.
6 Setting of TDM Functions
Describes the procedures for setting TDM

path and TDMoP (CEC) functions.
7 EthreOAM Functions
Describes the basic EtherOAM functions

and their setting procedures.
8 Configuration Data
Describes the configuration data of various

settings and the procedure for managing
configuration data.
Describes how to operate the maintenance

9 Method of Operating
Maintenance and Management functions for networks and devices and the
management functions by a monitor or log.
Functions
10 Useful Functions
Describes the procedures for CX2600/200

series system information registration,
performance measurement, and upgrade.
11 Troubleshooting
Describes how to find a solution when

equipment does not operate as desired and
the procedure for restoring the default
settings.
12 Specifications
Shows the specifications and standards of

the line to be connected and the supported
functions.
13 Appendix
Lists troubles, counter monitoring conditions,

command errors, restart factors, and
restrictions.
xii
Read these chapters when using various functions of

the CX2600/200 series if necessary.
Preface
Read these chapters first to

make settings for network
connection.
This manual is organized as shown below.
Preface
In this manual, interfaces using twisted pair cables as transmission media for Ethernet port are
collectively called as follows.
[1] 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX are collectively called "10/100BASE-TX".
[2] 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T are collectively called "10/100/1000BASE-TX".
xiii
Preface
Ver. 7.6 Unsupported Functions

The following line modules described in this manual and the "Command Reference" are
unsupported in Version 7.6.
Line Type
gmx
Line Module Type

gm8-t, gm8-x
xiv
Contents
Contents
Prefacei
About This Product iii
Safety Precautions vi
Document Structure xii
Ver. 7.6 Unsupported Functions xiv
1 Features and Configuration of the CX 1-1

1.1 Features of the CX2600/200 1-2
1.2 Unit Configuration 1-6
Unit Outline 1-6
Components 1-8
2 Commands 2-1
2.1 Entering a Command 2-2
Rules for entering a command 2-2
2.2 Command Line Interface 2-3
3 Settings for Network Connection 3-1

3.1 Installation Procedure 3-2
3.2 Unit Mounting 3-3
3.3 Cable Connection 3-10
3.3.1 Network connection mode 3-10
3.3.2 Cable connection 3-11
3.4 Power on and Login 3-26

3.4.1 Confirming console port connection 3-27
3.4.2 Power on 3-27
3.4.3 Login 3-33
3.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance 3-42

3.5.1 Setting IP addresses 3-43
3.5.2 Remote Maintenance through In-band Network 3-44
xv
Contents
3.5.3 Remote Maintenance through Out-band Network 3-52
3.5.4 Maintenance network construction 3-60
3.6 Basic Settings after Purchase 3-62

3.6.1 Setting date and time 3-63
3.6.2 Setting system information 3-67
3.6.3 Setting functions 3-67
3.6.4 Saving set information 3-68
4 Setting of Basic Functions 4-1

4.1 Setting of Basic Functions 4-2
4.1.1 Port 4-2
4.1.2 VLAN 4-41
4.1.3 QoS control 4-59
4.1.4 Link aggregation 4-98
4.1.5 Frame size 4-112
4.1.6 IGMP snooping 4-114
4.1.7 Spanning tree protocol 4-120
4.2 Setting of Extended Functions 4-136

4.2.1 Port isolation 4-136
4.2.2 IFG overrate mode 4-140
4.2.3 Filtering 4-145
4.2.4 MAC address learning count limitation 4-149
4.2.5 MAC transparency function 4-152
4.2.6 Clock I/F control function 4-158
5 Setting of ATM Functions 5-1

5.1 ATM Path Setting 5-2
5.1.1 PVC setting 5-4
5.1.2 ATM-QoS 5-8
5.1.3 PVC-VLAN 5-20
5.1.4 ATMoP 5-23
5.1.5 ATM cell relay 5-33
5.2 ATM-OAM Setting 5-36

5.3 ATM-APS Setting 5-40
5.4 PVC Isolate 5-46
5.5 ATM Loop Guard Function 5-48
5.6 IMA Function 5-51
xvi
Contents
6 TDM Functions 6-1

6.1 TDM Setting 6-2
6.2 TDMoP Setting 6-19
6.3 TDM APS Setting 6-41
7 EtherOAM Function 7-1

7.1 EtherOAM Function 7-2
7.2 EtherPS Function 7-27
7.3 EtherRing Function 7-41
8 Configuration Data 8-1

8.1 About Configuration Data 8-2
8.1.1 Structure of configuration data 8-3
8.1.2 Types of configuration data 8-4
8.2 Configuration Data
Management 8-6
8.2.1 Setting and referencing the running configuration data 8-7

8.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup configuration data 8-8
8.2.3 Managing configuration data using a server 8-10
9 Method of Operating Maintenance and

Management Functions 9-1
9.1 Loopback Test 9-3
9.1.1 M/C loopback test procedure 9-3
9.1.2 ATM transmission path loopback test 9-6
9.1.3 Ether network loopback test 9-14
9.1.4 IMA set line loopback test 9-18
9.2 Connection Test 9-21

9.2.1 Connection test procedure 9-21
9.3 SNMP-based Management 9-23

9.3.1 Setting SNMP 9-25
9.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager 9-25
9.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance 9-26
9.3.4 Setting the trap manager 9-26
9.3.5 Saving the set data 9-27
xvii
Contents
9.4 Counter Monitoring 9-28
9.4.1 Port counters 9-28
9.4.2 VLAN counters 9-32
9.4.3 ATM counters 9-39
9.4.4 EtherOAM counters 9-49
9.5 Fault Monitoring 9-53

9.6 Faults 9-56
9.7 M/C Status 9-57
9.8 syslog Functions 9-62
9.9 MAC Learning 9-67
9.9.1 UGSW MAC learning function 9-67
9.9.2 ATM line module MAC learning function 9-70
9.10 Port Mirroring 9-75

9.11 System Reboot 9-80
9.12 Initialization 9-82
9.13 Replacement 9-84
Replacing a duplicate UGSW module 9-85
Replacing a line module 9-92
Replacing a power module 9-94
Replacing a fan module 9-95
9.14 UGSW Module Redundancy Control 9-96

9.15 UGSW Clock Redundancy Control 9-105
9.16 Resource Monitoring 9-111
9.17 Command Mode Functions 9-113
9.18 User Continuity Test 9-115
9.19 NTP Function 9-121
10 Useful Functions 10-1

10.1 Upgrade 10-2
Upgrade procedure 10-2
10.2 Line Module Type Assign
Function 10-8
10.3 External Memory Control
Function 10-10
10.4 Trap Transmission Selection Function 10-16
xviii
Contents
11 Troubleshooting 11-1
12 Specifications 12-1
12.1 Unit Specifications 12-2
12.2 Interface Specifications 12-4
Line interface specifications 12-4
Maintenance interface 12-12
Clock interface 12-15
13 Appendix 13-1
13.1 Alarm Transfer Mechanism 13-3
13.2 (TTC) TS-1000 Standard 13-33
13.3 Fault List 13-37
13.4 Trap List 13-43
13.5 Counter Monitoring Condition List 13-164
13.6 Command Error List 13-179
13.7 Restart Cause List 13-214
13.8 UGSW Switchability List 13-215
13.9 APS State List 13-219
13.10 APS Protection Time List 13-225
13.11 IMA State List 13-226
13.12 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed Connection List
13-228
13.13 External Memory List 13-231
xix
Contents
(Blank page)
xx
Features and Configuration of the CX
1 Features and
Configuration of the CX
This chapter describes the features and
configuration of the CX2600/200 series.
1.1 Features of the CX2600/200

1.2 Unit Configuration
1-1
1-6
1-2
1.1 Features of the CX2600/200

The CX2600/200 series are a series of multi-service aggregation switches that can apply to
establishing broadband access network such as FTTx service to wide-area Ethernet network and
mobile access aggregation network (mobile backhaul).
Support of various access lines

The CX2600/200 series provide a variety of line modules to flexibly support establishing various
networks.
Ethernet modules supporting FE and GbE (10/100BASE-TX, 100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-T,
1000BASE-X)
TDM modules supporting T1/E1 and STM-1 (Channelized T1/E1, STM-1/OC-3c)
ATM modules supporting T1/E1 and STM-1 (T1/E1 IMA, STM-1/OC-3c)
Hybrid switching function

The hybrid function which implements packet switch and TDM cross-connect in one module
enables flexible switching in accordance with traffic type on a single platform.
Layer 2 switch with maximum of 24Gbps and scheduler granularity of 25kbps
TDM cross-connect with maximum of 2Gbps and minimum unit of 64kbps (DS0)
Advanced QoS function

The CX2600/200 series supports the advanced QoS function which can provide elaborate
bandwidth control and priority control on a per-flow basis without affecting traffic transmission
features.
QoS control on a per-VLAN ID basis (Max. 4094) and on a per-CoS basis (4 classes)
Implementation of the maximum bandwidth, minimum bandwidth guarantee, and fairness
control between VLANs
Support of the discard mechanism which restricts influence to TCP throughput (UPC-RED
function)
A variety of classified CoS mapping function based on various header information
(Ethernet/VLAN, ATM, IPv4/v6, etc.)
Support of various traffic classes (CBR/UBR/GFR) by VP/VC/hierarchical VP and VC shaper
[supported by ATM155M/S module and ATMP155 module]
1-2

Line emulation function
The line emulation function and the ATM/Ethernet bridge function which packetize TDM/ATM traffic
enables the traffic to be integrated into the cost-efficient packet network. External input clock, line
extraction clock, or adaptive clock via packet network can be selected as the transmission clock for
the TDM/ATM line.
TDM emulation: SAToP, CESoPSN
ATM emulation: ATMoP (cell mode)
[supported by ATMP and ATMP155 modules]
ATM/Ethernet bridge: Ethernet over AAL5
[supported by ATM155M/S module]
OAM functions
In addition to ATM OAM (ITU-T I.610), the CX2600/200 series provide various OAM functions for
Ethernet (ITU-T Y.1731/IEEE802.1ag, TTC TS-1000). Functions such as failure detection, failure
information notification, identification of failure part, alarm transmission, and performance
measurement are realized to improve the maintenance and operation capability in the packet
network.
Enhanced Ethernet/VLAN functions

The CX2600/200 series provide various Ethernet/VLAN functions which are effective for
establishing layer 2 based carrier networks.
VLAN function
Port base VLAN, tag base VLAN (IEEE802.1Q), extended tag VLAN (IEEE802.1ad),
VLAN tag swap, port isolation (blocking communication between specific ports)
Redundancy function
Link aggregation (EEE802.3ad), Rapid spanning tree (IEEE802.1D,w)
Filtering function
MAC control frame transparency, traffic blocking based on various kinds of L2/L3 header
information
1-3

IPv6 functions
The CX2600/200 series provide IPv6 packet classification and multicast control functions to
support transition to the IPv6 network in the future.
IPv6 header classification function (CoS mapping)
MLD Snooping function
MPLS functions
MPLS functions support various line interfaces, such as EoMPLS and ATM/TDMoMPLS. These
functions are available by separately purchasing MPLS function licenses. For detailed information
on using and setting these functions, refer to the "Instruction Manual (MPLS)" and the "Command
Reference (MPLS)" of Ver. 7.6 or later.
Carrier class reliability

Each module is duplicated to achieve carrier class reliability.
The common part (switch module) and the power module are duplicated.
The GbE/STM-1 line interface part (line module) supports APS switchover.
All modules (switch module/line module/power module/FAN module) support hot swapping.
Flexible performance data collection

Traffic data can be flexibly collected not only on a per-line interface basis but also on a per-flow
basis (VLAN, PVC). The discard counter, which is effective for separation and identification of
problematic part, is equipped in each block in the equipment.
Network management function

The CX2600/200 series are equipped with network management protocol (SNMPv1/v2c) which
can save its own operation status in the MIB database as SNMP agent and perform monitoring and
management from SNMP manager (NMS). Event monitoring and log file collection using syslog
daemon is also available.
1-4

Maintenance interface
The CX2600/200 series have the following interfaces to be used for the maintenance and
operation of the equipment.
10/100BASE-TX interface
It can connect with NMS to perform remote monitoring by SNMP. CLI control using Telnet can
be performed and configuration data/update program files using FTP connection can be
transferred. By setting VLAN, Telnet connection can also be established via in-band without
using this interface.
RS-232C interface
It can connect with a PC, etc. via serial interface to perform CLI control.
External memory
External memory can be used to save data for file update, save and copy configuration data,
save syslog information, and so on.
1-5
1.2 Unit Configuration

Unit Outline
CX2600/220
The outline of the CX2600/220 is show below.
The outer dimensions of the CX2600/220 are 440 mm in width, 470 mm in depth, and 265 mm in
height, so the unit can be mounted in the 19-inch rack.
470mm
CX2600/220
265mm
440mm
1-6
CX2600/210
The outline of the CX2600/210 is shown below.
470mm
176mm
CX2600/210
ESD
440mm
CX2600/202
The outline of the CX2600/202 is shown below.
470mm
87mm
440mm
1-7
Components
CX2600/220
Front (connectors and indication lamps)
The front of the CX2600/220 has various insertion slots in which various modules are to be
mounted.
CX2600/220
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Item
Indication
Color
Description
(1)
Switch slots
1 and 2
These slots can mount two switch modules

to achieve the redundant configuration of
the switch/CPU unit.
(2)
Line slots
1 to 10
These slots mount various line modules.
11/R1
* FE-PV line module and 100BASE-FX line

module are mounted in line slot 1 to 4.
12/R2
* To implement protection configuration for

line modules, lines need to be paired as
follows: "1 and 3", "2 and 4", "5 and 7", "6
and 8", "9 and 11/R1", and "10 and
12/R2".
(3)
ESD terminal
(4)
Air inlet
ESD
This terminal is provided to release static

electricity. When maintaining the unit,
wear the wrist strap and connect the wrist
strap to this terminal.
This is an air inlet for air cooling.
1-8
CX2600/210
mounted.
CX2600/210
(1)
(2)
(4)
ESD
(3)
Item
(1)
Switch slots
(2)
Line slots
Indication
Color
Description
1 and 2
These slots can mount two switch modules

to achieve the redundant configuration of
the switch/CPU unit.
1 to 6

* FE-PV line module and 100BASE-FX line
module are mounted in line slot 1 to 4.
* To implement protection configuration for
line modules, lines need to be paired as
follows: "1 and 3" and "2 and 4".
(3)
ESD terminal
(4)
Air inlet
ESD

1-9
CX2600/202
mounted.
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3)
Item
Indication
Color
Description
(1)
Switch slot
This slot can mount one switch module.
(2)
Line slots
3 to 4

There are two slots in total; the left one is
slot 3 and the other right one is slot 4.
(3)
ESD terminal
(4)
Air inlet
ESD

1-10

Switch module
UGSWC
INS ALM SW-ACT SW-SEL
(2)
(3)
(1)
(4)
EXT-M
CONSOLE-LAN
CONSOLE-RS232C
(6)
(5)
(7)
EXTCLK-IN
(8)
EXTCLK-ACT
(9)
ALM
Item
(1)
INS lamp
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green/
yellow
Indicates the operating state of the module.

On (green): The module is in the normal
state.
On (yellow): The module is in the
initialization state.
Blink (yellow): The module is in the initial
setting state or self-diagnosis state.
Blink (green and yellow): The states are
given below.
- The module is downloading software,
FPGA, or configuration.
- The module is uploading configuration,
failure information, or local log.
- The module is executing the "write
memory" command to external memory.
Off: The module stops services, has a unit
failure, or finds an error during
self-diagnosis.
(2)
ALM lamp
ALM
Red
Indicates the fault state of the module.

On: A failure has occurred in the module or
an error has been found during
self-diagnosis.
Blink: A fan error/low temperature error
occurred
Off: The module is normal.
(3)
SW-ACT lamp
SW-ACT
Green
Indicates the operating state of the module

in the redundant configuration.
On: This module is in the normal state.
Off: This module is in the waiting state.
(4)
ACT change
switch
(5)
Maintenance port
SW-SEL
This is a manual ACT change switch.

Switching is enabled only from the ACT
system.
EXT-M
This is a port to which external memory is

connected (for maintenance).
1-11

Item
Indication
Color
Description
(6)
Console port 2
CONSOLERS-232C
This is a console port to which a local

console terminal is connected. A RS-232C
cable with Dsub9 pins is connected to the
port. A cross cable is used for the
connection with a console (such as a PC).
(7)
Console port 1
CONSOLELAN
This is a console port used to connect the

module to a local console terminal for the
purpose of network download. An RJ45
UTP (category 5) cable is used for the
connection.
LINK lamp
(left of the
connector)
Green
Indicates the link state of console port 1.

On: A link is established (Link-Up).
Off: No link is established (Link-Down).
Blink: Communication is in progress.
SPEED lamp
(right of the
connector)
Yellow
(8)
Clock port
EXTCLK-IN
(9)
EXTCLK-ACT
lamp
EXTCLK-ACT
Green
Indicates the line state of console port 1.

This lamp lights when 100BASE-TX is
connected, but does not light when
10BASE-T is connected.
This is a port to input reference clock.
Indicates the operating state of the clock
port.
On: The clock port is in operation.
Off: This clock port is not in operation.
1-12

GbE-PV line module
Tx Rx
GbE-PV
ALM
INS
1000BASE-X
(2)
(1)
Item
(4)
(3)
(5)
Color
Description
On: The module is in the normal state.
Off: The module is in the service stop state.
Blink: The module is downloading FPGA.
On: A failure has occurred in the module.
in a duplex operation. The lamp does not
light in a single mode.
On: The module is in the normal state
Off: The module is in the standby state
This port is used to connect the
CX2600/200 to the Ethernet via
1000BASE-SX/LX/BX. SFP (mini GBIC)
module is used to connect an optical fiber
cable.
Indicates the state of the port.
Off: No communication is performed.
This is a port used to connect the
1000BASE-T. An RJ45 UTP (category 5E
or higher) is connected.
Indicates the state of the LAN port.
This lamp lights only when 1000BASE-T is
connected.
INS lamp
INS
Green
(2)
ALM lamp
ALM
Red
(3)
LINE-ACT lamp
LINE-ACT
Green
(4)
1000BASE-X
TX, RX
1000BASE-X
LINK lamp
LINK
Green
ACT lamp
ACT
Green
1000BASE-T
LINK lamp
(right of the
Connector)
Green
SPEED lamp
(left of the
Connector)
Yellow
1000BASE-T
1000BASE-T
Indication
(1)
(5)
LINK
ACT
ALMLINE-ACT
1-13

GbE-PV2 line module
Tx Rx
GbE-PV2
ALM
INS
1000BASE-X
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Item
INS lamp
Indication
INS
Color
Green
(2)
ALM lamp
ALM
Red
(3)
LINE-ACT lamp
LINE-ACT
Green
(4)
1000BASE-X
TX, RX
1000BASE-X
LINK lamp
LINK
Green
ACT lamp
ACT
Green
10/100/1000
BASE-T
10/100/1000
BASE-T
LINK lamp
(right of the
connector)
Green
SPEED lamp
(left of the
connector)
Yellow
(5)
LINK
ACT
LINE-ACT
1-14
10/100/1000BASE-T
(5)
Description
in a duplex operation. The lamp does not
light in a single mode.
On: The module is in the normal state
Off: The module is in the standby state
This port is used to connect the
1000BASE-SX/LX/BX. SFP (mini GBIC)
module is used to connect an optical fiber
cable.
Off: No communication is performed.
This is a port used to connect the
CX2600/200 to the Ethernet via 10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, or 1000BASE-T. An RJ45
UTP (category 5E or higher) is connected.
This lamp lights only when 1000BASE-T is
connected.

100BASE-FX (Class S/A/B) line module
This module can be mounted only in line slots 1 to 4.
FX8S-PV
ALM
INS
(1) INS lamp
(3)
(2)
(1)
Item
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green

(2) ALM lamp
ALM
Red

(3) 100BASE-FX
LINK lamp
1 to 8
Green
This port is used to connect this product to

the Ethernet via 100BASE-FX. A TTC
simplex optical cable is used for this
connection.
This LED is provided and lit for each port.
TEST lamp
Yellow
Lights when the LAN port is tested.

1-15

10/100BASE-TX line module
This module can be mounted only in line slots 1 to 4.
FE8-PV
FE8
ALM
INS
(1)
INS lamp
(3)
(2)
(1)
Item
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green

(2)
ALM lamp
ALM
Red

(3)
10/100BASE-TX
1 to 8

the Ethernet via 10/100BASE-TX.
An RJ45 UTP (category 5) cable is used for
this connection.
SPEED lamp
(right of the
connector)
Yellow
Indicates the state of a LAN line. This

lamp lights during 100BASE-TX connection,
but does not light during 10BASE-T
connection.
LINK lamp
(left of the
connector)
Green

1-16

ATM155 line module
TX
ATM155M
ALM
INS
(2)
(1)
Item
(1) INS lamp
RX
FAIL
LINK
APS-ACT
(3)
(4)
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green

(2) ALM lamp
ALM
Red

(3) APS-ACT lamp
APS-ACT
Green

in the duplex operation and does not light in
the single operation.
(4) ATM port
TX, RX

the ATM network.
For ATM155S, a SM (Single Mode) cable is
used for this connection.
For ATM155M, a MM (Multi Mode) cable is
used for this connection.
FAIL lamp
FAIL
Red

On: A line failure (LOS/LOF) has occurred.
Blink: A line failure (other than LOS/LOF)
has occurred.
Off: No line failure has occurred.
LINK lamp
LINK
Green

On: A link is established.
Off: No link is established.
1-17

ATMP line module
ATMP
ALM
INS
(1) INS lamp
(3)
(2)
(1)
Item
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green

Blink: The module is being initialized or is
downloading FPGA.
(2) ALM lamp
ALM
Red

(3) T1/E1 line
1 to 8

T1/E1 line.
An RJ45 connector is used for the
connection.
Alarm detection
lamp
(right of the
connector)
Yellow
Indicates the state of T1/E1 line alarm

detection.
On: AIS is detected.
Blink: RAI is detected.
Off: No line alarm is detected.
Line state lamp
(left of the
connector)
Green
Indicates the state of the T1/E1 line.

On: Normal state
Off: Abnormal state
1-18

TDMP line module
(3)
(2)
(1)
Item
(1) INS lamp
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green

Blink: The module is being initialized or is
downloading FPGA.
(2) ALM lamp
ALM
Red

(3) T1/E1 line
1 to 8

T1/E1 line.
An RJ45 connector is used for the
connection.
Alarm detection
lamp
(right of the
connector)
Yellow
Indicates the state of T1/E1 line alarm

detection.
On: AIS is detected.
Blink: RAI is detected.
Off: No line alarm is detected.
Line state lamp
(left of the
connector)
Green
Indicates the state of the T1/E1 line.

On: Normal state
Off: Abnormal state
1-19

ATMP155 line module
ATMP155
APS-ACT
ALM
INS
Rx
Tx
FAIL
LINK
STM-1OC-3
(2)
(1)
Item
(1) INS lamp
(4)
(3)
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green

(2) ALM lamp
ALM
Red

(3) APS-ACT lamp
APS-ACT
Green

(4) ATM port
FAIL lamp
TX, RX,
STM-1/OC-3
FAIL
Red
This port is used to connect CX2600/200 to

the ATM network via STM-1/OC-3. SFP
(mini GBIC) module is used to connect an
optical fiber cable.
has occurred.
Off: No line failure has occurred.
LINK lamp
LINK
Green

1-20

TDMP155 line module
TDMP155
APS-ACT
ALM
INS
Tx
Rx
STM-1OC-3
(2)
(1)
Item
(1) INS lamp
FAIL
LINK
(4)
(3)
Indication
Color
Description
INS
Green

(2) ALM lamp
ALM
Red

(3) APS-ACT lamp
APS-ACT
Green

(4) STM-1/OC-3
LINK lamp
TX, RX,
STM-1/OC-3
LINK
Green
This port is used to connect CX2600/200 to

a network via STM-1/OC-3. SFP (mini
GBIC) module is used to connect an optical
fiber cable.
FAIL lamp
FAIL
Red

has occurred.
1-21

Product No. (SPEC No.) and Model No.
The product numbers and model numbers of the CX2600/200 are described below.
As the product number of
"NWA-040031-001" is indicated.
the
CX2600/220,
"SPEC.No.NWA-024193-001"
or
The model number is SA9064A-MBHSW.

As the product number of the CX2600/210, "SPEC.No.NWA-035577-001" is indicated.

As the product number of the CX2600/202, "SPEC.No.NWA-035580-001" is indicated.
Warning Label
The following warning labels are attached to the CX2600/200.
The following diagram shows the CX2600/220. The labels other than the NEC label showing the
SPEC No. and Model No. (c) are also applicable to other models.
(1) Top of the equipment
Front
(1)
Back
1-22

(2) Front of the equipment
CX2600/22 0
Warning label
Contents
Warning label relating to Class 1 LASER.

Do not look directly through the optical transceiver port.
Electrostatic warning label
Indicates that this equipment complies with the FDA

Standards.
Indicates that this product complies with the VCCI Class

A Standards.
Indicates that this product complies with the FCC Part15

Class A Standards.
Provides a warning of Class1 laser radiation.

Avoid viewing of a laser beam for a long period of time.
1-23

Warning label
Contents
Indicates that electrical and electronic wastes must be

separated from household refuse in the EU member
countries based on the laws that are enforced in each EU
member country.
Indicates that this equipment complies with the CE
Marking Standards.
Indicates that this equipment complies with the CSA
Standards.
1-24
DC power module/fan module

CX2600/220 DC power module/fan module
The figure below shows the components on the back of the CX2600/220 when the unit has the DC
power module (DC-PWR) and fan module.
(11)
(10)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(2)
(8)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(11)
(10)
(7)
(8)
(3)
1-25
(1)
(8)
Item
Indication
Description
(1)
DC power terminal 1
48VDC, RTN,
Power terminal to connect the module to the

48VDC power supply
(2)
DC power terminal 2
48VDC, RTN,

48VDC power supply
(3)
DC power switch 1
PWR/ON
Switch to turn on the DC power.
(4)
DC power switch 2
PWR/ON
(5)
OPE lamp
OPE
LED to indicate the state of the DC power

module
Normal: On (green)
Abnormal: Off
(6)
ALM lamp
ALM
LED to indicate the fault state of the DC

power module
Normal: Off
Abnormal: On (red)
(7)
DC power module
mounting screw
Screw to mount the DC power module on

the main body
(8)
DC power module
removal handle
Handle to remove the DC power module
(9)
Exhaust vent
Exhaust vent for air cooling exhaust
Screw to mount the fan module on the main

body
(10) Fan module mounting

screw
Note
When the DC power module is removed or inserted, the power cable must have been
removed from the DC power connector. If the DC power module is attached to or
removed from the main body of the CX2600/220 while power is supplied to the DC power
module, a failure may be caused.
Note
Do not use the DC power module and the AC power module at the same time.
Memo
The CX2600/220 operates normally if power is supplied by either DC power module 1 or

DC power module 2.
1-26

(9)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(11)
(7)
ALM OPE
(10)
(7)
ALM OPE
(9)
(7)
(8)
(3)
1-27
(1)
(6)
(5)

(8)
Item
Indication
Description
(1)
DC power terminal 1
48VDC, RTN,

48VDC power supply
(2)
DC power terminal 2
48VDC, RTN,

48VDC power supply
(3)
DC power switch 1
PWR/ON
(4)
DC power switch 2
PWR/ON
(5)
OPE lamp
OPE

module
Normal: On (green)
Abnormal: Off
(6)
ALM lamp
ALM

power module
Normal: Off
Abnormal: On (red)
(7)
DC power module
mounting screw

the main body
(8)
DC power module
removal handle
(9)
Exhaust vent

screw

body
(11) Fan module removal

handle
Handle to remove the fan module
Note
Memo

DC power module 2.
1-28

(11)
(
7)

(6)
(5)
(
4)
(8)
(2)
(13)
(9)
(7)
(7)
(10)
(7)
(6)
(5)

1-29
(3)
(8)
(1)
(12)
Item
Indication
Description
(1)
DC power connector 1
48VDC, RTN
Power connector to connect the module to

the 48VDC power supply
(2)
DC power connector 2
48VDC, RTN

the 48VDC power supply
(12) Protection earth 1
Terminal screw for the protection earth

connection.
(13) Protection earth 2
Terminal screw for the protection earth

connection.
(3)
DC power switch 1
PWR/ON
(4)
DC power switch 2
PWR/ON
(5)
OPE lamp
OPE

module
Normal: On (green)
Abnormal: Off
(6)
ALM lamp
ALM

power module
Normal: Off
Abnormal: On (red)
(7)
DC power module
mounting screw

the main body
(8)
DC power module
removal handle
(9)
Exhaust vent

screw

body
(11) Fan module removal

handle
Handle to remove the fan module
Note
Memo

DC power module 2.
1-30

Power receiving terminal area in the DC power module
The figure below shows the power receiving terminal area on the DC power module (DC-PWR) of
the "CX2600/220" and "CX2600/210".
-48V
-48V
RTN(G)
RTN(G)
(FG)
(FG)
Solderless
terminal
Wire rod
Detail Drawing of
the Power Receiving Terminal Area
Solderless terminal
5.5-A-4 (JST: Japan Solderless Terminal)
Wire rod
AWG10
(Up to AWG8 can be supported. However,
select a solderless terminal which can be
inserted in the range of 10 mm, the width
between walls dividing terminal blocks.
The figure below shows the power receiving connector area on the DC power module (DC-PWR)
of the "CX2600/202."
Note
Be sure to tighten fixing screws (two points) in the power module to fix the module to the
unit body before use.
1-31
AC power module/fan module

CX2600/220 AC power module/fan module
The figure below shows the components on the back of the CX2600/220 when the unit has the AC
power module (AC-PWR) and fan module.
(11)
(10)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(2)
(8)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(11)
(10)
(7)
(3)
(8)
1-32
(1)
(8)
Item
Indication
(1)
AC power connector 1
AC100/120/
220-230/240V

AC power supply
(2)
AC power connector 2
AC100/120/
220-230/240V

AC power supply
(3)
AC power switch 1
PWR/ON
Switch to turn on the AC power.
(4)
AC power switch 2
PWR/ON
Switch to turn on the AC power.
(5)
OPE lamp
OPE
Description
LED to indicate the state of the AC power

module
Normal: On (green)
Abnormal: Off
(6)
ALM lamp
ALM
LED to indicate the fault state of the AC

power module
Normal: Off
Abnormal: On (red)
(7)
AC power module
mounting screw
Screw to mount the AC power module on

the main body
(8)
AC power module
removal handle
Handle to remove the AC power module
(9)
Exhaust vent

body

screw
Note
When the AC power module is removed or inserted, the power cable must have been
removed from the AC power connector. Moreover, the power cable must have been
removed from the AC power module. If the AC power module is attached to or removed
from the main body of the CX2600/220 while power is supplied to the AC power module, a
failure may be caused.
Note
Do not use the DC power module and the AC power module at the same time.
Memo
The CX2600/220 operates normally if power is supplied by either AC power module 1 or

AC power module 2.
1-33
(Blank page)
1-34
Commands
2 Commands
This chapter describes how to operate the
command line interface (CLI).
2.1 Entering a Command
2-2
2.2 Command Line Interface 2-3
2-1
Commands
2.1 Entering a Command

Rules for entering a command
This unit uses the command line interface (CLI) to accept commands.
The displayed command prompt is followed by a command or space-delimited commands.
parameter following a command is delimited by a space.
Single-byte numbers, letters, and symbols can be entered.
The letters are case sensitive.
Switch@1> show system date

[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Command prompt

[2] Command
[3] Cursor
Error message during command entry

If command execution ends abnormally because an incorrect command or unauthorized command
is entered, an error message appears.
Switch@1> date 10/21/04 10:51:30
00034 : Command not found.
Switch@1>
Memo
For details of individual error messages, see "13.6 Command Error List".
2-2
Commands
2.2 Command Line Interface

During command entry, you can move the cursor, edit characters on the command line, call the
command history, complete a command, enter an abbreviated command, and use the help and
scroll control functions.
Cursor movement
The cursor can be moved on the command line.
Ctrl +
or
Moves the cursor one character to the left.
Ctrl +
or
Moves the cursor one character to the right.
Ctrl +
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl +
Moves the cursor to the end of the line.

Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
(To the beginning of the line)
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
(To the end of the line)
(One character to the left)
(One character to the right)
Editing characters on the command line

The following key combinations can be used with cursor movement to delete or edit characters on
the command line.
Back Space
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
Ctrl +
Deletes the characters between the cursor position and the

end of the command line.
Ctrl +
Deletes the entered characters on the command line.
Ctrl +
Deletes the characters between the cursor position and the

beginning of the command line.
Ctrl +
Pastes the cut or copied character string.
Ctrl +
Cancels the standby state and starts a new line.
2-3
Commands
Back Space (Delete the character to the left)
Switch@1> show system dat

Switch@1> show system d
Switch@1>
Switch@1> show system d
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
(Deletes the characters up to the end)
Ctrl +
(Deletes the characters on the command line)
Ctrl +
(Pastes the cut or copied character string)
Switch@1>
Ctrl + w (Deletes the characters between the cursor

position and the beginning)
Switch@1>
Ctrl +
(Starts a new line)
Calling command history

The commands entered so far can be called through key operation.
The commands can be called from newest to oldest or from oldest to newest.
The command history capacity is 20 latest commands.
prompt appears.
When all commands are called, the first
A called command can be edited.
Ctrl +
or
Calls the entered commands from the oldest one.
Ctrl +
or
Calls the entered commands from the newest one.
After startup, when the three commands "show all", "show session", and "show system date" has
been entered in this order, the commands are called as shown below.
Switch@1>
Switch@1> show session
Switch@1> show all
Switch@1>
2-4
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
or
Commands
Switch@1>
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
or
Ctrl +
or
Switch@1>
Ctrl +
or
Switch@1>
Ctrl +
or

Switch@1> show session
In combined use, the order is determined relative to the current command.
Completion of a command
The Tab key completes a command that is incompletely entered.
When there is only one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the Tab
key completes the rest of the command.
Switch@1> show system da
Tab
When there is more than one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the
Tab key does not complete the rest of the command.
Switch@1> show s
Tab
Switch@1> show s
2-5
Commands
Entering an abbreviated command
When there is only one command that begins with the entered character string, pressing the Enter
key can enter the command. When there is more than one command that begins with the entered
character string, the command cannot be entered.
The following example shows entry of the abbreviated "disable" command.
Switch@1# dis
Switch@1>
Enter
For a command containing multiple words, if each of the words can be abbreviated, the command
can be entered with each word abbreviated. A space is used to separate between the words.
The following example shows entry of the abbreviated "write memory" command.
Switch@1# wr m
Enter
Writing Flash Memory...

Switch@1#
Help function
The
The ?
state.
key can be used to list command descriptions.

key displays the descriptions of the commands or parameters that can be used in that
Switch@1# set terminal scroll system
off
Disables scroll control.
on
Enables scroll control.
(d)
Scroll Line <1 - 99>
<cr>
Switch@1# set terminal scroll system
2-6
Commands
Scroll control
If scroll control is set, "--More--" appears in midstream of display to stop scrolling many lines of
information. Press the Space key to display the multiple lines that follow or press the Enter key to
display the next line. If Ctrl + c are pressed, the subsequent display is cancelled and the
prompt appears.
Commands
set terminal scroll system
Setting of scroll control defaults
set terminal scroll local
Setting of local terminal scroll control
show terminal config
Display of terminal information
Note on entering a command

Only the ASCII characters (excluding control characters) can be used to enter a command.
When two or more commands are copied and pasted simultaneously, the commands may not be
executed normally.
2-7
Commands
(Blank page)
2-8
Settings for Network Connection
3 Settings for Network

Connection
This chapter describes the procedure for

installing the CX2600/200, connecting cables
and power, and setting consoles.
3.1 Installation Procedure

3.2 Unit Mounting
3-2
3-3
3.3 Cable Connection
3-10

3.5 Settings for Remote
Maintenance 3-42
3.6 Basic Settings after
Purchase 3-62
3-1
3.1 Installation Procedure

This section describes the procedure for installation of the CX2600/200.
3.2 Unit Mounting 3-3
Mount the CX2600/200 in the 19-inch rack.
3.3 Cable Connection 3-10
Select the connection mode corresponding

to the network environment to be
configured and connect cables.

Turn on the CX2600/200 and log in it.
3.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance
3-42
Perform settings for remote maintenance
by in-band network communication and
out-band network communication.
3.6 Basic Settings after Purchase
3-62
Perform basic settings of the CX2600/200
after purchase.
3-2
3.2 Unit Mounting

Confirming mounting location
The CX2600/200 can be mounted on the 19-inch rack.
rack metal fittings (standard accessories).
To mount it in the 19-inch rack, use the
Be sure not to mount the unit in the following locations to prevent operation errors, troubles,
electric shocks, etc.:
Unsteady locations (such as shaking stands and sloping locations)
Locations where the unit may be bathed in water or chemicals
Locations near devices emitting strong magnetism
Locations preventing radiation and ill-ventilated locations
Mounting procedure
Be sure to follow the following procedure to mount the CX2600/200 on the 19-inch rack:
1.
Confirm that the chassis is empty (the power module, fan module, and modules are not
mounted).
2.
Mount the flanges at the right and left sides of the CX2600/200 with small screws (M3).
CX2600/220
In the case of CX2600/220
3-3
CX2600 /21 0
CX2600/202
3.
Mount the brackets (non-accessories) at the 19-inch rack side.

Prepare mounting rails for the rack separately or ask the dealer for them.
3-4

4.
Mount the CX2600/200 in the 19-inch rack and fix it with screws at the left and right sides of
the front.
* None of the CX2600/200 models are equipped with front mounting screws.
screws for the rack that is used. (Screws of size M5 are recommended.)
CX2600/220
3-5
Prepare suitable
CX2600/210
3-6
CX2600/202
5.
Connect the ground and power cables.
(See "3.4 Power on and Login".)
6.
Mount the power module, fan module, and modules.
3-7

Notes
(1) The mounting and replacement work should be performed by the maintenance personnel.
Be sure to wear the wrist strap connected to the ESD terminal of the unit during the work.
(2) The screws are used for installing the rack metal fittings and chassis.
fittings and chassis firmly with the screws.
Mount the metal
(3) When mounting the power module, fan module and modules, insert them horizontally along
with the rails in the chassis up to the back. Mount each module, not applying excessive force
to it by using levers at both ends of the module.
(4) Mount each module in its correct slot.
module and chassis may be destroyed.
If the module is mounted in an incorrect slot, the
(5) Screws of size M5 are recommended for the front mounting screws.
must withstand the load of the equipment.
However, the screws
The metal fittings include a set of flanges (for right and left sides) of the following size. The
flanges cannot be mounted in some cases depending on the type of the 19-inch rack. So confirm
that they can be mounted in advance.
If they cannot be mounted, prepare mounting rails for the rack separately or ask the dealer for
them.
The metal fittings, conforming to the Kawamura Electric manufactured-[HD RACK] and its size, are
19-inch rack-dedicated metal fittings.
countersink
Fig.
Flanges for CX2600/220 (L)
3-8
Fig.
Fig.
3-9
3.3 Cable Connection

3.3.1 Network connection mode
The CX2600/200 allows various types of network connection modes.
CX2600/200 connection example

Console terminals
Higher
unit
Higher unit
CX2600/220
Optical
cables
UTP cables
M/C
M/C
HUB
UTP cables
Terminal
Terminal
3-10
HUB
3.3.2 Cable connection

Ethernet cable types
Ethernet
See the following table for the Ethernet cable types.
Table
Ethernet Cable Types
System
Connector
Cable type
Max. cable length
10BASE-T
RJ-45
UTP category 3 or higher
100 m (full duplex)
100BASE-TX
RJ-45
UTP category 5 or higher
100 m (full duplex)
The CX2600/200 mounts the 10/100BASE-TX (8-pin modular jack type RJ-45 connector).
Giga-bit Ethernet
See the following table for the Giga-bit Ethernet cable types.
Table
Giga-bit Ethernet Cable Types
System
Connector
Cable type
Core
Max. cable length
1000BASE-SX
LC
Multi-mode
optical fiber
50 m
500 m (full duplex)
1000BASE-LX
LC
Single-mode
optical fiber
9 m
10000 m (full duplex)
1000BASE-T
RJ-45
UTP category 5E
or higher
(with shield)
100 m (full duplex)
* For the gigabit Ethernet RJ45 cable, use a shield cable.
ATM cable types

See the following table for the ATM cable types.
Table
ATM Cable Types
Module
Connector
Cable type
Core
Max. cable length
ATM155S
SC
Single-mode
optical fiber
10 m
15 km
ATM155M
SC
Multi-mode
optical fiber
62.5 or
50 m
2 km
3-11
Cable connection method

The procedure for connecting cables to the CX2600/200 is described below.
information of the cable connection method, see each item in the flowchart.
Ether port
connection
ATM port
connection
T1/E1port
connection
1000BASE-SX port connection

1000BASE-LX port connection
1000BASE-T port connection
100BASE-FX port connection
10/100BASE-TX port connection
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-17
3-18
ATM port connection 3-19
T1/E1 port connection 3-20
STM-1/OC-3
port connection
STM-1/OC-3 port connection 3-21
Clock interface
connection
Clock interface connection
Local console port

connection
Local console connection
3-12
3-22
3-23
For more
Remote maintenance by
in-band network
communication
Remote maintenance by out-band

network communication
Connection for
remote maintenance
Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection 3-24

ATM port connection
3-13
3-14
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19

The CX2600/200 mounts the 1000BASE-SX port (LC connector).
The connection procedure is described below.
(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-SX port and LC connector optical
fiber cables (two cables per interface).
(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-SX TX port of this
unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-SX RX port of the HUB.
(3) Connect one end of the other LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-SX RX port of
this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-SX TX port of the HUB.
1000BASE-SX port
TX
Multi-mode optical fiber cable with LC connectors
RX
Another unit (such as CX2700)

TX
RX
Prepare optical fiber cables (multi-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-SX port specifications of
this unit.
3-13

The CX2600/200 mounts the 1000BASE-LX port (LC connector).
(1) Prepare a Giga-bit Ethernet HUB mounting the 1000BASE-LX port and LC connector optical
fiber cables (two cables per interface).
(2) Connect one end of one LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-LX TX port of this
unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-LX RX port of the HUB.
(3) Connect one end of the other LC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-LX RX port of
this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-LX TX port of the HUB.
1000BASE-LX port
TX
Single mode optical fiber cable with LC

connectors
RX
Another unit (such as CX2700)

TX
RX
Prepare optical fiber cables (single-mode) conforming to the 1000BASE-LX port specifications of
this unit.
3-14

1000BASE-BX10-D/U port connection
The CX2600/200 mounts the 1000BASE-BX port (SC connector)
(1) Prepare a terminal mounting a 100BASE-BX port that enables sending and receiving through
one optical fiber cable (such as M/C) and SC connector optical fiber cables (one cable per one
interface).
(2) Verify that an SC connector is for the 1000BASE-BX10-D port and the other SC connector is
for the 1000BASE-BX10-U.
(3) Connect one end of the SC connector optical fiber cable to the 1000BASE-BX10-(DorU) port
of this unit and the other end to the 1000BASE-BX10-(UorD) port of the terminal (such as the
M/C).
1000BASE-BX10 port
SC connector optical filer cable
M/C, etc.
Fig.
SC Connector Optical Fiber Cable Connection
Prepare an optical fiber cable (single-mode) corresponding to the 1000BASE-BX port

specifications of this unit.
3-15

The CX2600/200 mounts the 1000BASE-T port (RJ45 connector).
For connection with a router
(1) Prepare a router mounting the 1000BASE-T and an RJ-45 UTP (category 5E or higher)
straight cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 5E or higher) straight cable to the 1000BASE-T
port of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 5E or higher) straight cable to the
1000BASE-T port of the router.
1000BASE-T port
RJ-45 UTP straight cable
Fig.
Connection to 1000BASE-T of Router
3-16
Router

The CX2600/200 mounts the 100BASE-FX port (SC connector).
(1) Prepare a terminal mounting a 100BASE-FX port that enables sending and receiving through
one optical fiber cable (such as M/C) and SC connector optical fiber cables (one cable per one
interface).
(2) Connect one end of the SC connector optical fiber cable to the 100BASE-FX port of this unit
and the other end to the 100BASE-FX port of the terminal (such as the M/C).
100BASE-FX port
SC connector optical fiber cable
M/C, etc.
Fig.
100BASE-FX Cable Connection
Prepare an optical fiber cable (single-mode) corresponding to the 100BASE-FX port specifications
of this unit.
3-17

The CX2600/200 mounts the 10/100BASE-TX port (8-pin modular jack type RJ-45 connector).
For connection with a HUB
(1) Prepare an Ethernet HUB mounting the 10/100BASE-TX and an RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or
higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX
connection) straight cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-TX port of
this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-TX port of
the HUB.
Fig.
HUB Connection to 10/100BASE-TX
For connection to the 10/100BASE-TX cascade port (MDI) of the HUB, when the Ether port auto
negotiation is disabled, use the RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or higher for 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for 100BASE-TX connection) crossing cable.
3-18

ATM port connection
The CX2600/200 mounts the ATM port (SC connector).
(1) Prepare an ATM switch mounting an ATM port and SC connector optical fiber cables (two
cables per interface).
(2) Connect one end of one SC connector optical fiber cable to the ATM TX port of this unit and
the other end to the RX port of the ATM switch.
(3) Connect one end of the other SC connector optical fiber cable to the ATM RX port of this unit
and the other end to the TX port of the ATM switch.
ATM port
TX
SC connector optical fiber cable
RX
Fig.
Another unit (such

as CX2690)
ATM Cable Connection
Prepare optical fiber cables (single-mode/multi-mode) conforming to the ATM port specifications of
this unit.
3-19

T1/E1 port connection
The CX2600/200 mounts the T1/E1 port (8-pin modular jack type RJ-45 connector).
(1) Prepare a TDM unit/ATM (when ATMP is connected) unit mounting T1/E1 interface and an
RJ-45 UTP cable accommodating signals defined in ANSI T1.403.
(For signal
accommodation of CX2600/200, refer to 12.2 "Interface Specifications Line interface
specifications T1/E1 interface" in this manual. Use a straight cable or crossing cable in
accordance with signal accommodation of the remote device and the connector type.)
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 UTP cable to the T1/E1 port of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 UTP cable to the T1/E1 port of the TDM unit/ATM unit.
TDM unit (switch,
base station, etc.)
T1/E1 port
RJ-45 cable
Fig.
T1/E1 Cable Connection (TDMP Interface)

ATM switch, etc.
T1/E1 port
RJ-45 cable
Fig.
T1/E1 Cable Connection (ATMP Interface)
(4) To connect a 75-ohm coaxial cable to the other unit on E1 line, connect the shield E of the
transmitting coaxial cable to the TX shield of the RJ-45 connector, and connect the other end
of the coaxial cable to the E1 port of the TDM/ATM unit. Make sure that the shield line of the
receiving coaxial cable of the other unit is opened (connection to the transmitting side is
recommended for the shield E case).
Coaxial cable
T1/E1 port
RJ-45
Fig.
E1 Coaxial Cable Connection
3-20
BNC
TDM Unit
ATM switch, etc

STM-1/OC-3 port connection
The CX2600/200 mounts the STM-1/OC-3 port (SFP supported connector).
(1) Prepare a TDM unit mounting STM-1/OC-3 port, ATM switch and optical fiber cables (two
cables per interface).
(2) Connect one end of the optical cable to the STM-1/OC-3 port of this unit and also connect the
other end of the cable to the STM-1/OC-3 RX port of the TDM unit or ATM switch.
(3) Connect one end of the other optical cable to the STM-1/OC-3 RX port of this unit and also
connect the other end of the cable to the STM-1/OC-3 TX port of the TDM unit or ATM switch.
Prepare optical fiber cables (single-mode or multi-mode) conforming to the STM-1/OC-3 port
specifications of this unit.
TDM unit
Optical fiber cable
STM-1/OC-3 port
TX
TX
RX
Switch or Base station
RX
Fig.
STM-1/OC-3 port
TX
STM-1/OC-3 Cable Connection (TDMP155 Interface)
Optical fiber cable
ATM switch etc

TX
RX
Fig.
STM-1/OC-3 Cable Connection (ATMP155 Interface)
3-21

Clock interface connection
The CX2600/200 mounts the clock interface port for network clock synchronization.
Use a cable for the clock supply cable [D-sub 9-pin cable] to connect to the clock supply unit.
connection procedure is described below.
The
(1) Prepare a clock supply unit and D-sub 9-pin cable. (For signal accommodation of
CX2600/200, refer to 12.2 "Interface Specifications Line interface specifications T1/E1
interface". Use a suitable cable in accordance with signal accommodation of the clock supply
unit side and the connector type.)
(2) Connect one end of the D-sub 9-pin cable to the clock interface port of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the D-sub 9-pin cable to the clock output port of the clock supply unit.
D-Sub
9-pin cable
D-Sub
9
EXTCLK
EXTCLK interface
Fig.
Clock Interface Cable Connection
3-22
Clock supply unit

Local console connection
The CX2600/200 mounts the console port (asynchronous serial DCE mode).
Connect the unit to a device with which asynchronous transmission is performed by using a
console communication cable [D-sub 9-pin female (male*) female crossing cable].
To operate the CX2600/200, a console terminal enabling non-procedural asynchronous
communication by RS-232C is required.
The default communication parameter setting values are as follows:
- 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
The connection procedure is as follows:
(1) Prepare a console communication cable [D-sub 9-pin female (male*) female crossing cable].
(2) Connect the female side of the console communication cable [D-sub 9-pin female (male*)
female crossing cable] to the RS-232C port of this unit.
(3) Connect the female side of the console communication cable [D-sub 9-pin female (male*)
female crossing cable] to a console terminal (such as a PC).
RS-232C port
D-sub 9-pin crossing cable
Fig.
Console terminal
Console Terminal Connection
When the console terminal mounts an RS-232C port having a different form, prepare an RS-232C
conversion adapter or a male/female conversion adapter.
3-23

Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection
The Ethernet (for CONSOLE) connection procedure is described below.
For connection with HUB MDI-X port

(1) Prepare an Ethernet HUB mounting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX and an RJ-45 UTP
(category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the
100BASE-TX connection) straight cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the 10/100BASE-TX
port (CONSOLE) of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection
and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX connection) straight cable to the
10/100BASE-TX (MDI-X) port of the HUB.
Fig.
HUB Connection to 10/100BASE-TX (MDI-X)
For connection to HUB 10/100BASE-TX cascade port (MDI), use an RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or
higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX connection)
crossing cable.
3-24

For connection to a console terminal (such as PC)
(1) Prepare a console terminal (PC) mounting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX and an RJ-45 UTP
(category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and category 5 or higher for the
100BASE-TX connection) crossing cable.
(2) Connect one end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection and
category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX connection) crossing cable to the 10/100BASE-TX
port (CONSOLE) of this unit.
(3) Connect the other end of the RJ-45 UTP (category 3 or higher for the 10BASE-T connection
and category 5 or higher for the 100BASE-TX connection) crossing cable to the 10BASE-T
port or the 100BASE-TX port of the console terminal.
Fig.
Terminal (Such as PC) Connection (10/100BASE-TX)
3-25
3.4 Power on and Login

This section describes the procedure to log in the CX2600/200 by the local console connection.
In addition to the local console connection, you can log in the CX2600/200 through up to four
sessions by the telnet connection from a remote console.
For remote console settings, see "3.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance".
3.4.1 Confirming console port connection
3.4.2 Power on
3.4.3 Login
3-27
3-27
Confirm cable connection between

console port and console terminal.
Connect power cables and confirm display

of login message and login prompt.
3-33
Connect to a local console to login to the
CX2600/200 and to set up the password
required for the login.
3-26
3.4.1 Confirming console port connection

Confirm that the cable is connected to the console port correctly.
3.4.2 Power on
DC Power cable connection (with DC power unit)
The CX2600/220, CX2600/210, and CX2600/202 use a DC-48V power supply.
When restarting this unit after turning power off, turn on power after a while.
power immediately, this may cause a failure.
If you turn on the
After turning on the power, be sure not to turn off the power until this unit is completely started.
this unit is turned off during its start, this may cause a failure.
If
Protection ground connection

Be sure to connect the protection earth by using the protection earth (FG) cable.
If the earth is not connected with the power supply terminal, connect the earth with the earth
terminal at the rear of this unit.
The earth connection decreases the damage by lightning strike and prevents electric shock and
noises.
Note
Be sure to connect the earth wire for safety.
Note
Be sure not to connect the earth wire to a gas pipe.
Note
Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the earth wire.
3-27
If connect, a fire may be caused.

DC Power cable connection (CX2600/220, CX2600/210)
(1) Prepare a DC power supply (-48 V) having the power capacity necessary for using this unit.
(2) Connect the -48VDC, RTN (G), and
FG power cables to the -48VDC, RTN (G), and
terminals at the rear of this unit respectively.
Fig.
FG
DC Power Connection
Note
Connect/disconnect the power cables with the protection ground conductor connected.
Note
Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the power cables.
Note
Confirm that the DC-48V power circuit breaker is set to off. Fix the circuit breaker handle
to the OFF position with tape. Measure the voltages at the DC power connection
terminals (-48V and RTN (G)) to confirm the voltages are 0 (power off).
3-28

DC Power cable connection (CX2600/202)
(1) Prepare a DC power supply (-48 V) having the power capacity necessary for using this unit.
(2) Gather power cables by using the provided power connector.
1. Strip cable ends (AWG#18) by 3.0 to 3.5 mm.
3.03.5mm
2. Connect the power cables to sockets (four sockets) by using crimp tools.
Socket
Power cable
3. Insert the sockets to the power connector (will be locked as insertion).
-48V
Power connector
Pin No.
Power
RTN(G)
-48V
RTN(G)
-48V
RTN(G)
(3) Connect the power connector to the power of the unit.
Fig.
CX2600/202 DC Power Connection at the Rear of the Unit
Note
Connect/disconnect the power cables with the protection ground conductor connected.
Note
Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the power cables.
Note
Confirm that the DC-48V power circuit breaker is set to off. Fix the circuit breaker handle
to the OFF position with tape. Measure the voltages at the DC power connection
terminals (-48V and RTN (G)) to confirm the voltages are 0 (power off).
3-29
AC Power cable connection (with AC power unit)

AC power unit also can be used for CX2600/220.
When restarting this unit after turning power off, turn on power after a while.
power immediately, this may cause a failure.
If you turn on the
After turning on the power, be sure not to turn off the power until this unit is completely started.
this unit is turned off during its start, this may cause a failure.
AC Power cable connection (CX2600/220)

(1) Connect the AC power cable to the AC power unit of the unit.
Note
Be sure to turn the power off before connecting/disconnecting the AC power cables.
Note
Use a power tap with protection earth for primary power tap of the AC power cable.
3-30
If
System start procedure after power-on

When power is turned on, the system starts in the following order:
(1) The system boots and the diagnosis executed.
(2) The DRAM memory area is cleared.
(3) A boot entry is executed and the program file set in the built-in flash memory is loaded in
DRAM as a running program.
(4) The startup configuration data in the built-in flash memory is loaded in DRAM as running
configuration data. If the startup configuration data is not found, the initial configuration
contents are loaded in DRAM as running configuration data for starting.
For more information of the configuration data, see "8.1 About Configuration Data" of this
manual.
(5) When self diagnosis/memory diagnosis and configuration data loading terminate normally, the
"Welcome to CX2600/220 System" message and the login prompt are displayed as shown in
the following example.
Memo
Although the case for CX2600/220 is described above, replace it with CX2600/210 or
CX2600/202 depending on the unit used with because these descriptions also appear in
this manual.
If you need to end the operation after turning the power on, confirm that the prompt is displayed
and no commands are executed and then turn the power off.
When the system is restarted by the "reset system" command, it starts in the same order as that
performed when power is turned on, excluding the self diagnosis/memory diagnosis,. In this case,
all running configuration data before the restart is lost.
3-31

Input example
System Boot
Copyright 2001-2002 NEC
CPU: PPC 405GP

Version: 5.4
BSP version: 1.2/5
Boot version: K01.00
Creation date: Mar 31 2004, 14:38:54
Press [Ctrl]+[c] key to enter recover mode...

memory test start ...... end
... coming up latest image
auto-booting...
Starting at 0x10038...
Attaching interface lo0...done
Adding 6418 symbols for standalone.
System is coming up now ..............
Welcome to CX2600/220 System
Switch@1>
3-32
3.4.3 Login
About user authority
The CX2600/200 login modes include the "privilege mode", "general mode", and "maintenance
mode".
In each mode, commands corresponding to the mode can be input.
commands, refer to the "Command Reference" (separate manual).
For more information of the
General mode
This mode is used by general users. In this mode only a part of commands can be used.
Setting commands excluding autonomous message and scroll control commands cannot be
used.
Privilege mode
This mode is used by privileged users.
Setting commands related to networks can be used.
Maintenance mode
This mode is used by maintenance users.
File operation commands can be used.
Command prompt display

The command prompt displayed on the screen indicates which user authority is available.
<Privilege mode>
In the privilege mode, the prompt is indicated by "#".
Input example
Switch@1#
<General mode>
In the general mode, the prompt is indicated by ">".
Input example
Switch@1>
3-33

<Maintenance mode>
In the maintenance mode, the prompt is indicated by "%".
Input example
Switch@1%
When there are differences between startup-config settings and running-config settings, "*" is
displayed at the beginning of the command prompt.
<When there are no differences>

When there are no differences, a "space" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt.
Input example
Switch@1#
<When there are differences>

When there are differences, "*" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt.
Input example
*Switch@1#
3-34

The slot number of the Switch module can be identified by the prompt.
<When the module operates in slot 1>

When the Switch module operates in slot 1, "@1" is displayed in the prompt.
Input example
Switch@1#
<When the module operates in slot 2>

When the Switch module operates in slot 2, "@2" is displayed in the prompt.
Input example
Switch@2#
The operation status of the Switch module can be identified by the prompt.
<When the module operates in active system>

When the Switch module operates in the active system, the mode type of the prompt is
displayed in one character.
Input example
Switch@1#
<When the module operates in standby system>

When the Switch module operates in the standby system, the mode type of the prompt is
displayed in two characters.
Input example
Switch@2##
3-35

Memo
Characters "Switch" displayed in the prompt are set as the default.

The prompt name can be changed to a new prompt name by setting of the prompt display
change using the "set terminal prompt" command for identifying the unit.
Note
If "!" is displayed at the beginning of the prompt, the start processing did not terminate
normally or a CR failure (critical failure) occurred. In this state, normal operations are not
assured.
Command
set terminal prompt
Setting of terminal prompt
3-36
Login authentication
The CX2600/200 login authentication methods include "mode login authentication" and "account
name login authentication". When an account is not registered, "mode login authentication" is
performed. When an account is registered, "account name login authentication" is performed.
Mode login authentication

Login authentication is performed by inputting a login password. After login authentication, the
general mode screen is displayed. When no login password is set, the general mode screen is
displayed without login authentication.
The general mode can be changed to the privilege mode by executing the "enable" command in
the general mode and inputting a privilege mode password. If a privilege mode password is not
set, the privilege mode screen is displayed by the [Enter] key.
Memo
When a password is set for each mode, password authentication is performed.
Note
After login, set a password for security.
Note
When an account is registered, login by "mode login authentication" is disabled. A login

password and a privilege mode password can be set. They are enabled when the
account is deleted.
Power ON
Connection from
telnet
Maintenance
mode
Mode login
authentication
Login
password
exit
end
maintenance
exit
enable
Privilege mode
password
General mode
Privilege mode
disable
Fig.
Mode Transition Diagram during Mode Login Authentication
3-37

Commands
disable
Switch from privileged mode to general mode
enable
Switch from general mode to privileged mode
end
Switch from maintenance mode to privileged mode
maintenance
Switch from privileged mode to maintenance mode
exit
Logout
set enable password
Setting of privileged mode password
clear enable password
Clearing of privileged mode password
set login password
Setting of login password
clear login password
Clearing of login password
Account name login authentication

Login authentication is performed by inputting an account and a password. After login
authentication, the general mode or privilege mode screen is displayed according to the user
authority.
Memo
The account used for login can be confirmed by the "show session" command.
Connection from
telnet
Power ON
Account name
login authentication
Account
Password
Maintenance
mode
end
Account
Password
exit
exit
General mode
Fig.
maintenance
Privilege mode
Mode Transition Diagram during Account Name Login Authentication
3-38

Forcible logout due to time out
A time out event occurs when no commands are input for a predetermined period of time after
login, and the forcible logout is performed.
Commands
set terminal logout
Setting of automatic logout time
Account management
When an account is registered, "account name login authentication" is performed from the next
login. To register the account, the general mode (read-only) or privilege mode (read-write) user
authority is required and a password containing four to 16 characters must be registered.
The registered password can be changed by specifying the registered account name and the user
authority and inputting the registered password.
When a new account is registered, login with default account "admin" is enabled. The initial
password of the default account is "admin". The default account password can be changed.
The default account cannot be deleted.
Excluding the default account, up to six accounts can be registered.
Memo
When no accounts are registered, also the default account is not displayed by the "show
user account" command.
Note
After a new account is registered, change the password of default account "admin" for
security.
Commands
set user account
Registration of user account
show user account
Display of user account
clear user account
Clearing of user account
3-39
Session management
Up to four sessions can be set up by login to the CX2600/200 by telnet connection from a remote
console in addition to from a local console. Session management can display login statuses and
disconnect login sessions forcibly.
For remote console settings, see "3 Settings for Network Connection > 3.5 Settings for Remote
Maintenance" of this manual.
If the link with a remote console is disconnected due to a failure in the line, session information is
held for five minutes and deleted.
Commands
show session
Display of session
clear session
Clearing of session
Autonomous message
The CX2600/200 outputs an autonomous message to each console if events such as a failure and
information occur. The output setting of the autonomous message can be set by a "set terminal
monitor" command. (The default setting of the autonomous message output is "enable" for a
serial console and "disable" for a remote console.)
01/01/2000 00:00:37
===================
IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP
[1]
(SWITCH#1,CAUSE:POWER-ON RESET)
[3]
[2]
[1] Occurrence date and time

[2] Message
[3] Additional information
3-40

Memo
When unit statuses are monitored by the autonomous message (same as for a local log),
confirm the autonomous message of the ACT system.
Memo
When a login password is set or an account is registered, the autonomous message is

output after login authentication.
Note
If a large amount of events occurs and the number of autonomous messages waiting to
be output exceeds 16000, the autonomous message after that is not be output. If this
happens, the following message is output: "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED
(CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)". When the output restarts, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED
RECOVER" is output.
If the number of autonomous messages waiting to be output exceeds the upper
accumulation limit, the autonomous message after that is not be output either. If this
happens, the following message is output: "There were some autonomous messages
discarded by the buffer overflow."
Commands
set terminal monitor
Setting of autonomous message output
Input example
Autonomous message output is set.
for telnet, it is set to output disabled.
For RS-232C, the default value is set to output enabled and
*Switch@1# set terminal monitor enable

*Switch@1# show terminal config
Current Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 5
Output Length
: 22
Alarm Monitor
: enabled
Default Terminal Configuration
==============================
Console TimeOut (minutes) : 5
Output Length
: 22
*Switch@1#
3-41
3.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance

The CX2600/200 calls communication through the FastEther (FE) port and GigabitEther (GbE) port
"in-band network communication" and communication through the console port "out-band network
communication". The remote communications enable remote maintenance using telnet from a
remote console.
To enable access from a remote console using telnet, IP addresses must be set. No IP
addresses are factory set for the CX2600/200. IP addresses setting for the CX2600/200 is made
from the local console.
When IP address setting is completed and telnet connection is enabled, all commands that can be
used from the local console become available from a remote console.
This section explains the settings to enable access to the CX2600/200 in the network from a
remote console using a network example shown in the following figure.
In the following figure, communications from remote hosts 1 and 2 are enabled through in-band
network communication and communications from remote hosts 3, 4, and 5 are enabled through
out-band network communication.
Higher switch
Remote host 2
192.168.1.4
CX2600/200
FE/GbE port
In-band network
192.168.1.0/24
CX2600/220
192.168.1.254
Gateway
169.127.10.1
RS-232C
Console port 1
Local console
Out-band network
Remote host 1
10.42.74.0/16
169.127.10.3
10.42.74.253
10.42.74.254
Gateway
Gateway
10.41.18.1
10.40.36.1
Remote host 3
10.42.74.25
Remote host 4
10.40.36.123
Remote host 5
10.41.18.124
3-42

For telnet connection, up to four sessions including connections through in-band network
communication and connections through out-band network communication, can be started at the
same time.
3.5.1 Setting IP addresses

0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx,
xxx.xxx.xxx.0/xxx.xxx.xxx.255,
and
255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" are any number.)
224.xxx.xxx.xxx
to
Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.

IP address where all host part bits are 0 or 1 cannot be set.
When IP addresses of gateways and various types of servers and managers are set,
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx,
xxx.xxx.xxx.0/xxx.xxx.xxx.255,
and
224.xxx.xxx.xxx
to
255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set. When gateways and various types of servers and managers exist
in network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, the servers and managers can be
configured but correct communications cannot be implemented.
3-43
3.5.2 Remote Maintenance through In-band

Network
When remote maintenance through in-band network communication is performed for the
CX2600/200, access by telnet is enabled by the following procedure:
Until the procedure is completed, operations from a remote console are disabled.
Connecting in-band network 3-45
Connect cables for in-band network
communication.
Setting IP addresses 3-45
Allocate IP addresses to CX2600/200.
Setting VLAN ID 3-46

Allocate VLAN ID to CX2600/200.
Setting port blocking 3-46

Setting of port blocking or unblocking
can be performed for in-band port.
Setting telnet connection access list 3-49
Limit login through telnet communication
Confirming communication statuses 3-50

Check CX2600/200-remote console
telnet communication status.
Saving set data 3-51
Save the set data contents.
Login from remote console 3-51

Log in CX2600/200 through telnet
communication from remote console.
Make settings of a terminal to be used as a remote console (such as a PC) by reading the
operation manual of the terminal so that telnet can be used.
3-44
Connecting in-band network

Connect a remote maintenance terminal to a network through the FastEther (FE) port and
GigabitEther (GbE) port.
Setting IP addresses
To perform remote maintenance using telnet from a remote console through in-band, IP addresses
must be allocated to the CX2600/200. And set a default gateway as needed.
The set IP address is used also for SNMP, ftp, and file update.
Three IP addresses, including the IP address of switch slot 1, IP address of switch slot 2, and
System IP address, can be set.
When the IP address of switch slot 1 and IP address of switch slot 2 are allocated, the IP
addresses are given to the slots permanently, however, the System IP address is always given to
the ACT system. So if the ACT system is switched during duplicated operation, the System IP
address is given to the port of the new ACT system.
To access the non-ACT switch module, the IP address must be allocated for each slot.
Connection to the IP address of each slot is enabled regardless of the switch module status
(ACT/SBY).
Note
During duplicated operation, the IP addresses of the local slot and System should be
allocated.
If duplicated operation is performed in a state in which only the System IP address is
allocated, the following limitations occur for the non-ACT switch module:
- telnet access is disabled.
- Upload and download by ftp are disabled.
When setting a default gateway, set the gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the
in-band network as the default gateway. If the default gateway belongs to neither of the networks,
communications may not be set up correctly.
Note
When the local slot IP address or the System in-band IP address is changed or deleted,
the login session is disconnected if it is established by telnet communication through the
in-band network. The login session is not disconnected if it is established by telnet
communication through the out-band network. In both cases, the login session
disconnection confirmation message is output.
3-45

Note
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, xxx.xxx.xxx.0/xxx.xxx.xxx.255,
and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" is any
number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.
Note
Setting VLAN ID
To perform remote maintenance using the in-band port, a VLAN ID must be set.
Note
Only one VLAN ID can be set for the in-band port. The same VLAN ID must be set for
the port of the CX2600/200 connected to the network (or the higher switch) to which the
remote host is connected.
Commands
set ip address in-band
Setting of in-band IP address
set in-band vid
Setting of in-band port VLAN
set ip route default
Setting of default gateway
show ip config
Display of network information
clear ip address in-band
Clearing of in-band IP address
clear ip route default
Clearing of default gateway
Setting port blocking

Port blocking or unblocking can be set for the in-band port and the setting can be referenced.
Commands
set in-band admin
Block/unblock of in-band port
show in-band information
Display of in-band port setup information
3-46

Input example (1/2)
"192.168.1.10" is set as the IP address of the CX2600/200, "255.255.255.0" is set as the subnet
mask, and "192.168.1.254" is set as the default gateway address.
100 is set as the VLAN ID for the in-band port and unblock the in-band port.
Switch@1# set ip address in-band system 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0

*Switch@1# set ip route default 192.168.1.254
*Switch@1# show ip config
Out-Band IP Table
=================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
--------------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:90
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:90
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
In-Band IP Table
================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
--------------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:50
192.168.1.10
255.255.255.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:50
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
IP Routing Table
================
Destination
Gateway
Index Address
Netmask
Address
Port
--------------------------------------------------------------------- 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
192.168.1.254
in-band
In-Band Mode
============
Mode : virtual
VLAN Virtual-Address Table
==========================
Index VID Name
Address
--------------------------------------------------------------------No entry in the table.
(Continued to the next page)
3-47

Input example (2/2)
*Switch@1# set in-band vid 100
*Switch@1# set in-band admin enable
*Switch@1# show in-band information
In-band Configuration
=====================
Module
Admin
------------------Switch#1 : enabled
Switch#2 : enabled
In-band VLAN Configuration
==========================
VID : 100
Name: default
3-48
Setting telnet connection access list

The CX2600/200 provides the telnet connection access list function that allows login by telnet from
remote consoles having specific IP addresses or remote consoles in specific networks only. How
to set the telnet connection access list is described below.
When no telnet connection access lists are set, login from all remote consoles are enabled.
Setting of access lists is available also for setting for the out-band network.
Note
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP

addresses. ("xxx" is any number.)
Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 can be set, however, correct
communication cannot be set up.
Commands
set session ip-permit
Setting of access list
show session ip-permit
Display of access list
clear session ip-permit
Clearing of access list
Input example
IP address "192.168.1.4" is set in access list 1 and acceptable network "169.127.10.0/24" is set in
access list 2.
*Switch@1# set session ip-permit 1 192.168.1.4 255.255.255.255

*Switch@1# show session ip-permit
Telnet Filter Table
===================
No IP Address
Netmask
-----------------------------------1 192.168.1.4
255.255.255.255
2 169.127.10.0
255.255.255.0
*Switch@1#
3-49
Confirming communication statuses

The status of telnet communication between the CX2600/200 and a remote console is confirmed
from the local console.
Command
ping
Note
Checking of connection
In the case of ping from the other unit, request timeout may occur depending on the timing
of ARP aging timeout of the other unit.
Input example
Confirm that communication between the CX2600/200 and the remote console having IP address
"192.168.1.4" is set up.
*Switch@1# ping 192.168.1.4

PING 192.168.1.4: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 192.168.1.4: icmp_seq=0
ttl=128
ttl=128
ttl=128
ttl=128
time=5ms
time<5ms
time<5ms
time<5ms
--- 192.168.1.4 ping statistics --4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max/stddev = 0.000/1.250/5.000/2.165 ms
*Switch@1#
3-50
Saving set data

The contents set in the CX2600/200 are saved in built-in flash memory.
When IP addresses used in the out-band network are used, restart by executing the "write
memory" command and "reset system" command in this order is required after the IP addresses in
the in-band network are set.
Command
write memory
Saving of setting status
Login from remote console

Log into the CX2600/200 from a remote console through telnet communication.
For the login method, see "3.4.3 Login" of this manual.
Note
If the system switches during telnet connection using system IP addresses, the
connection is disconnected once because the IP addresses are reallocated to the new
ACT system. After the system switching is completed, make a telnet connection again.
Input example
telnet connection to the CX2600/200 from a remote console is established. After the command
prompt is displayed, the same operation as that for the local console is enabled.
> telnet 192.168.1.10
Switch@1>
3-51
3.5.3 Remote Maintenance through Out-band

Network
When remote maintenance is performed for the CX2600/200 through out-band network
communication, access by telnet is enabled by the following procedure.
Until the procedure is completed, operations from the remote console are disabled.
Connecting out-band network 3-53
Connect cables for out-band network
communication.
Allocate IP addresses to CX2600/200.
Setting speed of maintenance port 3-54

Modifying speed for out-band or flow control
settings can be performed.
Setting telnet connection access list 3-57
Limit login by telnet communication.
Confirming communication statuses 3-58

Confirm CX2600/200-remote console telnet
communication status
Saving set data 3-59
Save the set data contents.
Login from remote console 3-59

Log in CX2600/200 from remote console by
telnet communication.
Make settings of a terminal to be used as a remote console (such as a PC) by reading the
operation manual of the terminal so that telnet can be used.
3-52
Connecting out-band network

Connect a remote maintenance terminal to a network through the console port.
Setting IP addresses
To perform remote maintenance using telnet from a remote console through out-band, IP
addresses must be allocated to the CX2600/200. And set a default gateway as needed.
The set IP addresses are used also for SNMP, ftp, and file update.
Three IP addresses, including the IP address of switch slot 1, IP address of switch slot 2, and
System IP address, can be set.
When the IP address of switch slot 1 and IP address of switch slot 2 are allocated, the IP
addresses are given to the slots permanently, however, the System IP address is always given to
the ACT system. So if the ACT system is switched during duplicated operation, the System IP
address is given to the port of the new ACT system.
To access the non-ACT switch module, the IP address must be allocated for each slot.
Connection to the IP address of each slot is enabled regardless of the switch module status
(ACT/SBY).
Note
During duplicated operation, the IP addresses of the local slot and System should be
allocated.
If duplicated operation is performed in a state in which only the System IP address is
allocated, the following limitations occur for the non-ACT switch module:
- telnet access is disabled.
- Upload and download by ftp are disabled.
When setting a default gateway, set the gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the
in-band network as the default gateway. If the default gateway belongs to neither of the networks,
communications may not be set up correctly.
Note
When the local slot IP address or the System out-band IP address is changed or deleted,
the login session is disconnected if it is established by telnet communication through the
out-band network. The login session is not disconnected if it is established by telnet
communication through the in-band network.
In both cases, the login session
disconnection confirmation message is output.
3-53

Note
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, xxx.xxx.xxx.0/xxx.xxx.xxx.255,
and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as IP addresses. ("xxx" is any
number.) Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set.
Note
Commands
set ip address out-band
Setting of out-band IP address
set ip route default
Setting of default gateway
show ip config
clear ip address out-band
Clearing of out-band IP address
clear ip route default
Clearing of default gateway
Setting speed of maintenance port

Settings such as speed, duplex mode or flow control can be set for the out-band port and the
setting can be referenced.
Commands
set out-band speed
Setting of out-band port speed/communication direction
set out-band flowcontrol
Setting of out-band port flow control
show out-band information
Display of out-band port setup information
3-54

Input example (1/2)
"10.42.74.100" is set as the IP address for out-band network communication of the CX2600/200,
"255.255.0.0" is set as the subnet mask, and "10.42.74.254" is set as the default gateway address.
Also, "auto" is set for out-band speed.
*Switch@1# set ip address out-band system 10.42.74.100 255.255.0.0

*Switch@1# set ip route default 10.42.74.254
Out-Band IP Table
=================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
-------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:90 10.42.74.100
255.255.0.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:90 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
In-Band IP Table
================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
-------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:50 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:50 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
IP Routing Table
================
Destination
Gateway
Index Address
Netmask
Address
Port
------------------------------------------------------------------ 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
10.42.74.254
out-band
In-Band Mode
============
Mode : virtual
==========================
Index VID Name
Address
------------------------------------------------------------No entry in the table.
3-55

Input example (2/2)
*Switch@1# set out-band speed auto
*Switch@1# show out-band speed
Out-Band Table
==============
Port
Link
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
Module
Speed
Status
MDI
Configuration Status
-----------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : auto
100m-full auto disabled
disabled
Switch#2 : auto
--auto disabled
--*Switch@1#
3-56
Setting telnet connection access list

The CX2600/200 provides the telnet connection access list function that allows login by telnet from
remote consoles having specific IP addresses or remote consoles in specific networks only. The
setting method of telnet connection access lists is described below.
When no telnet connection access lists are set, login from all remote consoles are enabled.
Setting of access lists is available also for setting for the in-band network.
Note

addresses. ("xxx" is any number.)
Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24 can be set, however, correct
Commands
set session ip-permit
Setting of access list
show session ip-permit
Display of access list
clear session ip-permit
Clearing of access list
Input example
IP address "10.42.74.25" is set in access list 1 and acceptable network "10.40.36.0/24" is set in
access list 2.

*Switch@1# show session ip-permit
Telnet Filter Table
===================
No IP Address
Netmask
-----------------------------------------------------------1 10.42.74.25
255.255.255.255
2 10.40.36.0
255.255.255.0
*Switch@1#
3-57
Confirming communication statuses

The status of telnet communication, between the CX2600/200 and a remote console, through
out-band network communication is confirmed from the local console.
Command
ping
This command enables the local console to confirm the status of telnet communication between
the CX2600/200 and a remote console through out-band network communication.
Note
In the case of ping from the other unit, request timeout may occur depending on the timing
of ARP aging timeout of the other unit.
Input example
Confirm that communication between the CX2600/200 and the remote console having IP address
"10.42.74.25" is set up.
*Switch@1# ping 10.42.74.25

PING 10.42.74.100: 56 data
64 bytes from 10.42.74.25:
64 bytes from 10.42.74.25:
64 bytes from 10.42.74.25:
64 bytes from 10.42.74.25:
bytes
icmp_seq=0
icmp_seq=1
icmp_seq=2
icmp_seq=3
ttl=128
ttl=128
ttl=128
ttl=128
time=5ms
time<5ms
time<5ms
time<5ms
*Switch@1#
3-58
Saving set data

The contents set in the CX2600/200 are saved in built-in flash memory.
When IP addresses used in the in-band network are used, restart by executing the "write memory"
command and "reset system" command in this order is required after the IP addresses in the
out-band network are set.
Command
write memory
Login from remote console

The CX2600/200 is logged in from a remote console in the out-band network through telnet
communication.
For the login method, see "3.4.3 Login" of this manual.
Note
If the system switches during telnet connection using system IP addresses, the
connection is disconnected once because the IP addresses are reallocated to the new
ACT system. After the system switching is completed, make a telnet connection again.
Input example
telnet connection to the CX2600/200 from a remote console in the out-band network is established.
After the command prompt is displayed, the same operation as that for the local console is
enabled.
> telnet 10.42.74.100
Switch@1>
3-59
3.5.4 Maintenance network construction

When a LAN including two or more gateways is constructed while a maintenance network is
constructed, gateways excluding the default gateway can be set for the CX2600/200 by the
following procedure.
Adding static routes 3-60
Adding static routes

Gateways excluding the default gateway are added as static gateways.
Up to 32 static routes can be set.
Memo
When setting a static route, set a gateway belonging to either the out-band network or the
in-band network as the default gateway.
Note
If the gateway belongs to neither of the out-band and in-band networks, communications
with a network set by destination may not be set up correctly.
Note
When both in-band and out-band network IP addresses are set and gateways belong to
both of the networks, set the gateway in a network in which many network address parts
match. To set the gateway in a network in which few network address parts match, set
the IP address, which is different from one in the network in which many network address
parts match, as the gateway IP address.
Note

addresses.
("xxx" is any number.)
Network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and
192.168.129.0/24 cannot be set. A gateway address can be set to 192.168.128.0/24 and
192.168.129.0/24 network addresses, but communications cannot be performed correctly.
Note
It is recommended to stop the communication currently in progress.

communications with a network set by destination may not be set up correctly.
Commands
set ip route
Setting of static route
clear ip route
Clearing of static route
show ip config
3-60
If not,

Input example
Gateway "10.42.74.253" to the remote host "10.41.18.124" is set as the 32nd static route.
*Switch@1# set ip route 32 10.41.18.124 255.255.255.0 10.42.74.253

Out-Band IP Table
=================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
-------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:90 10.42.74.100
255.255.0.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:90 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
In-Band IP Table
================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
-------------------------------------------------------------System : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:50 192.168.1.10
255.255.255.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:fc:50 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
IP Routing Table
================
Destination
Gateway
Index Address
Netmask
Address
Port
------------------------------------------------------------------ 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
10.42.74.254
out-band
32 10.41.18.0
255.255.255.0
10.42.74.253
out-band
In-Band Mode
============
Mode : virtual
==========================
Index VID Name
Address
------------------------------------------------------------No entry in the table.
*Switch@1#
3-61
3.6 Basic Settings after Purchase

This section describes the procedure for basic settings by the CLI (command interface) to be
performed after purchase of the CX2600/200.
3.6.1 Setting date and time
3-63
Set current date and time.
3.6.2 Setting system information
3-67
Set each function according to
CX2600/200 operation mode.
3.6.3 Setting functions 3-67

Set each function according to
CX2600/200 operation mode.
3.6.4 Saving set information
3-68
Save the set and modified data.
3-62
3.6.1 Setting date and time

The CX2600/200 provides the clock function.
Set the current date and time.
It sets the timezone, current date and time, and daylight saving time period and synchronizes the
time by the NTP function. The CX2600/200 can deal with years 2000 to 2099.
Timezone setting
The time lag from Greenwich mean time is set. The local time is set to the unit based on the
timezone setting when the time is synchronized by the NTP function.
Note
The default setting of the timezone is +09:00. If the date and time is before 2000/01/01
00:00:00 by the timezone setting, the date and time of the unit is 2000/01/01 00:00:00.
Commands
set system timezone
Setting of timezone
show system date
Display of date and time
Input example
The timezone is set to -06:00.
*Switch@1# set system timezone -06:00

*Switch@1# show system date
System Date
===========
Date
: 01/01/2000
Time
: 00:00:02
Time Zone: GMT -06:00
*Switch@1#
3-63
Date and time setting

The date and time entered is set to the unit.
Memo
Years 2000 to 2099 can be set.
Commands
date
Setting of date and time
show system date
Input example
The date and time is set to 2006/10/22 12:00:00.
*Switch@1# date 10/22/06 12:00:00

*Switch@1# show system date
System Date
===========
Date
: 10/22/2006
Time
: 12:00:03
Time Zone: GMT -06:00
*Switch@1#
3-64
Daylight saving time setting

The daylight saving time is a function to set the time ahead during the period set. The daylight
saving period can be set by specifying a date or a day of the week. The time is automatically set
ahead when the daylight saving time period starts and is set back when it ends. The time
difference can be set freely.
Memo
If the time difference is omitted in setting the daylight saving time, 01:00 is assumed.
Memo
In specifying a date, the same date cannot be set as the start and the end date of daylight
saving time. In specifying a day of the week, the same month/week/day of the week
cannot be set as the start and the end date of daylight saving time.
Memo
If daylight saving time is shorter than time difference by daylight saving time, the specified
end date is changed to that of the next year.
Memo
If the start date or the end date is Feb. 29, daylight saving time is applied only to leap
years. If Feb. 29 is set as the start date and the daylight saving time is shorter than time
difference by daylight saving time, the end date is changed to that of the next year of the
leap year. If Feb. 29 is set as the end date and the daylight saving time is shorter than
time difference by daylight saving time, the start date is changed to that of the previous
year of a leap year.
Memo
During daylight saving time, (DST) is shown in the current time.
Commands
set system daylight-time
Setting of daylight saving time
clear system daylight-time
Clearing of daylight saving time
show system date
3-65

Input example
Daylight saving time is set as starting from 00:00 on the first Sunday in April and ending in 00:00
on the last Sunday in October.
*Switch@1# set system daylight-time first sunday 4 00:00 last sunday 10

12:00
*Switch@1# show system date detail
System Date
===========
Current Date
: 10/22/2006
Current Time
: 13:00:07 (DST)
Time Zone
: GMT -06:00
Daylight Time Start : 04/02/2006 00:00
Daylight Time End : 10/29/2006 12:00
Daylight Time Offset: 01:00
*Switch@1#
NTP setting
The CX2600/200 provides the NTP function. The NTP function is a protocol that synchronizes the
network time between the NTP server and the CX2600/200. This synchronization enables
respective events to be related according to time information during system log creation or at event
occurrence.
For the details of the NTP function setting method, see "9.19 NTP function" of this manual.
3-66
3.6.2 Setting system information

System information of the CX2600/200 is set.
System information includes an administrator to contact, a system name and a system location.
This information can be referenced as maintenance information during SNMP access and telnet
access from a remote host.
Commands
set system contact
Setting of administrator contact
set system name
Setting of system name
set system location
Setting of system location
show system information
Display of system information
3.6.3 Setting functions

Various types of settings are performed according to the CX2600/200 operation mode.
Functions are set by CLI commands.
Basic Functions" of this manual.
For the details of the setting method, see "4 Setting of
If you have configuration data to be set, copy the necessary setting data and paste it in the console
screen of this unit. Input the data as is as a command. Some communication software allows
you to set the configuration data as is in batch mode by sending it to this unit. For the detail of the
setting method, see "8.2 Configuration Data Management" of this manual.
3-67
3.6.4 Saving set information

The set/modified data is written as running configuration data in the DRAM area.
turned off, the data disappears.
So, if power is
The running configuration data is saved in built-in flash memory as startup configuration data so
that the set/modified data will not disappear even if power is turned off.
Command
write memory
3-68
Setting of Basic Functions
4 Setting of Basic Functions

This chapter explains setting procedures for
basic functions such as VLAN, QoS, and link
aggregation.
4.1 Setting of Basic Functions
4-2
4.2 Setting of Extended Functions
4-1
4-136
4.1 Setting of Basic Functions

4.1.1 Port
Set the communication mode of the FastEther (100BASE-FX/TX) port, GigabitEther
(1000BASE-X/T) port, ATMP port, and TDMP port in accordance with the use environment.
You can confirm the setting information of the media converter (M/C) to be connected to the FX8x
(x: S/A/B) port of the CX2600/200. For details on the M/C setting information, see "M/C Status in
Fault Supervision" in "Maintenance and Management".
Setting port attributes
4-3
Sets the attributes of each port.
4-2
Setting port attributes

The CX2600/200 accommodates different types of lines depending on the line module. A line
module supporting FastEther has eight ports; the GigabitEther line module has one port; a line
module supporting TDMP has eight ports; a line module supporting ATMP has eight ports; a line
module supporting ATM155 has one port; a line module supporting ATMP155 has one port; and a
line module supporting TDMP155 has one port. When you set the attributes of each port, specify
the mounting slot number and port number as parameters.
Setting the GbE line mode
4-6
Sets the operation mode for the GbE module.
Setting the medium of the GbE port 4-7
Setting the communication speed, etc.
Setting the flow control
4-9
Line blocking/unblocking
4-8 Sets items such as communication speed for

each port.
Enables or disables the flow control.
Setting the link protection time
Setting the link-trap sending
Sets the medium of the GbE port.
4-10
4-10
4-10
Sets the link protection time.
Sets whether to send link traps to SNMP.
Blocks or unblocks the line.
Setting the clock mode
4-11
Sets the clock mode.
Setting the frame mode
4-11
Sets the frame mode.
Setting the TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP

line mode 4-12
Sets the line mode for the TDMP/ATMP line

module.
4-3
Displaying the TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP

line mode setting 4-21
Displaying the TDMP155 line module

logical port settings 4-22
Setting the cable length
Displaying the line status
Displays the frame format settings of the

TDMP155 line module.
4-23
Displaying the cable length settings
Displays the line mode of the TDMP/ATMP line

module.
Sets the cable length for each T1/E1 port.

4-26
4-27
Displaying the port (line) alarm status of

the TDMP155 line module 4-39
Displays the cable length of each T1/E1 port.
Displays the port settings and status information.
Displays the port (line) alarm status of the

4-4

The following shows the procedure for setting the port attributes.
GbE port
Yes
Set the Gbe line mode.

(set line mode gbe)
No
Set the medium of the GbE port.

(set port type)
ATM transmission
path
Yes
No
Yes
T1/E1 port
No
Set the line mode.

(set line mode)
Set the line speed.

(set port speed)
Set the clock mode.

(set port clock)
Set the cable length.

(set port cable-length)
Set the flow control.

(set port flowcontrol)
Set the frame mode.

(set port frame)
Set the link protection time.

(set port protection-time)
Set link trap sending.

(set port link-trap)
Block/unblock the line.

(set port admin)
End
4-5
Setting the GbE line mode

In GbE line mode setting, set the operation mode for the GbE line module.
When the operation mode is set to the GbE mode, the line speed can be set to 1000m-full/auto.
When set to the FE mode, the line speed can be set to 10m-full/100m-full/auto.
The following shows the operation mode(s) supported for each line module type.
Line module type
Operation mode
GbE-PV
GbE mode
FE mode
GbE-PV2
Note
GbE mode
If an operation mode not supported for the line module is set, the specified line module
port is blocked. In this blocked state, input of the port blocking/unblocking command (set
port admin) is possible, but the port will remain blocked. The port can be unblocked by
setting an operation mode supported for the line module.
The following shows how to set the GbE line mode.
Commands
set line mode gbe
Setting of GbE line mode
show line mode
Display of line mode setting
Memo
The FE mode can be set only for slots 1 to 4.
Note
No change can be made except when line module type setting (set line type) is
performed.
Note
If any of the following changes has been made, line restart will be executed:
Changing the line mode from none or gbe to fe
Changing the line mode from fe to none or gbe
4-6

Input example
*Switch@1# set line mode gbe 1 gbe
*Switch@1# set line mode gbe 2 fe
*Switch@1# show line mode
Line Mode Information
=====================
Line Line Frame
Slot Type Mode Type
-------------------------1 gbe
gbe
--2 gbe
fe
--3 ------4 ------5 ------6 ------7 ------8 ------9 ------10 ------11 ------12 ------*Switch@1#
Setting the medium of the GbE port

Sets the medium of the GbE port.
It can be fixed to optical or electric, or set to auto-negotiation.
Commands
set port type
Setting of GbE port media
show port information
Display of port setting and status information
Note
When auto is set, the optical port takes precedence.
4-7
Setting the communication speed, etc.

Such settings as communication speed can be determined by auto-negotiation or fixed.
Auto-negotiation is a procedure by which this device exchanges function information with the other
device to implement optimum communication with the best speed and direction. When
auto-negotiation is enabled, there is "none"ed to set the communication speed or direction.
Note
If 100m-full is set for the FE8 line module port, the SPEED-LED is always on regardless of
the line status.
Note
If only a fixed speed is set for the FE8 line module port, the port becomes MDI-X.
want to use it as MDI, be sure to set MDI when you set the speed.
Note
In the GbE/GbE-MUX line module port, MDI/MDI-X setting is ignored.
Note
Fix the speed of the FX8x line module port to 100M/Full.
Note
When a GbE-PV line module electric port is used, the operation is based on only
1000BASE-T. Make sure that the other unit supports 1000BASE-T.
When a GbE-PV2 line module electric port is used, the operation is based on only
1000BASE-T if the GbE line mode is set to the GbE mode. Make sure that the other unit
supports 1000BASE-T. If the GbE line mode is set to the FE mode, the operation is
based on only 100BASE-TX. Make sure that the other unit supports 100BASE-TX.
For GigabitEther, auto-negotiation is recommended for speed setting regardless of
whether the port is optical or electric. If the speed is fixed, connection may become
unstable when the other unit supports a different link connection method.
Commands
set port speed
Setting of port speed and MDI/MDI-X
4-8
If you
Setting the flow control

Flow control is a function of the receiving unit, which adjusts the data transmission speed and other
conditions in accordance with the processing status so that it may not miss receive data.
Flow control can be enabled forcibly when auto-negotiation is enabled, regardless of the settings
specified in negotiation and the function of the other device.
Note
Flow control cannot be set to auto-negotiation setting unless the port speed setting is set
to auto-negotiation setting. (When the port speed is fixed, the flow control can be set but
flow control does not work.)
Note
Because a 100BASE-FX port is fixed to 100M-Full, do not force flow control unless the
other device, which is a customer premises M/C, supports flow control or it can let through
flow control frames.
Note
On a line where flow control setting is enabled or set to auto-negotiation, functions

(IEEE802.3ad aggregation, spanning tree, line flow supervision, ELAN connection test
function, and EtherOAM) that involve transmission and reception of control frames will not
operate.
Note
The GbE-MUX port does not support flow control.
Note
This device supports only Pause Frame reception operation.

operation is not supported.
It does not accept this setting.

Pause Frame transmission
Commands
set port flowcontrol
Setting of flow control
4-9
Setting the link protection time

Sets the protection time from detection of link down to recovery of the port.
Commands
set port protection-time
Setting of port link protection time
show port protection-time
Display of port link protection time
Note
It is recommended to use the default setting, unless link down and recovery repeat many
times.
Setting the link-trap sending

Sets whether to notify port link down/recovery by SNMP traps.
Commands
set port link-trap
Setting of SNMP link trap transmission
show port trap
Display of link trap transmission setting
Note
SNMP traps will not be sent unless the trap transmit selection function is also enabled.
For details, see "10.4 TRAP Transmit Selection Function".
Line blocking/unblocking
Blocking the port disables communication, while unblocking it enables communication.
Commands
set port admin
Setting of port blocking/unblocking
4-10
Setting the clock mode

Either the independent mode (master) or external supply mode (slave) can be set.
In the external supply mode, the clock is synchronized with the clock supplied by the other device.
If no external clock can be extracted in the external supply mode, a clock can be generated in the
independent mode by the hardware autonomous operation.
Note
This command can be set for the ATM transmission path only.
Commands
set port clock
Setting of ATM transmission path clock
Setting the frame mode

Either SDH/idle cell, SDH/unassigned cell, or SONET/unassigned cell can be set as the physical
layer frame format and idle cell method.
Note
This command can be set for the 155Mbps line only.
Note
For the TDMP155 line module, see "Setting the TDMP155 line mode (set line mode
tdmp155)".
Commands
set port frame
Setting of ATM transmission path framing mode
4-11
Setting the TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP line mode

In TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP line mode setting, you can set the operation mode, frame type, line
code, and frame format for the TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP line module.
The following shows the operation mode(s) supported for each line module type.
Line module type
Operation mode
TDM mode
TDMP
TDMoP mode
TDM mode
TDMP155
TDMoP mode
ATMP
ATMoP mode
The following shows the line codes and frame formats supported for each frame type.
Frame type
Line code
Frame format
CRC-4 Multiframe
E1
HDB3
AMI
CRC-4 Multiframe-no-CAS
Non-CRC-4
Unframed
Super Frame(SF)
T1
B8ZS
AMI
Super Frame-Japanese (SF-JPN)

Extended Super Frame (ESF)
Unframed
CRC-4 Multiframe
SDH
Non-CRC-4
Unframed
Super Frame (SF)
SONET

Unframed
4-12

The following shows how to set the line mode for the TDMP line module T1/E1 port.
Command
set line mode tdmp
Setting of TDMP line mode
Memo
When tdm is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the third parameter (frame
type), the fourth parameter (line code for the TDM mode), and the fifth parameter (frame
format for the TDM mode) can be specified.
Memo
When tdmop is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the third parameter (frame
type), the fourth parameter (line code for the TDMoP mode), and the fifth parameter
(frame format for the TDMoP mode) can be specified.
Memo
When "none" is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the TDMP line mode
setting is cleared.
Memo
When the TDMoP mode is set, connect the same interface for the T1/E1 line respectively.
When E1 line is connected to T1 line and vice versa, the line extraction clock is not
guaranteed.
Note
You cannot change the TDMP line mode setting if any of the following commands is
already entered:
- set tdm group
- set tdmop group
- set port cable-length
- set ether-oam mep
Note
When the cable length setting is already done, it is necessary to reset to the default
setting with the cable length setting command (set port cable-length). (For details, refer
to "Setting the cable length".)
Note
- Changing TDMP line mode from tdm to tdmop or none
- Changing TDMP line mode from tdmop to tdm or none
- Changing frame type
Note
If TDMP and TDMP155 line modules are used in the TDMoP mode, the following
restriction is applied:
(Number of TDMP line modules x 1) + (number of TDMP155 line modules x 3) < 16
* Each number of line modules above is the number of line modules that are set to the
TDMoP mode.
4-13

Input examples
The following example shows how to set the TDMP line mode when tdm is specified in the second
parameter (line mode).
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
line
line
line
line
line
line
line
line
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
tdm
tdm
tdm
tdm
tdm
tdm
tdm
tdm
e1
e1
e1
e1
t1
t1
t1
t1
hdb3
crc4
hdb3 crc4
b8zs
esf
b8zs esf
The following example shows how to set the TDMP line mode when tdmop is specified in the
second parameter (line mode).
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
line
line
line
line
mode
mode
mode
mode
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
tdmp
2
3
4
5
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
tdmop
e1
e1
t1
t1
unframed
hdb3 crc4nocas
sf
b8zs esf
The following example shows how to set the TDMP line mode when "none" is specified in the
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 none

*Switch@1#
4-14

For the TDMP155 line module, set the TDMP155 line mode and SDH/SONET logical port using
separate commands.
The following shows how to set the TDMP155 line mode for the TDMP155 line module.
Command
set line mode tdmp155
Setting of TDMP155 line mode
Memo
When tdm is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the frame format for the TDM
mode can be specified in the third parameter.
Memo
When tdmop is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the frame format for the
TDMoP mode can be specified in the third parameter.
Memo
When "none" is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the TDMP155 line mode
setting is cleared.
Memo
When the TDMoP mode is set, connect the same interface for the SONET(T1)/SDH(E1)
logical port respectively.
When SONET(T1) logical port is connected to SDH(E1) port and vice versa, the line
extraction clock is not guaranteed.
Note
You cannot change the TDMP155 line mode setting if any of the following commands is
already entered:
- set tdm group
- set tdmop group
Note
- Changing TDMP155 line mode from tdm to tdmop or none
- Changing TDMP155 line mode from tdmop to tdm or none
4-15

Input examples
The following example shows how to set the TDMP155 line mode when tdm is specified in the
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 2 tdm sdh

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 3 tdm sonet
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the TDMP155 line mode when tdmop is specified in the
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 2 tdmop sdh

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 3 tdmop sonet
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the TDMP155 line mode when "none" is specified in the
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 1 none

*Switch@1#
4-16

The following shows how to set the SDH/SONET logical port for the TDMP155 line module.
Command
set port logical-interface
Setting of TDMP155 port logical interface
Memo
When sdh is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the frame format for SDH can
be specified in the third parameter.
Memo
When sonet is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the frame format for
SONET can be specified in the third parameter.
Memo
When "none" is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the frame format setting is
cleared.
Memo
When the frame type is set to SDH and the TDMoP operation mode is set to CESoPSN
during TDMP155 line mode setting, unframed cannot be set in the fourth parameter.
Memo
The TDMP155 line mode setting needs to be done already.
Note
You cannot change the SDH/SONET logical port setting if any of the following commands
is already entered:
- set tdm group
- set tdmop group
4-17

Input examples
The following example shows how to set the TDMP155 frame format when sdh is specified in the
*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 unframed

*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 sdh 1/1/2
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the TDMP155 frame format when sonet is specified in the
*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 2/1 sonet 1/1/1 sf

*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 2/1 sonet 1/1/4
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the TDMP155 frame format when "none" is specified in
the second parameter (line mode).
*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 none

*Switch@1#
4-18

The following shows how to set the ATMP line mode for the ATMP line module.
Command
set line mode atmp
Setting of ATMP line mode
Memo
When atmop is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the third parameter (frame
type), the fourth parameter (line code for the ATMoP mode), and the fifth parameter
(frame format for the ATMoP mode) can be specified.
Memo
When "none" is specified in the second parameter (line mode), the ATMP line mode
setting is cleared.
Note
You cannot change the ATMP line mode setting if any of the following commands is
already entered:
- set port cable-length
- set ima group
- set ima clock
Note
- Changing ATMP line mode from atmop to none
4-19

Input examples
The following example shows how to set the ATMP line mode when atmop is specified in the
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
line
line
line
line
line
line
line
line
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
atmp
atmp
atmp
atmp
atmp
atmp
atmp
atmp
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
atmop
atmop
atmop
atmop
atmop
atmop
atmop
atmop
e1
e1
e1
e1
t1
t1
t1
t1
hdb3
crc4
hdb3 crc4
b8zs
esf
b8zs esf
The following example shows how to set the ATMP line mode when "none" is specified in the
*Switch@1# set line mode atmp 1 none

*Switch@1#
4-20
Displaying the TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP line mode setting

Displays the line mode settings of the TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP line modules.
Command
show line mode
Memo
Display of line mode setting
Hyphens (---) appear for line mode and frame type for line modules other than
TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP.
Input example
The following example shows how to display line mode settings per device basis.
*Switch@1# show line mode

Line Mode Information
=====================
Line
Line
Frame
Slot Type
Mode
Type
--------------------------1 fe8
----2 tdmp
tdm
e1
3 atmp
atmop e1
4 gbe
----5 tdmp
tdmop t1
6 tdmp
tdmop e1
7 atmp
atmop t1
8 atm155 ----9 ------10 tdmp
none
--11 tdmp155 tdm
sdh
12 tdmp155 tdmop sonet
*Switch@1#
4-21
Displaying the TDMP155 line module logical port settings

Displays the frame format settings of the TDMP155 line modules.
Command
show port logical-interface
Display of TDMP155 port logical interface setting
Input example
The following example shows how to display frame format settings per device basis.
*Switch@1# show port logical-interface

Logical Interface Table
=======================
Logical Frame
Port
Port
Format
-----------------------1/1
1/1/1 crc4
1/1
1/1/2 crc4nocas
1/1
1/1/3 unframed
1/1
1/2/1 non-crc4
:
:
:
1/1
3/7/3 crc4
*Switch@1#
4-22
Setting the cable length

When T1 is selected as the frame type for TDMP/ATMP line modules, the cable length between
CX2600/200 and remote devices, transmission power, and reception sensitivity can be set for each
port by the cable length setting.
When the cable length type is "short", the cable length can be specified as follows:
Cable Length
Supported Cable Length (ft)
133ft
0 to 133
266ft
134 to 266
399ft
267 to 399
533ft
400 to 533
655ft
534 to 655
When the cable length type is long, the transmission power and reception sensitivity can be
specified as follows:
Setting Items
Setting Value
Transmission power
0 dB
7.5 dB
15.0 dB
22.5 dB
Reception sensitivity
31 dB
21 dB
4-23

Command
set port cable-length
Setting of cable length
Memo
When "short" is specified in the second parameter (length type), the third parameter
(cable length) can be specified.
Memo
When "long" is specified in the second parameter (length type), the third parameter
(transmission attenuator value) and the fourth parameter (gain value) can be specified.
Memo
When "initial" is specified in the second parameter (length type), the default values can be
set:
- Length type: short
- Cable length: 133ft
Memo
When the line mode type of the specified line is "none", this command cannot be
executed.
Memo
When the line module operation mode is switched from none to tdm/tdmop/atmop and T1
is specified as the frame type by the set line mode command, default values are applied to
the settings.
4-24

Input examples
The following example shows how to set the cable length when "short" is specified in the second
parameter (length type).
*Switch@1# set port cable-length 1/3 short

*Switch@1# set port cable-length 1/1-2,1/4-8 short 399ft
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the cable length when "long" is specified in the second
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
port
port
port
port
port
cable-length
cable-length
cable-length
cable-length
cable-length
3/3 long
3/4 long 7.5db
3/5 long gain21db
3/6 long 7.5db gain21db
3/1-2,3/7-8 long 15db gain31db
The following example shows how to set the cable length when "initial" is specified in the second
*Switch@1# set port cable-length 12/1 initial

*Switch@1#
4-25
Displaying the cable length settings

Displays the cable length settings for each port when T1 is selected as the frame type for
TDMP/ATMP line modules. The setting can be displayed per line basis or per device basis.
Command
show port cable-length
Display of port cable length settings
Memo
When the line mode of the line module with the line number specified by the parameter is
tdm/tdmp/atmp and the frame type is T1, the cable length settings will be displayed.
Memo
If the parameter is omitted, the cable length settings will be displayed when the line mode
of the line modules in the device is tdm/tdmop/atmop and the frame type is T1.
Input example
The following example shows how to display the cable length settings per device basis.
*Switch@1# show port cable-length

Cable Length Information Table
==============================
Cable
Receive
Port Kind Length Tx ATT Sensitivity
---------------------------------------3/1 short 133ft
----3/2 short 266ft
----3/3 short 399ft
----3/4 short 533ft
----3/5 short 655ft
----3/6 short 133ft
----3/7 short 133ft
----3/8 short 133ft
----4/1 long --0db
gain21db
4/2 long --0db
gain31db
4/3 long --7.5db gain21db
4/5 long --15db
gain21db
4/6 long --15db
gain31db
4-26
Displaying the line status

The port settings and status information about the line module can be displayed.
Command
Input example (1/8)

Switch@1# show port information
Line number
Blocked or unblocked
Port Information Table

Line speed
======================
Line status
Port
Link
MDI status
Port Admin
Speed
Status
MDI
-----------------------------------------------------1/1 enabled 100m-full link-down --1/2 enabled 100m-full link-down --1/3 enabled 100m-full link-down --1/4 enabled 100m-full link-down --1/5 enabled 100m-full 100m-full --1/6 enabled 100m-full 100m-full --1/7 enabled 100m-full link-down --1/8 enabled 100m-full link-down --Flow control configuration
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
Port Configuration Status
-------------------------------1/1 disabled
disabled
1/2 disabled
disabled
1/3 disabled
disabled
1/4 disabled
disabled
1/5 disabled
disabled
1/6 disabled
disabled
1/7 disabled
disabled
1/8 disabled
disabled
Status of flow control
4-27

Input example (2/8)
======================
Port
Link
Port Admin
Speed
Status
MDI
-----------------------------------------------------6/1 enabled auto
link-down auto mdi/mdi-x
Line type configuration
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
-------------------------------6/1 disabled
disabled
Optical module type

Fault status of the input and
output sides of the optical
module
Type
Type
Tx
Rx
Port Status
Configuration SFP Type
Error Error
--------------------------------------------------------------------6/1
auto
unmount
----SFP Vendor Information
======================
Port 6/1
----------------------------------------Vendor Name
: --Vendor OUI
: --Vendor Part Number
: --Vendor Revision
: --Vendor Serial Number : --Port Information Table
======================
Port
Link
Port Admin
Speed
Status
MDI
-----------------------------------------------------7/1 enabled auto
100m-full auto mdi/mdi-x
7/2 enabled auto
7/3 enabled auto
7/4 enabled auto
7/5 enabled auto
7/6 enabled auto
7/7 enabled auto
7/8 enabled auto
4-28

Input example (3/8)
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
-------------------------------7/1 disabled
disabled
7/2 disabled
disabled
7/3 disabled
disabled
7/4 disabled
disabled
7/5 disabled
disabled
7/6 disabled
disabled
7/7 disabled
disabled
7/8 disabled
disabled
Current line type
======================
Port
Link
Port Admin
Speed
Status
MDI
-----------------------------------------------------8/1 enabled auto
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
-------------------------------8/1 disabled
disabled
Type
Type
Tx
Rx
Port Status
Error
Error
--------------------------------------------------------------------8/1 1000BASE-SX
auto
1000BASE-SX
normal normal
SFP Vendor Information
======================
Port 8/1
----------------------------------------Vendor Name
: SumitomoElectric
Vendor OUI
: 00-00-5F
Vendor Part Number
: SCP6584-GL-CNH
Vendor Revision
: D
Vendor Serial Number : 5YK002D01262
4-29

Input example (4/8)
======================
Port
Link
Port Admin
Speed
Status
MDI
-----------------------------------------------------9/1 enabled auto
link-down auto mdi/mdi-x
Flowcontrol
Flowcontrol
-------------------------------9/1 disabled
disabled
Type
Type
Tx
Rx
Port Status
Error Error
------------------------------------------------------------9/1
auto
unmount
-----
4-30

Input example (5/8)
The following example shows the line status of the TDM/ATM line module.
Line number

Blocked or unblocked
======================
Line code
Frame Link
Alarm
Frame format
Port Admin
Type
Status
Status Code Framing
-----------------------------------------------------------8/1 enabled e1
2.048m-e1 normal hdb3 unframed
8/2 enabled e1
link-down los
hdb3 unframed
8/3 enabled e1
link-down los
hdb3 unframed
8/4 enabled e1
link-down los
hdb3 unframed
8/5 enabled e1
link-down los
hdb3 unframed
8/6 enabled e1
link-down los
hdb3 unframed
8/7 enabled e1
link-down los
hdb3 unframed
8/8 enabled e1
link-down los
hdb3 unframed
Line speed
Line status
======================
Frame Link
Alarm
Port Admin Type
Status
Status Code Framing
-----------------------------------------------------------9/1 enabled t1
1.5m-t1
normal b8zs esf
9/2 enabled t1
link-down los
b8zs esf
9/3 enabled t1
link-down los
b8zs esf
9/4 enabled t1
link-down los
b8zs esf
9/5 enabled t1
link-down los
b8zs esf
9/6 enabled t1
link-down los
b8zs esf
9/7 enabled t1
link-down los
b8zs esf
9/8 enabled t1
link-down los
b8zs esf
4-31

Input example (6/8)
The following example shows the line status of the ATM155 line module.
Clock control configuration

Physical layer frame format

Idle cell
======================
Port
Link
Cell
Port Admin
Speed
Status
Clock
Framing Padding
-------------------------------------------------------------------10/1 enabled 155m
155m
master sdh
idle
F1 Status Table
===============
Port LOS
LOF
-------------------10/1 -----
F1 alarm status
F2 Status Table
F2 alarm status
===============
Port MS-AIS MS-SD MS-RDI MS-ERR MS-REI
-------------------------------------------10/1 ----------F3 Status Table
F3 alarm status
===============
Port LOP
P-AIS
LCD
---------------------------10/1 -------
4-32

Input example (7/8)
The following example shows the line status of the ATMP155 line module.
Clock control configuration

Physical layer frame format

Idle cell
======================
Port
Link
Cell
Port Admin
Speed
Status
Clock
Framing Padding
-------------------------------------------------------------------11/1 enabled 155m
155m
master sdh
idle
Optical module type
Port SFP Type Tx Error Rx Error

---------------------------------11/1 OC3-SI15 normal
normal
Fault status of the input and output sides

of the optical module

======================
Port 11/1
----------------------------------------Vendor Name
: NEC CORPORATION
Vendor OUI
: 00-00-4C
Vendor Part Number
: OD-J9449-5A01
Vendor Revision
: 0001
Vendor Serial Number : 7609
F1 Status Table
===============
Port LOS
LOF
-------------------11/1 -----
F1 alarm status
F2 Status Table
F2 alarm status
===============
Port MS-AIS MS-SD MS-RDI MS-ERR MS-REI
-------------------------------------------11/1 ----------F3 Status Table
F3 alarm status
===============
Port LOP
P-AIS
LCD
---------------------------11/1 -------
4-33

Input example (8/8)
The following example shows the line status of the TDMP155 line module.

======================
Frame format
Port
Link
Port Admin
Speed
Status
Framing
---------------------------------------------12/1 enabled 155m
155m
sdh
Optical module type
Port SFP Type Tx Error Rx Error

---------------------------------12/1 OC3-SI15 normal
normal
Fault status of the input and output sides

of the optical module

======================
Port 12/1
----------------------------------------Vendor Name
: NEC CORPORATION
Vendor OUI
: 00-00-4C
Vendor Part Number
: OD-J9449-5A01
Vendor Revision
: 0001
Vendor Serial Number : 7609
SECTION(RS) Status Table
SECTION (RS) alarm status
========================
Port LOS
LOF
OOF
RS-TIM RS-BIP
-------------------------------------------12/1 ----------LINE(MS) Status Table
LINE (MS) alarm status
=====================
Port MS-AIS MS-EXC MS-DEG MS-REI MS-RDI MS-BIP
---------------------------------------------------12/1 ------------Switch@1#
4-34
Setting the path trace for the TDMP155 line module

Use the "set port path-trace" command to set the path trace for J0/J1/J2 in the frame header
(SOH/POH) of TDM155. The parameters of the "set port path-trace" command include the port
(line) number, path identifier (all path traces/J0 path trace/J1 path trace/J2 path trace), higher path
number or logical port number, setting type [initial setting/setting of the character string to be
transmitted/setting of the character string to be received (expected value)], use of CRC (added/not
added), character string length (1/16/64 bytes), character type (binary mode/ASCII mode), and
message.
Command
set port path-trace
Setting of SDH path trace for TDMP155
Memo
The default values are 'CRC added', 16 bytes for the character string length, binary mode
for the character type, and 'all "0"s' for the message.
Note
This function can be set only for the TDMP155 line module.
Note
The TDMP155 line mode must have been set.
Note
When initial setting is set for the setting type, the above default values are set for both the
character string to be transmitted and the character string to be received (expected value).
Note
If the line mode of a TDMP155 line module is to be changed, the path trace configuration
of the line must be set to the default settings.
Displaying the path trace of the TDMP155 line module

Use the "show port path-trace" command to display the path trace settings of the TDMP155 line
module. The parameters of the "show port path-trace" command include the port (line) number,
path identifier (J0 path trace/J1 path trace/J2 path trace), and higher path number or logical port
number.
Command
show port path-trace
Note
Display of SDH path trace setting for TDMP155
The TDMP155 line mode must have been set.
4-35

Input examples
The following examples show how to display the setting of the character string to be transmitted,
the setting of the character string to be received (expected value), and the received character
string.
Example of display per J0 path trace
Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j0

STM-1 Path Trace Config Table
=============================
Port
: 12/1
J0 Transmit Message
===================
mode
: binary
length : 16 (byte)
crc
: on
message : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20
J0 Expected Message
===================
mode
: ascii
length : 16 (byte)
crc
: on
message : "NEC CX2600
Port (line) number

Setting of J0 character string to be
transmitted
Character type
Character string length
CRC
Message
Setting of J0 character string to

be received (expected value)
Character type
CRC
Message
"
J0 Received Message
===================
binary : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20
ascii : "NEC CX2600
"
Switch@1#
4-36
J0 received character string

Message (binary)
Message (ASCII)

Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j1 3

=============================
Port
: 12/1
STS-1 : 3
Port (line) number

Higher path number

J1 Transmit Message
be transmitted
===================
Character type
mode
: binary
CRC
length : 64 (byte)
Message
crc
: off
message : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 01 02
Setting of J1 character string
J1 Expected Message
===================
Character type
mode
: binary
CRC
length : 64 (byte)
Message
crc
: off
message : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 01 02
J1 Received Message
Message (binary)
===================
Message (ASCII)
binary : 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 40 40
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
50 50 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 01 02
ascii : "..........
0000000000@@@@@@@@@@PPPPPPPPPP''''''''''.."
Switch@1#
4-37
to

Switch@1# show port path-trace 12/1 j2 3/7/4

=============================
Port
: 12/1
Logical Port : 3/7/4
Port (line) number

Logical port number
be transmitted
Character type
CRC
Message
J2 Transmit Message
===================
mode
: ascii
length : 16 (byte)
crc
: on
message : "abcdefghijklmno"

Character type
CRC
Message
J2 Expected Message
===================
mode
: ascii
length : 16 (byte)
crc
: on
message : "abcdefghijklmno"
J2 Received Message
===================
binary : 4e 45 43 20 43 58 32 36 30 30 20 20 20 20 20
ascii : "NEC CX2600
"
Switch@1#
4-38

Message (binary)
Message (ASCII)
Displaying the port (line) alarm status of the TDMP155 line

module
The port (line) alarm status of the TDMP155 line module can be displayed per logical port basis,
per line basis, or per device basis.
Command
show stm status
Memo
Display of port (line) alarm status for TDMP155 port
This command shows the high-order path, low-order path, and PDH alarm statuses. The
SECTION(RS)/LINE(MS) alarm status is displayed with the "show port information"
command.
4-39

Input example
The following example shows how to display the alarm status by specifying a logical port number
when the frame type is set to SDH in TDMP155 line mode setting.
Switch@1# show stm status 12/1 1/1/1

STM Path Alarm Status Table
===========================
HO-PATH Status
High-order path alarm status
==============
Port TUG-3 AU-AIS AU-LOP
--------------------------12/1
1 detect --Port TUG-3 HP-TIM HP-UNEQ HP-PLM HP-EXC HP-DEG HP-REI HP-RDI HP-BIP
------------------------------------------------------------------------12/1
1 ----------------LO-PATH Status
Low-order path alarm status
==============
Logical
Port Port
TU-AIS TU-LOP TU-LOM
------------------------------------12/1 1/1/1
------Logical
Port Port
LP-TIM LP-UNEQ LP-PLM LP-EXC LP-DEG LP-REI LP-RDI LP-BIP
---------------------------------------------------------------------------12/1 1/1/1
----------------PDH Status
PDH alarm status
==========
Logical
Port Port
AIS
LOF
RAI
SEF
FAS
CRC
-----------------------------------------------------12/1
1/1/1 -------------
4-40
4.1.2 VLAN
The CX2600/200 supports the VLAN function that allows the user to flexibly add, delete, or change
the network configuration without being restricted by the physical network configuration.
The CX2600/200 has four types of VLAN functions including portbase VLAN, tagbase VLAN,
Extended VLAN, VLAN ID tag swap function, which can be used for different purposes.
Portbase VLAN
4-42
Describes how to set a portbase VLAN.
Tagbase VLAN
Extended VLAN
4-45
Describes how to set a tagbase VLAN.
4-48
Describes how to set an extended VLAN.
VLAN ID tag swap function
4-54
Describes the VLAN ID tag swap function.
4-41
Portbase VLAN
The CX2600/200 implements a portbase VLAN by grouping ports and assigning a unique VLAN ID
to each group, which serve as the identifier. The portbase VLAN is the most popular VLAN
method where groups are formed based on the physical ports of the switch.
Broadcast frames from the port belonging to a VLAN will be sent only to the ports that belong to
the same VLAN.
From a portbase VLAN port, data is output without VLAN tags.
The following shows the procedure for setting a portbase VLAN.
Set the VLAN IDs.
(set vlan portbase, set vlan member)
Set the VLAN name.

(set vlan name)
To delete a portbase VLAN, set a tagbase VLAN (without a VLAN).
Memo
To set a portbase VLAN, use the portbase VLAN setting command or collective setting
command for portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN.
Note
If a line has more than 100 tagbase VLAN settings and VLAN tag swap settings in total,
the collective setting command for portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN cannot set the line
to a portbase VLAN line.
Note
The GbE-MUX line module does not accept a setting of portbase VLAN.
Note
To implement frame transmission by the GbE-MUX line module, you need to set a VLAN
(tagbase VLAN or VLAN tag swap).
Note
This portbase setting does not work for ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and
TDMP155 line modules.
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, a portbase VLAN can be set only on the line
without VLAN of tagbase VLAN. Any other settings cannot be accepted.
4-42

Commands
set vlan portbase
Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan member
Setting of portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN en bloc
show vlan table port
Display of VLAN table per port (line)
show vlan table vid
Display of VLAN table per VLAN
set vlan name
Setting of VLAN name
clear vlan name
Clearing of VLAN name
show vlan summary
Display of number of VLAN entries
Setting example
Higher unit
Higher unit
Port 7/1
/
Port 8/1
/
Port 9/1
/
Port 12/1
10/
CX2600/220
VLAN 10
VLAN
10
Port 1/1 /
VLAN 20
VLA
N
Port
1/3
/
4-43
Port 2/12/
Port 2/6
/

The following describes how to set portbase VLANs in a configuration shown on the previous page.
(1) Set portbase VLANs.
(2) Set VLAN names.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
portbase 1/1 10
portbase 1/3 10
portbase 7/1 10
portbase 9/1 10
portbase 2/1 20
portbase 2/6 20
portbase 8/1 20
portbase 12/1 20
name 10 VLAN10
name 20 VLAN20
4-44
(1)
(2)
Tagbase VLAN
The CX2600/200 supports the tagbase VLAN function based on the IEEE802.1Q specification.
The tagbase VLAN is a VLAN method where a VLAN group is explicitly specified by assigning a
"tag header" to a MAC frame as an identifier for identification of a VLAN group. This frame is
called VLAN tag frame. By using a tagbase VLAN, you can configure a VLAN across multiple
devices.
A switch, receiving a VLAN tag frame, internally interprets the tag data and relays the frame to the
proper port belonging to the VLAN.
The following shows the procedure for setting a tagbase VLAN.
Set a VLAN ID.
(set vlan tagbase, set vlan member)
Set a VLAN name.

(set vlan name)
The following shows the procedure for deleting a tagbase VLAN.

Delete the VLAN ID.
(clear vlan tagbase)
Delete the VLAN name.

(clear vlan name)
Memo
One line of the GbE-MUX line module can have up to 32 VLANs registered.
Memo
To set a tagbase VLAN, use the tagbase VLAN setting command or collective setting
command for portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN.
Note
When VLAN tag swap is set in a port, a VLAN ID already used as the swap destination
VLAN ID cannot be set as a tagbase VLAN ID.
Note
A port to which tagbase VLAN is set checks whether a received frame has a VLAN tag.
If it receives a frame having no tag, it will discard the frame.
4-45

Note
When you set a VLAN for the GbE-MUX line module, you cannot set the following VLAN
IDs for multiple lines in the same line module.
VLAN ID used in a tagbase VLAN setting
Swap origin VLAN ID used in a VLAN tag swap setting
Note
When you set a VLAN for the GbE-MUX line module, you cannot register a new VLAN if
the burst tolerance of the priority transmission function of multiplex ports is exceeded due
to such addition.
Note
If you delete a VLAN set for the GbE-MUX line module, it will also delete all MAC learning
information of the line where the VLAN was set.
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, a tagbase VLAN having a VLAN ID specified
cannot be set on a line where a portbase VLAN is set. Only a VLAN without VLAN ID
can be set.
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, if you want to set a tagbase VLAN in a line
where VLAN tag swap is set, you cannot set the same VLAN ID with the swap origin
VLAN ID.
Commands
set vlan tagbase
Setting of tagbase VLAN
set vlan member
clear vlan tagbase
Clearing of tagbase VLAN
set vlan name
clear vlan name
show vlan summary
4-46

Setting example
Higher unit
Higher unit
10
10
Port 7/1
20
Port 8/1
Port 9/1
VLAN 10
Port 1/1
Port 12/1
VLAN 20
Port 2/1
Port1/3
10
20
10
20
Lower unit
Port 2/6
20
Lower unit
The following describes how to set tagbase VLANs in a configuration shown above.
(1) Set tagbase VLANs.
(2) Set VLAN names.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
tagbase
tagbase
tagbase
tagbase
tagbase
tagbase
tagbase
tagbase
name 10
name 20
1/1 10
1/3 10
7/1 10
9/1 10
2/1 20
2/6 20
8/1 20
12/1 20
VLAN10
VLAN20
4-47
(1)
(2)
Extended VLAN
The CX2600/200 allows the user to add multiple VLAN tags unique to the network using portbase
VLANs by the extended VLAN (VLAN tag stacking) function based on the VLAN function defined
by IEEE802.1Q. This makes it possible for the user to separate the traffic within the network by
the VLAN ID assigned to individual VLANs.
The following describes the network configuration and operation of an extended VLAN.
Ethertype 0x9100 , VLAN ID 100
VLAN
CX2600/200#1
Port
Tag
Layer2 switch
VLAN ID is
decided by the
receive port.
CX2600/200#2
Tag
Tag
CX2600/200#3
Tag
Port
VLAN ID is decided by the

extended VLAN tag of the
received frame
Layer2 switch
VLAN ID is decided by the

extended VLAN tag of the
received frame
Frame forwarding direction

Frame forwarding status
CX2600/200#1
CX2600/200#2
CX2600/200#3
(2)
Layer2 switch
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
(1)
(2)
Extended VLAN
tag is forwarded.
(1)
(2)
Layer2 switch
Extended VLAN
tag is deleted.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1) IEEE802.1Q VLAN tag

(2) Extended VLAN tag
[Ethertype=0x9100, VLAN ID=100]
4-48

In an extended VLAN of the CX2600/200, an extended VLAN tag is added at each port.
Transmission cannot be performed with a VLAN ID of an extended VLAN added to an extended
VLAN tag for each VLAN tag frame on one port.
The example below shows each case when a VLAN tag frame of VLAN ID=10 is received on port
1/1 and when a VLAN tag frame of VLAN ID=20 is received on port 1/1. The VLAN ID of the
extended VLAN set on the port 1/1 is added to the extended VLAN tag of these frames.
Extended VLAN tag frame
VLAN tag frame

VLAN tag
VLAN ID=10
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=10
Port1/1
Extended VLAN tag

VLAN ID=100
Port1/2
CX2600/200
VLAN tag frame
Extended VLAN tag frame
VLAN tag
VLAN ID=20
VLAN tag Extended VLAN tag

VLAN ID=100
VLAN ID=20
Memo
A VLAN tag is added when a frame is input from a portbase VLAN and output from a
tagbase VLAN port. When the Ethertype for VLAN tag recognition of the output port is
defaulted to 0x8100 (IEEE802.1Q tag), the IEEE802.1Q tag is added and sent out.
Note
When a frame is input from a tagbase VLAN and output from a tagbase VLAN port, if the
Ethertype for VLAN tag recognition of the output port is not defaulted to 0x8100
(IEEE802.1Q tag), the Ethertype of the outer tag is converted.
4-49
Setting an extended VLAN

To set an extended VLAN, use the following commands that are previously explained in
explanations of VLAN setting procedures. The parameters and values to set are the same with
the other types of VLANs.
The following shows the procedure for setting an extended VLAN.
extended VLAN)
(For adding or deleting an
Set a VLAN ID.

(set vlan portbase , set vlan member)
Sets a port to a portbase VLAN port that add or

delete an extended VLAN.
Set a VLAN ID.

(set vlan tagbase , set vlan member)
)
Sets the I/O port belonging to the extended VLAN

network to a tagbase VLAN.
Set a VLAN name.

(set vlan name)
Set the Ethertype for VLAN tag

recognition. (set vlan ethertype)
Sets a VLAN name if necessary.

omitted.)
(This can be
Sets the Ethertype for the extended VLAN.
The following shows the procedure for deleting an extended VLAN.

Delete the VLAN ID.
(clear vlan tagbase)
Delete the VLAN name.

(clear vlan name)
Set the Ethertype for VLAN tag

recognition. (set vlan ethertype)
Deletes the tagbase VLAN of the I/O port

belonging to the extended VLAN network.
Deletes the VLAN name.
Returns the Ethertype

recognition to 0x8100.
4-50
for
VLAN
tag

Commands
set vlan portbase
Setting of portbase VLAN
set vlan tagbase
Setting of tagbase VLAN
set vlan member
show vlan table port
Display of VLAN table per port (line)
clear vlan tagbase
Clearing of tagbase VLAN
show vlan table vid
Display of VLAN table per VLAN
set vlan name
clear vlan name
set vlan ethertype
Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition
show vlan ethertype
Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition
show vlan summary
4-51
Extended VLAN setting example

This part describes the basic setting procedure for implementing an extended VLAN taking the
following network configuration for an example.
Configuration example
The following describes the basic setting procedure to implement an extended VLAN as shown
below.
Extended VLAN
Transmission and reception of frames

VLAN
Layer2 switch
Port
1/1
CX2600/220#1
Port Port
7/1 7/1
CX2600/220#2
Port Port
8/1 7/1
CX2600/220#3
VLAN
Port
1/1
Layer2 switch
Ethertype 0x9100
VLAN ID 100
Extended VLAN
tag is deleted.
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
CX2600/220#2
CX2600/220#1
CX2600/220#3
(2)
Layer2 switch
(1)
(2)
Extended VLAN
tag is forwarded.
Extended VLAN
tag is added.
(1)
Extended VLAN
tag is deleted.
(2)
Extended VLAN
tag is deleted.
(1)
(2)
Layer2 switch
(1)
(1) IEEE802.1Q VLAN tag

(2) Extended VLAN tag
[Ethertype=0x9100, VLAN ID=100]
4-52

Input examples
CX2600/220#1 and CX2600/220#3 in the above example are configured with Ethertype of 0x9100.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
portbase 1/1 100

tagbase 7/1 100
name 100 VLAN100
ethertype 7/1 0x9100
CX2600/220#2 in the above example is configured with Ethertype of 0x9100.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
vlan
vlan
vlan
vlan
tagbase 7/1 100

tagbase 8/1 100
name 100 VLAN100
ethertype 7/1,8/1 0x9100
4-53
VLAN ID tag swap function

The CX2600/200 can also swap extended VLAN tags as well as add and delete extended VLAN
tags. Using this function, the user can establish a connection between the local network and
another network or new network and existing network without changing the existing extended
VLAN IDs, which is very effective in maintenance and operation.
VLAN=B
VLAN tags can be swapped

when interconnection with
another network is
established.
Another network
CX2600/200
CX2600/220
VLAN=A
CX2610
VLAN=100
Company A
CX2610
VLAN=101
EVLAN 10
VLAN=100
Company B
VLAN=101
EVLAN 20
EVLAN Extended VLAN
4-54
Setting VLAN ID swapping

The CX2600/200 provides the VLAN ID tag swap function by the extended VLAN (VLAN tag
stacking) function based on the VLAN function defined by IEEE802.1Q.
When you set VLAN ID tag swapping, set a tagbase VLAN port that is to be the origin of swap
processing. The set port will be able to receive frames from outside, which have the same
Ethertype as the set one. With this port used as the origin, VLAN IDs and Ethertype are swapped
at input and output of frames.
To set VLAN tag swapping on the CX2600/200, follow the procedure given below.
(1) Set Ethertype for the tagbase VLAN port.
(set vlan ethertype)
(2) Set VLAN tag swapping for the tagbase VLAN port.
(3) Display the VLAN tag swap settings.
(4) Delete the VLAN tag swap settings.
(set vlan swap)
(show vlan swap)

(clear vlan swap)
Setting Ethertype
Use the "set vlan ethertype" command to set Ethertype. The parameters of the "set vlan
ethertype" command include the port number (1/1-12/1) and Ethertype value (0x600-0xffff). Enter
them with separating them by a space.
Memo
If a portbase VLAN is set to a port, the port keeps the Ethertype setting but it does not
function.
Note
If portbase is specified by the PVC-VLAN mode setting command when the ATM155 line
module is set, no other value than 0x8100 can be set in Ethertype.
Displaying Ethertype
Use the "show vlan ethertype" command to display the Ethertype setting.
"show vlan ethertype" command is the port number (1/1-12/1).
4-55
The parameter of the

Setting and deleting VLAN tag swapping
On the tagbase VLAN port where Ethertype is set, VLAN tag swapping is enabled.
destination VLAN ID.
Set the swap
Use the "set vlan swap" command to set VLAN tag swapping. The parameters of "set vlan swap"
include the port number (1/1-12/1), swap origin VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN name, and swap
destination VLAN ID (0-4094). Enter these parameters in this order placing a space between
each of them.
Use the "clear vlan swap" command to delete VLAN tag swapping. The parameters of "clear vlan
swap" include the port number (1/1-12/1) and swap origin VLAN ID (1-4094) or VLAN name.
Enter them with separating them by a space.
Memo
If a portbase VLAN is set to the port, the port keeps the tag swap setting but it does not
function.
Memo
You cannot set tag swapping specifying the VLAN ID that is the same as the swap
destination VLAN ID, because it will not swap tag frames.
Memo
A VLAN ID that is already used as a swap origin VLAN ID can be overwritten and
changed. For example, when VLAN ID 10 is swapped to 20, you can write 30 over VLAN
ID 10 and set it to 30.
Memo
If you set a tagbase VLAN on a VLAN where VLAN tag swapping is set, the tag swapping
setting will be deleted and a tagbase VLAN is set.
Memo
One line of the GbE-MUX line module can have up to 32 VLANs registered.
Note
The ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155 line module does not accept any
setting of VLAN tag swapping.
Note
A VLAN ID that is already used as a swap destination VLAN ID in a port cannot be

assigned redundantly to another VLAN as the swap destination VLAN ID. For example,
when VLAN ID 10 is swapped to 20, VLAN ID 30 cannot be swapped again to 20. This is
because a redundantly set swap destination VLAN ID will confuse the system about the
destination VLAN ID to which it should swap a frame input from the specified port.
Note
When you set VLANs for the GbE-MUX line module, you cannot set the following swap
origin VLAN ID on multiple lines within one line module.
- VLAN ID used in a tagbase VLAN setting
- Swap origin VLAN ID used in a VLAN tag swap setting
Note
In the same line of the GbE-MUX line module, you cannot set a swap destination VLAN ID
that is the same as the swap destination VLAN ID used in VLAN tag swapping setting.
Note
If you delete a VLAN set for the GbE-MUX line module, it will also delete all MAC learning
information of the line where the VLAN was set.
4-56

Note
When the command mode is safety mode, VLAN tag swapping cannot be set on a line
where a portbase VLAN is set.
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, if you want to set VLAN tag swapping on a line
where a tagbase VLAN is set, you cannot set a swap origin VLAN ID that is the same as
that VLAN ID.
Note
When the command mode is safety mode and when you set VLAN tag swapping on a
VLAN tag swapping line, you cannot overwrite a VLAN ID that is already used as the
swap origin VLAN ID to change it.
Displaying the VLAN tag swapping information

Use the "show vlan swap" command to display the VLAN tag swapping information. The
parameters of the "show vlan swap" include the port number (1/1-12/1) and swap origin VLAN ID
(1-4094) or VLAN name. Enter these parameters in this order separating them by a space.
Commands
set vlan ethertype
Setting of Ethernet type for VLAN tag recognition
show vlan ethertype
Display of Ethernet type information for VLAN tag recognition
set vlan swap
Setting of VLAN tag swapping
clear vlan swap
Clearing of VLAN tag swapping
show vlan swap
Display of VLAN tag swapping information
4-57

Input example
Ethertype of port 1/1 is set to 0x9100, and VLAN ID 10 to 20.
*Switch@1# set vlan ethertype 1/1 0x9100

*Switch@1# show vlan ethertype 1/1
VLAN Ether-Type Table
=====================
Port Ether-Type
---------------1/1
0x9100
*Switch@1# set vlan swap 1/1 10 20
*Switch@1# show vlan swap 1/1
VLAN Swap Table
===============
Port : 1/1 Ether-Type : 0x9100
VID Name (Interior)
VID (Exterior)
--------------------------------------------------10 VLAN10
20
*Switch@1#
4-58
4.1.3 QoS control

QoS control is a function for effective use of the limited bandwidth of a line. The CX2600/200 has
QoS control to perform maximum bandwidth limit, fairness control, priority control, and other
functions.
Bandwidth control 4-62
Priority control
Restrictions
4-82
4-96
Sets the functions of bandwidth control.
Sets the functions of priority control.
Explains about the restrictions.
This figure shows how the QoS control functions are deployed.
Line module
Assignment/conversion
of input priority
(1)
Class mapping
Maximum input bandwidth
(2)
Switch module
Class mapping
Fairness control on the output side
Class mapping
Priority transmission control
(3)
(4)
Line module
Output priority conversion
Class mapping
Maximum output bandwidth
4-59
(5)
(6)

Bandwidth control and priority control can be set at each point of the input port and output port
shown in the figure on the previous page.
(1) Assignment/conversion of input priority

- Profile creation function for priority assignment and conversion
- Profile mapping function for priority assignment and conversion for each input port and VLAN
(2) Maximum input bandwidth control and class mapping function for input ports
- Class mapping function for each input port and VLAN
- Maximum bandwidth limit function for each input port and VLAN, or for each VLAN class
- Priority discard control function for each input port and VLAN class
(3) Fairness control on the output side and class mapping function of the output port
- Class mapping function for each four-profile port
- Bandwidth upper limit control function for each output port
- Fairness control function based on the weight setting for each output port and VLAN
- Priority discard control function for each output port and VLAN class
(4) Priority transmission control function
- Priority transmission control function for each VLAN class
(5) Output priority conversion function
- Profile creation function for priority conversion
- Profile for conversion mapping function for each output port and VLAN
(6) Maximum bandwidth control and class mapping function of the output port
- Class mapping function for each output port and VLAN
- Maximum bandwidth limit function for each output port and VLAN, or for each VLAN classes
- Priority discard control function for each output port and VLAN class
(7) Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode function
- Maximum bandwidth limit operation mode function of each line
For bandwidth control, a framed received from a port is processed in the order of (1), (2), and (3),
then sent for switching processing and processed as (4) in the switching processing, and, after
completion of switching, processed as (5) and (6).
In addition, by setting the mode described in (7), you can enable maximum bandwidth limit function
for the input port only or for the output port only.
4-60

Bandwidth control is performed based on the physical rate.
in parentheses are byte counts.)
(See the figure below.
The numbers
Frame length for bandwidth control on the physical rate basis
Preamble (8)
IFG
(12)
FCS
(4)
Data
(46 - 1500)
TYPE
(2)
VLAN tag
(0, 4, 8)
SA
(6)
DA
(6)
Preamble (8)
IFG
(12)
FCS
(4)
Flow of frames
* Physical rate: A frame length is the sum of the valid frame (preamble to FCS) + 12 (minimum
IFG).
4-61
Bandwidth control
1 Function to change operation of maximum bandwith limitation on I/O port
4-63
Describes the maximum bandwidth limit operation modes on the I/O port
and change of the period of the bandwidth calculation of maximum
bandwidth limit.
2 Maximum bandwidth limit function for input port
4-65
Describes the bandwidth control for each input port and VLAN or for each
VLAN class, as well as the discard function based on the burst tolerance
of each VLAN class.
3 Output side fairness control mode function 4-69
Describes the features of the output side fairness control mode.
4 Fairness control function on the output side of a port
4-71
Describes the output side fairness control over the output traffic volume
for each output port and VLAN, as well as the discard function based on
the burst tolerance of each VLAN class.
5 Maximum bandwidth limit function for output port
4-76
Describes the bandwidth control for each output port and VLAN or for each
VLAN class, as well as the discard function based on the burst tolerance of
each VLAN class.
6 Default burst tolerance collective setting function 4-80

Describes the default burst tolerance collective setting function.
4-62
1 Function to change operation of maximum bandwidth

limit on I/O port
This function changes the operation mode of input and output traffic volume control on each I/O
port and VLAN or for each VLAN class.
Setting the maximum bandwidth limit operation mode

function
For the maximum bandwidth limit operation mode function, specify input, output, or I/O for each
line module. I/O is the default value of the maximum bandwidth limit operation mode function.
To specify the maximum bandwidth limit function only for the input port on the specified line
module, set the maximum bandwidth limit operation mode to input. To specify the maximum
bandwidth limit only for the output port, set the maximum bandwidth limit operation mode to output.
The following table shows the maximum VLANs that can be registered with a port in each
maximum bandwidth limit operation mode.
Maximum bandwidth limit

operation mode
Input port maximum

bandwidth limit
Output port maximum

bandwidth limit
FE port
GbE port
FE port
GbE port
I/O mode
64
1024
64
1024
Input mode
128
2048
128
2048
Output mode
Memo
Output port maximum bandwidth limit cannot be set for the FE/GbE line module whose
maximum bandwidth limit operation mode is set to the input mode. Likewise, Input port
maximum bandwidth limit cannot be set for the FE/GbE line module which is set to the
output mode.
Note
If maximum bandwidth limit on I/O port is set in a line module, its maximum bandwidth
limit operation mode cannot be changed. To change the mode, you need to delete the
setting of maximum bandwidth limit on I/O port.
Note
ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and TDMP155 line modules do not accept this
setting.
4-63

Commands
set qos maximum-mode
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode
show qos maximum-mode
Display of maximum bandwidth limit operation mode
Input example
The maximum bandwidth limit operation mode function is set.
*Switch@1# set qos maximum-mode 1 in

*Switch@1# show qos maximum-mode
Line Maximum Mode Table
=======================
Slot Mode
---------1 in
2 both
3 out
9 --*Switch@1#
4-64
2 Maximum bandwidth limit function for input port

This function limits the input traffic volume for each input port and VLAN or for each VLAN class.
Maximum bandwidth limit for each input port and VLAN or

for each VLAN class
There are four classes in a VLAN. Eight priorities of input frames can be mapped to four classes
in each VLAN. The maximum bandwidth limit function can be set for each input port and VLAN
(collective addition mode) or for each VLAN class (individual addition mode or individual addition
mode (with RED used)). In the collective addition mode, the maximum bandwidth limit function is
implemented by setting the maximum bandwidth for each VLAN and burst tolerance for each class.
In the individual addition mode, the maximum bandwidth limit function is implemented by setting
the maximum bandwidth and burst tolerance for each class. In the individual addition mode (with
RED used), the maximum bandwidth limit function is implemented by setting the maximum
bandwidth, upper burst tolerance, lower burst tolerance, and maximum discard rate for each class.
VLANs whose bandwidth is not explicitly specified can be regarded as one VLAN, for which the
maximum bandwidth limit function can be set. A VLAN whose bandwidth is not explicitly specified
is called a remaining-VLAN, which exists for each input port. If you do not set any other settings
than this remaining-VLAN, the maximum bandwidth limit function works for each input port instead
of each VLAN.
Burst tolerance is the tolerance value of the input burst traffic that exceeds the specified value of
maximum bandwidth limit. This can be set for each input port and VLAN class, and for each
remaining-VLAN class. The value of burst tolerance can be calculated by multiplying the burst
traffic volume (kbps) exceeding the specified value of maximum bandwidth limit by the tolerance
time (sec).
The order of priorities corresponds to the descending order of the burst tolerance values.
Different burst tolerances are set for different classes. Therefore, when input traffic exceeds the
burst tolerance, frames having a class of lower priority are supposed to be discarded before frames
having a class of higher priority.
In the individual addition mode (with RED used), UPC-RED (Usage Parameter Control-Random
Early Detection) is used for maximum bandwidth limit where discard judgment is performed based
on the discard rate line instead of Tail-Drop in response to the flow rate measurement. This
makes it possible to gradually increase the number of frames to be discard before the length of the
queue reaches the limit.
4-65

Memo
The number of VLANs whose bandwidth can be explicitly specified by using this function
varies depending on the setting of the maximum bandwidth limit operation mode
described earlier.
Memo
For class mapping of Class-A to Class-D, see "Class mapping function" described later.
Memo
In a specified input port, if the maximum bandwidth limit is set with VLAN specification at
the initial setting, remaining-VLAN is also set.
Memo
In the individual addition mode (with RED used), the setting of upper burst tolerance
cannot be a value smaller than the lower burst tolerance. Likewise, the lower burst
tolerance cannot be greater than the upper burst tolerance.
Memo
In the individual addition mode (with RED used), when a class for which the lower burst
tolerance is made invalid, discard judgment is performed by Tail-Drop instead of the
discard rate line.
Note
Line modules other than PV line modules can accept settings for individual VLANs, but
the control function works only on the remaining-VLAN. If you set a remaining-VLAN in
the individual addition mode or individual addition mode (with RED used), you can enter
commands but they do not function.
Note
The remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted if maximum bandwidth limit for a VLAN is set on
the specified input port.
Note
When IFG (Inter Frame Gap) is enabled, entering this command disables the IFG function
to the specified input port.
Note
setting.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting or deleting the maximum bandwidth limit for each
input VLAN or setting the priority discard for each input VLAN, Remaining-VLAN can be
specified only by the smaller port number.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting the maximum bandwidth limit for each input VLAN,
the same VLAN ID cannot be registered for the smaller and greater port numbers at the
same time.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting the maximum bandwidth limit for each input VLAN, a
command entry for the greater port number requires previous Remaining-VLAN setting for
the smaller port number.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when deleting the maximum bandwidth limit for each input VLAN,
Remaining-VLAN with the smaller port number cannot be deleted if the configuration with
the greater port number exists. (This also applies to when deleting the smaller port
number side for each port number.)
4-66

Commands
set qos in-rate maximum
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
set qos in-priority maximum
Setting of priority discard function per input VLAN
clear qos in-rate maximum
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input VLAN
CX2600/200
Web
http://
PC
PC
Voice
Home
GateWay
(Router)
Router
Movie
stream
PC
PC
Movie
SV
VID 10
VID 10
Pri=7
Pri=5
W=50Mbps/Th=1000KB
Switch
Fabric
UpStream
Network
ClassB
ClassC
Pri=3
SV
SV
ClassA
W=30Mbps/Th=500KB
W=15Mbps/Th=100KB
Web
SV
VID 10
W=5Mbps/Th=50KB
ClassD
ISP
Voice
Picture
Pri=1
Input bandwidth limit
GW
Picture
PC
- The bandwidth and burst tolerance can be set for each class of a VLAN.
- There are four classes from A to D.
- Each priority can be assigned to a desired class.
Input example
Maximum bandwidth limit and burst tolerances are set in the individual addition mode (with RED
used).
The input example on the next page shows how the following is set in the above configuration.
Class-A: Maximum bandwidth = 50 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 1000 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance = 500 Kbytes, Maximum discard rate 32 (100%)
Class-B: Maximum bandwidth = 30 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 500 Kbytes, Lower burst
Class-C: Maximum bandwidth = 15 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 100 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance (invalid), Maximum discard rate (invalid)
Class-D: Maximum bandwidth = 5 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 50 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance (invalid), Maximum discard rate (invalid)
4-67
*Switch@1# set qos in-rate maximum fe 1/1 vid 10 separate-red class-a 50000
class-b 30000 class-c 15000 class-d 5000
*Switch@1# set qos in-priority maximum fe 1/1 vid 10 separate-red class-a 1000
500 32 class-b 500 250 16 class-c 100 disable class-d 50 disable
*Switch@1# show qos in-rate maximum 1/1
QoS Input Port Maximum Table
============================
Port Registered-VID Available-VID
----------------------------------1/1
2
62
QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table
============================
Port : 1/1
VID : 10
Mode : separate-RED
===================
Rate
MaximumMinimumPriority
(Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte) Probability
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : ----------Class-A : 6,7
50000
1000
500
32(100%)
Class-B : 4,5
30000
500
250
16(50%)
Class-C : 0,3
15000
100
disabled
disabled
Class-D : 1,2
5000
50
disabled
disabled
No Entry : none
--------Port : 1/1
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
Rate
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --100000
------Class-A : 6,7
--127
----Class-B : 4,5
--64
----Class-C : 0,3
--32
----Class-D : 1,2
--16
----No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
4-68
3 Output side fairness control mode function

Use this function to set on this device whether to enable the fairness control function on the output
side over output traffic volume for each output port and VLAN.
Setting the output side fairness control mode

The output side fairness control mode can be either disable or enable. Because the default mode
is the disable mode, you need to change this mode if you want to use the output side fairness
control function for each output port and VLAN.
(1) Select the disable mode when you do not use the output side fairness control function.
(2) Select the enable mode when you want to use the output side fairness control function. In
this mode, you cannot expand the bandwidth by link aggregation, but you can establish
redundant configuration.
Memo
Setting the output fairness control mode to disable initializes the entire configuration of 4
the output fairness control function on the output port.
Note
on all ports.
Note
When a non-FE line module is installed in slot number 1 to 2, it cannot be operated with
the output side fairness control mode enabled. To operate a non-FE line module in the
enabled mode, you need to install and operate it in slot number 3 to 10.
Commands
set qos out-fairness-mode
Setting of output-side fairness control mode function
show qos out-fairness-mode Display of output-side fairness control mode function
4-69

Input example
The output side fairness control mode is set.
*Switch@1# set qos out-fairness-mode enable

*Switch@1# show qos out-fairness-mode
QoS Out Fairness Mode Table
===========================
Port Status
-------------all enabled
*Switch@1#
4-70
4 Fairness control function on the output side of an

output port
This function controls fairness on the output side over the traffic volume output for each output port
and VLAN.
Output side fairness control function for each output port

and VLAN
There are four classes in a device. Eight priorities of output frames can be mapped to four
classes in each device and a weight can be set for each output port and VLAN (collective addition
mode). To implement the priority discard control function, set the output side fairness control
function for each VLAN and burst tolerance to each class. VLANs whose bandwidth is not
explicitly specified can be collectively regarded as one VLAN, for which the weight can be set. A
VLAN whose weight is not explicitly specified is called a remaining-VLAN, which exists for each
output port.
For the purpose of bandwidth adjustment, frames exceeding burst tolerance are discarded if more
frames are input than the specified weight when there is no bandwidth, which is allocated
according to the weight, remaining on the output port. Burst tolerance is a value indicating the
tolerable volume of burst traffic, which can be set for each output port and VLAN class and for
each remaining-VLAN class.
The burst tolerance can be calculated by multiplying the burst traffic volume (kbps) exceeding the
specified value of maximum bandwidth limit by the tolerance time (sec).
Different burst tolerances are set for different classes. Therefore, when input traffic exceeds the
Memo
To enable the fairness control function on the output side for each output port and VLAN,
you need to set the output side fairness control mode to the enable mode.
Memo
The maximum number of VLANs whose bandwidth can be explicitly indicated by this
function is 2047 for an ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155 port and 255 for
an FE port.
Memo
Weights can be set at the rate of 25 kbps per one weight.
Note
When you set a weight by the rate, the total sum of the rates set on a port must not
exceed the bandwidth of the physical port.
4-71

Note
Input frames from ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155 line modules are out of fairness
control target on the output side.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting the weight/rate for the fairness control function of the
output side of an output port, the same VLAN ID cannot be registered for the smaller and
greater port numbers at the same time.
Setting the upper limit of the bandwidth of an output port

Sets the upper limit of the bandwidth of an output port. Output from the output port shall be
limited to this value. The default value is the physical bandwidth of the output port.
Memo
Memo
When the output side fairness control function is enabled with the default settings,
remaining-VLAN is already registered. Remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted.
Note
Even if the link aggregation function is used together, the upper limit of the bandwidth of
an output port cannot exceed the physical bandwidth of the output port.
Note
When link aggregation is combined, bandwidth control is performed for each output port
using link aggregation as the redundancy function. Bandwidth control for each output
port functions for each link aggregation group. It works based on the settings of the port
of the smallest number of the smallest-number slot in each link aggregation group.
Note
The total output bandwidth in each link aggregation group will not exceed the upper limit
of the bandwidth of each output port that is set on the smallest-number port of the
smallest-number slot.
Note
When the port link status is 10 Mbps and the set upper limit is over 10 Mbps, the upper
limit is reset to 10 Mbps with the setting remains the same in configuration. When
10Mbps link down occurs, the configuration returns to the state as before.
Note
When you set 0 as a weight, no output is made on the VLAN of the output port.
4-72

Commands
set qos out-weight fairness
Setting of output-side fairness control function weight of

output port
set qos out-weight rate
Setting of output-side fairness control function rate of output

port
set qos out-priority fairness
Setting of priority discard function of output-side fairness

control function of output port
set qos out-rate fairness

maximum-port
Setting of upper threshold of output-side fairness control

function of output port
clear qos out-weight fairness
Clearing of output-side fairness control function of output

port
show qos out-weight fairness
Display of output-side fairness control function of output

port
CX2600/200
Switch Fabric
http://
Web
PC
PC
Home
GateWay
(Router)
VID 10
SV
SV
SV
SV
Output side
fairness control
Fairness
VID 10
stream
Movie
PC
PC
Home
GateWay
(Router)
W=8,Th=127KB,60KB
VID 20
UpStream
Network
VID 20
W=3,Th=127KB,64KB
ISP
Voice
GW
- Fairness control on the output side can be set for each VLAN.
-The surplus bandwidth is allocated to each VLAN by the specified
proportion.
- A bandwidth can be collectively set for VIDs that are not set.
4-73

Input example (1/2)
The proportions of output ports and the upper limit of the bandwidth are set.
The input example below shows how the following is set in the above configuration.
Upper limit of the output bandwidth = 60 Mbps
VID-10: Weight = 8
Class-A: Burst tolerance = 127 Kbytes
Class-B: Burst tolerance = 60 Kbytes
Class-C: Burst tolerance = 32 Kbytes
Class-D: Burst tolerance = 10 Kbytes
VID-20: Weight = 3
Class-A: Burst tolerance = 127 Kbytes
Class-B: Burst tolerance = 64 Kbytes
Class-C: Burst tolerance = 32 Kbytes
Class-D: Burst tolerance = 16 Kbytes
*Switch@1# set qos out-weight fairness fe 1/1 vid 10 8

*Switch@1# set qos out-weight rate fe 1/1 vid 20 75
*Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness fe 1/1 vid 10 class-a 127 class-b 60
class-c 32 class-d 10
*Switch@1# set qos out-priority fairness fe 1/1 vid 20 class-a 127 class-b 64
class-c 32 class-d 16
*Switch@1# set qos out-rate fairness maximum-port fe 1/1 60000
*Switch@1# show qos out-weight fairness 1/1
QoS Output Port Fairness Table
==============================
Maximum- Real-Maximum- Total-25KbpsRegistered Available
Port Slot Rate(Kbps) Rate(Kbps)
based-Rate(Kbps) -VID
-VID
--------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 --60000
60000
300
3
253
QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table
==============================
Port
: 1/1
VID
: 10
Priority Profile : 1
=========================
4-74

Input example (2/2)
25Kbps-based- RealPriority
Weight
Rate(Kbps)
Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --8
200
40000.00
--Class-A : 6,7
------127
Class-B : 4,5
------60
Class-C : 0,3
------32
Class-D : 1,2
------10
No Entry : none
--------Port
: 1/1
VID
: 20
=========================
Weight
Rate(Kbps)
Rate(Kbps)
Burst(KByte)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --3
75
15000.00
--Class-A
: 6,7
------127
Class-B
: 4,5
------64
Class-C
: 0,3
------32
Class-D
: 1,2
------16
No Entry : none
---
---
---
---
Port
: 1/1
VID
: remain
=========================
Weight
Rate(Kbps)
Rate(Kbps) Burst(KByte)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --1
25
5000.00
--Class-A : 6,7
------127
Class-B : 4,5
------64
Class-C : 0,3
------32
Class-D : 1,2
------16
No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
Memo
Real-Rates displayed in the QoS Output VLAN Fairness Table are calculated using the
rate value per one weight based on the Real-Maximum-Rate of the QoS Output Port
Fairness Table. If the value does not reach the second decimal place, "0.01(less)" is
displayed, which indicates the value is smaller than 0.01.
4-75
5 Maximum bandwidth limit function for output port

This function limits the input traffic volume for each output port and VLAN or for each VLAN class.
Maximum bandwidth limit for each output port and VLAN or

for each VLAN class
There are four classes in a VLAN. Eight priorities of output frames can be mapped to four classes
in each VLAN. The maximum bandwidth limit function can be set for each output port and VLAN
(collective addition mode) or for each VLAN class (individual addition mode or individual addition
mode (with RED used)). In the collective addition mode, the maximum bandwidth limit function is
implemented by setting the maximum bandwidth for each VLAN and burst tolerance for each class.
In the individual addition mode, the maximum bandwidth limit function is implemented by setting
the maximum bandwidth and burst tolerance for each class. In the individual addition mode (with
RED used), the maximum bandwidth limit function is implemented by setting the maximum
bandwidth, upper burst tolerance, lower burst tolerance, and maximum discard rate for each class.
VLANs whose bandwidth is not explicitly specified can be collectively regarded as one VLAN, for
which the maximum bandwidth limit function can be set. A VLAN whose bandwidth is not
explicitly specified is called a remaining-VLAN, which exists for each output port.
If you do not set any other settings than this remaining-VLAN, the maximum bandwidth limit
function works for each output port instead of each VLAN.
Burst tolerance is the tolerance value of the output burst traffic that exceeds the specified value of
maximum bandwidth limit. This can be set for each output port and VLAN class, and for each
remaining-VLAN class. The burst tolerance can be calculated by multiplying the burst traffic
volume (kbps) exceeding the specified value of maximum bandwidth limit by the tolerance time
(sec).
Different burst tolerances are set for different classes. Therefore, when output traffic exceeds the
In the individual addition mode (with RED used), UPC-RED (Usage Parameter Control-Random
Early Detection) is used for maximum bandwidth limit where discard judgment is performed based
on the discard rate line instead of Tail-Drop in response to the flow rate measurement. This
makes it possible to gradually increase the number of frames to be discard before the length of the
queue reaches the limit.
4-76

Memo
The number of VLANs whose bandwidth can be explicitly specified by using this function
varies depending on the settings of the maximum bandwidth limit operation mode
described earlier.
Memo
Memo
In a specified output port, if the maximum bandwidth limit is set with VLAN specification at
the initial setting, remaining-VLAN is also set.
Memo
In the individual addition mode (with RED used), the setting of upper burst tolerance
cannot be a value smaller than the lower burst tolerance. Likewise, the lower burst
tolerance cannot be greater than the upper burst tolerance.
Memo
In the individual addition mode (with RED used), when a class for which the lower burst
tolerance is made invalid, discard judgment is performed by Tail-Drop instead of the
discard rate line.
Note
Line modules other than PV line modules can accept settings for each VLAN, but the
control function works only on the remaining-VLAN. If you set a remaining-VLAN in the
individual addition mode or individual addition mode (with RED used), you can enter
commands but they do not function.
Note
The remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted if maximum bandwidth limit for a VLAN is set on
the specified output port.
Note
to the specified output port.
Note
setting.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting or deleting the maximum bandwidth limit for each
output VLAN or setting the priority discard for each output VLAN, Remaining-VLAN can be
specified only by the smaller port number.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting the maximum bandwidth limit for each output VLAN,
the same VLAN ID cannot be registered for the smaller and greater port numbers at the
same time.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting the maximum bandwidth limit for each output VLAN,
a command entry for the greater port number requires previous Remaining-VLAN setting
for the smaller port number.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when deleting the maximum bandwidth limit for each output VLAN,
Remaining-VLAN with the smaller port number cannot be deleted if the configuration with
the greater port number exists. (This also applies to when deleting the smaller port
number side for each port number.)
4-77

Commands
set qos out-rate maximum
Setting of maximum bandwidth limit function per output

VLAN
set qos out-priority maximum
Setting of priority discard function per output VLAN
clear qos out-rate maximum
Clearing of maximum bandwidth limit function per output

VLAN
show qos out-rate maximum
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per output

VLAN
CX2600/200
Web
http://
Movie
stream
VID 10
PC
PC
Home
GateWay
(Router)
Switch Fabric
VID 10
Voice
Pri=7
Movie
Pri=5
Web
Picture
Pri=
Pri=
SV
SV
SV
W=50Mbps/Th=100KB
ClassA
W=30Mbps/Th=64KB
ClassB
UpStream
ClassC
Network
W=15Mbps/Th=30KB
PC
PC
Voice
SV
VID 10
W=5Mbps/Th=16KB
ClassD
Output bandwidth limit
ISP
GW
Picture
PC
- The bandwidth and burst tolerance can be set for each class in a VLAN.
- There are four classes from A to D.
- Each priority can be assigned to a different class.
Input example
Maximum bandwidth limit and burst tolerances are set in the individual addition mode (with RED
used).
The input example below shows how the following is set in the above configuration.
Class-A: Maximum bandwidth = 50 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 100 Kbytes, Lower burst
Class-B: Maximum bandwidth = 30 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 64 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance = 25 Kbytes, maximum discard rate 16 (50%)
Class-C: Maximum bandwidth = 15 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 30 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance (invalid), maximum discard rate (invalid)
Class-D: Maximum bandwidth = 5 Mbps, Upper burst tolerance = 16 Kbytes, Lower burst
tolerance (invalid), maximum discard rate (invalid)
4-78
*Switch@1# set qos out-rate maximum fe 1/1 vid 10 separate-red class-a 50000
class-b 30000 class-c 15000 class-d 5000
*Switch@1# set qos out-priority maximum fe 1/1 vid 10 separate-red class-a
10050 32 class-b 64 25 16 class-c 30 disable class-d 16 disable
*Switch@1# show qos out-rate maximum 1/1
QoS Output Port Maximum Table
=============================
----------------------------------1/1
2
62
QoS Output VLAN Maximum Table
=============================
Port : 1/1
VID : 10
Mode : separate-RED
===================
Rate
(Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte)
Probability
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : ----------Class-A : 6,7
50000
100
50
32(100%)
Class-B : 4,5
30000
64
25
16(50%)
Class-C : 0,3
15000
30
disabled
disabled
Class-D : 1,2
5000
16
disabled
disabled
No Entry : none
--------Port : 1/1
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --100000
------Class-A : 6,7
--127
----Class-B : 4,5
--64
----Class-C : 0,3
--32
----Class-D : 1,2
--16
----No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
4-79
6 Default burst tolerance collective setting function

This function collectively sets the default burst tolerance.
Collective setting of default burst tolerance

Changes the default burst tolerance value. If any burst tolerance values are registered when this
change is made, they are collectively changed to the new value.
This change is applicable to burst tolerance values of the maximum bandwidth limit function for the
input port (for collective addition or individual addition), maximum bandwidth limit function for an
output port (for collective addition or individual addition), fairness control function on the output side
of an output port, maximum bandwidth limit function for the input port (with RED used), and
maximum bandwidth limit function for an output port (with RED used).
Commands
set qos initial-priority
Setting of default burst tolerance
show qos initial-priority
Display of default burst tolerance
Memo
If any registered burst tolerance settings exist, they are collectively changed to the default
value.
Memo
For the maximum bandwidth limit function for an I/O port (with RED used), the setting of
upper burst tolerance cannot be a value smaller than the lower burst tolerance.
Likewise, the lower burst tolerance cannot be greater than the upper burst tolerance.
Memo
When the command mode is safety mode, you will be asked if you really want to execute
the command after entering it.
Note
ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and TDMP155 line modules can accept this setting,
but it is effective only for the fairness control function on the output side of an output port.
Input example (1/2)

*Switch@1# set qos initial-priority in-maximum-red fe class-a 96 disable
class-b 64 32 10 class-c 3000 20 32 class-d 2000 10 1
*Switch@1# show qos initial-priority
QoS Default Burst Table
=======================
4-80

Input example (1/2)
In-Maximum In-Fairness Out-Fairness Out-Maximum
(KByte)
(KByte)
(KByte)
(KByte)
----------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
16
127
127
Class-B :
64
32
64
64
Class-C :
32
48
32
32
Class-D :
16
64
16
16
QoS Initial Burst(RED) Table
============================
In-Maximum(FE)
==============
Maximum-Burst(KByte) Minimum-Burst(KByte) Probability
----------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
96
disabled
disabled
Class-B :
64
32
10(31.25%)
Class-C :
3000
20
32(100%)
Class-D :
2000
10
1(3.125%)
In-Maximum(GbE)
===============
----------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
disabled
disabled
Class-B :
64
disabled
disabled
Class-C :
32
16
32(100%)
Class-D :
16
8
32(100%)
Out-Maximum(FE)
===============
----------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
127
32
1(3.125%)
Class-B :
64
16
1(3.125%)
Class-C :
32
8
1(3.125%)
Class-D :
16
4
1(3.125%)
Out-Maximum(GbE)
================
----------------------------------------------------------------Class-A :
30000
29999
16(50%)
Class-B :
30000
29999
16(50%)
Class-C :
30000
29999
4(12.5%)
Class-D :
30000
29999
4(12.5%)
*Switch@1#
4-81
Priority Control
1 Class mapping function
4-83
Explains mapping of priorities to classes.
2 Priority assignment/change function
4-90
Explains assignment and change of priorities.
3 Priority mapping default collective setting function
4-94
Explains assignment and change of priorities.
4-82
1 Class mapping function

Decides the priority value in the VLAN tag and class mapping used for various QoS control.
Bandwidth control and priority transmission control described earlier are performed at the
applicable points in accordance with the priority value in the VLAN tag and class mapping specified
here.
Class mapping to be used for QoS control at each point is different, and it can be set in the units as
described below.
Maximum bandwidth control for an input port: Class mapping for each input port and VLAN
Maximum bandwidth control for an output port: Class mapping for each output port and VLAN
Fairness control function on the output side of an output port: Class mapping of four profiles to
individual ports
The following shows the default assignment of priorities and class mapping.
Priority
Class mapping
Input maximum bandwidth control class mapping

Class mapping of input maximum bandwidth control is effective for class mapping for each input
port and VLAN. Class mapping for each input port and VLAN allows the user to specify classes,
as well as priorities, for broadcast frames and multicast frames. This is useful when you want to
manage bandwidths separately for unicast frames, broadcast frames, and multicast frames without
relation to the priority values. Broadcast frames and multicast frames have their own priority
values, but when a class for broadcast or multicast is set, they will be under bandwidth control of
the class for broadcast or multicast.
Memo
The priority belonging to no entry will be discarded.
Note
Multiple classes cannot be mapped as classes for broadcast and multicast.

classes do not overlap, such mapping is possible in each class.)
Note
In a VLAN where maximum bandwidth control is performed in the collective addition

mode, mapping of broadcast or multicast is supported.
Note
Priorities cannot be redundantly specified.
Note
You cannot specify "none" for all the classes.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting priority mapping for each input VLAN,
Remaining-VLAN can be specified only by the smaller port number.
4-83
(If the

Suppose that priority mapping is changed as shown in the input example.
Priority
Class mapping
Priority
Broadcast
Multicast
Class mapping
Commands
set qos in-class-map maximum
Setting of priority mapping function per input VLAN
show qos in-rate maximum
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per input

VLAN
Input example
*Switch@1# set qos in-class-map maximum fe 1/1 1 separate class-a 6,7 class-b
3-5 class-c 0-2 class-d bc+mc
*Switch@1# show qos in-rate maximum 1/1
QoS Input Port Maximum Table
============================
----------------------------------1/1
2
62
QoS Input VLAN Maximum Table
============================
Port : 1/1
VID : 1
Mode : separate
===============
Rate
(Kbps) Burst(KByte) Burst(KByte)
Probability
------------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : ----------Class-A : 6,7
50000
100
----Class-B : 3,4,5
30000
64
----Class-C : 0,1,2
15000
30
----Class-D : bc+mc
5000
16
----No Entry : none
---------
4-84
Port : 1/1
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
Rate
----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --100000
------Class-A : 6,7
--127
----Class-B : 4,5
--64
----Class-C : 0,3
--32
----Class-D : 1,2
--16
----No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
Output maximum bandwidth control class mapping

Class mapping of output maximum bandwidth control is effective for class mapping for each output
port and VLAN. Class mapping for each output port and VLAN allows the user to specify classes,
as well as priorities, for broadcast frames and multicast frames. This is useful when you want to
manage bandwidths separately for unicast frames, broadcast frames, and multicast frames without
relation to the priority values. Broadcast frames and multicast frames have their own priority
values, but when a class for broadcast/multicast is set, they will be under bandwidth control of the
class for broadcast/multicast.
Memo
Note
Multiple classes cannot be mapped as classes for broadcast and multicast.

classes do not overlap, such mapping is possible in each class.)
Note
In a VLAN where maximum bandwidth control is performed in the collective addition

mode, mapping of broadcast or multicast is supported.
Note
Note
Note
Woth EtherPS enabled, when setting priority mapping for each output VLAN,
Remaining-VLAN can be specified only by the smaller port number.
4-85
(If the

Priority
Class mapping
Priority
Broadcast
Multicast
Class mapping
Commands
set qos out-class-map maximum
Setting of priority mapping function per output VLAN
show qos out-rate maximum
Display of maximum bandwidth limit function per output

VLAN
Input example
*Switch@1# set qos out-class-map maximum fe 1/1 vid 1 separate class-a 6,7
class-b 3-5 class-c 0-2 class-d bc+mc
*Switch@1# show qos out-rate maximum 1/1
QoS Output Port Maximum Table
=============================
----------------------------------1/1
2
62
QoS Output VLAN Maximum Table
=============================
Port : 1/1
VID : 1
Mode : separate
===================
Rate
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : ----------Class-A : 6,7
50000
100
----Class-B : 3,4,5
30000
64
----Class-C : 0,1,2
15000
30
----Class-D : bc+mc
5000
16
----No Entry : none
---------
4-86
Port : 1/1
VID : remain
Mode : normal
===================
Rate
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Class-All : --100000
------Class-A : 6,7
--127
----Class-B : 4,5
--64
----Class-C : 0,3
--32
----Class-D : 1,2
--16
----No Entry : none
--------*Switch@1#
Class mapping by four profile ports

Class mapping by four profile ports is effective when the fairness control function on the output
side of an output port is enabled. Up to four profiles can be created. For each port, you can
specify a profile.
Memo

However, broadcast frames, multicast frames, and unknown unicast frames will not be
discarded even if the priority belongs to no entry.
Memo
When output side fairness control is in the disable mode, class mapping does not work.
Note
Class mapping is also applicable to frames terminated at this device. Note that if no
class is specified (none), it affects the function and operation. If the aggregation mode of
the link aggregation function is dot3ad/passive, LACP frames are controlled with priority 7.
If the RSTP or STP function is enabled, BPDU frame is controlled with priority 7. Frames
of ping, telnet, or SNMP with in-band communication used are controlled with priority 0.
Note
Note
4-87

Priority
Class mapping
None
None
Commands
set qos class-map profile
Creating of priority mapping profile
show qos class-map profile
Display of priority mapping profile
Input example
*Switch@1# set qos class-map profile 1 class-a 6,7 class-b 4,5 class-c
0,3 class-d none
*Switch@1# show qos class-map profile 1
QoS Class Mapping Profile Table
===============================
Profile No. : 1
===============
Priority
-------------------------Class-A : 6,7
Class-B : 4,5
Class-C : 0,3
Class-D : none
No Entry : 1,2
*Switch@2# set qos class-map fe 1/1 1
*Switch@2# show qos class-map
QoS Priority Mapping Table
==========================
Port Slot Profile No.
-------------------------------1/1 --1
1/2 --1
1/3 --1
1/4 --1
1/5 --1
1/6 --1
1/7 --1
1/8 --1
*Switch@1#
4-88
Priority transmission control function of L2SW

Send frames are sorted into four send queues according to the priorities assigned to the VLAN
tags based on the following mapping information, and sent from the output port in the descending
order of the send queue classes.
Priority
Class mapping
Memo
Ping and other frames intended for devices, BDPU, and LACP PDU are excluded from
QoS control.
Note
Class mapping of L2SW cannot be changed by a command.
4-89
2 Priority assignment/change function

This function, on an input port, assigns or changes a priority value in a VLAN tagbase on the
information in the frame.
On a port where a portbase VLAN is set, a priority value of a VLAN tag to be assigned to a
received frame can be specified. On a port where a tagbase VLAN is set, the priority value of a
VLAN tag can be changed for each input port and VLAN. In either case, you need to create
profiles to be used as the information for this assignment or change and map them to each VLAN
to implement this function.
On an output port, this function only changes the priority value in the frame header.
of priority values on an output port are used only within the device.
The changes
Profile creation function for priority assignment/change

The profile creation function for priority assignment/change can create up to 128 profiles on one
device. One profile can have 32 items (31 item + other) registered. When you create a profile,
set the profile number and index (when omitted, the smallest number is given), conditions of
assignment/change, and priority value (0 to 7) to be assigned or changed.
The conditions of assignment/change can be selected out of the following.
Priority in a VLAN tag: priority value of inner/outer tag: 0 - 7 or untag
ToS in the IP header of an IPv4 packet or TC in the IP header of an IPv6 packet:
IP Precedence ToS value: 0 - 7
DSCP ToS value: 0 - 63
Fullbit ToS value: 0 - 255
Other than the above (corresponds to "other")
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, mapped profiles cannot be deleted.
4-90
Priority assignment/change profile mapping function

For the profile mapping function for priority assignment/change, specify which profile to use for
each VLAN.
Memo
This function searches for matching information in the ascending order of indexes and
assigns or changes a priority when it founds that the information in the input frame
matches the set information. For "other", priority assignment/change is performed when
the information of any other index does not match.
Memo
In the first creation of a profile, "other" is also set.
Memo
This function refers to a priority in a VLAN tag when the TPID (tag protocol ID) is 0x8100
for inner tag and when the TPID is the same as the TPID set on the port. If any other
value is set as the TPID, it assumes "untag".
Memo
The point in a frame to be referred to for Ethernet type varies depending on the tag
assignment status. When the TPID (tag protocol ID) of the outer tag is different from the
TPID set on the port, the field is referred to. When the TPID of the inner tag is not
0x8100, the field is referred to. When the TPID of the inner tag is 0x8100, the next field
is referred to.
Memo
The number of settings for each VLAN is limited to 20000 each on an input port and
output port of one device.
Memo
If you specify an unregistered profile number and perform mapping, all frames will pass
through.
Note
This function can be set in a non-PV line module, but it will not function.
output side does not support ATM155.
Note
Only one profile can be registered on one VLAN.

(If the same index is specified, the profile will be overwritten.)
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, unregistered profiles cannot be mapped.
Note
With EtherPS enabled, when setting input/output CoS priority mapping, the same VLAN
ID cannot be registered for the smaller and greater port numbers at the same time.
(However, it is allowed to register the same VLAN ID for input CoS priority mapping
setting and output CoS priority mapping setting.)
4-91
In addition, the

Commands
set qos cos-map profile
Creating of CoS profile
set qos in-port cos-map
Setting of input CoS priority mapping
set qos out-port cos-map
Setting of output CoS priority mapping
clear qos cos-map profile
Clearing of CoS profile
clear qos in-port cos-map
Clearing of input CoS priority mapping
clear qos out-port cos-map
Clearing of output CoS priority mapping
show qos cos-map profile
Display of CoS profile
show qos in-port cos-map
Display of input CoS priority mapping
show qos out-port cos-map
Display of output CoS priority mapping
4-92

Input example
*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 1 1 cos inner 3 4
*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 1 2 cos outer untag 5
*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 2 1 v4tos ip-precedence 0 1
*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 2 2 v4tos dscp 2 3
*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 2 3 v6tc fullbit 4 5
*Switch@1# set qos cos-map profile 1 other 1
*Switch@1# show qos cos-map profile
CoS Profile Table
=================
Profile No. : 1
=================
Before
Convert
Index Field Type Kind
Data
Data
-----------------------------------------------1
cos
inner
3
4
2
cos
outer
untag
5
Other ------1
Profile No. : 2
=================
Before
Convert
Index Field Type Kind
Data
Data
-------------------------------------------------1 v4tos
ip-precedence
0
1
2 v4tos
dscp
2
3
3 v6tc
fullbit
4
5
Other ------0
*Switch@1# set qos in-port cos-map fe 1/1 10 1
*Switch@1# set qos out-port cos-map fe 1/1 20 2
*Switch@1# show qos in-port cos-map
Input CoS Priority Mapping Table
================================
Port VID Profile
------------------1/1
10
1
*Switch@1# show qos out-port cos-map
Output CoS Priority Mapping Table
=================================
Port VID Profile
------------------1/1
20
2
*Switch@1#
4-93
3 Priority mapping default collective setting function

This function collectively sets the default priority mapping.
Collective setting of default priority mapping

Changes the default priority mapping values. If any priority mapping settings are registered when
this change is made, they will be collectively changed to the new value.
This change is applicable to priority mapping for the maximum bandwidth limit function for the input
port and maximum bandwidth limit function for an output port.
Memo
If any priority mapping settings are registered, they will be collectively changed to the new
value that is set as the default.
Memo
When the command mode is safety mode, you will be asked if you really want to execute
the command after entering it.
Note
The same priority value as that of another class cannot be set.
Note
ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and TDMP155 line modules can accept this setting,
but they do not work.
Commands
set qos initial-class-map
Setting of default priority mapping
show qos initial-class-map
Display of default priority mapping
4-94

Input example
*Switch@1# set qos initial-class-map in-fairness class-a 0-1 class-b
2-3 class-c 4-5 class-d 6-7
*Switch@1# show qos initial-class-map
QoS Default Class Mapping Table
===============================
In-Maximum
In-Fairness
Out-Maximum
(Priority)
(Priority)
(Priority)
---------------------------------------------------Class-A : 6,7
0,1
6,7
Class-B : 4,5
2,3
4,5
Class-C : 0,3
4,5
0,3
Class-D : 1,2
6,7
1,2
No Entry : none
--none
*Switch@1#
4-95
Restrictions
About output side fairness control function on output port
This function works for each link aggregation group, based on the settings of the fairness control
function on the output side of the smallest-number port of the smallest-number slot within each
link aggregation group.
The total output from each link aggregation group will not exceed the upper limit of the
bandwidth of each output port that is set on the smallest-number port of the smallest-number
slot.
This function deals with such frames as broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast frames that
are output to multiple output ports according to the specified limit or weight of each output port
and VLAN. If any of the specified value is exceeded, this function will discard the frame
without transferring it to any port.
For example, if a frame is input, which shall be transferred to multiple output ports as described
above, bandwidth control is performed based on the smallest value of maximum bandwidth limit
among the transfer destination output ports. Therefore, the frame is output at the lowest rate
from all the output ports.
Fairness control function is performed according to the learning information for bandwidth
calculation which is different from that for frame transfer. Therefore, if an entry in the learning
information for frame transfer is deleted, the fairness control function may give an incorrect
result. Such an error may be triggered by clearing of information other than clearing of all ports
in the MAC learning information, deletion of MAC address by the aging function of the L2SW,
and link down of the line.
If GbE line module is operated in slot number 1 to 2 when output side fairness control mode
function is enabled, the output side fairness control is up to 100 Mbps. For the output side
fairness control more than 100 Mbps, operate GbE line module in slot number 3 to 10.
When a non-FE line module is installed in slot number 1 to 2, it cannot be operated with the
output side fairness control mode enabled. To operate a non-FE line module in the enabled
mode, you need to install and operate it in slot number 3 to 10.
4-96

About the bandwidth control function for each output port
If this function is set together with link aggregation, it performs bandwidth control for each output
port having link aggregation as the redundant function.
About discarding of frames by a burst traffic model

Frames may be discarded, because burst traffic caused by input bandwidth limit, input fairness
control, or output fairness control may momentarily make the traffic volume exceed the physical
bandwidth.
Memo
When an output port may not be able to use the physical bandwidth fully due to some
reason like half-duplex communication, the result may not be correct.
4-97
4.1.4 Link aggregation

The CX2600/200 supports the link aggregation function that collects up multiple Fast Ether ports or
Gigabit Ether ports to make a single logical transmission path between other devices. This
function can make a group port assume a role of redundancy. This unit supports two functions
including the simple aggregation function and IEEE802.3ad aggregation function.
Simple aggregation
Simple aggregation is NECs unique link aggregation function, which implements link aggregation
without recourse to protocol communication between devices.
Up to eight ports per one group and up to 32 groups can be set. All ports for link aggregation
need to be assigned with the same VLAN ID and same speed. Set this function as follows:
Specifying aggregation groups
4-100
Specifies the aggregation mode.
Specifying port priorities 4-108

Specifies the priority port.
Or,

4-100
Specifies the aggregation mode.
Note
ATM155, ATMP, ATMP155, TDMP, and TDMP155 line modules do not accept this
setting.
Note
The function cannot be set for ports for which EtherPS is enabled.
4-98
IEEE802.3ad aggregation
This unit allows the user to set dynamic link aggregation based on IEEE802.3ad by communicating
with the other device using control frames of LACP. This function sets link aggregation according
to the settings on the other device. For this purpose, it is necessary that the other device
complies with IEEE802.3ad.
The mode of link aggregation with LACP used can be either dot3ad or passive.
and 32 groups can be set.
Up to eight ports
Set IEEE802.3ad aggregation as follows:
Specifying system priorities 4-107

Specifies the priority level of the switch.
4-100
Sets aggregation.
Or,
Specifying system priorities 4-107
Specifies the priority level of the

switch.

4-100
Sets aggregation.
Note
On a line where flow control is enabled or set to auto-negotiation, IEEE802.3ad

aggregation does not work.
Note
On a port with MTU set, which is shorter than the LACP frame length (128 bytes),
IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work.
Note
IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work for ATM155, ATMP, ATMP155, TDMP, and
Note
For LACP without a VLAN tag, MAC learning is performed with VLAN ID 1.
Note
IEEE802.3ad aggregation does not work for ports for which EtherPS is enabled.
4-99
Setting the configuration

The following explains how to set link aggregation and how the functions work according to the
settings. For details on commands, see "Command Reference".

Specifies the ports required for setting link aggregation. At the same time, specify the number of
operation ports, and thus you can set the same number of ports from the highest-priority port to
operation ports and the remaining ports to standby ports that do not perform communication. If
the ports have the same priority, the operation ports are selected starting from the smallest-number
port of the smallest-number line module. If a failure occurs on an operation port, the standby port
having the highest priority is automatically selected and switched to an operation port to replace
the failed port.
If you do not set the number of operation ports, all group port numbers are used as operation ports.
In this case, if a failure occurs on a port, it is not replaced by another port.
Aggregation function can be set across line modules. Up to 32 groups and up to eight ports can
be set for this function. However, FastEther ports and GigabitEther ports cannot be mixed in a
same group.
For line connection with the other device that performs aggregation, connect the device port to port
in the order of the port priority of the other device, if the priorities are set, or in the ascending order
of the port numbers, if no port priority is set. The numbers of operation ports must be the same
on the both devices.
When there are six group ports and four of them are operation ports, if a failure occurs on an
operation port, port switching is performed as shown below. Upon recovery, the operation ports
before failure will operate again.
Group ports
Failure
Standby ports
Operation ports
Standby ports
Failed port
Operation ports
If the number of the group ports is the same as the number of the operation ports, all group ports
function as operation ports, and this disables switching if a failure occurs.
When you specify aggregation groups, specify the distribution function of the aggregation function
at the same time.
4-100
Distribution methods
This unit supports the following three distribution methods.
(1) Source MAC address distribution method (src-mac)
(2) Destination MAC address distribution method (dst-mac)
(3) Source MAC address XOR destination MAC address distribution method (both-mac)
Distribution algorithm
When a frame is output from the device, if link aggregation is set on the output destination, it can
be decided which port in the group is used for output by the distribution method.
First, the individual ports selected as operation ports in a group are given a number from 1 to 8
cyclically, which is called LLB (Link Aggregation Load Balancing), starting from the port having the
smallest number. Then distribution algorithm is used to decide the LLB number of the port to
which the frame should be sent.
(The LLB to which a frame is transferred is called destination LLB.)
In the distribution methods above, the distribution LLB is selected as the number that is 1 plus the
value after taking the XOR value of the following values (1) to (4) and 1.
Destination LLB = { (1) XOR (2) XOR (3) XOR (4) XOR (5) } + 1
(1) In the distribution methods of (1) and (2), the value after taking the XOR value of the following
3-bit values of each address; in the distribution method of (3), the value after taking the XOR
value of the following 3-bit values of both addresses.
Lower 3 bits (bit0-2), bit8-10, bit16-18, bit24-26, bit32-34, bit40-42
(2) The value after taking the XOR value of the lower 3 bits (bit0-2) and bit8-10 of VLAN ID.
(3) When the line module from which the frame is input is FE, the lower 3-bit value of the number
that is the port number minus 1; when it is GbE, the following value corresponding to the line
module number.
Line module number
10
Corresponding value
(4) In the case of a VLAN frame with no tag or a frame with 1-hop VLAN tag, the value after
taking the XOR value of the lower 3 bits (bit0-2) and bit8-10 of the type field in the Ether
header; in the case of a frame with 2-hop VLAN tag, the value after taking the XOR value of
the lower 3 bits (bit0-2) and bit8-10 of TPID in the 2nd VLAN tag.
4-101

(5) The following value corresponding to the line module conditions.
Conditions
Type of receive line module
Line module number
Corresponding
value
FE
1, 3, 5
FE
7, 9
FE
2, 4, 6
FE
8, 10
GbE
All
The destination LLB is automatically changed when the operation port is changed due to reasons
such as layer 1 failure is detected, output destination is changed by setting, or LACP timeout is
detected.
Memo
As described above, unlike UGSWA, UGWSC distribution uses other bits in addition to the
lower 3 bits of the MAC address, as well as other information in addition to MAC
addresses.
Note
Distribution methods are not applied to the destination of multicast, unknown (DLF), or
broadcast frames. One port is always selected as the destination of such frames by
software control.
4-102

Suppose that 1/1, 1/2, and 1/3 are grouped into LAG#1, and 1/6, 1/7 into LAG#2 as shown below.
1/1
1/2
1/3
1/4
2/1
2/2
2/3
2/4
MBH
1/5
1/6
1/7
1/8
2/5
2/6
3/1
4/1
* Line module numbers 1 and 2 indicate FE line modules, while line module numbers 3
and 4 indicate GbE line modules.
LLB is assigned to each port in each group in a cyclic manner (same with UGSWA).
LAG table
LAG#1
LAG#2
LLB
Output module/port#
LLB
Output module/port#
1/1
1/6
1/2
1/7
1/3
1/6
1/1
1/7
1/2
1/6
1/3
1/7
1/1
1/6
1/2
1/7
In the above case, the destination of a frame is decided as follows:
4-103

Receive line module is GbE
When the following frame (with 1-hop VLAN tag) received from 3/1 is output from a link
aggregation group:
Source MAC
= 0x000102030405 (0x1 = 0101)
Destination MAC = 0x000506070809 (0x5 = 0001)
TPID
= 0x8100 (unused for calculation)
VLAN ID
= 100 (0x4 = 0100)
Ether type
= 0x800 (0x0 = 0000)
Destination LLB:
{ Source MAC (0101) XOR VLAN ID (0100) XOR value corresponding to the receive line
(0001) XOR value corresponding to the line module (0100) XOR Ether type (0000) } + 1 = 6
Result:
According to the LAG table, the frame is distributed to 1/3 in LAG#1, and 1/7 in LAG#2.
(2) Destination MAC address distribution (dst-mac)
Destination LLB:
{ Destination MAC (0001) XOR VLAN ID (0100) XOR value corresponding to the receive line
(0001) XOR value corresponding to the line module (0100) XOR Ether type (0000) } + 1 = 1
Result:
Destination LLB:
{ Source MAC (0101) XOR Destination MAC (0001) XOR VLAN ID (0100) XOR value
corresponding to the receive line (0001) XOR value corresponding to the line module (0100)
XOR Ether type (0000) } + 1 = 6
Result:
4-104

Receive line module is FE
When the following frame (with 2-hop VLAN tag) received from 2/6 is output from a link
aggregation group:
Source MAC
= 0x000102030405 (0x1 = 0101)
Destination MAC = 0x000506070809 (0x5 = 0001)
TPID
VLAN ID
= 100 (0x4 = 0100)
TPID
= 0x8100 (0x1 = 0001)
VLAN ID
= 10 (unused for calculation)
Ether type
Destination LLB:
{ Source MAC (0101) XOR VLAN ID (0100) XOR receive port value (0101) XOR value
corresponding to the line module (0010) XOR TPID (0001) } + 1 = 8
Result:
(2) Destination MAC address distribution (dst-mac)
Destination LLB:
{ Destination MAC (0001) XOR VLAN ID (0100) XOR receive port value (0101) XOR value
corresponding to the line module (0010) XOR TPID (0001) } + 1 = 4
Result:
Destination LLB:
{ Source MAC (0101) XOR Destination MAC (0001) XOR VLAN ID (0100) XOR receive port
value (0101) XOR value corresponding to the line module (0010) XOR TPID (0001) } + 1 = 7
Result:
Local mode
This mode is used when NECs unique simple aggregation is used. This is the default setting of
this unit. Operation is based on the settings of the local unit without recourse to those of the other
device, because LACP communication is not performed. To make operation in this mode
effective, select the ports to be used on the local unit and the other unit in advance before setting
the function.
4-105
Standby filtering
This sets operation when frames are received in standby ports.
(1) standby-block: Sets discard of received frames except LACP.
(2) standby-admit: Accepts received frames.
Memo
Link aggregation protection time is applied for groups to which standby-admit is set.
dot3ad mode
This is the standard mode based on IEEE802.3ad. LACP communication with the other device is
periodically performed for setting of link aggregation. After link aggregation is set, LACP is sent to
the other device on a 1-second cycle.
If LACP from the other device is not received for 6 seconds, LACP reception times out, and the
port where timeout occurs is separated from the group and changed into a standby port. LACP
communication is performed even in this case, but the intervals of LACP transmission will be
changed to 30 seconds. When reception of LACP from the other device becomes possible, the
port will become a candidate for an operation port again.
The following explains how to decide operation ports and standby ports on the local unit and the
other device.
(1) Comparison of system priorities
First, the system priority of the other device and the system priority of the local unit are
compared.
(2) Comparison of port priorities
Then the port priority of the switch having the highest system priority is referred to. The ports
having higher port priorities are selected. Port priorities of a unit having lower system priority
are not referred to.
(3) Selection of operation ports
On a switch having the higher switch priority, ports are selected until the number reaches the
specified number of operation ports. If the number of operation ports on the other device is
smaller than that on the switch with the higher switch priority, in this process, the number of
operation ports on the other device will be effective. If the number of operation ports fails to
reach the specified number due to failure in reception of LACP or a physical cause like port
failure, the ports that fail to be selected will behave as standby ports.
4-106
Passive mode
When the other device is in the dot3ad mode, setting of link aggregation is triggered by reception
of LACP from the other device.
If LACP is not received from the other device, link aggregation is not set because no LACP
communication is made.
Commands
set aggregation group
Setting of link aggregation group
show aggregation group
Display of link aggregation setting status
clear aggregation group
Clearing of link aggregation group
Note
One same port cannot accept this setting together with port isolation setting.
Specifying system priorities

By setting the system priority, you can specify whether you use the port priority of the local unit or
that of the other device when you select operation and standby ports. The switch having smaller
value (higher system priority) takes precedence. If both has the same the priority, their MAC
addresses are compared, and the switch having the MAC address of the smaller value will be
selected as the priority switch.
Commands
set aggregation system priority
Setting of system priority
show aggregation system priority
Display of system priority
Note
This setting is used for protocol communication by LACP between the devices. Because
simple aggregation does not support LACP protocol communication between the devices,
this setting makes no difference in operation.
Note
Set the system priority before setting link aggregation.

after link aggregation is set.
4-107
System priority cannot be set
Specifying port priorities

Specifies the priorities of the ports specified in specification of aggregation groups. The smaller
the value is, the higher the priority is. If the priorities are same, the port whose module location
number and the port number is the smallest is selected as an operation port before other ports.
Commands
set aggregation port priority
Setting of port priority
show aggregation port priority
Display of port priority
Specifying link aggregation protection time

The link aggregation protection time function works for link aggregation groups with standby-admit
set that operate in the simple aggregation mode.
A port that is in the unblocked and physical link down state becomes a standby port after linkup is
notified and then changes to an operation port. The link aggregation protection time function
controls the standby time from linkup notification received by a port that is in the unblocked and
physical link down state to its change into an operation port.
The port remains the standby state during the link aggregation protection time, which allows frame
reception but not frame transmission. After the link aggregation protection time elapses, the port
becomes operational and allows frame transmission.
By setting the link aggregation protection time, you can reduce the communication down time that
arises when a port that is in the unblocked and physical link down state changes into an operation
port.
4-108

Commands
set aggregation protection-time
Setting of link aggregation protection time
show aggregation protection-time
Display of link aggregation protection time
Memo
The link aggregation protection time can be set for each link aggregation group whether
any aggregation group exists or not.
Note
If the linkup port is in the link aggregation protection time, it has an influence on the
following functions:
- For the fast and standard spanning tree function, the port status remains the discarding
state and will not change.
- Operation of the IGMP snooping function on the port is excluded.
Setting example
The explanation is based on the following network.
CX2600/220
Port1/1-1/4,3/1-3/4
Port8/1,
12/1
Port8/1,10/1
The aggregation distribution method is based on the XOR value of the source MAC address and
destination MAC address. Eight ports (ports 1/1-1/4 and 3/1-3/4) are set in Group 1 as simple
aggregation. Two ports (ports 8/1 and 12/1) are set in Group 32 in dot3ad mode. The port
priorities of ports 3/1-3/4 are set to 10. The counterparts of ports 8/1 and 12/1 are operating in
dot3ad mode.
In this sample configuration, the communication speed is set to 100 Mbps on ports 1/1-1/4 and
3/1-3/4, and 1 Gbps on ports 8/1 and 10/1, in advance.
4-109

Input example
*Switch@1# set aggregation group 1 1/1-4,3/1-4 4 standby-admit local both-mac
*Switch@1# set aggregation group 32 8/1,12/1 2 dot3ad src-mac
*Switch@1# set aggregation port priority 3/1-4 10
*Switch@1# set aggregation protection-time 1 10000
*Switch@1# show aggregation group
Switch Aggregate Table
======================
Aggregated Ports/
Active-Numbers/ Mode/
Distribute
Index Name
Standby-Filter Time(msec) Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1/1-4,3/1-4
4
local
both-mac
standby-admit
10000
32 8/1,12/1
2
dot3ad
src-mac
standby-block
0
*Switch@1# show aggregation port priority 1/1-8,3/1-8,8/1,12/1
LAG Port Information
====================
Port Index Priority
--------------------1/1
1
128
1/2
1
128
1/3
1
128
1/4
1
128
1/5
128
1/6
128
1/7
128
1/8
128
3/1
1
10
3/2
1
10
3/3
1
10
3/4
1
10
3/5
128
3/6
128
3/7
128
3/8
128
8/1
32
128
12/1
32
128
*Switch@1#
4-110
Learning of aggregation groups

A frame received from an aggregation port is learned by the port of the smallest number in the
group.
Memo
The leaned MAC address is not deleted until all ports of link aggregation become standby
ports or aging timeout occurs. Learning of link aggregation is always performed on the
port of the smallest number in the group regardless of its implementation.
4-111
4.1.5 Frame size

The CX2600/200 provides the frame size setting function.
The minimum frame size is 64 bytes, and the maximum value is 1536 bytes for FE, 9000 bytes for
GbE, and 1536 bytes for ATM. The default value is 1536 bytes for all.
Use the "set frame-size" command to set the frame size. The parameters of the "set frame-size"
command include the port type (FE, GbE, or ATM) and frame size (64-1536 for FE, 64-9000 for
GbE, or 64-1536 for ATM). Enter these parameters separating them by a space.
Note
The tolerable frame size on a tagbase VLAN port is the command specification value + 4
bytes.
Note
When you set a frame size, data continuity may be momentarily interrupted, which may
cause an error like a CRC error.
Note
In a GbE line module for which line module operation mode is set to FE, the frame size is
treated as 1536 bytes even when the frame size setting value exceeds 1536 byts.
Note
This function cannot be set for ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and TDMP155 line modules.
Commands
set frame-size
Setting of frame size
show frame-size
Display of frame size
4-112

Input example
The frame size is set to 1536 bytes for the FE port, 9000 bytes for the GbE port, and 1536 bytes
for the ATM transmission path.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set frame-size fe 1536

set frame-size gbe 9000
set frame-size atm 1536
show frame-size
Frame Size (Byte)

=================
FE-Port : 1536
GbE-Port : 9000
ATM-Port : 1536
*Switch@1#
4-113
4.1.6 IGMP snooping

This section explains the IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) snooping function that
works on this unit. A layer 2 switch, unable to distinguish multicast traffic and multicast groups,
transmit all frames sent to a multicast address to all the ports belonging to the associated VLAN as
unknown frames. The IGMP snooping function monitors the IGMP Query and IGMP Report (Join
and Leave) messages compliant to RFC1112 and RFC2236, registers a destination MAC address
and VLAN as a unit in an entry, and sends frames to the ports belonging to a specified group. A
combination of a forwarding multicast MAC address and a VLAN ID is regarded as one group, and
up to 160 entries can be registered.
Memo
This unit supports the IGMP snooping IPv6 function in addition to the IGMP snooping IPv4
function. IGMP snooping IPv6 supports only MLD v1 snooping.
Memo
Packets supported by MLD v1 snooping can be Query, Report, or Done, which

corresponds respectively to IGMP Query, IGMP Report (join), and IGMP Report (leave) of
IGMP snooping IPv4. This function provides operation equivalent to IGMP snooping
IPv4.
The following explains the operation of this function using a sample configuration of IGMP
snooping IPv4 as shown below.
(1) A multicast router sends an IGMP Query
packet to the hosts in the same VLAN.
(2) A host sends an IGMP Report (Join)

packet with the IP multicast group specified.
Multicast router
CX2600/200
Multicast router
Query
CX2600/200
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
Join
Host A
Host B
Host C
Host A
Host D
Host B
This registers the information in the multicast transfer table of the CX2600/200.
4-114
Host C
Host D

The following explains the operation to delete registered information.
(3) Ignores the IGMP Query without sending
an IGMP Report (Join) packet.
(4) The host sends an IGMP Report (Leave)

packet.
Multicast router
Multicast router
CX2600/200
CX2600/200
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
Join
Host A
Leave
Host B
Host C
Host D
Host A
Host B
Host C
Host D
Registered information is deleted either by (3) or (4).
Memo
When the number of registered entries reaches 160, this unit discards an IGMP Report
(Join) frame, if it detects it, without registering the information in the multicast transfer
table.
4-115
Setting IGMP snooping

Specifies whether to enable or disable the IGMP snooping function in the unit.
If you desire IGMP snooping operation, enable IGMP snooping.
Enabling or disabling IGMP snooping
Note
4-116
An in-band IP address is required for registration or deletion of an entry in response to a

Join message or Leave message. If no IP address is set (by using the "set ip address
in-band" command), IGMP snooping will not function.
Enabling or disabling IGMP snooping

Sets IGMP snooping to enable or disable, and you can make IGMP snooping operate on this unit
as you specify. If you disable it, IGMP snooping does not function and no multicast groups are
made.
When you set IGMP snooping to enable, you can specify either Ipv4 or Ipv6 for the unit
individually. If you omit this specification, Ipv4 is set.
Command
set igmp
Setting of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable
Displaying whether IGMP snooping is enabled or disabled

You can display the current IGMP snooping setting information.
Command
show igmp status
Display of IGMP Snooping function enable/disable information
4-116
Displaying IGMP snooping

Reception of a Join message or Leave message packet from a host triggers registration of a port in
a group or deletion of such registered information. You can confirm which port belongs which
entry with specifying the MAC, VLAN, or port.
Commands
show igmp mac
Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified MAC
show igmp vid
Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN
show igmp port
Display of IGMP Snooping entry for specified port number
Memo
If you omit the parameter, all registered entries are displayed.
Input example
IGMP snooping is enabled, and then the port registration status is displayed.
Switch@1# set igmp enable

*Switch@1# show igmp port
IGMP Snooping Multicast MAC Table
=================================
IGMP Group Ports
: 1/6
IGMP Group Address
: 01:00:5e:0a:0b:0c
VLAN ID
: 1
Total Number of Ports : 1
*Switch@1#
4-117
Deletion of IGMP snooping member

A member registered in a group can be deleted.
VLAN to delete an IGMP snooping entry.
You can specify either the group address or
Commands
clear igmp mac
Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified group address
clear igmp vid
Clearing of IGMP Snooping entry for specified VLAN
Memo
When you use the "clear igmp mac" command, specify the group address.
Memo
If you omit the parameter, when you use the "clear igmp vid" command, all registered
entries are deleted.
Input example
The port registration status is displayed and the entries of the specified group address are deleted.

=================================
IGMP Group Ports
: 1/3
IGMP Group Address
: 01:00:5e:01:01:02
VLAN ID
: 30
--------------------------------------------------------------------IGMP Group Ports
: 1/4
IGMP Group Address
: 01:00:5e:01:01:02
VLAN ID
: 40
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# clear igmp mac 01:00:5e:01:01:02
*Switch@1#
=================================
No entry in the table.
*Switch@1#
4-118

Memo
When link aggregation is used at the same time, the port of the smallest number in the
group is displayed as the designated port.
Note
This unit does not support Group-Specific Query, which is used for confirmation of
members of a specific multicast group.
Note
IGMP v1 join/leave packets are handled only when no IP option is added. However,
IGMP v2 join/leave messages, including query messages, are handled even when a
4-octet IP option (Router alert option) is added.
Note
If the GbE-MUX line module is implemented, the VLAN deletion command, when
executed, exerts an effect also on the members registered with the specified VLAN.
Note
When a Join message or Leave message is received, it is not transferred to other ports in
the same VLAN. (However, when a router port is already exists, the message is
transferred to the port.) When a Query message is received, it is transferred to the other
ports in the same VLAN.
Note
When the IGMP IPv6 mode is specified, the destination MAC address of the packet
recognized as a Query, Report, or Done packet starts with 33:33 without exception.
Note
When the IGMP snooping IPv6 mode is set, the IGMP Query and IGMP Report (join and
leave) messages of IGMP snooping IPv4 are handled in the same way as general
multicast frames and transferred to the other ports in the same VLAN.
Note
As a MLD v1 snooping group address, the reserved multicast

FF0*:0:0:0:0:0:0:0 (* is a value from 0 to F) is the deletion target address.
Note
The function of MLD v1 snooping deletes a packet if its version or length is found to be
incorrect.
4-119
address
of
4.1.7 Spanning tree protocol

This unit supports the rapid spanning tree function. In a large-scale network, redundant network
operation is implemented to make the network always available. However, if a layer 2 switch in a
network is set up in redundant configuration, it may cause a broadcast storm where a broadcast
message loops, which can bring the network down. Then, spanning tree protocol is useful as a
layer 2 protocol because it can avoid loops even if the switch is in redundant configuration.
On this unit, you can use the following two types of spanning tree protocols according to the
operation system.
(1) Rapid spanning tree (IEEE802.1w): RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
Protocol based on IEEE802.1w.
the default function.
Reconfigures a tree around a root bridge quickly.
This is
(2) Standard spanning tree (IEEE802.1D): STP (Spanning Tree Protocol)

When another device on the network supports STP instead of RSTP, this can be used as an
alternate function of RSTP.
Note
The standard spanning tree function of this unit is provided as an alternate function of the
rapid spanning tree function (IEEE802.1w). Therefore, the function is different from that
of IEEE802.1D STP.
Note
The spanning tree function does not work for ATM155, ATMP, ATMP155, TDMP, and
Note
The spanning tree function does not work for ports for which EtherPS is enabled.
4-120
Basic operation of spanning tree

Root switch determination
Each switch sends BPDU to other switches to notify them that it is a root switch so that a network
can be configured on the tree having the root switch placed in the center.
In the RSTP mode, protocol communication of Proposal and Agreement is performed and the root
switch and the designated port are determined at once.
(1) Sends Proposal BPDU.
(2) Blocks the other ports.

C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
(3) Agreement BPDU

Returns it if the other switch is more prioritized.
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
2
(4) Immediately enters into
the forwarding state.
(5) Sends Proposal BPDU.
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
(6) Blocks the other ports.
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
Finally, the switch whose priority is the lowest (if the switch priorities are the same, the switch
whose MAC address is the smallest) will be selected as the root switch.
In the STP mode, a tree configuration is not constructed by Proposal and Agreement method.
4-121
Determination of the root port and designated port

In the RSTP mode, the root port and designated port are selected through the protocol
communication of Proposal and Agreement.
Root switch A
Designated switch B
Designated switch C
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
C X 2 6 0 0 /2 2 0
Designated port A
Path cost value 1
Root port B
Path cost value 2
Designated port B
Path cost value 3
Root port C
Path cost value 4
In the course of determination of the root port and designated port, ports are compared in the
following sequence both in the RSTP and STP mode.
1.
Route ID
A route ID consists of a 2-octet switch priority and 6-octet MAC address. The port that
receives the BPDU that has the route ID of the smallest value will be selected as the root port.
2.
Route cost
The accumulated path cost value from the root switch.
cost will be selected as the root port.
The port that has the smallest route
In the above figure, the accumulated path cost value of the route from designated port B is 2.
3.
Designated switch ID
The port of the switch whose switch ID (switch priority + MAC address) is the smallest will be
selected as the designated port.
4.
Designated port ID
A port ID consists of 2-octet port priority and 2-octet port number.
smallest port ID will be selected as the designated port.
4-122
The port that has the
Port status change in spanning tree

The root switch sends a BPDU to the designated switch in every 2 seconds by default. If this
frame is not detected by any other switch before receiving timeout (6 seconds: three times the
hello-time), or if only a BPDU of lower priority is received, the other switches will have receiving
timeout and change the role of the port to designated port.
The behavior of the port statues upon reception of a BPDU is different between the RSTP mode
and STP mode.
When operation is in RSTP mode

1)
When an Agreement message is received, the status changes immediately.

Port status change: Discarding
2)
Forwarding
When no BPDU is received, the status changes to forwarding in about 30 seconds.

Learning
Transfer delay time (15 seconds by default)
Note
Forwarding
If, however, the designated port is not set point-to-point, the operation will be the same as
the operation in STP mode.
4-123

When operation is in STP mode
If the transfer delay time is defaulted to 15 seconds, the status changes from discarding to
forwarding in about 30 seconds whether a BPDU is received or not.
Learning
Forwarding
Memo
If a switch receives a higher-priority BPDU or nothing while the receiving timeout is

enabled, it outputs a trap indicating detection of a new root switch. If a switch does not
receive anything, it detects itself as the root switch.
Memo
Port migration is included in port status change. Changing the status among the four
statuses including send-stp, sending-stp, send-rstp, and sending-rstp is called migration.
At the time when individual port sends a BPDU in RSTP or STP mode, a trap indicating
occurrence of migration is output.
Memo
In the event of a topology change, each port operates the timer for 4 seconds (twice the
hello-time) by default in RSTP mode, or for 35 seconds (maximum aging time + transfer
delay time) by default in STP mode. If a port receives a BPDU whose priority is higher
than the priority it holds while the timer is working, it checks that the timer of each port has
stopped and outputs a trap for topology change.
Note
The length of receiving timeout is calculated from the smaller value between the maximum
aging time minus the message age time of the BPDU and three times hello-time.
Note
MAC learning of a BPDU without a VLAN tag is performed by VLAN ID 1.
4-124
Configuring spanning tree

Configures a spanning tree following the steps described below.
Setting data on the switch 4-126
Sets the spanning tree mode, switch
priority, and timer to be used in the system.
Setting data on the spanning tree port
4-129
Sets the items required for configuration
of a spanning tree on each port.
Enabling spanning tree
4-132
Reflects the settings to the entire system.

Confirms the status by displaying it.
4-125
Setting data on the switch

Sets information on the switch, which is necessary for spanning tree protocol to function.
Setting the mode

For the CX2600/200 spanning tree protocol, either RSTP mode or STP mode can be selected.
Use the "set spantree mode" command to set the mode.
Memo
Mode change applies to the entire switch.
The default is RSTP mode.
Note
When you change the mode, RSTP/STP must be disabled.

Changing the mode initializes all configuration information related to RSTP/STP to the
default values of the newly set mode.
Enabling or disabling RSTP/STP

Is performed using the "set spantree" command to enable or disable RSTP/STP.
Set enable or disable as the parameter of the "set spantree" command.
Input example
The mode is set to RSTP.
Switch@1# set spantree mode rstp
*Switch@1# show spantree mode
Spantree Mode Information
=========================
Mode : rstp
Status : disabled
*Switch@1#
4-126

Setting the switch priority
Sets the switch priority so that the priority switch can be determined.
the smallest in the same network will be selected as the root switch.
The switch whose priority is
Use the "set spantree priority" command to set the switch priority.
Memo
If more than one switch exists, which has the smallest switch priority, in the same network,
the switch whose MAC address is the smallest will be selected as the root switch.
Note
In the RSTP mode, set the switch priority to a multiple of 4096.
Input example
The switch priority is set to 32768.
*Switch@1# set spantree priority 32768
*Switch@1#
Setting the timer

Sets the timer information on the switch, which is necessary to make the spanning tree protocol to
operate as you desire.
Setting the hello-time

Sets the intervals at which the switch sends a BPDU to other switches. When the root switch is
determined, the switches will operate on the hello-time of the root switch.
Use the "set spantree time" command to set the hello-time.
Setting the transfer delay time

Sets the time taken for changing the port status from learning to forwarding. When the root switch
is determined, the switches will operate on the transfer delay time of the root switch.
Use the "set spantree time" command to set the transfer delay time.
4-127

Setting the maximum aging time
Sets the maximum survival time of the received route information. When the root switch is
determined, the switches will operate on the maximum aging time of the root switch.
Use the "set spantree time" command to set the maximum aging time.
Note
For stability and correct modification of spanning tree, this setting must meet the following
conditions.
2 (Transfer delay time -1) Maximum aging time
Maximum aging time 2 (Hello-time + 1)
Input example
The timer is set.
This is an example in the RSTP mode.
*Switch@1# set spantree time hello 2

*Switch@1# set spantree time forward 15
*Switch@1# set spantree time maxage 20
*Switch@1#
Setting the maximum BPDU transmission times

Sets the maximum times that a line on the switch can send a BPDU in a second. Limit the BDPU
transmission times in order to keep the bandwidth from spreading when a topology change occurs
frequently.
Use the set "spantree txholdcount" command to set the maximum BPDU transmission times.
Memo
This command is effective only in the RSTP mode.
Input example
The maximum BPDU transmission times is set to 3.
*Switch@1# set spantree txholdcount 3
*Switch@1#
4-128
Setting data on the spanning tree port

On the ports, sets the information which is necessary to make the spanning tree protocol to
operate as you desire. This information is used for selection of the root port and designated port.
Memo
When spanning tree is set together with link aggregation, BPDUs are sent from the
smallest-number port of link aggregation in one same group. In this case, the settings of
the smallest-number port of link aggregation are always used as the settings for spanning
tree.
Note
When flow control is enabled or set to auto-negotiation on a line, the spanning tree
function does not work on this line.
Enabling or disabling spanning tree operation for each port

Is performed using the "set spantree port" command to enable or disable the function on each port.
Enter the port number and enable or disable in this order as the parameters of the "set spantree
port" command.
Memo
If disable is set on a port, spanning tree does not apply to this port.
the same way as the ports where spanning tree is not set do.
It forwards frames in
Setting the port path cost

Sets the path cost, and then you can activate your desired path.
auto-negotiation, which depends on the line speed.
The default setting is
Association between the line speed and path cost by default

Line speed
Path cost
STP Mode (IEEE802.1D)
RSTP Mode (IEEE802.1w)
10 Mbps
100
2000000
100 Mbps
19
200000
1 Gbps
20000
In RSTP/STP configuration, the root switch and all the other switches shall be connected by the
paths having the lowest port path cost possible. To set a port path cost independently from the
line speed, use the "set spantree port cost" command.
Memo
The range of port path cost that can be set is different depending on the mode.
RSTP mode: 1-200000000
STP mode:
1-65535
4-129

Setting the port priority
Sets the port priority, and you can make your desired path active on a priority basis. If two or
more ports have a path to the other port of which path cost is the same, the port whose priority is
the lowest is selected as the root port. Use the "set spantree port priority" command to set the
priority.
If the port priorities are also same, the port whose port number is the smallest will be selected as
the root port.
Memo
In the RSTP mode, a port priority can be a multiple of 16.
Input example
Spanning tree is set for each port.
This is an example in the RSTP mode.
*Switch@1# set spantree port 1/1-1/3 enable

*Switch@1# set spantree port cost 1/2 20000
*Switch@1# set spantree port priority 1/3 128
*Switch@1#
Setting point-to-point
Sets point-to-point, and the other device operates as connected point-to-point and becomes a
target of instant switching. When auto-negotiation is set, the state changes to enable or disable
depending on the full duplex or half-duplex setting with the other device respectively. Set
point-to-point by using the "set spantree port point-to-point" command.
Memo
Note
When link aggregation is used together, set this item to auto or enable.
4-130

Setting the edge port
Sets the edge port, and a port connected to a device (terminal) other than a switch will be
changed, at the time of linkup, into a port that can transfer frames. Use the "set spantree port
edge" command to set an edge port.
Memo

periodically also on the line having this setting.
BPDU transmission is performed
Input example
Point-to-point is set to 1/3, and edge port is set to 1/1.
*Switch@1# set spantree port point-to-point 1/3 enable
*Switch@1# set spantree port edge 1/1 enable
*Switch@1#
4-131

Applies spanning tree to the entire system. Perform this setting after completing all the above
settings. To enable spanning tree, use the "set spantree" command.
Memo
If you disable this function, a network loop may occur. Therefore, if you do not use
spanning tree, change the network configuration such that no loops may occur before you
disable this function.
Input example
*Switch@1# set spantree enable
*Switch@1# show spantree mode
Spantree Mode Information
=========================
Mode : rstp
Status : enabled
*Switch@1#
4-132

Displaying spanning tree information
To display information of individual port, use the "show spantree port" or "show spantree info"
command. You can confirm the information in the same way either in RSTP or STP mode. For
details on the commands, see "Command Reference".
Input examples
Spanning tree port information is displayed.
You can see that 1/1 is the root port.
*Switch@1# show spantree port 1/1-8,3/1

RSTP Port Configuration Table
=============================
Port Priority Status
Edge
Cost
------------------------------------------------------------------1/1
128 enabled
enabled
auto
1/2
128 enabled
disabled
20000
1/3
128 enabled
disabled
auto
1/4
128 disabled disabled
auto
1/5
auto
1/6
auto
1/7
auto
1/8
auto
3/1
auto
RSTP Port Status Table
======================
DES
DES
DES
Port Status
Role
Cost Bridge
Cost Port
TC
-----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 forwarding root
200000 03fb00004cb42511 19 8029
1
1/2 discarding disabled
20000 800000004cb4fc70
0
8002
0
800000004cb4fc70
0
8003
0
200000 800000004cb4fc70
0
8004
0
200000 800000004cb4fc70
0
8005
0
800000004cb4fc70
0
8006
0
800000004cb4fc70
0
8007
0
200000 800000004cb4fc70
0
8008
0
800000004cb4fc70
0
8011
0
*Switch@1#
4-133

Spanning tree information is displayed. You can see that 1/1 is the root port. The settings given
on the local switch are displayed under Local Switch Information and information from the root
switch is displayed mainly under STP Global Information.
*Switch@1# show spantree info
STP Global Information
======================
Spanning Tree Version
: IEEE802.1W(RSTP)
STP Priority
: 32768
Time Since Topology Change (sec) : 18015
STP Topology Changes
: 0
STP Designated Root
: 000000004cc4e3c1
STP Root Cost
: 200019
STP Root Port Number
: 1/1
STP MAX Age
(sec) : 20
STP Hello Time
(sec) : 2
STP Hold Time
(sec) : 1
STP Forward Delay
(sec) : 15
Local Switch Information
========================
STP Bridge MAX Age
STP Bridge Hello Time
STP Bridge Forward Delay
STP TX Hold Count
(sec): 20
(sec): 2
(sec): 15
: 3
*Switch@1#
4-134
BPDU transparency function

The BPDU transparency function floods a received BPDU in the switch.
When this function is enabled, redundant routes can be configured between this unit and the other
connected devices where spanning tree function is enabled.
When a BPDU is received on a portbase VLAN port, BPDU transparency is performed for that
VLAN ID regardless of whether the BPDU has a tag or not. When a BPDU is received on a
tagbase VLAN port, it will be discarded if it does not have a tag, and BPDU transparency is
performed for that VLAN ID if it has a tag.
Enabling or disabling BPDU transparency

Is performed using the "set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu" command to enable or disable BPDU
transparency.
As the parameters of the "set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu" command, enter vid and then VLAN
identifier for specification on an individual VLAN or all for specification on all VLANs, and then
enable or disable in this order separating each parameter by a space.
Memo
This function applies to frames based on IEEE802.1D, whose destination MAC address is
01:80:C2:00:00:00.
Memo
Although reception of a BPDU with a tag is not compliant with IEEE802.1D, this switch
supports it.
Note
When you enable the BPDU transparency function, disable the spanning tree function. If
you enable the BPDU transparency function when the spanning tree function is enabled,
only BPDUs to which the spanning tree function does not apply will be let through.
Note
ATMP, ATMP155, TDMP, and TDMP155 line modules do not accept this setting.
Input example
The BPDU transparency from VLAN ID100 to 105 is enabled.
Switch@1# set l2p-transparent stp-bpdu vid 100-105 enable
*Switch@1# show l2p-transparent stp-bpdu
L2P BPDU Transparent Configuration
==================================
BPDU Transparent VID : 100-105
*Switch@1#
4-135
4.2 Setting of Extended Functions

4.2.1 Port isolation
The CX2600/200 has the port isolation function that can block transfer of frames received from a
specified port to the forwarding destination port. This function applies to all types of frames
(broadcast, multicast, and unicast frames as well as flooding frames).
When port isolation is not set (default), frames incoming from all ports can be transferred to all the
other ports regardless of the line module type as shown in the following example.
GbE
Transfer
10/1
9/1
CX2600/200
1/1
3/1
2/1
Transfer
Transmission
FE
By setting port isolation, you can enable, for example, communication between FE and GbE as
well as between GbE and GbE while disabling communication between FE and FE, as shown
below.
GbE
Transfer
10/1
9/1
CX2600/200
1/1
2/1
Transmission
FE
4-136
3/1
Setting port isolation
4-137
Clearing port isolation 4-138
Displaying port isolation
4-139
Sets port isolation.
Clears port isolation.
Displays the port isolation setting state.
Setting port isolation

Sets port isolation. By this setting, you can keep frames incoming from a specified port from
being transferred to the specified port.
Command
set isolate port
Setting/clearing of port isolate
Memo
Port isolation is set by additionally specifying a reception port and the destination ports,
which does not affect the set up configuration.
Note
This cannot be set on the same port where link aggregation is set.
Note
Specify the line module number to set this for the GbE-MUX, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or
Input example
Frames incoming from port 1/1 are not transferred to any ports between 2/1 and 2/8.
Switch@1# set isolate port 1/1 2/1-2/8 enable

*Switch@1#
4-137
Clearing port isolation

Clears port isolation. Frames incoming from a specified port are allowed to be transferred to the
specified ports.
Command
set isolate port
Setting/clearing of port isolate
Memo
Port isolation is cleared by clearing the specification of a reception port and the
destination ports, which does not affect the set up configuration.
Note
Specify the line module number to set this for the GbE-MUX, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or
Input example
Frames incoming from port 1/1 can be transferred to any ports between 2/1 and 2/8.
Switch@1# set isolate port 1/1 2/1-2/8 disable

*Switch@1#
4-138
Displaying port isolation

Displays the port isolation setting state about the specified reception port.
Command
show isolate port
Display of port isolate setting state
Input example
The port isolation information of the reception port 1/1 is displayed.
*Switch@1# show isolate port 1/1

Port-Isolate Configuration
==========================
State of Port-Isolate of Port: 1/1
Transfer-Blocking Port
: 2/1-8
*Switch@1#
4-139
4.2.2 IFG overrate mode

Only for a tagbase VLAN GbE port, the CX2600/200 allows the user to select the output frame rate
out of the following two by adjusting the IFG (Inter Frame Gap).
These modes can be set for individual systems.
This function works only when a frame incoming from a portbase VLAN port is going out of a
tagbase VLAN port.
100% rate mode (default)
Over 100% rate tolerance mode
Note
This setting does not apply to FE, FX, GbE-MUX, ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and
TDMP155 ports. If maximum bandwidth limit function and fairness control function in the
QoS function are used at the same time, the operation may be different from what you
expect.
The following explains the details on this function using the figure on the next page.
The CX2600/200 supports the following four combinations of an input VLAN and output VLAN.
Portbase VLAN
->
Portbase VLAN
Tagbase VLAN
->
Tagbase VLAN
Tagbase VLAN
->
Portbase VLAN
Portbase VLAN
->
Tagbase VLAN
The CX2600/200 adds or removes VLAN tags within the device only for portbase VLAN ports as
shown in the figure on the next page.
4-140

Therefore, the frame rate of the frames run at the 100% rate will be as described below.
The gray part describes the operation influenced by the IFG overrate mode function.
Features of the frame rate
Input VLAN
Output VLAN
Portbase
Portbase
A VLAN tag added in the

unit increases the frame
size and the frame rate
exceeds 100% by that
much.
A VLAN tag is removed in the unit, which

decreases the frame size and returns the
frame rate to 100%.
Tagbase
Tagbase
No VLAN tag is added in

the unit and the frame rate
remains 100%.
There is no removal of a VLAN tag, and the

frame rate remains 100%.
Tagbase
Portbase
No VLAN tag is added in

the unit and the frame rate
remains 100%.
A VLAN tag is removed in the unit, which

decreases the frame size and the frame
rate falls less than 100% by that much.
Portbase
Tagbase
A VLAN tag added in the

unit increases the frame
size and the frame rate
exceeds 100% by that
much.
The VLAN tag is not removed in the unit,

and the frame rate stays over 100%. The
IFG overrate mode function returns the
frame rate to 100% when in [100% rate
mode] and leaves the frame rate over 100%
when in [Over 100% rate tolerance mode].
Before UGSW input
4-141
After UGSW output
Portbase VLAN
Portbase VLAN
Line
Module
UGSW
TAG TAG
TAG
(Back to) 100% rate
Tagbase VLAN
TAG
Tagbase VLAN
Line
Module
UGSW
TAG TAG
100% rate
TAG
TAG
TAG TAG
TAG TAG
100% rate
Line
Module
UGSW
TAG
TAG TAG
Under 100% rate
Portbase VLAN
Tagbase VLAN
Line
Module
TAG
100% rate
TAG
TAG
100% rate
100% rate
TAG
Portbase VLAN
Line
Module
TAG TAG
Line
Module
100% rate
Tagbase VLAN
TAG
TAG
TAG
Over 100% rate
100% rate
Line
Module
TAG
UGSW
TAG
TAG
TAG TAG
TAGTAG
4-143
Displaying the IFG overrate mode
TAG
TAG TAG
< IFG overrate mode >

Disabled: (Back to) 100% rate
Enabled: Over 100% rate
Over 100% rate
Setting the IFG overrate mode
Line
Module
4-144
4-142
Sets the IFG overrate mode.
Displays the IFG overrate mode.
Setting the IFG overrate mode

Sets the IFG overrate mode.
You can choose a setting from the following two.
100% rate mode (default)

Over 100% rate tolerance mode
Command
set ifg over-rate
Setting of IFG overrate mode
Setting the 100% rate mode

Input example
The 100% rate mode is set.
Switch@1# set ifg over-rate disable

*Switch@1#
Setting the over 100% rate tolerance mode

Input example
The over 100% rate mode tolerance mode is set.
Switch@1# set ifg over-rate enable

*Switch@1#
4-143
Displaying the IFG overrate mode

Displays the IFG overrate mode.
Command
show ifg over-rate
Display of IFG overrate mode
Input example
The IFG overrate mode is displayed.
*Switch@1# show ifg over-rate

IFG Over-Rate Configuration
===========================
Over-Rate : enabled
*Switch@1#
4-144
4.2.3 Filtering
The filtering function is used to explicitly discard or transmit frames for specified traffic types.
CX2600/200 supports the input and output filtering function.
The
1 PV filtering function
You can explicitly specify whether to discard or let through a frame, which is determined on an I/O
portbase on the information in the frame. On portbase VLAN ports, you can specify a profile for
each port. On tagbase VLAN ports, you can specify a profile for each port and VLAN. In either
case, create a filtering profile and map it to individual VLANs to implement this function.
After applying a profile to a port, you can edit the profile and dynamically add a new filtering policy.
In the above figure, when IGMP filtering (DMAC specified) block is added in Filtering Profile 6,
IGMP block (DMAC specified) will collectively apply to all ports to which Filtering Profile 6 is
applied.
Memo
f you map an unregistered profile number, all frames will run through.
Note
Non-PV line modules do not support this function.
Note
More than one profile cannot be registered to a VLAN.

(If the same index is specified, the information will be overwritten.)
4-145
Filtering profile creation function

Filtering profile creation function can create up to 128 profiles per unit and register 32 items (31
items + other) per one profile. When you create a profile, specify the profile number, index in the
profile (numbered in the ascending order by default), and conditions for discarding or letting
through frames.
The following can be selected as the condition for discarding or letting through frames.
(L2) Destination MAC address (48 bits/bitmask)
(L2) Source MAC address (48 bits/bitmask)
(L2) Ethertype (16 bits)
(L3) Protocol ID (8 bits)
(L3) IPv4 destination IP address (32 bit/netmask)
(L3) IPv4 Source IP address (32 bits/netmask)
Other than the above (corresponds to "other")
Note
For multiple tags, up to two stages are supported.
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, a mapped profile cannot be deleted.
4-146
Filtering profile mapping function

For the filtering profile mapping function, specify which profile you want to apply to each VLAN or
to all VLANs of a port collectively.
Memo
This function checks frames in the ascending order of the index numbers, and when it
finds an input frame having the same information as the specified information, it performs
filtering. For "other", it performs filtering if no other index corresponds.
Memo
When you create a profile and first set it, "other" is also set.
Memo
For the Ethertype in a frame, this function refers to different parts depending on the
addition status. When the TPID (tag protocol ID) of the outside tag does not match
TPID of the port, this function refers to that field. When the TPID of the inside tag is
0x8100, it refers to the field. When the TPID of the inside tag is 0x8100, it refers to
next field.
Memo
The number of settings for individual VLANs is limited to 20000 items per one device.
Note
These commands can be entered for Line modules other than PV line modules, but the
function does not work. For the GbE-MUX line module, these commands cannot be
entered.
Note
When the command mode is safety mode, unregistered profiles cannot be mapped.
Note
setting.
Commands
set filter profile
Creating of filtering profile
set filter in-port
Setting of input filtering
set filter out-port
Setting of output filtering
clear filter profile
Clearing of filtering profile
clear filter in-port
Clearing of input filtering
clear filter out-port
Clearing of output filtering
show filter profile
Display of filtering profile
show filter in-port
Display of input filtering
show filter out-port
Display of output filtering
4-147
tag
the
not
the

Input example
*Switch@1# set filter profile 1 1 admit ether-type 0x0600
*Switch@1# set filter profile 1 2 block proto-type tcp
*Switch@1# show filter profile
Filter Profile Table
====================
Profile No. : 1
=================
Index Mode
Field Type
Field Type Information Mask Information
-----------------------------------------------------------------1 admit ether-type
0x600
--2 block proto-type
tcp
--Other block ------*Switch@1# set filter in-port fe 4/1 1 1
*Switch@1# show filter in-port
Input Filter Table
==================
Port VID Profile
------------------4/1
1
1
*Switch@1#
4-148
4.2.4 MAC address learning count limitation

The MAC address learning count limitation function limits, at an input port, the number of source
MAC addresses for transparency for each VLAN. This function allows the user to limit the number
of learned MAC addresses (the number of MAC addresses for transparency) on an L2SW. The
CX2600/200 has the MAC address learning count limitation function implemented on the input
side.
On each portbase VLAN port, the maximum number of learned MAC addresses can be specified.
On tagbase VLAN ports, the limit can be specified for each port and VLAN.
Memo
User frames may be discarded, because this limit is strictly applied to even frames with
high priorities like BPDUs and OSPF-LSA.
Note
This function cannot be set for the line modules other than GbE-PV, GbE-PV2, FE-PV,
and ATM155.
Note
Although this function can be set for the GbE-PV2 line module, it will not work.
4-149
Setting the MAC address learning count limitation function

You can specify the maximum number of learned MAC addresses up to 8192 per one line.
Memo
If you specify 16 or under, the number can be specified in units of one MAC address.
you specify a number greater than 16, the number shall be specified in units of 16.
If
Memo
If there is a static registration, described below, of the MAC address learning count
limitation function, the MAC address leaning count cannot be changed.
Memo
Because the limit is handled in units of 16 MAC addresses, even when the limit is set to
16 or under, the remaining number of addresses that can be registered is calculated by
subtracting 16.
Static registration of the MAC address learning count

limitation function
For a VLAN having the limit of MAC address leaning count, you can register up to 16 MAC
addresses as static.
Memo
You cannot make a static registration unless the target VLAN has the limit of MAC
address leaning count.
Memo
You cannot register more addresses as static than the specified limit of MAC address
leaning count.
Aging function
The specified aging timer value is also applied to the MAC learning limitation function.
Memo
This aging function is not completely synchronized with the aging function of the L2SW, a
slight time lag will occur in the MAC address leaning count.
4-150

Commands
set fdb limiter
Setting of MAC address learning limiting count function
set fdb limiter static
Setting of static MAC address of MAC address learning limiting

count function
clear fdb limiter
Clearing of MAC address learning count limiting function
clear fdb limiter static
Clearing of static MAC address of MAC address learning limiting

count function
show fdb limiter
Display of MAC address learning count limiting function
Input example
*Switch@1# set fdb limiter fe 4/1 1 32
*Switch@1# set fdb limiter static fe 4/1 1 00:00:00:00:00:01
*Switch@1# set fdb limiter fe 4/2 2 64
*Switch@1# show fdb limiter 4/1-2
MAC Limiter Line Table
======================
Module
Registered-Block Available-Block
------------------------------------------Line#4 :
96
506
MAC Limiter Port Table
======================
Port VID Registered-MAC Static-MAC
-------------------------------------4/1
1
32
1
4/2
2
64
2
MAC Limiter Port Static Address Table
=====================================
Port VID Static-MAC Address
----------------------------4/1
1 00:00:00:00:00:01
4/2
2 00:00:00:00:01:00
4/2
2 00:00:00:00:02:00
*Switch@1#
4-151
4.2.5 MAC transparency function

The MAC transparency function can flood a frame whose destination address (DA) is set to a
reserved multicast address, within the switch.
When enabled, the MAC transparency function can also discard LACP of link aggregation and
BPDU of the spanning tree protocol at the input port instead of flooding them.
Transparency mode: disable (default)

[GbE-PV]
When the input port is a portbase VLAN port, this function does not flood a frame having the
following DA.
01-80-C2-00-00-00 to 01-80-C2-00-FF-FF
When the input port is a tagbase VLAN port, this function does not flood a frame having the
following DA.
01-80-C2-00-00-00 to 01-80-C2-00-00-10
01-80-C2-00-00-20 to 01-80-C2-00-00-2F
[GbE-PV2]
Whether the input port is a portbase or tagbase VLAN port, this function does not flood a frame
having the following DA.
01-80-C2-00-00-00 to 01-80-C2-00-00-10
01-80-C2-00-00-20 to 01-80-C2-00-00-2F
Transparency mode: enable

Regardless of whether the input port is a portbase VLAN port or tagbase VLAN port, this function
floods a frame having the following DA.
01-80-C2-00-00-00 to 01-80-C2-00-FF-FF
4-152

Commands
set l2p-transparent reserved-mac
Setting of MAC address transparency function
show l2p-transparent reserved-mac
Display of MAC address transparency function
Memo
The MAC transparency function can be used together with the BPDU transparency
function.
When the BPDU transparency function is enabled, a BPDU input to the port where the
MAC transparency function is set to discard BPDUs will be discarded at the input port
instead of being flooded.
Note
When the MAC transparency function is enabled, the link aggregation function and/or
spanning tree protocol may not function correctly.
Note
If the flooding destination line module type is GbE-MUX, frames having the following DA
will be discarded except for BPDUs.
01-80-C2-00-00-01 to 01-80-C2-00-FF-FF
Note
This function cannot be set for GbE-MUX, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and TDMP155 line
modules.
Input example
The MAC transparency function is set.
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 2/1 enable bpdu block lacp block
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 2/2 enable lacp block
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 2/3 enable
*Switch@1# show l2p-transparent reserved-mac 2/1-8
L2P Reserved-MAC Transparent Configuration Table
================================================
Port Transparent BPDU LACP
-----------------------------2/1 enabled
block block
2/2 enabled
admit block
2/3 enabled
admit admit
2/4 disabled
----2/5 disabled
----2/6 disabled
----2/7 disabled
----2/8 disabled
----*Switch@1#
4-153

The following example shows how this function is used with the link aggregation function. If the
link aggregation port is tagbase, the MAC transparency function and link aggregation function can
be used together.
(Example of use with link aggregation 1) Full transparency
If neither LACP discard nor BPDU discard is set, frames whose DA is between 01-80-C2-00-00-00
and 01-80-C2-00-FF-FF will be flooded.
Higher switch
Link aggregation
CX2600/200
CX2600/220
Lower switch/terminal
<GbE ports 8/1,10/1>

- Tagbase is set.
- Link aggregation is set.
- MAC transparency is set.
Internal
operation
<FE port 1/1>

- Portbase is set.
- MAC transparency is set.
CX2600/200
IS-IS, etc. (untag/tag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-14, other)
LACP(tag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)
LACP(untag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)
Filter
Tag
addition
IS-IS, etc. (tag/2-hop tag)

LACP(2-hop tag)
LACP(tag)
LACP(untag)
LACP (untag)
Tag
deletion
Filter
LACP(untag)
LACP processing
4-154
Filter

(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-14, other)
LACP(tag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)
LACP(untag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)

The following shows how the MAC transparency function is set in the configuration shown on the
previous page and confirmed.
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 1/1 enable

*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac gbe 8/1 enable
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac gbe 12/1 enable
*Switch@1# show l2p-transparent reserved-mac
================================================
----------------------------1/1 enabled
admit admit
1/2 disabled
----1/3 disabled
----1/4 disabled
----1/5 disabled
----1/6 disabled
----1/7 disabled
----1/8 disabled
----8/1 enabled
admit admit
12/1 enabled
admit admit
*Switch@1#
4-155

(Example of use with link aggregation 2) Discarding LACP
When LACP discard is set to an input port, LACP frames (DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02) are discarded
at that input port. At a tagbase port, only LACP frames with a tag are discarded at the input port.
Higher switch
Link aggregation
CX2600/200
CX2600/220
Lower switch/terminal
<FE port 1/1>

- Portbase is set.
- MAC transparency + LACP discard
Internal
operation
<GbE ports 8/1,10/1>

- Tagbase is set.
- Link aggregation is set.
- MAC transparency + LACP discard
CX2600/200
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-14, other)
LACP(tag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)
LACP(untag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)
Filter
Tag
addition
LACP(untag)
Discard
LACP(untag)
Tag
deletion
Filter
LACP processing
4-156
Filter
Discard

(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-14, other)
LACP(tag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)
LACP(untag)
(DA=01-80-C2-00-00-02)

The following shows how the MAC transparency function is set in the configuration shown on the
previous page and confirmed.
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac fe 1/1 enable lacp block

*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac gbe 8/1 enable lacp block
*Switch@1# set l2p-transparent reserved-mac gbe 12/1 enable lacp block
*Switch@1# show l2p-transparent reserved-mac
================================================
----------------------------1/1 enabled
admit block
1/2 disabled
----1/3 disabled
----1/4 disabled
----1/5 disabled
----1/6 disabled
----1/7 disabled
----1/8 disabled
----8/1 enabled
admit block
12/1 enabled
admit block
*Switch@1#
4-157
4.2.6 Clock I/F control function

The clock interface control function controls clocks to be used for network synchronization needed
for data frame transmission and reception.
Multiple clocks with priority can be set as possible clock sources to be used for network
synchronization (hereinafter referred to as the "source clock").
Among source clocks to which priority is set, one clock can be set as the clock to be used for
network synchronization (hereinafter referred to as the "reference clock").
If a reference clock is stopped being provided, switching of reference clocks is autonomously
performed by hardware according to descending order of priority set in advance.
Source clocks can be selected from the following.
External clock Clock provided from external clock unit
Line extraction clockClock provided from T1/E1 interface or STM-1 interface
Line module extraction clock Clock generated from RTP packet
Memo
Up to five source clocks can be specified per system.
Note
When the device is in the initial state, a free-running clock is used as the reference clock.
Note
If all source clocks are stopped, the clock that has last used as the reference clock is
maintained in the device and adopted as the reference clock.
4-158
Setting external clock mode

Sets external clock mode as described below.
External clock mode can be selected from the following modes.
Type
Mode
Coding
rule
Terminating
resistance
DCS
DCS Mode
AMI
110
T1 D4 Framing Mode
1.544 Mbps
T1 ESF Framing Mode
AMI
B8ZS
AMI
B8ZS
AMI
E1 CRC4 Framing Mode

HDB3
2.048 Mpbs
AMI
E1 FAS Framing Mode
HDB3
2.048 MHz
E1 Synchronization Interface Mode
100
75
120
75
120
75
120
75
120
75
120
Note
The external clock mode that has already been set cannot be changed. Clear the current
external clock mode, and set a new external clock mode again.
Note
The external clock mode cannot be cleared while the external clock has priority assigned.
Clear the priority setting for the external clock, and set a new external clock mode again.
4-159
Setting clock priority

Specifies priority of source clocks which may be used for a reference clock. Switching of
reference clocks is autonomously performed by hardware according to the priority set in this
command.
Priority of source clocks can be set from 1 to 5.
For priority 1 and 2, external clock can be specified.
For priority 3 to 5, line extraction clock and line module extraction clock can be specified.
Memo
When an external clock is specified, external clock mode needs to be set.
Memo
When a line module extraction clock is specified, Adaptive-clock of TDMoP needs to be

set.
Memo
Line extraction clock can be set for ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, or TDMP155 line module.
Memo
Line module extraction clock can be set for TDMP or TDMP155 line module.
Memo
When the specified source clock becomes available after being set with this command,
switching of reference clocks may be performed depending on the clock operation mode
setting.
Note
The priority which has already been set cannot be changed.

priority and reset it.
Note
A line module to which priority has already been set cannot be set to another priority.
Note
Multiple priorities cannot be set in the same line module.
Delete the corresponding
Resetting clock
Restarts selection operation of reference clock and switch a reference clock according to the
descending order of clock priority set.
4-160
Setting clock operation mode

Sets the operation mode of reference clock.
The operation mode can be selected from the followings.
Autonomous switching / autonomous switchbackIf a reference clock cannot be provided and
source clock whose priority is higher than that of currently selected reference clock can be
provided, switching of reference clocks is performed according to the descending order of clock
priority set.
Autonomous switching / no autonomous switchbackIf a reference clock cannot be provided,
switching of reference clocks is performed according to the descending order of clock priority
set.
Memo
Because this setting is enabled immediately after this command is entered, reference
clock may be switched.
Memo
If only one source clock is used, it is recommended to enable "autonomous switchback".
Changing external clock

Switching of external clocks can be performed.
This command can be used when the following conditions are fulfilled:
UGSW redundant operation is performed and both systems of UGSW are provided with external
clock.
Clock priority is already set for external clock for both systems of UGSW.
External clock is selected as reference clock.
Commands
set external-clock mode
Setting of external clock mode
set reference-clock priority
Setting of reference clock priority
reset reference-clock
Resetting of reference clock
set reference-clock mode
Setting of reference clock operation
change external-clock
Change of external clock
show reference-clock information
Display of reference clock information
4-161

Input example
*Switch@2# set external-clock mode dcs
*Switch@2# set reference-clock mode revertive
*Switch@2# set reference-clock priority 1 external 1
*Switch@2# set reference-clock priority 2 external 2
*Switch@2# set reference-clock priority 3 port tdmp 3/1
*Switch@2# set reference-clock priority 4 port atmp 2/5
*Switch@2# set reference-clock priority 5 adaptive tdmp155 5
*Switch@2# show reference-clock information
Reference Clock Information
===========================
Reference Clock Mode
====================
mode : revertive
External Clock Configuration
============================
External Clock : dcs
Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#1)
===================================
Priority Source
Status
-----------------------------------------*
1 external 1
normal
2
external 2
normal
3
port tdmp 3/1
fail
4
port atmp 2/5
normal
5
adaptive tdmp155 5 normal
Clock Supply Status Table(Switch#2)
===================================
Priority Source
Status
-----------------------------------------*
1 external 1
normal
2
external 2
normal
3
port tdmp 3/1
fail
4
port atmp 2/5
normal
5
adaptive tdmp155 5 normal
*Switch@2# reset reference-clock
*Switch@2# change external-clock
4-162
Setting of ATM Functions
5 Setting of ATM Functions

This chapter describes how to set PVC
registration, ATM shaper, OAM, and other
basic functions.
5.1 ATM Path Setting 5-2

5.2 ATM-OAM Setting 5-36
5.3 ATM-APS Setting 5-40
5.4 PVC Isolate 5-46
5.5 ATM Loop Guard Function 5-48
5.6 IMA Function 5-51
5-1
5.1 ATM Path Setting

Configure ATM path settings to suit your operating environment.
[ATM 155 line module]

Registering PVC
Clearing PVC
5-4
Registers a PVC.
5-4
Clears a PVC.
Registering PVC name
Clearing PVC name
5-5
5-5
Blocking/unblocking PVC
Registers a PVC name.
Clears a PVC name.

5-6
Blocks or unblocks a PVC.
Rate mode function 5-8
ATM shaper function
Sets the rate mode.
5-10
Sets the ATM shaper.
AAL5 mode function 5-17

Sets the AAL5 mode.
Setting CLP
5-18
Sets a CLP.
Setting VLAN VC
5-21
Clearing VLAN VC setting
Sets a VLAN VC.

5-21
Clears a VLAN VC setting.
Setting PVC-VLAN mode
5-22
Sets portbase or tagbase for an ATM transmission
path.
5-2

[ATMP/ATMP155 line module]
Registering PVC
Clearing PVC
5-4
Registers a PVC.
5-4
Clears a PVC.
Clearing PVC name
5-5
Registers a PVC name.
5-5
Clears a PVC name.

5-6
Blocks or unblocks a PVC.
Rate mode function 5-8
ATM shaper function
5-10
Setting ATMoP mode
5-23
Setting ATMoP format
Sets the rate mode.
Sets the ATM shaper.
Sets the ATM mode.
5-24
Sets the ATMoP format.
Clearing ATMoP format setting
Setting CLP-priority mapping
CLP Conversion
5-25
Clears the ATMoP format setting.
5-29
Sets the CLP-priority mapping.
5-31
Setting path between ATMs
Sets the CLP conversion.

5-33
Sets a path between ATMs.
Clearing path setting between ATMs
5-34
Clears the pass setting between ATMs.
5-3
5.1.1 PVC setting

Registering PVC
Registering a PVC makes the specified PVC available and ready for communication with the
connected destination. PVC types are the VP connection and the VC connection. The VP
connection allows communication using all VCI values in a registered VPI value.
Commands
set pvc static
Registration of PVC
show pvc information
Display of PVC setting information
Memo
Up to 128 PVCs can be registered per ATMP line module.

Up to 256 PVCs can be registered per ATM155/ATMP155 line module.
Up to 2048 PVCs can be registered per equipment as a whole.
Note
0 to 255 can be used for VPI, and 32 to 16383 can be used for VCI.
in bits of VPI and VCI needs to be within 16 bits.
Note
This function can be used for the ATM155, ATMP, and ATMP155 line modules.
Note
The VP connection can be used for the ATMP and ATMP155 line modules.
However, total width
Clearing PVC
Clears a registered PVC.
Commands
clear pvc static
Clearing of PVC
Memo
If a PVC is cleared, other setting information associated with the PVC are cleared.
5-4

Assigns a PVC name to a VPI/VCI number.
Commands
set pvc name
Registration of PVC name
Memo
If a PVC is cleared, the PVC name corresponding to the cleared PVC is also cleared.
Memo
A PVC name must be 1 to 32 characters long.
Memo
A PVC name may consist of alphabetic letters (both uppercase and lowercase), numbers
(0 to 9), hyphen (-), and underbar (_). A PVC name must begin with an alphabetic letter.
Note
This function cannot be used if the PVC is not registered.
Clearing PVC name

Clears an assigned PVC name.
Commands
clear pvc name
Clearing of PVC name
Note
Note
This function cannot be used if the PVC name is not registered.
5-5
Blocks/unblocks a PVC.
the communication.
Blocking a PVC stops the communication. Unblocking a PVC resumes
Commands
set pvc admin
Setting of PVC blocking/unblocking
set pvc port admin
Setting of enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking
Memo
If a PVC is cleared, this setting is automatically cleared.
Memo
The default value is enable (unblock).
Memo
If the command mode is execution limitation mode, an execution confirmation is issued

after command input when enbloc PVC blocking/unblocking is set.
Note
5-6

Input example
Registration of PVCs (0/32, 0/33, 0/34, and 100)
Assignment of a PVC name to PVCs (0/32 and 100)
Blocking of PVCs (0/34 and 100)
*Switch@1# set pvc static 3/1 0/32-34

*Switch@1# set pvc static 3/1 100
*Switch@1# set pvc name 3/1 0/32 test
*Switch@1# set pvc name 3/1 100 vptest
*Switch@1# set pvc admin 3/1 0/34 disable
*Switch@1# set pvc admin 3/1 100 disable
*Switch@1# show pvc information
PVC System Connection Count
===========================
Configured Configurable
-----------------------4
124
PVC Connection Count
====================
Slot Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable
------------------------------------------------3
2
2
4
124
PVC Table
=========
Port VPI/VCI Name
Admin
--------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 test
enabled
3/1
0/33
enabled
3/1
0/34
disabled
3/1 100/--- vptest
disabled
*Switch@1#
5-7
5.1.2 ATM-QoS
Rate mode function
The rate mode function allows you to specify on a port basis what cells (low rate or high rate) will
receive priority for ATM cell rate control.
The recommended PCR values are:
Low: PCR value below 3000 kbps (default)
High: PCR value of 3000 kbps or higher
Note
If a PCR value of 3000 kbps or higher is set when low is specified, the gap between the
available bandwidth and the set PCR value becomes large. If a PCR value between 384
kbps and 3000 kbps is set when high is specified, the gap between the available
bandwidth and the set PCR value becomes wider. A wider gap may result in ATM cells
being discarded or insufficient use of bandwidth.
Note
If a PCR value below 384 kbps is set, high cannot be specified.
Commands
set atm-shaper mode
Setting of rate mode
show atm-shaper rate
Display of ATM shaper
Note
This function is available only for the ATM155 and ATMP155 line modules.
5-8

Input example
The following example shows how to set the rate mode function.
*Switch@1# set atm-shaper mode 3/1 high

*Switch@1# show atm-shaper rate 3/1
Rate Mode Table
===============
Port Mode
----------3/1 high
ATM Shaper Table(Kbps)
======================
Port
VPI/VCI Class Shaper VP-PCR VC-PCR
MCR
---------------------------------------------------No entry in the table.
*Switch@1#
5-9
ATM shaper function

The ATM shaper function controls the rate of ATM cells. Using a shaper mode and a traffic class
in combination lets you implement an ATM shaper function as appropriate for a specific purpose.
Shaper mode
There are three shaper modes - VP mode, VC mode, and hierarchical VP mode - one of which can
be selected for each ATM shaper. Up to 128 ATM shapers can be set per port. The three
shaper modes are described below.
VP mode:
ATM
VPI
VC mode :
ATM
VPI
An ATM shaper is set on a VPI basis, along with a VPPCR value.

A VPPCR occupies an ATM shaper.
VCI
VPPCR value
VCI
An ATM shaper is set on a VCI basis, along with a VCPCR value.

A VCPCR occupies an ATM shaper.
VCI
VCPCR value
Hierarchical VP mode: An ATM shaper is set on a VPI basis, along with a VPPCR value and a
VCPCR value per subordinate VCI as well. Regardless of the number of subordinate VCPCR
to be set, a VPPCR occupies an ATM shaper.
ATM
VPI
VPPCR value
VCPCR value
VCI
VCI
VCPCR value
5-10

Note
Different shaper modes cannot be set for the same VPI.
Note
Once set, the shaper mode cannot be changed.

current setting and set a new shaper mode.
Note
For the VP connection, only VP mode can be set as the shaper mode.
To change a set shaper mode, clear the
Traffic class
When an ATM shaper is set, a traffic class must be specified per PVC. One of the three traffic
classes - CBR, UBR, and GFR - can be selected. The three traffic classes are described below.
CBR (Constant Bit Rate)

Used for video distribution and other real-time applications, this traffic class guarantees the
accurate delivery of data using precise clock synchronization. CBR guarantees the bandwidth up
to the PCR value set for the ATM shaper.
UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate)

Used for non-real-time, bursty data communications, this traffic class provides no guarantee with
respect to the cell loss ratio and cell transfer delay. UBR allows the use of bandwidth up to the
PCR value set for ATM shaper.
GFR (Guaranteed Frame Rate)

Used for TCP/IP and other similar communications, this traffic class guarantees the minimum cell
rate (MCR). GFR guarantees bandwidth up to the MCR value set for the ATM shaper and allows
the use of bandwidth up to the PCR value.
Note
Since the shaper is controlled only on a VP basis (VPPCR value) when the shaper mode
is the VP mode, priority control is performed based on the traffic class, however the
bandwidth is not guaranteed on a VC basis.
Note
Changing the traffic class may cause momentary disconnection on other PVCs within the
same ATM shaper as the specified PVC.
Note
Priority for each traffic class is as follows.

CBR > GFR >UBR
5-11
Cell rate
Sets the VPPCR value, VCPCR value, or MCR value depending on the combination of the shaper
mode and the traffic class.
The following table shows which setting value is necessary for which shaper mode and which
traffic class.
Traffic class
Shaper mode
VP mode
VC mode
Hierarchical VP mode
CBR
VPPCR value
VCPCR value
VPPCR value/VCPCR value
UBR
VPPCR value
VCPCR value
GFR
VPPCR value
MCR value
VCPCR value
MCR value

MCR value
VPPCR value (VPI PCR value)

Sets the VPPCR value when the shaper mode is VP or hierarchical VP mode.
The PCR value can be set to 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, or 384 kbps or in the range of 500 to
150000 kbps (in steps of 500).
VCPCR value (VCI PCR value)

Sets the VCPCR value when the shaper mode is VC or hierarchical VP mode.
The PCR value can be set to 48, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256, or 384 kbps or in the range of 500 to
150000 kbps (in steps of 500).
MCR value
Sets the MCR value when the traffic class is GFR.
The MCR value can be set to 24, 32, 48, 64, 96, 100, 128, or 150 bps or in the range of 200 to
150000 bps (in steps of 100).
5-12

The following table shows whether oversubscription can be set or not depending on the shaper
mode and traffic class.
Shaper mode
Traffic class within the ATM shaper

CBR
UBR
GFR
CBR, UBR
CBR, GFR
UBR, GFR
CBR, UBR, GFR
VP mode
VC mode
Hierarchical VP
mode
O: Oversubscription can be set within the ATM shaper

: Oversubscription cannot be set within the ATM shaper
: Combination is not available within the ATM shaper (due to one ATM shaper per one PVC)
Note
When adding a PVC to an already set ATM shaper, you can omit setting the VPPCR
value.
Note
When changing the traffic class, you can omit setting the PCR value.
Note
When you change the traffic class from GFR to CBR or UBR, the setting of the MCR value
is automatically cleared.
Note
When the shaper mode is the VC or hierarchical VP mode, the MCR value must not be
greater than the VCPCR value.
Note
When the shaper mode is the VP mode, the total of the MCR values must not be greater
than the VPPCR value.
Note
When the shaper mode is the hierarchical VP mode, the total of the CBR VCPCR values
and the MCR values of the ATM shaper must not be greater than the VPPCR value.
Note
The total available bandwidth for the ATM shapers of a single port must not exceed
150000 kbps. However, if all the ATM shapers of a port have the UBR traffic class, the
total available bandwidth for the ATM shapers may exceed 150000 kbps.
For the available bandwidth, see the next page.
5-13
Available bandwidth
CX2600/200 allows you to check the available ATM shaper bandwidth that is specified in the ATM
shaper setting. The method of calculating the available bandwidth for each shaper mode is
described below.
VP mode
The VPPCR value is calculated as the available bandwidth, regardless of the traffic class.
VC mode
The VCPCR value is calculated as the available bandwidth, regardless of the traffic class.
Hierarchical VP mode
The VPPCR value is calculated as the available bandwidth, regardless of the traffic class.
Note
If all the ATM shapers set for a port have the UBR traffic class, the total of the available
ATM shaper bandwidth can exceed the maximum bandwidth per port (150000 kbps). In
that case, the maximum bandwidth per port is shared by each ATM shaper.
Commands
set atm-shaper rate
Setting of ATM shaper
clear atm-shaper rate
Clearing of ATM shaper
show atm-shaper rate
Display of ATM shaper
show atm-shaper information
Display of effective band
Memo
Note
Note
This function is available only for the ATM155 and ATMP155 line modules.
5-14

Input example
The following example shows how to set ATM shapers.
*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 0/32 vp cbr vppcr 1000

*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 1/33 vc ubr vcpcr 2000
*Switch@1# set atm-shaper rate 3/1 2/34 vpvc gfr vppcr 3000 vcpcr 2000 mcr 500
*Switch@1# show atm-shaper rate 3/1
Rate Mode Table
===============
Port Mode
---------3/1 low
ATM Shaper Table(Kbps)
======================
Port
VPI/VCI Class Shaper VP-PCR VC-PCR
MCR
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 cbr
vp
1000
----3/1
1/33 ubr
vc
--2000
--3/1
2/34 gfr
vpvc
3000
2000
500
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show atm-shaper information 3/1
ATM Shaper Table
================
Port Registered-Shaper Available-Shaper
------------------------------------------3/1
3
125
ATM Shaper Port Rate Table(Kbps)
================================
Maximum- AvailableTotalPort Rate
Rate
Rate
CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
150000
144000
6000
1000
2000
2000
500
ATM Shaper Rate Table(Kbps)
===========================
TotalPort VPI
VCI Shaper Rate
CBR(PCR) UBR(PCR) GFR(PCR) GFR(MCR)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0
--- vp
1000
1000
------3/1
1
33 vc
2000
--2000
----3/1
2
--- vpvc
3000
----2000
500
*Switch@1#
5-15
Limitations
The margin of error between the set value and the actual rate is up to 2%.
When the rate mode is low, however, the margin of error may be greater than 2% for a PCR
value of 59 Mbps or more.
In the case of a bursty traffic from the switch module to the ATM line module, the output may not
reach the shaper setting value.
Burst traffic arising from input bandwidth restriction, input fairness control, or output fairness
control or produced when traffic streams from multiple ports converge may cause cells to
overflow from the queue within the ATM shaper function. In that case, cells may be discarded.
5-16
AAL5 mode function

In order for CX2600/200 to accomplish conversion between ATM cells and Ethernet frames, you
need to set the AAL5 mode for ATM cells on a port basis. Select one of the two AAL5 modes
(EPD and PPD) to define how to discard packets. The two AAL5 modes are described below.
EPD (Early Packet Discard) mode (default)

If the threshold of the output buffer is exceeded, the AAL5 frame is discarded even when that
frame itself is normal.
PPD (Partial Packet Discard) mode

If any cell of an AAL5 frame is discarded, the remaining cells of the frame are discarded.
Commands
set atm-qos aal5
Setting of AAL5 mode
show atm-qos aal5
Display of AAL5 mode
Note
This function is available only for the ATM155 line module.
Input example
The following example shows how to set the AAL5 mode function.
*Switch@1# set atm-qos aal5 3/1 ppd
*Switch@1# show atm-qos aal5
AAL5 Mode Table
===============
Port Mode
------------3/1 ppd
*Switch@1#
5-17
Setting CLP
When performing conversion between ATM cells and Ethernet frames, CX2600/200 sets the ATM
cell CLP value for each PVC based on the Ethernet frame priority.
The following figure shows an example where CLP values are set in ATM cells transferred to PVCs
0/32 and 0/33.
PVC CoS when CLP=1

0/32 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Ethernet frame
CoS = 0
0/33 1, 2,
ATM cell
CLP = 1
0/32
CX2600/200
0/33
Ethernet frame
ATM cell
CoS = 3
CLP = 0
Commands
set atm-qos out-port clp
Setting of CLP
clear atm-qos out-port clp
Clearing of CLP setting
show atm-qos out-port clp
Display of CLP setting
Memo
Note
Note
CLP-based discard control is done on a PVC basis.
Note
If different traffic classes of the ATM shaper function coexist for the same VPI, the cell
discard control based on the ATM shaper function traffic classes takes precedence over
the CLP-based discard control.
Note
5-18

Input example
The following example shows how to set a CLP.
*Switch@1# set atm-qos out-port clp 4/1 0/32 7

*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show atm-qos out-port clp
Output CLP Priority Mapping Table
=================================
Port VPI/VCI Priority(CLP=1)
-----------------------------4/1
0/32 7
*Switch@1#
5-19
5.1.3 PVC-VLAN
CX2600/200
CX2600/200
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
Packet
Network
Packet
Network
ATM cell
Ether frame
Ether frame
Ether frame is segmented by

48byte each and becomes
the payload of the ATM cell.
Ether frame is assembled by

the received ATM cells.
ATM cell
header
Payload
(Segmented Ether frame)
* Encapsulate an Ether frame by an ATM cell
5-20
Setting VLAN VC
The VLAN VC setting function maps registered PVCs to VLANs. By setting a VLAN VC, user
data is transferred to ports for which the same VLAN is set or to PVCs to which the same VLAN is
mapped.
The same VLAN ID can be mapped to more than one PVC (PVC=n:VLAN=1).
Commands
set pvc-vlan table
Setting of VLAN VC
show pvc-vlan table pvc
Display of VLAN VC setting status per PVC
show pvc-vlan table vid
Display of VLAN VC setting status per VLAN
Memo
Note
Note
Clearing VLAN VC setting

Clears a VLAN VC setting.
Commands
clear pvc-vlan table
Clearing of VLAN VC settings
Note
If a VLAN VC setting is cleared when the connection is still maintained, the output of ATM
cells to the cleared VLAN VC may continue for a while. To clear the connection setting
completely, use the "clear pvc static" command.
5-21
Setting PVC-VLAN mode

Like other line modules, the ATM line module allows you to set portbase or tagbase. When
tagbase is set, cells are output with VLAN tags that are mapped to PVCs. When portbase is set,
cells are output with VLAN tags removed.
Commands
set pvc-vlan mode
Setting of PVC-VLAN mode
Memo
The default value is portbase.
Input example
Set VLAN VC 10 for a PVC (0/32).
Set the ATM line module to tagbase.
*Switch@1# set pvc-vlan table 3/1 0/32 10

*Switch@1# set pvc-vlan mode 3/1 tagbase
*Switch@1# show pvc-vlan table pvc
PVC-VLAN Mode Table
===================
Port Base
---------3/1 tag
PVC-VLAN Table
==============
Port VPI/VCI VID VLAN-Name
----------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32
10
*Switch@1#
5-22
5.1.4 ATMoP
CX2600/200
CX2600/200
BTS
RNC
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
ATM cell
ATM cell
PW frame
PW frame
Packet Network
L2 setting
Ether frame
header
UDP/IP
Payload
(ATM cell)
Ether frame
header
IP header UDP
header
Payload
(ATM cell)
* Encapsulate an ATM cell as a PW frame.
Setting ATMoP mode

Sets the mode of a PW path that encapsulates an ATM cell. Also, the mode of a PW path
accepted in decapsulation. VLAN 2-hop tag (c-tag) mode and UDP/IP (udp-ip) mode are
available as the mode types. When UDP/IP mode is used, either of "source" or "destination" can
be specified as the UDP port mode. Also, enabling/disabling the control words can be set for
each mode.
Commands
set atmop mode
Setting of ATMoP mode
show atmop format
Display of ATMoP format information
Memo
The default value is VLAN 2-hop tag (c-tag) mode.
Note
This function is available only for the ATMP and ATMP155 line modules.
5-23
Setting ATMoP format

ATMoP format setting function maps registered PVCs and PW paths. This setting enables
transmission of a PW frame that encapsulates an ATM cell (ATM --> PW conversion) and
transmission of an ATM cell decapsulated from a PW frame (PW --> ATM conversion).
An identical PW path can be mapped for multiple PVCs.
(PVC=n : PW=1)
Also, an Inner VID or a UDP/IP header can be attached to the generated PW frame.
Commands
set atmop format
Setting of ATMoP format
show atmop format
Memo
This setting is cleared automatically when the PVC is cleared.
Note
When an Inner VLAN ID is attached, "c-tag" must have been specified as ATMoP mode.
Note
When a UDP/IP header is attached, "udp-ip" must have been specified as ATMoP mode.
Note
The PVC used for path connection between ATM (within the same port only) cannot be
specified in this function.
Note
When the control words have been enabled in the setting of ATMoP mode, the
communication will be disabled unless the control words are also enabled in the other
unit.
Note
When a path has been set between ATMs, this function cannot be set if the combinations
of the PVC and the Inner-VLAN (or the PVC and the UDP port number) are set
redundantly.
set pvc connection 3/1 0/32 outer 200 inner 3000 5/1 1/40 outer 400 inner 4000
If a path has been set between ATMs as shown above, the following ATMoP format
settings are invalid.
[1] set atmop format 3/2 0/32 00:00:00:00:00:01 outer 100 inner 3000
[2] set atmop format 3/3 0/32 00:00:00:00:00:02 outer 101 inner 4000
5-24
Clearing ATMoP format setting

Clears a ATMoP format setting.
Commands
clear atmop format
Clearing of ATMoP format setting
show atmop format
5-25

Setting example
CX2600/200
VLAN
200
PVC
0/32
MAC
10/
address
00:00:00:00:00:02
CX2600/220
VLAN
VLANVLAN 10
10
Port 8/1
Port 7/1
Packet Network
PW frame
BTS
CX2600/220
DA SA Tag1 Tag2 Type Payload

200 2000
(ATM cell)
VLAN
200
5-26
MAC address
00:00:00:00:00:01

Setting procedure to implement an ATMoP like as the above figure is shown below.
- Set GbE line module (8/1) to tagbase (VID=200).
- Set PVC (0/32) to ATMP line module (7/1).
- Set the c-tag mode to ATMP line module (slot7).
- Map PVC (0/32) to VLAN (VID=200).
*Switch@1# set vlan tagbase 8/1 200

*Switch@1# set pvc static 7/1 0/32
*Switch@1# set atmop mode 7 c-tag
*Switch@1# set atmop format 7/1 0/32 5/100 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200
inner 2000
*Switch@1# show atmop format
ATMoP Table
===========
Source
Packet Source
Control
Slot MAC Address
Format IP Address Port Mode
Word
-----------------------------------------------------------------7 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa c-tag
----disabled
ATMoP L2-Header Table
=====================
VPI/VCI VPI/VCI Destination
Outer Inner
Port (ATM)
(ATMoP) MAC Address
VID
VID
------------------------------------------------------7/1
0/32
5/100
00:30:13:01:01:01 200 2000
ATMoP L3-Header Table
=====================
VPI/VCI Source
Destination
Destination
Port (ATM)
UDP Port IP address
UDP Port
TTL
--------------------------------------------------------7/1 0/32
--------*Switch@1#
5-27
Inserting/removing ATMoP card

A MAC address is uniquely assigned to each ATMoP (ATMP or ATMP155) card. Continuity is
assured when the destination MAC address in a received PW frame matches an ATMoP cards
MAC address. Therefore, when an ATMoP card is replaced, the destination MAC address setting
for the associated equipment needs to be changed to the MAC address of the newly inserted
ATMoP card.
For an ATMoP card to which APS is set, continuity is assured if the MAC address of either Master
or Reserve card is matched. Thus, the continuity is maintained even when APS takes place.
However, if one of the ATMoP cards to which APS is set is removed, the MAC address of the
removed card is instantly disabled, and the continuity is stopped. To minimize frame loss, it is
recommended to change the destination MAC address setting for the associated equipment before
card removal by the following procedure:
1.
Set the APS status of an ATMoP card to be removed to standby.
2.
Change the destination MAC address setting for the associated equipment to the active-side
MAC address.
3.
Remove the ATMoP card.
Memo
Check the MAC addresses for ATMoP cards with the "show system module-id" command.
The MAC address of the sender ATMoP card is assigned as the source MAC address in frames
which this equipment sends to the PW network side. When APS is set, the MAC address of the
firstly installed card is assigned. When the card of one system is not installed, the MAC address
of the installed card of the other system is assigned. This action is immediately reflected when
either card is removed. When this equipment is restarted with both-system cards installed, the
MAC address of the Master card is assigned.
Memo
Use the "show system module-id" command to check the source MAC address of send
frames when APS is set.
5-28
Setting CLP-priority mapping

When encapsulating an ATM cell into an Ether frame with CX2600/200, you can set a CoS value in
the VLAN tag when the ATMoP mode is C-tag, or a CoS value in the VLAN tag and DSCP value in
the IP header when the ATMoP mode is UDP-IP mode, based on the CLP value of ATM cell.
An example of the settings of CoS value for VLAN tag and DSCP value in the IP header based on
CLP when converting an ATM cell flowed from PVC 0/32 into an Ether frame is shown in the next
figure.
CLP
value
Outer tag
CoS value
Inner tag
CoS value
IP header
DSCP value
46
60
CLP-priority conversion map

When the CLP value of the ATM cell is 0
ATM cell
CLP = 0
PVC
0/32
CLP = 1
Inner tag CoS = 5
Outer tag CoS = 2

Inner tag CoS = 0
PVC
0/32
ATM cell
CX2600/200
PVC
0/32
ATM cell
Ether frame
Outer tag CoS = 7
IP header
DSCP = 46
CLP = 1
Ether frame
CX2600/200
CLP = 0
Outer tag CoS = 7
CX2600/200
ATM cell
Ether frame
CX2600/200
PVC
0/32
Ether frame
Outer tag CoS = 2
IP header
DSCP = 60
Memo
The default value of CoS in Outer tag and Inner tag when CLP=0 or CLP=1 is 5.
default value of DSCP in IP header when CLP=0 or CLP=1 is 46.
Memo
5-29
The

Note
This function cannot be set when the PVC has not been registered.
Note
Commands
set atmop in-port priority
Setting of CLP-priority mapping
show atmop in-port priority
Display of CLP-priority mapping setting status
Input example
The following example shows how to set CLP-priority mapping.
*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 7/1 0/32 clp0 outer 4 inner 5 dscp 40 clp1 outer
2 inner 0 dscp 50
*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 7/1 0/33 clp0 inner 1 clp1 outer 3 dscp 20
*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 7/1 0/34 clp0 outer 6 inner 4 clp1 dscp 40
*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 7/1 0/35 clp1 inner 3
*Switch@1# set atmop in-port priority 7/1 0/36 initial
*Switch@1# show atmop in-port priority 7/1
ATMoP Input CLP Priority Mapping Table(c-tag/udp-ip)
====================================================
CLP=0
CLP=1
Port VPI/VCI Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP Outer-tag Inner-tag DSCP
--------------------------------------------------------------------7/1
0/32
4
5
40
2
0
50
7/1
0/33
5
1
46
3
5
20
7/1
0/34
6
4
46
5
5
40
7/1
0/35
5
5
46
5
3
46
7/1
0/36
5
5
46
5
5
46
*Switch@1#
5-30
CLP Conversion
CLP values are modified when an Ether frame is converted to an ATM cell in ATM over Ether.
The following items can be set for every PVC for this CLP conversion.
1.
Transparency setting (transparent-mode)

CLP values are passed without modification.
2.
Fixed-value setting (fix-mode)

CLP values are fixed to either 0 or 1.
3.
Priority-depending setting (priority-mode)

CLP values are determined depending on either CoS or DSCP in Ether frames.
Memo
When the priority-depending setting (priority-mode) is selected, CLP values are

determined depending on CoS if the ATMoP mode is set to "c-tag". If the ATMoP mode
is set to "udp-ip", the values are determined depending on DSCP.
An example of CLP conversion in an ATM cell transferred to the PVCs 0/32 and 0/33 in
"priority-mode" is shown in the next figure.
PVC
0/32
0/33
CoS when CLP = 1

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
1, 2,
ATM cell
Ether frame
CoS = 0
CLP = 1
0/32
CX2600/200
Ether frame
0/33
ATM cell
CLP = 0
CoS = 3
Commands
set atmop out-port clp mode
Setting of CLP conversion mode
set atmop out-port clp priority
Setting of CLP conversion priority
show atmop out-port clp
Display of CLP conversion setting status
5-31

Memo
Setting of CLP conversion modes will be deleted automatically when the PVC is deleted.
Note
CLP conversion modes cannot be set if the PVC has not been registered.
Note
CLP conversion modes can be set for every PVC.

for every line module only.
CLP conversion priorities can be set
Input example
The following example shows how to set CLP conversion.

*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp mode 1/1 1/33 fix 1
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp mode 12/1 0/255 priority
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 1 c-tag 0-7 0
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 12 c-tag 1,6 0
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 12 c-tag 0,2-5,7 1
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 1 udp-ip 0-20 0
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 1 udp-ip 21-63 1
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 12 udp-ip 0-9,20-29,40-49,60-63 0
*Switch@1# set atmop out-port clp priority 12 udp-ip 10-19,30-39,50-59 1
*Switch@1# show atmop out-port clp
Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (c-tag)
=================================================
Slot CLP CoS
---------------------1
0 0-7
1 none
12
0 1,6
1 0,2-5,7
Output CLP Mapping Table on Priority Mode (udp-ip)
==================================================
Slot CLP DSCP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1
0 0-20
1 21-63
12
0 0-9,20-29,40-49,60-63
1 10-19,30-39,50-59
Output CLP Conversion Table
===========================
Port VPI/VCI Mode
CLP
------------------------------1/33 fix
1
1/1
12/1
0/255
priority
--*Switch@1#
5-32
5.1.5 ATM cell relay

CX2600/200
CX2600/220
ATM cell
ATM cell
ATM Network
ATM Network
Setting path between ATMs

Path setting between ATM is a function to relay ATM cells. This function sets a connection to a
PVC between 2 ATM line modules. The relay is available within line modules and between line
modules.
Since this function is used with the ATMoP function, either VLAN IDs or IP addresses and UDP
port numbers must be set. (The VLAN ID value is arbitrary.)
Commands
set pvc connection
Setting of path between ATMs
show pvc connection
Display of path information between ATMs
Memo
Note
An Inner VID must be specified when the ATMoP mode is "c-tag".

An UDP port number must be specified when the ATMoP mode is "udp-ip".
Note
The PVC used for the ATMoP format (within the same port only) cannot be specified in
this function.
Note
Note
When an ATMoP format has been set, this function cannot be set if the combinations of
the PVC and the Inner-VLAN (or the PVC and the UDP port number) are set redundantly.
set atmop format 3/2 0/32 00:00:00:00:00:01 outer 100 inner 3000
5-33

If an ATMoP format has been set as shown above, the following path settings between
ATMs are invalid.
[1] set pvc connection 3/1 0/32 outer 200 inner 3000 5/1 1/40 outer 400 inner 4000
[2] set pvc connection 3/8 0/32 outer 201 inner 5000 5/1 1/40 outer 401 inner 3000

Clears path setting between ATM.
Commands
clear pvc connection
show pvc connection
Display of path information between ATMs
Setting example
CX2600/200
PVC
1/40
PVC
0/32
10/
CX2600/220
VLAN
VLANVLAN 10
10
Port 8/1
Port 7/1
ATM cell
ATM Network
ATM Network
5-34

Setting procedure to implement a path between ATM like as the above figure is shown below.
- Set a connection between PVC (0/32) and PVC (1/40).

*Switch@1# set pvc connection 7/1 0/32 outer 2 inner 200 8/1 1/40
*Switch@1# show pvc connection
ATM Connection Table
======================
Outer Inner UDP
Outer Inner UDP
Port VPI/VCI VID
VID
Port Port VPI/VCI VID
VID
Port
---------------------------------------------------------------------7/1
0/32
2
200
--- 8/1
1/40
2
200
--*Switch@1#
5-35
5.2 ATM-OAM Setting

OAM setting
You can enable or disable OAM alarm monitoring individually for the VP (F4) and VC (F5) levels
with respect to registered path connections.
At the time of path connection registration, the OAM function is enabled by default.
For information about alarm transfer, see "13.1 Alarm Transfer Mechanism".
Setting ATM OAM alarm transfer

To enable or disable ATM OAM alarm monitoring for the VP (F4) or VC (F5) level, use the "set
atm-oam" command. When enabled, alarms are monitored and transferred as shown in the alarm
transfer diagram. When disabled, alarm monitoring is not performed. For the VP level, an
advance setting is available that allows you to specify whether to transfer the VC-AIS or VC-RDI to
all the PVCs belonging to the corresponding VP when VP-AIS is received. In the "set atm-oam"
command parameters, specify the level (VP (F4)/VC (F5)), PVC identifier (line number VPI or
VPI/VCI PVC name), ATM OAM alarm transfer setting (enable/disable), and advanced setting
(f5-generate).
Memo
The advanced setting can be entered only when VP (f4) is specified for the level.
Command
set atm-oam
Setting of ATM-OAM operation
Memo
The default value is enable.
Note
5-36
Setting ATM OAM flow

To set whether an ATM OAM cell in VP (F4)/VC (F5) level is to be terminated by the equipment or
transparent, use the "set atm-oam flow" command. End-End flow and Segment flow can be set
individually. When End point is specified, ATM OAM cells are terminated by the equipment.
When Connecting point is specified, ATM OAM cells are made transparent. When nothing is
specified, no operation is executed when receiving ATM OAM cells. As the parameters of the "set
atm-oam flow" command, level specification [VP (F4)/VC (F5)], PVC identifier (line number/VPI or
"VPI/VCI"/PVC name), flow type (End flow/Segment flow) and flow point type (End
point/Connecting point/nothing) should be input.
Whether the flow point setting is enabled or disabled in ATM OAM is shown below.
F4
Connection
F5
End-End flow
Segment flow
End-End flow
Segment flow
EP
CP
Non
EP
CP
Non
EP
CP
Non
EP
CP
Non
VC connection
VP connection
D: Default setting at VP/VC connection registration

S: Selective setting enabled
N: Selective setting is disabled
Command
set atm-oam flow
Setting of ATM-OAM flow point
Note
Note
5-37
Displaying ATM OAM setting

To display the ATM OAM setting, use the "show atm-oam config" command. In the "show
atm-oam config" command parameter, enter a PVC identifier (if omitted, all relevant information is
displayed).
Input example
The following example shows how to set the VP (F4) or VC (F5) alarm transfer operation.
Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 0 enable

*Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 1 enable f5-generate
*Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 20 disable
*Switch@1# set atm-oam f4 3/1 100 enable
*Switch@1# set atm-oam f5 3/1 0/32 enable
*Switch@1# set atm-oam f5 3/1 1/32 disable
*Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f4 3/1 0 segment end-point
*Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f4 3/1 255 segment connecting-point
*Switch@1# set atm-oam flow f5 3/1 0/32 segment end-point
*Switch@1# show atm-oam config
ATM OAM Config Table
====================
OAM Config(F4)
==============
Port VPI Config
Option
Segment
End-End
-----------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0 enabled none
end-point
end-point
3/1
1 enabled f5-generate
none
end-point
3/1 20 disabled ------3/1 100 enabled none
none
connecting-point
3/1 255 enabled none
connecting-point connecting-point
OAM Config(F5)
==============
Port VPI/VCI Config
Segment
End-End
----------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 enabled
end-point
connecting-point
3/1
1/32 disabled -----
5-38
Displaying ATM OAM status

To display the ATM OAM status, use the "show atm-oam status" command. In the "show
atm-oam status" command parameter, enter a PVC identifier (if omitted, all relevant information is
displayed).
Memo
To display the F1/F2/F3 alarm status, use the "show port information" command.
Input example
The following example shows how to display the ATM-OAM status.
Switch@1# show atm-oam status 3/1

ATM OAM Status Table
====================
OAM Status(F4 Detect/Generate)
==============================
Detect
Generate(gen)
-------------------------- ----------------------------Segment
End-end
Segment
End-end
------------- ------------ ------------- ------------Port VPI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI VP-AIS VP-RDI
-----------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0 detect --detect ----------3/1
1 detect --detect ----gen
--gen
3/1 20 --detect --detect --------3/1 255 detect --detect ----gen
--gen
OAM Status(F5 Detect/Generate)
==============================
Detect
Generate(gen)
-------------------------- -----------------------Segment
End-end
Segment
End-end
------------- ------------- ------------- ------------Port VPI/VCI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI VC-AIS VC-RDI
------------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 ----------------3/1
0/100 detect --detect ----gen
--gen
3/1
0/1000 --detect --detect --------3/1
0/10000 detect --detect ----gen
--gen
3/1
1/32 ----------------3/1
255/32 -----------------
5-39
5.3 ATM-APS Setting

Configure ATM-APS settings to suit your operating environment.
Setting ATM transmission path frame mode
Setting APS function enable/disable
5-41
Sets the ATM transmission path frame

mode.
5-42
Sets the APS function enable/disable.
Setting APS lockout
5-43
Setting APS timer value
Changing over APS
Sets APS lockout.
5-43
Sets the APS timer value.
5-44
Resetting APS changeover
Sets the APS change.

5-44
Resets the APS change.
5-40
APS function
CX2600/200 supports the Auto Protection Switch (APS) function that is compliant with ITU-T
G.783/G.841 Annex.A SDH (Bi-directional/Uni-directional), GR-253 Annex.A SONET
(Bi-directional/Uni-directional), and ITU-T G.783/G.841 Annex.B.
Multiple APSs can be arranged in a vertical direction like as "1 and 3" or "2 and 4". The smaller slot
number (1, 2, 5, 6, 9 or 10) is used as the command parameters.
Example of CX2600/220 unit
CX2600/220
Slot No. 11
TX
ATM155M
ALM
INS
Slot No. 9
Slot No. 7
ALM
INS
ALM
INS
TX
ALM
INS
ALM
INS
TX
RX
TX
RX
ALM
INS
ALM
INS
RX
ALM
INS
FAIL
LINK
TX
RX
TX
RX
Slot No. 10
FAIL
LINK
Slot No. 8
FAIL
LINK
FAIL
LINK
APS-ACT
TX
Slot No. 12
FAIL
LINK
RX
APS-ACT
ATM155M
FAIL
LINK
RX
TX
ATM155M
FAIL
LINK
TX
APS-ACT
ATM155M
FAIL
LINK
TX
APS-ACT
ALM
INS
RX
APS-ACT
ATM155M
FAIL
LINK
APS-ACT
ATM155M
Slot No. 1
RX
APS-ACT
ATM155M
ALM
INS
TX
APS-ACT
ATM155M
FAIL
LINK
APS-ACT
ATM155M
Slot No. 5
Slot No. 3
ALM
INS
RX
APS-ACT
ATM155M
ATM155M
FAIL
LINK
TX
ATM155M
ALM
INS
RX
APS-ACT
Slot No. 6
Slot No. 4
RX
APS-ACT
FAIL
LINK
Slot No. 2
Setting ATM transmission path frame mode

When using Annex.A as the APS operation mode, you first need to set the ATM transmission path
frame mode to choose between SDH and SONET. To set the ATM transmission path frame
mode, use the "set port frame" command. The parameters to be set are the line number (slot
number 1 - 10/port number 1), unused cell treatment method (idle or unassigned), and frame mode
(sdh or sonet). If idle is specified as the unused cell treatment method, the frame mode cannot be
specified.
Commands
set port frame
set aps
Setting of APS enable/disable
show aps information
Display of APS settings and status
5-41

To enable or disable APS, use the "set aps" command. The parameters to be set are the line
number (slot number 1, 2, 5, 6, 9 or 10/port number 1), enable or disable, operation mode (annex-a
or annex-b) and switchover mode (bi or uni).
Commands
set aps
Setting of APS enable/disable
set port frame
Note
Annex.B cannot be specified for a port for which SONET is specified as the frame mode.
Note
APS switchover operation varies depending on the switchover mode (Bi-directional or

Uni-directional).
Bi-directional: When APS switchover has occurred, selects the ACT system synchronizing
with the associated unit.
Uni-directional: When APS switchover has occurred, switches the ACT system without
synchronizing with the associated unit.
5-42
Setting APS lockout

To set APS lockout, use the "set aps lockout" command. The parameters to be set are the line
number (slot number 1, 2, 5, 6, 9 or 10/port number 1) and enable or disable. Disabling APS
clears this setting.
Commands
set aps lockout
Setting of APS lockout
Memo
In cases where APS lockout is enabled only at the office on one side, the APS status may
differ between the local and distant offices. Disabling APS lockout makes the APS status
in the two offices the same.
Note
Make sure that the APS lockout settings in the local and distant offices are the same. If
the distant office does not support the APS lockout function, do not set APS lockout in the
local office.

To set the APS timer value, use the "set aps time" command. The parameters to be set are the
line number (slot number 1, 2, 5, 6, 9 or 10/port number 1), timer (switch response wait time response or switchback wait protection time - recover), and time (response {500 | 1000} msec or
recover 30 - 600 sec). If the APS operation mode is Annex.A, the switchback wait protection time
cannot be specified. Disabling APS clears this setting.
Commands
set aps time
Setting of APS timer values
5-43
Changing over APS

An APS changeover can be made using the "change aps" command. The parameters to be set
are the line number (slot number 1, 2, 5, 6, 9 or 10/port number 1), change mode (forced, manual,
exercise, or lkop), and change port (smaller-number line module - master or larger-number line
module - reserve).
Once an APS changeover is initiated using the command, this status remains unchanged until the
"change aps reset" command is entered.
In the command-initiated change status, automatic switch may become impossible in the event of a
partial line failure.
For details, see the "Command Reference".
Commands
change aps
Changeover of APS
change aps reset
Resetting of APS changeover

Resets the command-initiated changeover status. To do so, use the "change aps reset"
command. The parameter to be set is the line number (slot number 1, 2, 5, 6, 9 or 10/port
number 1).
Commands
change aps reset
APS change reset
change aps
APS change
Display of the APS setting and status information
5-44

Input example
Set the frame mode of ATM transmission paths 9/1 and 10/1 to sonet.
Set the operation mode of ATM transmission paths 9/1 to annex-a and the switchover mode to
bi.
Set the operation mode of ATM transmission paths 10/1 to annex-a and the switchover mode to
uni.
Set the change port of ATM transmission path 9/1 to master and the change mode to forced.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
APS Config
==========
set port frame 9/1,10/1 unassigned sonet

set aps 9/1 enable annex-a bi
set aps 10/1 enable annex-a uni
change aps 9/1 forced master
Response
Recover
Port APS
Time (msec) Time (sec) Mode
----------------------------------------------------------9/1 enabled
1000
300 annex-a(sonet/bi)
10/1 enabled
1000
300 annex-a(sonet/uni)
APS Alarm
=========
Port CMF
FPF
PSBF
TAF
TDF
-------------------------------------------------------------------9/1 ----------10/1 ----------APS Status
==========
Port Status Name
APS Status
Lockout
---------------------------------------------------------------------9/1 active working
forced-switch
disabled
11/1 standby protection forced-switch
disabled
10/1 active working
normal-state
disabled
12/1 standby protection normal-state
disabled
*Switch@1#
5-45
5.4 PVC Isolate

PVC isolate setting
CX2600/200 has the PVC isolate function that suppresses communication between PVCs.
Enabling PVC isolate prevents the transmission of frames to PVCs within a VLAN via ATM
transmission paths.
This suppresses the traffic to ATM transmission paths.
Since PVC isolate is factory-set to disable, frames are transmitted to PVCs within a VLAN via ATM
transmission paths by default.
Setting or clearing PVC isolate

To enable or disable PVC isolate, use the "set pvc isolate" command.
parameter, enter enable or disable.
In the set pvc isolate
Commands
set isolate pvc
Setting/clearing of PVC isolate
show isolate pvc
Display of PVC isolate setting status
Memo
The default value is disable.
Memo
To enable or disable the port isolate function between ATM155 line modules, use the "set
isolate port" command.
Note
5-46

Input example
The following example shows how to enable PVC isolate.
*Switch@1# set isolate pvc 3/1 enable

*Switch@1# show isolate pvc
PVC-Isolate Configuration
=========================
Port Status
-----------------------3/1 enabled
*Switch@1#
5-47
5.5 ATM Loop Guard Function

Setting ATM loop guard function
5-48
Clearing ATM loop detection 5-50
Sets ATM loop guard.
Clears the ATM loop detection status.
Setting ATM loop guard function

The ATM loop guard function is intended to prevent an infinite loop from occurring between the
ATM network and equipment.
An infinite loop occurs if ATM cells transmitted to the ATM network are looped back, causing an
ATM loop, and they are retransmitted to the ATM network.
When ATM loop guard is disabled

D
S
U
D
S
U
ATM
network
CX2600/220
Infinite loop
To enable or disable ATM loop guard, use the "set atm-loop" command.
command parameter, enter enable or disable.
5-48
In the "set atm-loop"

Commands
set atm-loop
Setting/clearing of ATM loop guard
show atm-loop config
Display of ATM loop guard setting status
Memo
This setting is automatically cleared when a PVC is cleared or when a VLAN VC setting is
cleared.
Memo
The default value is disable.
Memo
This function cannot be used if the VLAN VC is not set.
Note
Input example
The following example shows how to enable ATM loop guard.
*Switch@1# set atm-loop 3/1 4094 enable
*Switch@1# show atm-loop config
ATM-Loop Configuration Table
============================
Port VID ATM-Loop
------------------3/1 4094 enabled
*Switch@1#
5-49
Clearing ATM loop detection

To clear the ATM loop detection state, use the "clear atm-loop" command.
command parameter, enter the PVC identifier.
In the "clear atm-loop"
Commands
clear atm-loop
Clearing of ATM loop detection
show atm-loop information
Display of ATM loop trap transmission state
Memo
Clearing of the ATM loop detection state is informed by using a trap if this function is
enabled when an ATM loop occurs.
Note
This functions is not available when the PVC has not been registered.
Input example
Clear the ATM loop detection status.
Display the ATM loop detection status.
*Switch@1# clear atm-loop 10/1 255/32

*Switch@1# show atm-loop information
ATM-Loop Information Table
==========================
Port VPI/VCI VID Detect
--------------------------3/1
1/32 4094 detect
10/1 255/32 4000 --10/1 255/100 4001 detect
*Switch@1#
5-50
5.6 IMA Function

Setting IMA clock mode
Setting IMA group
Clearing IMA group
5-53
5-55
5-59
Sets the IMA clock mode.
Sets the IMA group.
Clears the IMA group.
IMA function
CX2600/200 equips the IMA function that conforms to Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)
Specification Version1.1 (af-phy-0086.001).
The IMA functions of CX2600/200 are listed below.
Item
Description
Line type
T1/E1
IMA version
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Specification Version1.1

(af-phy-0086.001)
Number of IMA groups
Per line module: Up to 4 groups

Per equipment: Up to 48 group
Number of IMA links
Per IMA group: Up to 8 links

Minimum number of available links: 1 to 8 link(s)
IMA frame length
32/64/128/256
Clock mode
ITC (Independent Transmit Clock) / CTC (Common Transmit Clock)
Symmetry mode
Symmetrical Configuration and Operation
Differential delay
T1: 25ms to 282ms

E1: 25ms to 226ms
Scramble setting
T1: Scramble is disabled

E1: Scramble is enabled
5-51

The IMA function is a protocol to implement transmission of ATM cell streams in existing links
(such as T1/E1). It positions between the ATM layer and the physical layer as the IMA sub-layer
and controls multiple physical lines by grouping them as one line. Thus the function enables
formation of a logical link in the higher bandwidth. This grouped logical link is called an IMA
group.
A Cell stream received from the ATM layer is output to the physical lines which have been selected
among those within the IMA group, by using the round-robin sequence. Cells received from the
lines are synchronized with those from other lines within the group and restored as a cell stream.
Thus the stream is transmitted to the ATM layer again.
IMA Group
PHY
PHY
Single ATM cell

stream from the ATM
L
Physical Link #0
Physical Link #1
IMA Group
PHY
PHY
The restored cell stream

to the ATM Layer
Physical Link #2
PHY
PHY
IMA virtual link
Tx direction: Cells are distributed to the lines by using round-robin sequence.

Rx direction: Cells are restored as a single cell stream.
5-52
Setting IMA clock mode

Sets the IMA clock mode. CX2600/200 supports the Common Transmit Clock mode (CTC) and
the Independent Transmit Clock mode (ITC).
CTC
Use the clock distributed from the Tx Clock Unit as the transmission clock for all the lines.
Extraction route of the transmission clock in CTC is shown in the next figure by using thick lines.
Tx Clock
Selector
Local Oscillator
CTC
Tx
ITC
Rx
External Source
LINE 0
Selector
CTC
Tx
ITC
Rx
LINE N-1
ITC
Use the clock extracted from each of the lines as the transmission clock.
Extraction route of the transmission clock in ITC is shown in the next figure by using thick lines.
Tx Clock Unit
Selector
Local Oscillator
CTC
Tx
ITC
External Source
Rx
LINE 0
Selector
CTC
Tx
ITC
5-53
Rx
LINE N-1

Commands
set ima clock
Setting of IMA clock mode
show ima clock
Display of IMA clock mode setting information
Memo
The default setting is the CTC mode.
Note
The atmop mode must be set by the ATMP line mode setting.
Note
When the IMA clock mode is changed, the communication is to be interrupted due to the
IMA group restart processing.
Input example
The following example shows how to set ITC mode as the IMA clock mode of the line module
numbers 2 and 5.
*Switch@1# set ima clock 2,5 itc

*Switch@1# show ima clock 2-6
Transmit Clock Mode Information
===============================
Slot Mode
---------2 itc
3 ctc
4 ctc
5 itc
6 ctc
*Switch@1#
5-54
Setting IMA group

IMA group setting makes multiple physical lines one logical line. IMA group index (1 to 48), line
number (line module number 1 to 12/port number 1 to 8) and IMA ID (0 to 3) are required at
registration. Minimum number of required links, IMA frame length, link differential delay and route
port number also can be specified optionally.
IMA group index

This is the number to identify the IMA group in the equipment. A unique number within the range
can be specified. If the number which has been registered is specified, content of the group is
modified (overwritten) with the specified information.
IMA ID
This is the number to identify the IMA group in the identical line module.
the range can be specified.
A unique number within
Minimum number of required links

This parameter specifies the Minimum number of links required for communication of the IMA
group. Numbers more than the number of the ports that form the IMA group cannot be specified.
Also, if the number of the lines in the IMA group becomes less than the minimum number of
required links with any cause such as link down and line troubles, communication of the IMA group
is stopped. If no number is specified, 1 will be specified as the default.
IMA frame length

This parameter specifies the length of the IMA frame used for IMA protocol control. It can be
specified by selecting either of 32, 64, 128 or 256. If nothing is specified, 128 will be specified as
the default.
Link differential delay

This parameter specifies the maximum delay time to receive the cell transmitted with the
round-robin sequence. The range varies depending on line types: 25 to 282 (msec) for T1 lines
and 25 to 226 for E1 lines. If nothing is specified, 25 (msec) will be specified as the default in
both cases of T1 and E1 lines.
5-55

Route port number
This is the line number specified as the main line among the lines in the IMA group. If this
number is modified when modifying the IMA group's information, restart processing of the IMA
group (synchronizes and re-connects the equipment with the associated equipment) is executed
and its communication is interrupted (communication is not interrupted even if the link of the route
port is down). If no number is specified, the youngest line number among the lines in the group
will be specified.
No communication is established when a PVC is not set to the route port.
Commands
set ima group
Setting of IMA group
show ima group config
Display of IMA group setting information
show ima group status
Display of IMA group status information
Memo
An identical line cannot be registered to multiple IMA groups redundantly.
Memo
Up to 4 IMA groups can be registered per line module.
Memo
Line numbers which belong to multiple (different) line modules cannot be registered to an
identical IMA group together.
Memo
If the number which has been registered is specified, content of the group is modified
(overwritten).
Note
The atmop mode must be set by the ATMP line mode setting.
Note
If the number of the lines in the IMA group becomes less than the minimum number of
required links with any cause such as link down and line troubles, communication of the
IMA group is stopped.
Note
When specifying the IMA group index which has been registered for modification, if the
rout port number is modified, communication of the IMA group is interrupted due to the
restart processing.
Note
No communication is established when a PVC is not set to the route port.
Note
To modify the line mode of an ATMP line module, the IMA group of the relevant line must
be cleared.
5-56

Setting example
CX2600/200
PVC
0/32
Outer tag
VLAN
200
MAC address
CoS = 2
00:30:13:a1:2a:82
CX2600/220
IP address
192.168.2.144
UDP port number

Port 8/1
Port 7/1
5000
Packet network
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
VLAN
200
PVC
0/32
MAC address
00:30:13:01:01:01
IMA group
IP address
10/2, 10/4, 10/6
192.168.2.10
Route port
UDP port number
10/2
5001
5-57

Setting procedure to implement an IMA configuration like as the above figure is shown below.
Make the port numbers from 1 to 8 of ATMP line module number 7 an IMA group. Register it
as route port number 7/1.
(In the associated equipment, port numbers 2, 4 and 6 of ATMP line module number 10 are
assumed to be registered as an IMA group.)

*Switch@1# set atmop format 7 tag-count2 l3 192.168.2.144 5000
*Switch@1# set atmop table 7/1 0/32 5/100 00:30:13:01:01:01 outer 200 inner 3000
32 128 192.168.2.10 5001
*Switch@1# set ima group 1 7/1-8 id 1 links 3 delay 123 root 7/1
*Switch@1# show ima group config
IMA Group Configuration Table
=============================
Min-ReqFrameLink-DiffRootIndex Ports
ID
Links
Length
Delay(ms)
Port
-------------------------------------------------------------------1 7/1-8
1
3
128
123
7/1
*Switch@1# show ima group status 1
IMA Group Status Table
======================
Index ID GSM-State(NE)
GSM-State(FE)
Failure-State
------------------------------------------------------------------1 1
operational
operational
no-failure
IMA Link Status Table
=====================
Port LID TxState(NE) RxState(NE) TxState(FE) RxState(FE) Failure-State
-------------------------------------------------------------------7/1
1 no-given
no-given
no-given
no-given
LIF-failure
7/2
2 active
active
active
active
no-failure
7/3
3 no-given
no-given
no-given
no-given
LIF-failure
7/4
4 active
active
active
active
no-failure
7/5
5 no-given
no-given
no-given
no-given
LIF-failure
7/6
6 active
active
active
active
no-failure
7/7
7 no-given
no-given
no-given
no-given
LIF-failure
7/8
8 no-given
no-given
no-given
no-given
LIF-failure
*Switch@1#
5-58
Clearing IMA group

Clears an IMA group that has been set.
Commands
clear ima group
Clearing of IMA group
show ima group config
Display of IMA group setting information
show ima group status
Display of IMA group status information
Memo
Specify the IMA group index which has been registered.
Input example
Clear the IMA group whose IMA group index is 1
*Switch@1# clear ima group 1

*Switch@1# show ima group config
IMA Group Configuration Table
=============================
*Switch@1# show ima group status
IMA Group Status Table
======================
*Switch@1#
5-59
(Blank page)
5-60
TDM Functions
6 TDM Functions
This chapter describes how to set TDM path
and TDMoP (CES) functions.
6.1 TDM Setting
6-2
6.2 TDMoP Setting
6-19
6.3 TDM APS Setting
6-1
6-41
TDM Functions
6.1 TDM Setting

The CX2600/200 groups time slots on each port of the TDMP line module or time slots on each
logical port of the TDMP155 line module to provide the TDM switching function for intergroup
connections. To enable the TDM switching, configure the TDM group settings to group given time
slots, configure the given group name, and then configure the TDM path settings for intergroup
connections via path.
This section describes setting procedures for the TDM switching.
TDM group setting 6-3
TDM group name setting
TDM path setting 6-13
Groups time slots.
6-9
Gives group names for TDM group numbers.
Connects between TDM groups via path.
6-2
TDM Functions
TDM group setting

The TDMP line module or TDMP155 line module is configured by the TDM group settings.
Time slots of each port on the TDMP line module or time slots of each logical port on the TDMP
155 line module can be grouped with a given number. The TDMP group can be set per time slot.
Up to 31 time slots can be set when the frame type is set to E1 or SDH. Up to 24 time slots can
be set when the frame type is set to T1 or SONET.
Setting range of time slots for frame type and frame format is as follows:
Frame Type
E1
SDH
T1
SONET
Memo
Frame Format
Time Slot Setting Range
CRC-4 Multiframe
1 to 15, 17 to 31
1 to 31
Non-CRC-4
1 to 15, 17 to 31
Unframed
0 to 31
Super Frame (SF)
1 to 24
"CRC-4 Multiframe-no-CAS" mode can send received TS16 transparently.
Setting group for time slots

Groups time slots on lines on the TDMP line module or on logical ports of the TDMP155 line
module with a given number.
Command
set tdm group
Setting of TDM group
Memo
The group can be set only to time slots within the same line or within the same logical
port.
Memo
A unique number can be set for each line or each logical port as the group number.
Memo
Group names registered in the TDM group name setting can be used for the setting.
Note
TDM mode needs to be specified by the TDMP line mode setting.
Note
TDM mode needs to be specified by the TDMP155 line mode setting.
6-3
(E1/T1)
(SDH/SONET)
TDM Functions
Note
Time slot groups cannot be simultaneously specified.
Note
Time slots needs to be grouped by a single value or consecutive values.
Note
To reconfigure the group setting, delete the setting and reconfigure the setting.
Note
When APS is enabled in the TDMP155 line module, a command can be entered only for
the smaller number slot.
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the group when E1 is specified as the frame type in the
TDMP line mode setting.
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 tdm e1 unframed

*Switch@1# set tdm group 1/1 e1 2 0-19
*Switch@1# set tdm group 1/1 e1 1 20-31
*Switch@1#
Time slot configuration of 1 port at E1 specification

0
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Group number 2
Group number 1
The following example shows how to set the group when T1 is specified as the frame type in the
TDMP line mode setting.
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 12 tdm t1

*Switch@1# set tdm group 12/8 t1 24 1-24
*Switch@1#
Time slot configuration of 1 port at T1 specification

1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Group number 24
6-4
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to set the group when SDH is specified as the frame type in the
TDMP155 line mode setting.
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 1 tdm sdh

*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 1/1 sdh 2/5/1 unframed
*Switch@1# set tdm group 1/1 sdh 2/5/1 32 0-31
*Switch@1#
Time slot configuration of 1 logical port at SDH specification

0
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Group number 32
The following example shows how to set the group when SONET is specified as the frame type in
the TDMP155 line mode setting.
*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp155 12 tdm sonet

*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 12/1 sonet 1/7/4 sf
*Switch@1# set tdm group 12/1 sonet 1/7/4 24 1-24
*Switch@1#
Time slot configuration of 1 logical port at SONET specification

1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 -
Group number 24
The following example shows how to set the group by group name specification when E1 is
specified as the frame type in the TDMP line mode setting.

*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 8/5 e1 1 E1_GROUP_1
*Switch@1# set tdm group 8/5 e1 E1_GROUP_1 0-31
*Switch@1#
Time slot configuration of 1 port at E1 specification

0
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Group name E1_Group_1
6-5
TDM Functions
Clearing group setting for time slots

Clears the group setting of time slots of lines on the TDMP line module or time slots of logical ports
on the TDMP155 line module. The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group
number, specification of the group name, per logical port, or on per-line basis.
Command
clear tdm group
Clearing of TDM group
Memo
When the TDMP line module is installed and the command is entered for each line, the
execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.
Memo
When the TDMP155 line module is installed and the command is entered for each logical
port, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.
Note
The group setting that the TDM path is set cannot be cleared.
Note
When the TDMP155 line module is installed, the group setting for each line cannot be
cleared.
Input examples
The following example shows how to clear the group setting by group number specification when
E1 is specified as the frame type in the TDMP line mode setting.
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 e1 32

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the group setting per line number when E1 or T1 is
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/8

Would you like to clear the configuration? :(Y/N): y
*Switch@1#
6-6
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to clear the group setting by group number specification when
SDH is specified as the frame type in the TDMP155 line mode setting.
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 1/1 sdh 2/5/1 32

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the group setting by logical port number specification
when SONET is specified as the frame type in the TDMP155 line mode setting.
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 12/1 sonet 1/7/4

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the group setting by group name specification when E1
is specified as the frame type in the TDMP line mode setting.
*Switch@1# clear tdm group 8/5 e1 E1_GROUP_1

*Switch@1#
6-7
TDM Functions
Displaying group setting for time slots

Shows the group setting of time slots of lines on the TDMP line module or time slots of logical ports
on the TDMP155 line module. The setting can be displayed by the single or multiple group
number specification within a line, per logical port, per line, or on per-device basis.
Command
show tdm group
Note
Display of TDM group setting information
When the corresponding group name is not registered at group name specification, an
error occurs.
Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDM group settings on per-device basis.
*Switch@1# show tdm group

TDM Group Registration Table
============================
Logical
Port Port
Group Name
Time Slot Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------1/1
--1
1-32
e1
1/2
--1
CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_AAAAAAAA 1-32
e1
4/1
3/1/1
32 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_GROUP_BBBBBBB 1
sdh
12/1
1/3/4
24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24
sonet
*Switch@1#
6-8
TDM Functions
TDM group name setting

A group name can be configured for a TDM group number in the TDMP line module or TDMP155
line module.
Setting group name for TDM groups

Sets a given name for a group number in the TDMP line module or the TDMP155 line module.
Command
set tdm group-name
Setting of TDM group name
Memo
This command can be entered only when the TDMP line module or TDMP155 line module
is installed.
Note
An error occurs when a specified frame type is different from the frame type in the line
mode setting.
Note
An error occurs when a redundant group name is set within the same line (or the same
logical port when the TDMP155 line module is installed).
Note
A group name already set cannot be overwritten.
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the group name when the name of "E1GROUP_1" is
specified as the group number1 of the line number 1/1 in the TDMP line mode setting.

*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 1/1 e1 1 E1GROUP_1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
6-9
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to set the group name when the name of "SDHGROUP_1" is
specified as the group number 3 of the logical number 1/1/1 of the line number 3/1 in the TDMP155
line mode setting.
*Switch@1# set port logical-interface 3/1 sdh 1/1/1

*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 3/1 sdh 1/1/1 3 SDHGROUP_1
*Switch@1#
Clearing group name setting for TDM groups

Clears the group name setting of a TDM group. The setting can be cleared by the single or
multiple specification of the group number or specification of the group name.
Command
clear tdm group-name
Clearing of TDM group name setting
Memo
When the parameters are omitted, the execution is confirmed.
Note
When the command to specify a group name is entered and there is not the
corresponding group name, an error occurs.
Note
An error occurs when a specified frame type is different from the frame type in the line
mode setting.
Note
In the "set line mode tdmp" and "set line mode tdmp155" commands, when the command
which changes a frame type is entered, the TDM group name of the corresponding line is
cleared.
6-10
TDM Functions
Input examples
The following example shows how to clear the group name setting for group 1 of the logical port
1/1/1 of the line number 1/1 when SDH is set as the frame type in the TDMP155 line module.
*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 1 SDH_1

*Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sdh 1/1/1 1
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the group name setting for all groups of the logical port
1/1/1 of the line number 2/1 when SONET is set as the frame type in the TDMP155 line module.
*Switch@1# set tdm group-name 1/1 sonet 1/1/1 1 SONET_1

*Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 1/1 sonet 1/1/1
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the group name setting for all groups of the line number
3/8 in the TDMP line module.
*Switch@1# clear tdm group-name 3/8

*Switch@1#
6-11
TDM Functions
Displaying group name setting for TDM groups

Shows the setting of the TDM group name set lines on the TDMP line module or logical ports on
the TDMP155 line module. The setting can be displayed by the single or multiple group number
specification within a line, group name specification, per logical port, per line, or on per-device
basis.
Command
show tdm group-name
Display of TDM group name setting
Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDM group name setting specified on per-device
basis.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show tdm group-name
TDM Group Name Table
====================
Logical
Port
Port
Group Name
-----------------------------------------------------1/8
--1
CX2600_220_MBH_GROUP_NAME_AAAAAA
7/1
3/7/3
32 CX2600_220_SDH_GROUP_NAME_BBBBBB
12/1
3/7/4
24 CX2600_220_SONET_GROUP_NAME_CCCC
*Switch@1#
6-12
TDM Functions
TDM path setting

The path setting for grouped time slots enables connections.
Setting procedures to realize the path setting are explained.
(1) Set two groups for a path to be connected.
(2) Perform the path setting for the group setting.
Setting TDM path

Sets a path by using group numbers or group names.
Command
set tdm path
Setting of TDM path
Memo
A path can be set to groups if the time slot number of the groups to be set is not the same.
Memo
A path can be set to the group settings with the same number of time slots.
Memo
The path is always set bidirectionally.
Memo
The following combination is available for path setting.

E1 and E1, E1 and SDH, SDH and SDH
T1 and T1, T1 and SONET, SONET and SONET
Note
When the TDMP line module is installed, a path cannot be set to groups within the same
line.
Note
When the TDMP155 line module is installed, a path cannot be set to groups within the
same line and the same logical port.
6-13
TDM Functions
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the path between the group 1 of the line number 1/2 and
the group 2 of the line number 3/1 when E1 is specified as the frame type and CRC-4 Multiframe is
specified as the frame format in the TDMP line mode setting.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
line mode tdmp 1 tdm e1 hdb3 crc4

line mode tdmp 3 tdm e1 hdb3 crc4
tdm group 1/2 e1 1 30-31
tdm group 3/1 e1 2 29-30
tdm path 1/2 1 3/1 2
C X 2600 /200
L ine m od ule #1 Port #2

TS0
T S2 9
( *)
T S 30
S et T S 30 to T S3 1
as group1.
Lin e m odu le #3 Por t # 1

T S0
T S 29
T S31
P at h co n n ec tio n
*T S = Tim e slot
6-14
T S30
S et T S 29 to T S 30
as group2.
T S 31
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to set the path between the group 1 of the line number 1/8 and
the group 2 of the logical port 1/1/3 of the line number 2/1 when E1 is specified as the frame type
in the TDMP line mode setting and SONET is specified as the frame format in the TDMP155 line
mode setting.
* When the group number is omitted, group number 1 is assumed.
*Switch@1# set tdm group 1/8 t1 1 1-24

*Switch@1# set tdm group 2/1 sonet 1/1/3 1 1-24
*Switch@1# set tdm path 1/8 2/1 1/1/3
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the path by specification of the group names of
GROUP_NUM_1 of the line number 1/1 and the group 2 of the line number 2/1 when E1 is
*Switch@1# set tdm group 1/1 e1 GROUP_NUM_1 1

*Switch@1# set tdm group 2/1 e1 2 32
*Switch@1# set tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1 2/1 2
*Switch@1#
6-15
TDM Functions
Clearing TDM path

Clears the path setting. The setting can be deleted by the single specification of the group
number, group name specification, per logical port, or on per-line basis.
Command
clear tdm path
Clearing of TDM path
Memo
To clear the path, specify the line number, the group number, or group name of either one
of the two groups that was specified to set the path. (The path setting will be cleared by
specifying the line number, group number, or group name of any group of the two groups.)
Memo
When the TDMP line number is installed and the command is entered per line, the
execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.
Memo
When the TDMP155 line number is installed and the command is entered per logical port,
the execution is confirmed and then the setting is cleared.
Input examples
The following example shows how to clear the path setting by group number specification in the
TDMP line module.
*Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 1

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the path setting by group name specification in the
TDMP line module.
*Switch@1# clear tdm path 1/1 GROUP_NUM_1

*Switch@1#
6-16
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to clear the path setting by group name specification in the
*Switch@1# clear tdm path 2/1 3/7/3 SDH_GROUP_1

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the path setting per logical port number in the
*Switch@1# clear tdm path 4/1 1/7/3

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the path setting per line number in the TDMP line
module.
*Switch@1# clear tdm path 4/5

*Switch@1#
6-17
TDM Functions
Displaying TDM path setting

Shows the path setting. The setting can be displayed by the single group number specification,
multiple group number specification, group name specification, or per logical port within a line, per
line, or on per-device basis.
Command
show tdm path
Display of TDM path setting information
Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDM path settings per device.
*Switch@1# show tdm path

TDM Path Connection Table
=========================
Logical
Port Port
Group Name
Time Slot Type Side
---------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1
--1 CX2600_220_MBH_E1_GROUP_NAME_AAA 1-16
e1
side-A
12/1
--32 12345678901234567890123456789012 16-31
e1
side-B
2/1
1/1/1
24 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_BBBBB 1-24
sonet
side-A
4/1
2/2/2
1 CX2600_220_MBH_SONET_GROUP_CCCCC 1-24
sonet
side-B
*Switch@1#
6-18
TDM Functions
6.2 TDMoP Setting

The CX2600/200 groups time slots on each port of the TDMP line module to provide the TDMoP
function for encapsulating TDM in Ether.
To use the TDMoP function, configure the TDMoP operation mode, the TDMoP mode setting to
select a packet format, and the line mode setting of a line module in which the TDMoP function is
used. Then, configure the TDMoP group settings to group given time slots, and then configure
the TDMoP path settings to execute packet conversion between TDM and PW.
There are two formats used for packet conversion between TDM and PW: TDM over Ether and
TDM over UDP/IP.
(Set a TDMoP variation tolerance and an adaptive clock as needed before setting the TDMoP
path.)
This section describes setting procedures for the TDMoP function.
TDMoP mode setting 6-20
TDMP line mode setting
Sets the TDMP mode.
6-22
Sets the TDMP line mode.
TDMoP group setting 6-23
Groups time slots.
TDMoP variation tolerance setting 6-27
Adaptive clock setting
TDMoP path setting
6-29
Sets a variation tolerance.
Extracts ToP clock from the TDMoP path.
6-33
Connects between TDM and Ether via path.
6-19
TDM Functions
TDMoP mode setting

The TDMoP mode setting selects an operation mode when TDM is encapsulated in Ether and a
packet format after the encapsulation.
SAToP and CESoPSN can be selected for the operation mode, and either of TDM over Ethernet
(MEF8) or TDM over UDP/IP (RFC5086) can be selected for the packet format.
Setting TDMoP mode

Sets the TDMoP mode in the TDMP line module and the TDMP155 line module.
Command
set tdmop mode
Setting of TDMoP mode
Memo
The TDMP line mode and the TDMP155 line mode have to be set to none.
Memo
Either of the following packet formats can be selected.

TDM over Ether (MEF8):
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
Destination MAC Address
Source MAC Address
Source MAC Address
VLAN Ethertype (0x8100)
VLAN ID
VLP C
Ethertype (0x88D8)
ECID (Emulated Circuit Identifier)

Reserve L R M FRG
RTV P X
CC
Reserved (0x102)
Length
PT
Sequence Number
RTP Sequence Number
RTP (Optional)
Timestamp
SSRC Identifier
TDM Payload (Max 256 bytes)
6-20
TDM Functions
TDM over UDP/IP (RFC5086)
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1
Source MAC Address
Source MAC Address

IPVER
IHL
IP TOS
Total Length
Identification
TTL
Fragment Offset
Flags
Protocol
IP Header Checksum
Source IP Address
Destination IP Address
Source Port Number
Destination Port Number
UDP Length
UDP Checksum
RTV P X
CC
PT
RTP Sequence Number

RTP (Optional)
Timestamp
SSRC Identifier
Reserve L R M FRG
Length
Sequence Number
TDM Payload (Max 256 bytes)
FCS
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to SAToP and
the packet format is set to TDM over Ethernet (MEF8).
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 satop mef

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 tdmop e1 hdb3 unframed
*Switch@1# set tdmop group 1/1 e1 1 all
*Switch@1#
6-21
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to CESoPSN
and the packet format is set to TDM over Ethernet (MEF8).
(The number of transmitted frames is 2 and the jitter buffer control method is "dynamic".)
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 cesopsn mef 2 dynamic

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 tdmop t1 b8zs esf
*Switch@1# set tdmop group 1/1 t1 1 1-10
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to SAToP and
the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP.
(The number of transmitted frames is 4, the source IP address is "192.168.100.100" and the flow
identification method is "udp-src".)
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 satop udp-ip 192.168.1.100 udp-src 4

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 tdmop e1 hdb3 crc4nocas
*Switch@1# set tdmop group 1/1 e1 1 all
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the mode when the operation mode is set to CESoPSN
and the packet format is set to TDM over UDP/IP.
(The number of transmitted frames is 8 (omitted) and the source IP address is "192.168.100.4".)
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 cesopsn udp-ip 192.168.100.4

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 tdmop t1 ami sf
*Switch@1#
TDMP line mode setting

The operation modes of the TDMP line module and the TDMP155 line module, frame type, line
code and frame format can be set by the TDMP line mode settings.
For the details of the TDMP line mode setting, see "Setting port attributes" > "Setting the
TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP line mode" in "4.1.1 Port" of this manual.
6-22
TDM Functions
TDMoP group setting

The TDMP and the TDMP155 line modules are configured by the TDMoP group settings. When
the TDMoP operation mode is set to SAToP, time slots from 0 to 31 for E1 (and SDH) and time
slots from 1 to 24 for T1 (and SONET) can be set as a group. When the TDMoP operation mode
is set to CESoPSN, any time slots can be set as a group.
Setting group
Groups time slots of ports on the TDMP and the TDMP155 line modules.
Command
set tdmop group
Setting of TDMoP group
Memo
To specify a time slot number, the TDMoP operation mode needs to be set to the
CESoPSN mode in the TDMoP mode setting.
Memo
A TDMoP group can be set only to the TDMP or TDMP155 line module to which the
TDMoP mode is set.
Memo
A unique number can be set for each line as the TDMoP group number.
Memo
A TDMoP group cannot be set over line modules or lines.
Memo
A time slot number which has already been set as a group cannot be used within the
same slot.
Note
When clearing and reconfiguring the path, which has been set in a condition where the
frame type or number of time slots that is specified in the TDMoP group setting for TDMoP
format setting does not agree with the associated device, a device fault occurs.
When performing the TDMoP group setting for the TDMoP format setting, be sure to
confirm in advance that the frame type setting and number of time slots of the TDMoP
group to be specified agree with the number of time slots and the frame type setting of the
associated device by using the "show tdmop information" command.
Note
If the device fault described above occurs, reset the line module after clearing the TDMoP
path setting and TDMoP group setting, and then reconfigure the TDMoP group
appropriately to newly perform the TDMoP path setting.
6-23
TDM Functions
Input examples
The following example shows how to set the group when E1 is specified as the frame type in the
line mode setting.
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 1 cesopsn mef

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 1 tdmop e1 hdb3 unframed
*Switch@1# set tdmop group 1/1 e1 1 1-32
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the group when T1 is specified as the frame type in the
line mode setting.
*Switch@1# set tdmop mode 2 cesopsn mef

*Switch@1# set line mode tdmp 2 tdmop t1 b8zs
*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to set the group when SDH is specified as the frame type in the
line mode setting.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
tdmop mode 2 satop mef

line mode tdmp155 2 tdmop sdh
logical-interface 2/1 sdh 2/5/1 unframed
tdmop group 2/1 sdh 2/5/1 10 all
The following example shows how to set the group when SONET is specified as the frame type in
the line mode setting.
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set

line mode tdmp155 3 tdmop sonet
logical-interface 3/1 sonet 3/1/4 unframed
tdmop group 3/1 sonet 3/1/4 10 all
6-24
TDM Functions
Clearing group setting

Clears the group settings of time slots of ports on the TDMP line module and the TDMP155 line
module. The settings can be cleared by the single specification of the group number or per line.
Command
clear tdmop group
Clearing of TDMoP group
Memo
A group to which a TDMoP format or TDMoP connection is set cannot be cleared.
Memo
When a single group number is specified, a group number to which a TDMoP group is not
set cannot be specified.
Memo
If a group to which an adaptive clock is set is cleared, the adaptive clock setting is also
cleared.
Memo
If a group to which variation tolerance is set is cleared, the variation tolerance is set back
to the default value.
Memo
When a line number is specified, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is
cleared.
Input examples
The following example shows how to clear the TDMoP group settings when the command is input
by specifying a single group number.
*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 1/1 e1 1

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the TDMoP group settings when the command is input
per line.
*Switch@1# clear tdmop group 12/8

6-25
TDM Functions
Displaying group setting

Shows the group settings of time slots of ports on the TDMP line module and the TDMP155 line
module. The settings can be displayed by the single group specification within a line, multiple
group specification, per line, or on per-device basis.
Command
show tdmop information
Display of TDMoP group setting information
Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDMoP group settings per device.
*Switch@1# show tdmop information

TDMoP Group Count
=================
TUG-3/
Slot STS-1 Enabled Disabled Configured Configurable
------------------------------------------------------1
1
1
0
1
27
1
2
1
0
1
27
1
3
1
0
1
27
2
--1
0
1
127
3
--0
1
1
127
4
1
1
0
1
27
4
2
0
0
0
28
4
3
0
0
0
28
TDMoP Group Table
=================
Logical
Port Port Group Name
Time Slot Type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 1/1/1
1 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_001 all
sdh
1/1 2/5/3
32
all
sdh
1/1 3/2/2
10 CX2600_220_MBH_SDH_3_2_2_GROUP10 all
sdh
2/1
--2
all
e1
3/1
--3 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_003 all
t1
4/1 1/7/4
4 CX2600_220_MBH_CES_MBH_GROUP_004 all
sonet
*Switch@1#
6-26
TDM Functions
TDMoP variation tolerance setting

For TDM-Ether conversion, there is a buffer (jitter buffer) for packets received from the Ether side.
The size of this buffer (TDMoP variation tolerance) needs to be adjusted according to the network
configuration.
Setting variation tolerance

Sets variation tolerance (jitter buffer size) for TDM-Ether conversion.
Command
set tdmop jitter
Setting of variation tolerance
Memo
Only a group number to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.
Memo
Variation tolerance cannot be set to a group number to which a TDMoP format or TDMoP
connection is set.
Memo
If a TDMoP group is deleted, the variation tolerance is set back to the default value (4ms).
Memo
Only 2ms/4ms/8ms can be set as the variation tolerance if the dynamic mode is set as the
jitter buffer method in the setting of TDMoP mode.
Memo
The range available for the setting of variation tolerance varies depending on the number
of frames set in the setting of TDMoP mode. The following table shows the correlations.
Variation
tolerance
Available number of frames
32ms
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
64ms
4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
128ms
6-27
TDM Functions
Input example
The following sequence example shows how to set a variation tolerance.
(When a TDMoP format is set, the variation tolerance is set to 64ms.)
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
line type 12 tdmp

tdmop mode 12 mef
line mode tdmp 12 tdmop t1 b8zs esf
port cable-length 12/5-8 short 399ft
tdmop group 12/5 t1 5 all
tdmop jitter 12/5 5 64ms
tdmop format 12/5 5 00:01:02:03:04:05 CX2600_220_VLAN_0100 ecid 100
Displaying variation tolerance setting

Shows TDMoP variation tolerance. The setting can be displayed by the single group specification
within a line, multiple group specification, per line, or on per-device basis.
Command
show tdmop jitter
Display of variation tolerance
Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDMoP variation tolerance settings per device.
*Switch@1# show tdmop jitter

TDMoP Jitter Configuration
==========================
Port Group Jitter
------------------1/1
1
2ms
12/1
12
32ms
*Switch@1#
6-28
TDM Functions
Adaptive clock setting

Setting adaptive clock
By setting an adaptive clock to any TDMoP group, the line module extraction clock of the source
clock that will be subject to application to the reference clock can be specified.
Command
set tdmop adaptive-clock
Setting of adaptive clock
Memo
Only a group number to which a TDMoP group is set can be specified.
Memo
The adaptive clock cannot be set to a group number to which a TDMoP format or TDMoP
connection is set.
Memo
If a TDMoP group is deleted, the adaptive clock setting is also deleted.
Memo
Up to two line module extraction clocks can be specified for a system. However, up to
one line module extraction clocks can be specified for a system when APS is enabled.
Memo
Multiple extraction clocks cannot be specified from one line module.
Note
A line extraction clock cannot be selected from the line module extracting an adaptive
clock.
Note
An adaptive clock cannot be extracted from the line module which a line extraction clock
has already been selected for.
Note
When an external clock or line extraction clock is selected for the reference clock, a line
alarm may be detected in the TDMoP path associated device extracting an adaptive clock.
Note
In the case that an adaptive clock is extracted during a duplex operation of the switch
module, the adaptive clock supply stops at a system switch for the switch module. In
such a case, the adoptive clock supply restarts after the system switch for the switch
module completes.
Note
When removing or inserting a line module adjacent to the line module extracting an
adaptive clock, the adaptive clock may be out of synchronization for a moment.
However, this has no effect on the continuity.
6-29
TDM Functions
Input example
The following sequence example shows how to set an adaptive clock.
(An adaptive clock is extracted from the TDMoP group (group number 5) which is set to line 12/5.)
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set tdmp mode 12 cesopsn mef

set line mode tdmp 12 tdmop t1 b8zs sf
set port cable-length 12/5-8 short 399ft
set tdmop group 12/5 t1 5 1-10
set tdmop jitter 12/5 5 64ms
set tdmop adaptive-clock 12/5 5 middle
set tdmop format 12/5 5 00:01:02:03:04:05 CX2600_220_VLAN_0100 ecid 2
6-30
TDM Functions
Clearing adaptive clock setting

Clears an adaptive clock mapped to the TDMoP group.
Command
clear tdmop adaptive-clock
Clearing of adaptive clock
Memo
The setting of the adaptive clock to which a TDMoP format or TDMoP connection have
already been set and to which a group of the TDMoP path blocking cancel state is set
cannot be cleared.
Memo
A group number without TDMoP group setting cannot be specified.
Input example
The following example shows how to clear an adaptive clock setting when the command is input by
specifying a single group number.
*Switch@1# clear tdmop adaptive-clock 1/1 1

*Switch@1#
6-31
TDM Functions
Displaying adaptive clock setting

Shows the adaptive clock setting that has already been set and the operation status.
Command
show tdmop adaptive-clock
Display of adaptive clock setting
Input example
The following example shows how to display the adaptive clock settings.
*Switch@1# show tdmop adaptive-clock

TDMoP Adaptive-Clock Table
==========================
Logical
Port
Port
Group Network Type Status
--------------------------------------------1/1
3/7/3
1 narrow
acquiring
3/1
3/7/3
1 narrow
holdover
*Switch@1#
6-32
TDM Functions
TDMoP path setting

Setting path
Connects a path between TDM and Ether by setting a path (by setting the format and connection)
for grouped time slots.
Commands
set tdmop format
Setting of TDMoP format
set tdmop connection
Setting of TDMoP connection
Memo
When a path which loops back at the self card is set by the TDMoP connection setting,
two groups needs to be set within the same line.
Memo
The ECIDs to be set to each group to which a path which loops back is set by the TDMoP
connection setting need to be set separately.
Memo
Do not directly connect ports in that a path which loops back at the self card is set by the
TDMoP connection setting with a cross cable and the like.
Memo
The TDMoP group to which a TDMoP format or TDMoP connection has already been set
cannot be selected.
Memo
An ECID or a UDP number which has already been set cannot be used in the same slot.
Memo
The same ECIDs need to be set to TDMoP groups to be connected with the TDM over
Ethernet (MEF8) format.
Memo
The following combination is available for path setting.

E1 and E1, E1 and SDH, SDH and SDH
T1 and T1, T1 and SONET, SONET and SONET
Note
When communicating with the associated device via a TDMoP path, be sure to confirm in
advance that the settings for the frame type and number of time slots agree with those of
the associated device.
Note
When clearing and reconfiguring the path, which has been set in a condition where the
frame type or number of time slots that is specified in the TDMoP group setting for TDMoP
format setting does not agree with the associated device, a device fault occurs.
Note
If the device fault described above occurs, reset the line module after clearing the TDMoP
path setting and TDMoP group setting, and then reconfigure the TDMoP group
appropriately to newly perform the TDMoP path setting.
6-33
TDM Functions
Note
When CESoPSN is selected as the TDMoP operation mode and consecutive execution of
the following commands is repeated, a failure may occur in the hardware that controls
TDMoP packet, displaying "WR CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (%s)". (The
commands are shown below.)
y TDMoP path setting and deletion commands are executed consecutively.
(set tdmop format/connection, clear tdmop format/connection)
The hardware can be recovered from this failure by executing TDMoP path setting (set
tdmop format/connection) under the same condition.
Note
When CESoPSN is selected as the TDMoP mode at FDM over MPLS and consecutive
execution is performed under the following condition, a failure may occur in the hardware
that controls the TDMoP packet, displaying "WR CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED
(%s)". (The commands are shown below.)
y TDMoP path setting and deletion commands are executed consecutively.
(set tdmop format/connection, clear tdmop format/connection)
y UGSW switching is executed consecutively. (change switch)
The same problem may occur at updating of the MPLS label by Fast Reroute.
The hardware can be recovered by resetting the TDMP/TDMP156 line module from which
the problem occurred.
Note
When UGSW switching occurs due to the occurrence of a failure during TDMP/TDMP155
line module initialization and TDMoP path setting and deletion, the new ACT UGSW that
is used after switching operates in the state before the TDMoP path setting and deletion
configuration is reflected.
Note
When the total number of TDMoP paths that are set in the receiving equipment is around
500 or more, Buffer Underrun may occur in the applicable path.
6-34
TDM Functions
Input examples
The following example shows how to set a format.
(Destination MAC address =
00:01:02:03:04:05, VLAN name = CX2600_220_VLAN_0100, ECID=10)
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set line type 12 tdmp

set tdmop mode 12 satop mef
set line mode tdmp 12 tdmop t1 b8zs esf
set port cable-length 12/5-8 short 399ft
set tdmop group 12/5 t1 5 all
set tdmop jitter 12/5 5 64ms
set tdmop adaptive-clock 12/5 5 wide
set tdmop format 12/5 5 00:01:02:03:04:05 CX2600_220_VLAN_0100 7 ecid 10
C X2 6 0 0 /22 0
CX 26 0 0/2 2 0
Pa th c o nn e c tio n
D es tin a tio n d evice
L in e mo d u le # 12 Po rt # 5
M AC a d d re ss: 0 1 :0 2 :03 :0 4 :0 5 :0 6
6-35
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to set the connection which loops back at the self card. (Port6
and 7 are connected with CX2600_220_VLAN_0200 which is the VLAN name, ECID100, and 200.)
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set

line mode tdmp 12 tdmop t1 b8zs esf
tdmop connection 12/6 6 100 12/7 7 200 CX2600_220_VLAN_0200
The following example shows how to set the connection which loops back inside the local device.
(10/2 and 12/4 are connected with CX2600_220_VLAN_1000 which is the VLAN name, ECID100,
and 200.)
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
tdmop mode 10 cesopsn mef

tdmop mode 12 cesopsn mef
line mode tdmp 10 tdmop e1 hdb3 crc4nocas
line mode tdmp 12 tdmop e1 hdb3 crc4nocas
tdmop group 10/2 e1 1 1-20
tdmop group 12/4 e1 2 2-21
tdmop connection 10/2 1 100 12/4 2 200 CX2600_220_VLAN_1000
Clearing path setting

The setting can be cleared by the single specification of the group number or per line.
Commands
clear tdmop format
Clearing of TDMoP format
clear tdmop connection
Clearing of TDMoP connection
Memo
When the TDMoP connection is set, the path setting for the loopback destination is also
cleared.
Memo
A group number to which a TDMoP group is not set cannot be input.
Memo
When a line number is specified, the execution is confirmed and then the setting is
cleared.
6-36
TDM Functions
Input examples
The following example shows how to clear the path settings when the command is input by
specifying a single group number. (When a format is set.)
*Switch@1# clear tdmop format 1/1 1

*Switch@1#
The following example shows how to clear the path settings when the command is input per line.
(When connection is set.)
*Switch@1# clear tdmop connection 12/8

Displaying path setting status

Shows the path setting as well as TDMoP operation mode/ Packet format/ line number of the
loopback destination/ group number of the loopback destination/ CoS value/ECID, and so on.
The setting can be displayed by the single group specification with in a line, multiple group
specification, per line, or on per-device basis.
Commands
show tdmop format
Display of TDMoP format setting
show tdmop connection
Display of TDMoP connection setting
6-37
TDM Functions
Input examples
The following example shows how to display the TDMoP path setting status per device.
the TDMoP format is set.)
(When
*Switch@1# show tdmop format

TDMoP Mode Config Table
=======================
TDMoP
Packet Filter Frame RTP
Jitter
Slot Mode
Format Mode
Count Header Mode
-----------------------------------------------------1 satop
mef
--8 on
dynamic
2 cesopsn udp-ip udp-src
8 off
static
TDMoP Format Address Table
==========================
Source
Source
Slot MAC Address
IP Address
---------------------------------------1 00:30:13:a1:2a:aa --*00:30:13:a1:2a:af
2 00:30:13:a1:2a:ab 192.168.100.100
TDMoP Format L2 Config Table
============================
Logical
Destination
Port Port
Group MAC Address
VID CoS
ECID
----------------------------------------------------------1/1
--1 00:00:00:00:00:01 1000
7 1048575
2/1
1/1/1
2 00:00:00:00:00:02 2000
6
--TDMoP Format L3 Config Table
============================
Logical
Source
Destination
Destination
Port Port
Group UDP Port IP Address
UDP Port
TTL DSCP
----------------------------------------------------------------------2/1
1/1/1
2
65535 172.1.1.1
2142 255
63
*Switch@1#
6-38
TDM Functions
The following example shows how to display the TDMoP path setting status per device.
the TDMoP connection is set.)
(When
*Switch@1# show tdmop connection

TDMoP Mode Config Table
=======================
TDMoP
Packet Filter Frame RTP
Jitter
Slot Mode
Format Mode
Count Header Mode
-----------------------------------------------------3 satop
udp-ip udp-src
7 on
dynamic
4 cesopsn mef
--5 off
static
TDMoP Connection L2 Config Table
================================
Logical
Logical
Port Port
Group
ECID Port Port
Group
ECID VID CoS
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
--3
--- 3/4
--5
--- 3000
7
4/1
3/7/3
6 1048575 7/1
3/7/3
7 1000000 2000
7
TDMoP Connection L3 Config Table
================================
Logical
UDP
Logical
UDP
Port Port
Group Port Port Port
Group Port
-------------------------------------------------------3/1
--3 65535 3/4
--5 3000
*Switch@1#
Displaying path operation status

Shows the Buffer Underrun /TDMoP path blocking status.
The operation status can be displayed by the single group specification with in a line, multiple
group specification, per line, or on per-device basis.
Command
show tdmop status
Memo
Display of TDMoP path setting status information
When packets at Ether side of the TDMoP path are not received or a problem occurs with
received packets, a Buffer Underrun status occurs (fault).
6-39
TDM Functions
Input example
The following example shows how to display the TDMoP path operation status per device.
*Switch@1# show tdmop status

TDMoP Status Table
==================
Logical
Port
Port
Group Underrun Admin
---------------------------------------1/1
--1
normal
enabled
1/2
--2
fault
enabled
1/7
--3
normal
enabled
1/8
--4
fault
disabled
3/1
1/1/1
1
fault
disabled
3/1
2/1/1
1
normal
enabled
3/1
3/2/3
1
fault
enabled
*Switch@1#
6-40
TDM Functions
6.3 TDM APS Setting

The CX2600/200 provides the APS function (Auto Protection Switch: automatic line system change
function) in the TDMP155 line module.
In the TDMP155 line module, the frame mode (SDH/SONET) is set by the "set line mode tdmp155"
command.
For description of the APS function, see the following items in "5.3 ATM-APS Setting" in this
manual.

Setting APS lockout
Changing over APS
6-41
TDM Functions
Memo
When the connection of Ether side is temporarily disconnected due to APS system
switching or other reasons in the connection status shown below, an AIS frame is inserted
at TDMP155 (or TDMP).
Since each TDMoP path is in the SAToP mode, the AIS-compatible frame is transparent
in the path. The AIS-compatible is detected at the TDMP155 line module in the network,
and then RDI is inserted.
The inserted RDI is transparent just like AIS, and it may be detected at the other device.
* In the case shown by the following figure, the CX2600/200 on the left side has
executed APS system switchover.
[5] RAI is detected.
[1] Ether communication is

temporally disconnected due to
APS system switching or other
reason
[2] AIS-compatible frame is sent

responding to Ether
communication disconnection
CX2600/200
The other
device
TDMP
6/1
UGSW
CX2600/200
TDMP155
5/1
TDMP155
7/1
The other
device
TDMP155
6/8
TDMoP path (SAToP)

TDM connection
8/1
TDMP155
5/1
UGSW
TDMP
6/1
TDMP155
7/1
TDMP155
10/1
6/8
[3] Returns RDI responding to a

higher alarm (AIS) detection
APS setting
Note
When APS setting is completed in the TDMP155 line module for the TDMoP path
transmitting equipment and APS switching occurs, AIS may be detected by the temporary
packet loss at the lower-stream switch from the receiving equipment.
6-42
EtherOAM Function
7 EtherOAM Function
This chapter describes basic functions and
setting procedures of EtherOAM.
7.1 EtherOAM Function

7.2 EtherPS Function
7.3 EtherRing Function
7-1
7-2
7-27
7-41
EtherOAM Function
7.1 EtherOAM Function

With EtherOAM function, the continuity status between units can be checked using ETH-CC
(Ethernet Continuity Check), ETH-LB (Ethernet LoopBack), ETH-LT (Ethernet Link Trace),
ETH-DM (Ethernet Delay Measurement), and ETH-LM (Ethernet Loss Measurement) frames.
To use this function, groups need to be organized in units of MEG (ME Group), and end points
(MEP: MEG End Point) needs to be registered per direction (switch inside and outside), port,
VLAN, and MEG Level. Also, intermediate points (MIP: MEG Intermediate Point) needs to be
registered per port, VLAN, and MEG Level.
Periodically exchanging ETH-CCM frames between MEPs belonging to the same MEG enables
failure trap notification to maintenance personnel if there are communication errors. Also, sending
ETH-LBM frames, ETH-LTM frames, ETH-LMM frames and ETH-DMM frames from MEPs to MIPs
of the relay route or to associated MEPs enables check of frame communication status between
units with the response results.
ETH-CC failure types

If failures have occurred when MEPs monitor each failure information at ETH-CCM frame
reception, traps are notified per MEP. The default status is no failure status.
(1) LOC (Loss Of Continuity)

Failure content
No reception of ETH-CCM frames from an associated MEP.
Detection condition
No reception of ETH-CCM frames during the period 3.5 times as long as

the period value set to a MEP in the reception side.
Cancel condition
Reception of three ETH CCM frames during the period 3.5 times as long
as the period value set to a MEP in the reception side.
(2) RDI (Remote Defect Indication)

Failure content
Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is added

from an associated MEP.
Detection condition
Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is added at

a MEP in the reception side.
Cancel condition
Reception of ETH-CCM frames to which ETH-RDI information is not added

at a MEP in the reception side.
7-2
EtherOAM Function
(3) Unexpected MEG Level
Failure content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEG Level.
Detection condition
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a MEG Level value lower than
the MEG Level value set to a MEP in the reception side.
Cancel condition
During the period 3.5 times as long as the period value set to a MEP in the
reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a MEG
Level value lower than the MEG Level value set to a MEP in the reception
side.
(4) Mismerge
Failure content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEG ID.
Detection condition
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct MEG Level value

and a MEG ID which is not set to the MEP in the reception side.
Cancel condition
reception side, no reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a correct
MEG Level value and a MEG ID which is not set to the MEP in the
reception side.
(5) Unexpected MEP

Failure content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different MEP ID.
Detection condition

and MEG ID and an associated MEP ID which is not set to a MEP in the
reception side.
Cancel condition
MEG Level value and MEG ID and a MEP ID which is not set to the MEP
in the reception side.
(6) Unexpected Period

Failure content
Reception of an ETH-CCM frame which has a different Period.
Detection condition

and MEG ID and MEP ID, and a Period value which is not set to a MEP in
the reception side.
Cancel condition
MEG Level value and MEG ID and MEP ID, and a Period value which is
not set to a MEP in the reception side.
7-3
EtherOAM Function
Memo
Failure monitoring is continued without failure trap control at port link down.
Note
The failure trap may not be notified while exchanging the switch.
Note
Regarding the frame priority in the unit for the line direction, the user data is given priority
over Ether-OAM. Therefore, when the user data is streamed at full rate, protocol frames
may not be transmitted. This can be avoided by setting the total bandwidth of the
transmitted traffic to less than 100% with the bandwidth control function.
7-4
EtherOAM Function
Setting EtherOAM commands

Each command needs to be set to operate the EtherOAM functions.
Setting EtherOAM frame common information
Setting reply frame returning period
Setting MEG
7-9
Setting MEP
7-10
7-8
Sets LTR/LBR returning period.
Sets MEP.
7-11
Sets the ID of an associated MEP.
7-12
Sets MIP.
Setting ETH-CC transmission and reception
Setting RDI operation
Sets frame common information.
Sets MEG.
Setting associated MEP IDs
Setting MIPs
7-7
Follow the procedure below.
7-13
7-14
Executing EtherOAM Loop Back test
Sets ETH-CC frame transmission and

reception.
Sets ETH-RDI information addition.
7-15
Activates the loopback function.
7-5
EtherOAM Function
Executing EtherOAM Link Trace test
7-16
Activates the link trace function.
Executing EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement

test 7-17
Setting test target MEP
7-18
Executing EtherOAM Loss Measurement test
Activates the delay judgment function.
Sets MEP to be tested.
7-19
7-6
Activates the loss measurement function.
EtherOAM Function
Setting EtherOAM frame common information

Sets destination multicast MAC addresses and protocol type values which are used for EtherOAM
frames. The set values are used for EtherOAM frame transmission and reception.
Commands
set ether-oam frame
Setting of EtherOAM frame common information
show ether-oam frame
Display of EtherOAM frame common information
Among set multicast addresses, select destination multicast addresses of ETH-CCM and
ETH-LBM frames (Class1) and those of ETH-LTM frame (Class2). These addresses are used
when multicast CC and multicast LB are executed. The following shows how to figure Class#1
and #2.
Class1 = (Set MAC address && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F0) || MEG Level [0-7]
Class2 = (Set MAC address && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F8) || MEG Level [0-7]
[Usage example]
When "01:80:c3:00:00:ff" is set as the multicast address:
The following values will be set as the destination multicast address of the EtherOAM frame
transmitted from a MEP which belongs to the MEG with the MEG Level "1".
Class1 = (01:80:c3:00:00:ff && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F0) || 1 = 01:80:c3:00:00:f1
Class2 = (01:80:c3:00:00:ff && FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:F8) || 1 = 01:80:c3:00:00:f9
Memo
A frame which has a set MAC address and a protocol type is treated as an EtherOAM
frame. Check the setting contents before using EtherOAM.
Memo
Multicast addresses shown below cannot be specified as destination MAC addresses.

01:00:5E:00:00:00 to 01:00:5E:7F:FF:FF
01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:2F
01:19:A7:00:00:00 to 01:19:A7:00:00:FF
Memo
The following values are set by default:

Multicast MAC address Class1: 01:80:c2:00:00:30
Multicast MAC address Class2: 01:80:c2:00:00:38
Protocol type: 0x8902
7-7
EtherOAM Function
Note
Set the same setting as other switches using EtherOAM.

correct operation is not guaranteed.
If the setting is different,
Note
Do not set this setting during ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception, loopback test,
link trace, delay measurement, and loss measurement.
Setting reply frame returning period

At loopback (multicast) test and link trace test, you can set per unit whether to return response
frames of received ETH-LBM and ETH-LTM frames after the random time from 0 to 1 second or
return them immediately.
In the default setting, after loopback frame is received in an associated MEP, the response frame
is returned after the random time from 0 to 1 second. After link trace frame is received in a MIP or
an associated MEP, the response frame is immediately returned.
Commands
set ether-oam reply-period
Setting of Reply frame returning period
show ether-oam reply-period
Display of Reply frame returning period
7-8
EtherOAM Function
Setting MEG
Sets MEG groups to use EtherOAM function. In the MEG setting, specify transmission period of
MEG ID, MEG Level, and ETH-CC by each group. The setting unit of ETH-CC transmission
period is 3.33, 10, 100 milliseconds, 1, 10, or 60 seconds. Setting MEGs enables MEP setting for
corresponding groups.
Commands
set ether-oam meg
Setting of MEG
show ether-oam meg
Display of MEG setting information
clear ether-oam meg
Clearing of MEG
Memo
MEGs can be set up to 1536 MEGs for unit.
Memo
When MEPs are set to MEGs, the MEGs cannot be cleared.

related MEPs first.
Memo
A MEG ID can be specified with a string of up to 13 characters, or a 32-digit hexadecimal

number.
7-9
To clear the MEGs, clear all
EtherOAM Function
Setting MEP
Sets MEPs after setting MEG groups. In this MEP setting, link among ports, VLANs, MEGs,
transmission/reception directions (switch inside or outside), and MEP IDs are created. With this
link, EtherOAM function can be used between MEPs within the same MEG.
In ports in which tagbase VLANs are set, specifying untag parameter instead of VLANs enables
transmission and reception of EtherOAM frames without VLAN tags. Transmission/reception
direction of MEPs for which untag is specified is only switch outside.
Commands
set ether-oam mep
Setting of MEP
show ether-oam mep
Display of MEP setting information
clear ether-oam mep
Clearing of MEP
Memo
After checking that MEGs are set, set MEPs.
Memo
Even in ports where link is down, a MEP whose switch direction is inside processes
frames.
Memo
If an unsupported Opcode frame is received in GbE-PV2 line module, the frame is

discarded if its MEG Level is lower than that of the MEP, and the frame is transmissive if
its MEG Level is higher than that of the MEP. If an unsupported Opcode frame is
received in TDMP/TDMP155/ATMP/ATMP155 line module, they are all discarded.
Note
When setting MEP to a port with link aggregation configuration, EtherOAM function may
not work normally on that MEP.
Note
When the VLAN that is used for MEP is not registered or the VLAN is accidentally deleted,
the EtherOAM function does not work. The same can be said for the VLAN that is used
for EtherPS or EtherRing.
Note
When a MEP is to be registered with the same VLAN ID as the control VLAN of
EtherRing, the MEG level of the MEP should be set to lower than the MEG level of the
control VLAN of EtherRing.
7-10
EtherOAM Function
Setting associated MEP IDs

Sets associated MEPs in units of MEP. ETH-CCM frame reception from associated MEPs
registered here can be monitored. ETH-CCM frames received from associated MEPs which are
not registered are treated as abnormal frames. For each associated MEP, the reception
monitoring can be enabled or disabled.
Commands
set ether-oam peer-mep
Setting of associated MEP ID
clear ether-oam peer-mep
Clearing of associated MEP ID
Memo
After checking that MEPs are set, register associated MEPs.

registered, failure monitoring is not performed.
If associated MEPs are not
Memo
An associated MEP ID of a specified MEP can be cleared in the following cases.

- When the reception in units of local MEP is disabled, IDs of all associated MEPs for the
corresponding local MEP can be cleared.
- When the reception in units of local MEP is enabled and the reception in units of the
associated MEP is disabled, only the corresponding associated MEP ID for the
corresponding MEP can be cleared.
7-11
EtherOAM Function
Setting MIPs
Sets MIPs which are halfway points of ETH-LBM and ETH-LTM frames as relay points between
MEPs. In this MIP setting, ports, VLANs, and MEG Levels are linked.
Commands
set ether-oam mip
Setting of MIP
show ether-oam mip
Display of MIP setting information
clear ether-oam mip
Clearing of MIP
Memo
MIPs can be set up to eight groups for each line module in GbE-PV2 line modules.
Multiple VLANs (up to 4094 VLANs) can be assigned for one group.
Memo
Even in ports where link is down, a MIP whose switch direction is inside processes
frames.
Memo
If unsupported Opcode frames are received, they are made transparent unconditionally.
Note
When setting MIP to a port with link aggregation configuration, EtherOAM function may
not work normally on that MIP.
Note
It should be noted that when the VLAN that is used for MIP is not registered or the VLAN
is accidentally deleted, the EtherOAM function does not work subsequently.
7-12
EtherOAM Function
Setting ETH-CC transmission and reception

ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception between MEPs set in the local unit and associated
MEPs enables check of connection with associated units. ETH-CCM frame transmission and
reception monitoring can be set separately. Enabling reception monitoring starts monitoring of
ETH-CCM frame reception from associated MEPs. Enabling transmission monitoring starts
ETH-CCM frame transmission according to transmission period of a MEG to which a MEP belongs.
When failures are detected, autonomous message and traps are output.
Command
set ether-oam cc
Setting of EtherOAM Continuity Check transmission
Memo
After checking that MEPs and the associated MEPs are set, set the ETH-CC transmission
and reception setting. Moreover, transmission to switch inside or outside depends on
MEP settings. For MEP settings, refer to the "Command Reference".
Memo
Using MEP setting information display command, ETH-CC transmission and reception
setting can be checked.
Memo
Even in ports where link is down, a MEP whose switch direction is inside monitors
ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception.
Memo
As performing CC monitoring on the E-OAM, if a portbase VLAN is set to the GbE-PV on

the route, the CC monitoring cannot be performed.
Memo
Disabling
the
ETH-CC
reception
monitoring
during
ETH-CCM
frame
transmission/reception enables failure clearing for a MEP and all associated MEPs. If a
new failure occurs, a failure recovery trap notification is output per MEP.
Note
If a destination MAC address is specified in this ETH-CC transmission and reception

setting, ETH-CCM frame is sent only to one corresponding address. If ETH-CCM frames
are to be sent to multiple associated MEPs, specify multicast transmission.
7-13
EtherOAM Function
Setting RDI operation

Sends ETH-CCM frames which are transmitted to a MEP set as a local unit from an associated
MEP with adding ETJ-RDI information when LOC is detected due to timeout of ETH-CC receiving.
This function keeps sending ETH-CCM frames with ETH-RDI information to the other unit until the
LOC is recovered. Enabling this function allows the associated MEP to be noticed that a local unit
has an LOC failure.
Command
set ether-oam rdi
Memo
Setting of RDI operation
ETH-CCM frames with ETH-RDI information are not transmitted unless the ETH-CCM
frame transmission is enabled in the ETH-CC transmission and reception setting.
7-14
EtherOAM Function
Executing EtherOAM Loop Back test

Sends ETH-LBM (LoopBack Message) frame from a specified MEP and checks reception of
frames returned back in a MIP in a relay route or associated MEP. Unicast LB and multicast LB
functions are supported.
To perform unicast LB, send ETH-LBM frame with a specified MAC address as the destination
MAC address. MEPs or MIPs which belong to the same MEG Level and have the corresponding
MAC address return ETH-LBR (LoopBack Reply) frames in response to each ETH-LBM frame.
Thus, connection normality can be checked between the two points.
To perform multicast LB, send ETH-LBM frames to which multicast DA is given. All MEPs
belonging to the same MEG Level return ETH-LBR frames in response to each ETH-LBM frame.
Thus, existence of all the MEPs in the corresponding MEG Level can be checked.
In source MEPs, ETH-LBR frame reception is monitored for up to five seconds, and the reception
results are shown.
Command
loopback ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test
Memo
After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LB. Moreover, execution to switch inside
or outside depends on MEP settings. For MEP settings, refer to the "Command
Reference".
Memo
Even in ports where link is down, a MEP whose switch direction is inside performs
ETH-LBM/ETH-LBR frame transmission and reception.
Note
Multiple commands of ETH-LB execution cannot be started simultaneously. Also,

commands of ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution, ETH-DM execution and ETH-LM
execution cannot be started simultaneously.
7-15
EtherOAM Function
Executing EtherOAM Link Trace test

Sends ETH-LTM (Link Trace Message) frame from a specified MEP and checks a route to MIP in
the relay route or associated MEPs.
Using this command, send an ETH-LTM frame from a MEP to a specified MAC address (Target
MAC address). If there is a port leaning the Target MAC address after the MIP in the relay route
received the ETH-LTM frame, the MIP transfers the ETH-LTM frame to the port, and an ETH-LTR
(Link Trace Reply) frame is returned to the originating MEP.
When an associated MEP receives an ETH-LTM frame, an ETH-LTR frame is returned to the
originating MEP after confirmation that the Target MAC address is learned. The ETH-LTM frame
is terminated at this point.
Also, a MIP in the relay route or an associated MEP returns ETH-LTR frames to the originating
MEP also when each MAC address and Target MAC address are agreed and the ETH-LTM
frames are terminated.
After monitoring ETH-LTR frames for five or ten seconds, an originating MEP shows the
destination MAC address of the received ETH-LTR frames in the order of TTL.
Command
linktrace ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Link Trace test
Memo
After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-LT. Moreover, execution to switch inside
or outside depends on MEP settings. For MEP settings, refer to the "Command
Reference".
Memo
ETH-LTM/ETH-LTR frame transmission and reception.
Memo
The information indicating whether ETH-LTR frame is sent because a Target MAC
address has been learned (RlyFDB) or LTR is sent because a Target MAC address has
hit a MAC address of a MIP in a relay route or an associated MEP (RlyHit) is given in
LTR.
Note
Multiple commands of ETH-LT execution cannot be started simultaneously. Also,

commands of ETH-LT execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-DM execution and ETH-LM
7-16
EtherOAM Function
Executing EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test

Sends ETH-DMM (Delay Measurement Message) frame from a specified MEP and measures
delay time of frames to an associated MEP. In ETH-DM execution, the local MEP sends a
ETH-DMM frame storing frame transmission time (TxTimeStampf) to a specified MAC address
destination.
After receiving the ETH-DMM frame, an associated MEP stores the reception time
(RxTimeStampf) and the transmission time (TxTimeStampb) newly in the frame time information
and send the information as an ETH-DMR (Delay Measurement Reply) frame to the originating
MEP.
After receiving the ETH-DMR frame, the originating MEP measures frame delay time by comparing
the frame time information with frame reception time in the local unit (RxTimeb).
This unit sends ETH-DMM frame periodically to measure the maximum of frame delay time (Delay
Maximum), the minimum (Delay Minimum), the average (Delay Average), and the variation (Delay
Variation).
Command
dm ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Frame Delay Measurement test
Memo
Only Two-way ETH-DM is supported for this unit.
Memo
Frame delay time (Frame Delay) is calculated by the following calculating formula.
Frame Delay = (RxTimeb TxTimeStampf) (TxTimeStampb RxTimeStampf)
If this unit receives ETH-DMM frames, values to be stored in the ETH-DMR frame
(TxTimeStampb RxTimeStampf) are 0.
Memo
ETH-DMM/ETH-DMR frame transmission and reception.
Memo
After checking that MEPs are set, execute ETH-DM. Moreover, execution to switch
inside or outside depends on MEP settings. For MEP settings, refer to the "Command
Reference".
Note
Multiple commands of ETH-DM execution cannot be started simultaneously. Also,

commands of ETH-DM execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution and ETH-LM
7-17
EtherOAM Function
Setting test target MEP

To perform a frame loss measurement, setting of a test target MEP is required.
In the setting of the test target MEP, priority of the frame to be measured and a MEP to be
measured are registered.
Commands
set ether-oam lm
Setting of test target MEP
show ether-oam lm
Display of test target MEP setting information
clear ether-oam lm
Clearing of test target MEP
Memo
After checking that MEPs are set, set the test target MEP.
Memo
Even in ports where link is down, a test target MEP whose switch direction is inside
processes frames.
Memo
Only when a MEP is set on a port to which tagbase VLAN is set, priority of the frames to
be counted can be specified. When a MEP is set on a port to which portbase VLAN is
set, all priority of frames are measured.
Memo
To specify a priority of frames, MEPs needs to be set on a port to which tagbase VLAN is
set both for local/associated unit. Furthermore, the values to specify as priority must be
same values for both local/associated units.
7-18
EtherOAM Function
Executing EtherOAM Loss Measurement test

Sends ETH-LMM (Loss Measurement Message) frame from a specified MEP and measures frame
losses to an associated MEP. In ETH-LM execution, the local MEP sends an ETH-LMM (Loss
Measurement Message) frame storing frame transmission counter (TxFcf) to a specified MAC
address destination.
After receiving the ETH-LMM frame, an associated MEP stores the LMM reception counter (RxFcf)
and the LMR transmission counter (TxFcb) newly in the frame counter and sends the information
as an ETH-LMR (Loss Measurement Reply) frame to the originating MEP.
After receiving the ETH-LMR frame, the originating MEP measures the number of frame losses
and the rate of frame losses by comparing the LMM reception counter (RxFcf) and LMR
transmission counter (TxFcb) with frame transmission counter information (TxFcf) and reception
counter information (RxFcl) in the local unit.
This unit sends ETH-LMM frame periodically to measure the number of transmission frame losses
(far_end), number of reception frame losses (near_end), rate of transmission frame losses (Rate of
Frame Loss Far), and rate of reception frame losses (Rate of Frame Loss Near).
Command
lm ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Loss Measurement test
Memo
Only Single-ended method ETH-LM is supported for this unit.
Memo
The number of frame losses (Sum of Frame Loss) and the rate of frame losses (Rate of
Frame Loss) are calculated by the following calculating formulas:
[Sum of Frame Loss]
Sum of Frame Loss Far = (TxFcf previous TxFcf) (RxFcf previous RxFcf)
Sum of Frame Loss Near = (TxFcb previous TxFcb) (RxFcl previous RxFcl)
[Rate of Frame Loss]
Rate of Frame Loss Far =
Sum of Frame Loss Far / Number of transmitted frames on the testing device side
Rate of Frame Loss Near =
Sum of Frame Loss Near / Number of received frames on the tested device side
Memo
Even in ports where link is down, a MEP to be tested whose switch direction is inside
processes ETH-LMM/ETH-LMR frame transmission/reception.
7-19
EtherOAM Function
Memo
After checking that MEPs and the MEPs to be tested are set, execute ETH-LM.
Moreover, execution to switch inside or outside depends on MEP settings. For MEP
settings, refer to the "Command Reference".
Memo
Loss measurement for the following frames is available with the ETH-LM function:
- User frames
- EtherOAM frames with higher MEG level than the MEP to be tested
- ETH-CCM frames with the same MEG level as the MEP to be tested
- ETH-APS frames with the same MEG level as the corresponding MEP
Note
Multiple commands of ETH-LM execution cannot be started simultaneously. Also,

commands of ETH-LM execution, ETH-LB execution, ETH-LT execution and ETH-DM
Setting examples
In the configuration shown below, MEPs and a MIP are set in unit A and B, and communication is
performed between MEPs of the unit A and B.
CX2600/220
(Unit A)
Operator layer
Core SW
CX2600/220
(Aggregation SW) (Unit B)
MEP
ETH-CC frame flow
MIP
ETH-LB frame flow

ETH-LT frame flow
ETH-DM frame flow
ETH-LM frame flow
7-20
EtherOAM Function
The following shows a figure corresponding to the above figure. For CX2600/220 unit A, MEP is
set to port 7/1. For CX2600/220 unit B, MEP is set to port 7/1, and MIP is set to port 12/1.
Aggregation
SW
CX2600/220 Unit A
CX2600/220 Unit B
CX2600/220
GbE-PV2:
slot11 / port1
CX2600/220
GbE-PV2:
MEP (slot7 / port1)
GbE-PV2:
MIP (slot12 / port1)
GbE-PV2:
MEP (slot7 / port1)
MEP
MIP
7-21
EtherOAM Function
The setting procedure when EtherOAM is used, in the network configuration in the figure in the
previous page is explained. After setting MEPs and associated MEPs and MIP to each unit,
ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception is performed. Also, loopback, link trace, delay
judgment, loss measurement test are performed from unit A to unit B.
<Unit A>
*Switch@1# set ether-oam frame 01:00:00:00:00:00 0xfffe
*Switch@1# set ether-oam meg 1 MEG0001 0 period 1s
*Switch@1# set ether-oam mep 1 7/1 100 1 inside 10
*Switch@1# set ether-oam peer-mep 1 20
*Switch@1# set ether-oam cc 1 transmit-enable receive-enable
*Switch@1# set ether-oam rdi 1 enable
*Switch@1# set ether-oam lm 1 all
*Switch@1# show ether-oam mep index 1
Ether OAM MEP Information
=========================
MEP Index :
1 Port : 7/1
=============================
VID
: 100
MEG Level
: 0
MEG Index
: 1
MEG ID
: MEG0001
Position
: inside
MEP ID
: 10
CC Priority
: 7
Transmit
: enabled
Receive
: enabled
Kind
: multicast
DES MAC Address : 01:00:00:00:00:00
RDI
: enabled
ETH-CC Fault Table
==================
Status : normal
Ether OAM Peer MEP Information
==============================
Peer MEP ID Condition RDI-Received
-----------------------------------20
normal
no-rdi
7-22
EtherOAM Function
<Unit A>
*Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 1
Ether OAM Loopback Port Information
===================================
Port
: 7/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VID
: 100
MEG ID
: MEG0001
MEP ID
: 10
MEG Level : 0
Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Result Information
===============================================
1
00:30:13:b0:01:01
*Switch@1#
Switch@1# linktrace ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 wait 5s ttl 5 priority 7
Ether OAM Link Trace Port Information
=====================================
Port
: 7/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VLAN ID
: 100
MEG ID
: MEG0001
MEP ID
: 10
MEG Level
: 0
Ether OAM Link Trace Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01
=============================================================
TTL MAC Address
Relay Action
-----------------------------------4 00:30:13:a0:01:f9 RlyFDB
3 00:30:13:b0:01:01 RlyHit
Trace Complete
*Switch@1#
7-23
EtherOAM Function
<Unit A>
*Switch@1# dm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 count 10 second-period 1
Ether OAM Delay Measurement Port Information
============================================
Port
: 7/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VID
: 100
MEG ID
: MEG0001
MEP ID
: 10
MEG Level
: 0
During an ETH-DM examination........
Ether OAM Delay Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:b0:01:01
====================================================================
Request DMM
: 10
Receive DMR
: 10
Delay Minimum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Maximum(msec) : 0.11
Delay Average(msec) : 0.11
Delay Variation(msec) : 0.00
Error Count
: 0
Result
: complete
*Switch@1#
7-24
EtherOAM Function
<Unit A>
*Switch@1# lm ether-oam 1 00:30:13:b0:01:01 count 10 second-period 1
Ether OAM Loss Measurement Port Information
===========================================
Port
: 7/1
MAC Address : 00:30:13:a0:01:01
VID
: 100
MEG ID
: MEG0001
MEP ID
: 10
MEG Level
: 0
During an ETH-LM examination.....
Ether OAM Loss Measurement Result Information for 00:30:13:a0:01:01
===================================================================
Examination MEP Index : 1
Examination MEP ID
: 10
Target Priority
: all
Request LMM
: 11
Receive LMR
: 11
Sum of Frame Loss Far : 0
Sum of Frame Loss Near : 0
Error Count
: 0
Result
: complete
*Switch@1#
7-25
EtherOAM Function
<Unit B>
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
vlan tagbase 7/1 100

vlan tagbase 12/1 100
ether-oam frame 01:00:00:00:00:00 0xfffe
ether-oam reply-period linktrace random
ether-oam meg 1 MEG0001 0 period 1s
ether-oam mep 1 7/1 100 1 inside 20
ether-oam peer-mep 1 10
ether-oam mip 1 12/1 100 0
ether-oam cc 1 transmit-enable receive-enable
ether-oam rdi 1 enable
ether-oam lm 1 all
7-26
EtherOAM Function
7.2 EtherPS Function

CX2600/200 has EtherPS function which complies with ITU-T G.8031/Y.1342. EtherPS uses
EtherOAM Continuity Check function (ETC-CC) and PDU format (ETH-APS) to perform protection.
CX2600/200 EtherPS supports the following functions.
Function
Supported or not
Switchover method
1+1
Not supported
1:1
Supported
Unidirection
Not supported
Bidirection
Supported
Switching protocol
1-phase
Supported
Switchback mode
Revertive
Supported
Non-revertive
Supported
Direction
Remarks
EtherPS function deals with two physical lines as an active system (Working) and a standby
system (Protection) as one logical line. To connect a local office to the other office, connect an
active system to the other active system or connect a standby system to the other standby system
because EtherPS function switches by exchanging ETH-APS frames with the other office.
A system that exchanges user frames to be protected (Protected Traffic) is called an active
system, and a system that exchanges Protected Traffic after system switching is called a standby
system. When no system switching occurs, a standby system exchanges user frames not to be
protected (Extra Traffic). Switching state is shown as ACT or SBY. Protected Traffic is
exchanged on the ACT side. Since Extra Traffic is exchanged on the standby system, no Extra
Traffic is exchanged when the state of the standby system is ACT.
ETH-APS frames
Standby system (Protection)
CX2600/220 Unit A
CX2600/220 Unit B
CX2600/220
Protected traffic
Extra traffic
CX2600/220
Active system (Working)
7-27
EtherOAM Function
EtherPS states
States of EtherPS are described below. The upper EtherPS state in the table has priority to be
changed to. When the EtherPS is set as locked out, the state is not changed.
EtherPS state
Description
lockout-of-protection (LO)
LO (Locked out) state caused by state changing command
signal-fail-for-protection (SF-P)
SF-P occurred state caused by failure detection at standby

system
forced-switch (FS)
FS (forced switch) state caused by state changing command
signal-fail-for-working (SF)
SF occurred state caused by failure detection at active system
manual-switch (MS)
MS (manual switch) state caused by state changing command
wait-to-restore (WTR)
Waiting state for being switched back because of failure

recovery of active system (only in revertive mode)
exercise (EXER)
EXER (test request) state caused by state changing command
reverse-request (RR)
Making a response state for test request
do-not-revert (DNR)
Recovering state caused by failure recovery of active system

(only in non-revertive mode)
no-request (NR)
State without changing request
Triggers of EtherPS state change are described below.

Trigger of EtherPS state change
Description
local-lo
State change caused by LO order of local office
local-sf-p
State change caused by SF-P detection in local office
local-fs
State change caused by FS order of local office
local-sf
State change caused by SF detection in local office
local-ms
State change caused by MS order of local office
local-wtr
State change caused by SF recovery of local office
local-exer
State change caused by EXER order of local office
local-rr
State change caused by EXER detection in local office
local-dnr
State change caused by SF recovery of local office
local-nr
State change caused by NR order of local office
remote-lo
State change caused by LO order of the other office
remote-sf-p
State change caused by SF-P order of the other office
remote-fs
State change caused by FS order of the other office
remote-sf
State change caused by SF order of the other office
remote-ms
State change caused by MS order of the other office
remote-wtr
State change caused by SF recovery of the other office
remote-exer
State change caused by EXER order of the other office
remote-rr
State change caused by RR order of the other office
remote-dnr
State change caused by DNR order of the other office
remote-nr
State change caused by NR order of the other office
7-28
EtherOAM Function
Triggers of EtherPS state change are described below.
Line state
Active system ACT
Standby system SBY
Active system SBY
Standby system ACT
EtherPS state
LO
SF-P
FS
SF
MS
WTR
EXER
RR
DNR
NR
{*
{*
* Only in non-revertive mode
7-29
EtherOAM Function
EtherPS failure types

SF(-P) failures
Failures of signal-fail-for-working (SF) and signal-fail-for-protection (SF-P) are monitored.
Detection condition of signal-fail
Link down
Description
Detection of port link down
*
Loss Of Continuity (LOC)
Link down caused by port blocking or state change of line

module to OUS/UMMOUNT is detected without any
protection time of Hold-off timer.
LOC detection by EtherOAM ETH-CC function

*
Line module failure
LOC which has same MEG level as the setting value of

control VLAN of EtherPS is detected.
Detection of CR/MJ failure in line modules

*
Detects without any protection time of Hold-off timer.
ETH-APS failures
Various failures are monitored when sending/ receiving APS frames.
(1) FOP-PMb (Failure of Protocol Provisioning Mismatch (the "B" bit mismatch))
Failure content
Wrong switchover method: 1+1/1:1
Detection condition
ETH-APS frame with mismatched B bit is received.
Cancel condition
ETH-APS frame without mismatched B bit is received.
(2) FOP-PMa (Failure of Protocol Provisioning Mismatch (the "A" bit mismatch))
Failure content
Wrong APS channel
Detection condition
ETH-APS frame with mismatched A bit is received while receiving frame

without mismatched B bit is received.
Cancel condition
ETH-APS frame without mismatched A bit is received while receiving

frame without mismatched B bit.
7-30
EtherOAM Function
(3) FOP-PMd (Failure of Protocol Provisioning Mismatch (the "D" bit mismatch))
Failure content
Wrong direction: uni-directional/bi-directional
Detection condition
ETH-APS frame with mismatched D bit is received while receiving frame

without mismatched B bit is received. However, it is not detected when
detecting A bit mismatch simultaneously.
Cancel condition
ETH-APS frame without mismatched D bit is received while receiving

frame without mismatched B bit is received.
(4) FOP-PMr (Failure of Protocol Provisioning Mismatch (the "R" bit mismatch))
Failure content
Wrong switchback mode
Detection condition
ETH-APS frame with mismatched R bit is received while receiving frame

without mismatched B bit is received. However, it is not detected when
detecting A bit or D bit mismatch simultaneously.
*
Cancel condition
EtherPS state is changed with the detection according to

"Request/State" in the ETH-APS frames.
ETH-APS frame without mismatched R bit is received while receiving

frame without mismatched B bit is received.
(5) FOP-NR (Failure of Protocol No Response)

Failure content
Wrong selector direction with the other office
Detection condition
Sent "Requested Signal" does not match received "Requested Signal" in

more than 50msec.
Cancel condition
APS frame with the same "Requested Signal" value as sent one is
received.
(6) FOP-CM (Failure of Protocol Configuration Mismatch)

Failure content
Wrong connection: active system/standby system
Detection condition
ETH-APS frame is received from active system.

*
Cancel condition
Note
Outside MEP setting in the same MEG level as EtherOAM function is

required for the active system.
ETH-APS frame is never received from active system in 17.5sec.
Regarding the frame priority in the unit for the line direction, the user data is given priority
over Ether-PS. Therefore, when the user data is streamed at full rate, protocol frames
may not be transmitted. This can be avoided by setting the total bandwidth of the
transmitted traffic to less than 100% with the bandwidth control function.
7-31
EtherOAM Function
Setting EtherPS
To get the EtherPS function to work, some command settings are required.
Follow the procedure below.
Setting EtherPS enable/disable 7-32
Setting ETH-APS frames
Setting EtherPS timer
7-33
7-34
Sets EtherPS enabled
Sets ETH-APS frames
Sets each timer
Setting EtherPS enable/disable

Sets EtherPS function enabled/disabled.
method/direction/switchback mode.
When setting enabled, also set switchover
Commands
set ether-ps
Setting of EtherPS enable/disable
show ether-ps config
Display of EtherPS configuration information
7-32
EtherOAM Function
Setting ETH-APS frames

Sets ETH-APS frames. ETH-APS frames are sent/received when the same MEG level of Outside
MEP as EtherOAM function is set for active/standby system.
(1) Setting EtherPS control VLAN

Sets the value of control VLAN and MEG level.
Commands
set ether-ps control-vlan
Setting of EtherPS control VLAN
(2) Setting EtherOAM frame common information

Sets the values of destination multicast address and protocol type. The values used for
EtherOAM frames are used for the destination multicast address of ETH-APS frames and protocol
type.
Commands
set ether-oam frame
Setting of EtherOAM frame common information
show ether-oam frame
Display of EtherOAM frame common information
7-33
EtherOAM Function
Setting EtherPS timer

(1) Wait to Restore (WTR) timer
Sets a protection time until switching back to an active ACT system from a standby ACT system as
a SF failure recovery. If another SF is detected during the protection time, the timer stops. This
function works only in revertive mode.
When "0" is set for the timer value, it means infinite for the protection time and any switchback to
an active ACT system from a standby ACT system never occurs even on a SF failure recovery. If
EtherPS is set as locked out, any switchback never occurs even after the protection time expired.
Default value
5min
Customizable range
0, 5 - 12min (by 1min)
Commands
set ether-ps time
Setting of EtherPS timer
(2) Hold-off timer

Sets a protection time until detecting SF failure occurrence/recovery. If EtherPS is set as locked
out, any SF failure occurrence/recovery is never detected even after the protection time expired.
Default value
500msec
Customizable range
0 - 7000msec (by 500msec)
Commands
7-34
EtherOAM Function
Changing EtherPS state

Changing EtherPS state
Performs EtherPS state changeover. There are various changeover types such as Lockout,
Forced Switch, Manual Switch, test request (Exercise). Changeover may not be performed
depends on EtherPS state. This function does not work when EtherPS is set as locked out.
EtherPS state
Changeover type
Lockout
Forced Switch
Manual Switch
Exercise
lockout-of-protection
signal-fail-for-protection
forced-switch
signal-fail-for-working
manual-switch
wait-to-restore
exercise
reverse-request
do-not-revert
no-request
{: Can be changed over
X: Cannot be changed over
Commands
change ether-ps
Changeover of EtherPS state
show ether-ps status
Display of EtherPS status
7-35
EtherOAM Function
Resetting EtherPS state changeover

Resets EtherPS state changeover. Resetting changeover may not be performed depends on
EtherPS state. This function does not work when EtherPS is set as locked out.
EtherPS state
Resetting changeover
signal-fail-for-protection
forced-switch
signal-fail-for-working
manual-switch
wait-to-restore
exercise
reverse-request
do-not-revert
no-request
{: Changeover can be reset
X: Changeover cannot be reset
Commands
change ether-ps reset
Resetting of EtherPS state changeover
7-36
EtherOAM Function
Setting EtherPS lockout

Sets EtherPS lockout. When EtherPS is set as locked out, trigger of state change is not detected.
Perform same EtherPS lockout setting both for local office and the other office. If the setting is
performed only to one office, the EtherPS state may become unmatched between local office and
the other office. To resolve this situation, disable the EtherPS lockout.
Commands
set ether-ps lockout
Setting of EtherPS lockout
Setting examples
As the configuration shown below, EtherPS settings are performed for unit A and B, and
communication is performed between unit A and B.
Operator layer
CX2600/220
Core SW
CX2600/220
(Unit A)
(Aggregation SW)
(Unit B)
MEP
Active system (Working)
ETH-CC frame flow

Protected Traffic
Standby system (Protection)
ETH-CC frame flow

ETH-APS frame flow
Extra Traffic
7-37
EtherOAM Function
A figure corresponding to the figure above is shown below. EtherPS settings are performed with
CX2600/220 unit A9/1 (active system), 11/1 (standby system), and CX2600/220 unit B 10/1 (active
system), 12/1 (standby system).
Extra Traffic
CX2600/220 Unit A
CX2600/220 Unit B
CX2600/220
GbE-PV2:
slot9/port1
CX2600/220
Aggregation SW
GbE-PV2:
slot11/port1
GbE-PV2:
slot12/port1
GbE-PV2:
slot10/port1
Protected Traffic
The setting procedure for the case using EtherPS with the network configuration shown in the
previous page is described. Specify a switchover method, switchover direction, and switchback
mode for each unit, and then enable EtherPS. After enabling EtherPS, set MEP and the other
MEP, and then send/receive ETH-CCM and ETH-APS frames.
Set user frames to be protected (Protected Traffic) to an active system, and set user frames not to
be protected (Extra Traffic) to a standby system.
7-38
EtherOAM Function
<Unit A>
*Switch@1# set ether-ps 9/1 enable 1:1 bi revertive
*Switch@1# set ether-ps control-vlan 9/1 enable 500 3
*Switch@1# set ether-ps time 9/1 wtr 10
*Switch@1# set vlan ethertype 9/1 0x9100
*Switch@1# set vlan tagbase 9/1 500-1000
*Switch@1# set vlan tagbase 11/1 1001-1500
*Switch@1# set port protection-time gbe 9/1 link-up 0
*Switch@1# set port protection-time gbe 9/1 link-down 0
*Switch@1# set ether-oam frame 01:80:c2:00:00:40 0x0600
*Switch@1# set ether-oam meg 1 MEG1 3 period 3.33ms
*Switch@1# set ether-oam mep 20 9/1 500 1 outside 20
*Switch@1# set ether-oam mep 21 11/1 500 1 outside 21
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-ps config
Ether PS Config
===============
Change
Revertive
Port ETH-PS
Mode
Direction
Mode
WTR(min)
------------------------------------------------------------9/1 enabled 1:1
bi-direction revertive
10
Ether PS Frame Config
=====================
Multicast MAC Address : 01:80:c2:00:00:40
Protocol Type
: 0x0600
=========================================
Port Control VID MEG Level Priority
-------------------------------------9/1
500
3
7
*Switch@1#
7-39
EtherOAM Function
<Unit A>
*Switch@1# show ether-ps status
Ether PS Status
===============
Port Status Name
ETH-PS Status
Request
Lockout
-------------------------------------------------------------------------9/1 active working
no-request
local-nr
disabled
11/1 standby protection no-request
local-nr
disabled
Ether PS Alarm
==============
Port FOP-PMb FOP-NR FOP-CM FOP-PMa FOP-PMd FOP-PMr
-------------------------------------------------------9/1 ------------*Switch@1#
<Unit B>
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
set
ether-ps 10/1 enable 1:1 bi revertive

ether-ps control-vlan 10/1 enable 500 3
ether-ps time 10/1 wtr 10
vlan ethertype 10/1 0x9100
vlan tagbase 10/1 500-1000
ether-oam frame 01:80:c2:00:00:40 0x0600
ether-oam meg 1 MEG1 3 period 3.33ms
ether-oam mep 1 10/1 500 1 outside 1
ether-oam mep 2 12/1 500 1 outside 2
7-40
EtherOAM Function
7.3 EtherRing Function

CX2600/200 provides the EtherRing function which is compliant with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1731. The
EtherRing function performs a protection switchover in a ring topology using ETH-CC (Ethernet
Continuity Check) of EtherOAM and R-APS_PDU for ring control.
The EtherRing function in CX2600/200 supports the following functions:
Supported Function
Remarks
Switchover control
Single ring
(per port)
Switchover for a group (instance) which consists

of multiple VLANs is not supported.
Switchback mode
Revertive
(automatic switchback)
Non-revertive (manual switchback) is not

supported.
In a steady state where one node with an RPL port is set among nodes that are connected in the
form of a ring, the EtherRing function unblocks the RPL port and blocks the failed port to switch
paths in case of a line failure in the ring.
The communication downtime during path switchover differs depending on the setting of the
maximum MAC learning count mode (16K/512K). It is recommended to set the maximum MAC
learning count mode to 16K because the downtime will become longer with 512K entry mode.
7-41
EtherOAM Function
When no failure occurred (steady state)

R-APS control frame
RPL Owner
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
RPL port
User frame
When a failure occurred
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
CX2600/220
Unblock the RPL port
Failure
occurred
Block the failed port
Unblocked port
Blocked port
7-42
EtherOAM Function
Glossary
Words and terms used for the EtherRing function are described below.
Term
Description
RL (Ring Link) port
Port included in the ring
RPL (Ring Protection Link) port
Port which blocks communications with user frames and R-APS

control frames to prevent loops in a ring in a steady state
RPL Owner
Node which has the RPL port in the ring
Ring index
Identifier assigned for the device within the ring
Ring ID
ID used to identify the ring
R-APS control frame
Frame used to control ring switching
EtherRing states
The following node and port states can be caused by the EtherRing function.
Node states
Node states are described below.
Node state
Description
idle
State where only an RPL port has been blocked and no fault has
occurred at every link in the ring
protection
State where one or more failures occurred at a link(s) in the ring, or

switchback has been performed after a fault recovery
Port states
Port states are described below.
Port state
rpl-block
Description
State where an RPL port has been blocked
This state can be assumed at a port that has been set as an RPL port.
forward
State where user frames and R-APS control frames can be

communicated
signal-fail
State where a link fault was detected and the port with the fault has
been blocked
recovery
State where a link fault has been recovered
wait-to-restore
State where a switchback to the steady state has been performed

after a link fault recovery
This state can be caused at a port that has been set as an RPL port.
7-43
EtherOAM Function
Correlation between node state and port state

Correlation between node state and port state is described below.
Port state
rpl-block
forward
signal-fail
recovery
wait-torestore
idle
protection
Node state
{: Correlated
: Not correlated
State change trigger

Triggers for node/port state change are described below.
State change trigger
Description
local-nr
State change caused by NR order from local node
local-sf
State change caused by SF detection at local node
remote-nr
State change caused by NR order from remote node
remote-sf
State change caused by SF detection at remote node
Memo
The port state and state change trigger displayed by the "show ether-ring status"
command is "---" by default of ring setting.
7-44
EtherOAM Function
Types of EtherRing failures

Failures detected in EtherRing are described below.
SF failures
The following failures cause the EtherRing function to switch paths as signal-fail (SF) failures.
Failure
Link down
Description
Link down of a port was detected.
Link down caused by a port block, or a line module state change to
OUS/UNMOUNT, is detected without protection time of the Hold-off
timer.
LOC (Loss Of Continuity)
LOC was detected by EtherOAM ETH-CC function.

LOC of lower level than the MEG level which has been set for the
control VLAN of EtherRing is detected.
Line module failure
Major (MJ) failure of a line module was detected.

*
This failure is detected without protection time of the Hold-off timer.
R-APS failure
The EtherRing function monitors the following failure as an R-APS failure.
Failure
Loop Detection
Description
Frame loop was detected in the ring.
<Detection condition>
Detected when 16 R-APS control frames are received within
10msec per instance
<Release condition>
Released at a deletion by the command
7-45
EtherOAM Function
Setting EtherRing
Each command needs to be set to get the EtherRing function to work.
below.
Enabling EtherRing
7-47
Enable EtherRing
Setting EtherRing control VLAN
Setting RPL port
7-47
Set the EtherRing control VLAN
7-48
Set the RPL port
Setting EtherRing timers
7-48
Set the EtherRing timers
The following command needs to be set to disable the EtherRing function.
Disabling EtherRing
Follow the procedure
7-54
Disables EtherRing
7-46
EtherOAM Function
Enabling EtherRing
Enables the EtherRing function.
Select the ports to be used and also set the switchback mode.
Commands
set ether-ring
Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
show ether-ring config
Display of EtherRing configuration information
Setting EtherRing control VLAN

Sets the control VLAN.
Set the ring ID, control VLAN, MEG Level and priority value.
Commands
set ether-ring control-vlan
Setting of EtherRing control VLAN
Memo
Ring ID is used for the value of lower 1 byte of the destination MAC address of the R-APS
control frame.
Note
The value of the ring ID, control VLAN, MEG Level and priority need to be set with a
common value among all nodes in the ring.
Note
When the same VLAN ID as the control VLAN is set as a MEP, set a lower value for the
MEG level of the MEP than that of the control VLAN.
Note
This unit supports the single ring only.
Note
If you have performed the VLAN setting for the port to be used in the ring before executing
this command, a loop may occur. Be sure to execute this command to check EtherRing
operation before setting the VLAN for the relevant port.
"1" can be set for the ring ID.
7-47
EtherOAM Function
Setting RPL port

Sets an RPL port. Select one node out of all nodes within the ring, and execute this command for
any port that belongs to the ring. When you have set an RPL port, the R-APS control frame
transmission to each node starts.
Commands
set ether-ring rpl-owner
Setting of EtherRing RPL port
Note
If you set or clear an RPL port during operation, the EtherRing state of the node is
switched to the default state.
Note
If you set multiple RPL ports within the same ring, switching operation is not performed
correctly because the ring is split. Be sure to set one RPL port in one ring.
Note
When you clear an RPL port, the communication will be disconnected because the MAC
learning information on the ring configuration port is not cleared. After you have cleared
or reconfigured an RPL port, it is recommended to clear the MAC learning information on
the ring configuration port.
Setting EtherRing timers

(1) WTR (Wait to Restore) timer
Sets the protection time to switchback operation after an SF failure recovery. The protection time
can be set only for the node to which the RPL port setting has been performed.
Default value
5min
Customizable range
5 to 12min (in increments of 1min)
Commands
set ether-ring time
Setting of EtherRing timer
7-48
EtherOAM Function
(2) Guard timer
Sets the time for temporarily discarding the received R-APS control frames to prevent state
inconsistency with other units in case of an SF failure recovery. Set a higher value than the round
trip time of one ring for this timer.
Default value
500msec
Customizable range
10 to 2000msec (in increments of 10msec)
Commands
set ether-ring time
Setting of EtherRing timer
(3) Hold-off timer

Sets the port link protection time until detection of an SF failure occurrence/recovery.
Default value
500msec
Customizable range
0 to 7000msec (in increments of 500msec)
Commands
7-49
EtherOAM Function
Setting examples
In the configuration shown below, EtherRing is configured for ports 11/1 and 12/1 of GbE-PV2 line
modules in Units A, B and C. Communication is performed between ports 7/1 of GbE-PV2 line
modules in Units A, B and C.
RPL Owner
Unblocked port
CX2600/220 Unit B
CX2600/220
11/1
Blocked port
RPL port
12/1
CX2600/220 Unit A
CX2600/220 Unit C
CX2600/220
11/1
CX2600/220
12/1
12/1
11/1
MEP
ETH-CCM frame flow
R-APS control frame flow
User frame
A
11/1
12/1
11/1
11/1 12/1
12/1
The procedure for setting EtherRing in the above network configuration is described below for each
unit.
When using the EtherRing function, executing commands in the wrong order may cause a frame
loop. To prevent this, it is recommended to set EtherRing in the following order.
7-50
EtherOAM Function
<Unit A>
(1) Enabling EtherRing
(2) Setting EtherRing control VLAN
(3) Setting EtherRing guard timer
(4) Setting tagbase VLAN for control VLAN
(5) Setting MEG, MEP and associated MEP
(6) Setting ETH-CCM frame transmission and reception
(7) Setting portbase/tagbase VLAN for user VLAN
*Switch@1# set ether-ring 1 enable 11/1 12/1 revertive

*Switch@1# set ether-ring control-vlan 1 enable 1 3000 7 5
*Switch@1# set ether-ring time 1 guard 1000
*Switch@1# set vlan member 3000 tagbase 11/1,12/1
*Switch@1# set ether-oam mep 110 11/1 3000 10 110
*Switch@1# set vlan member 10 portbase 7/1 tagbase 11/1,12/1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show ether-ring config
Ether Ring Config
=================
Revertive
RPL
Guard
Index Port
Mode
Owner WTR(min) Time(msec)
-----------------------------------------------------------1 11/1,12/1 revertive
----1000
Ether Ring Frame Config
=======================
Multicast MAC Address : 01:19:A7:00:00:(RingID)
Protocol Type
: 0x8902
===============================================
Index RingID Control VID MEG Level Priority
----------------------------------------------1
1
3000
7
5
*Switch@1#
7-51
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
EtherOAM Function
<Unit B>
(3) Setting RPL port
(5) Setting EtherRing WTR timer
*Switch@1# set ether-ring rpl-owner 1 enable 12/1
*Switch@1# set ether-ring time 1 wtr 12
*Switch@1#
Ether Ring Config
=================
Revertive
RPL
Guard
Index Port
Mode
-----------------------------------------------------------1 11/1,12/1 revertive
12/1
12
1000
=======================
Protocol Type
: 0x8902
===============================================
----------------------------------------------1
1
3000
7
5
*Switch@1#
7-52
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
EtherOAM Function
<Unit C>
*Switch@1#
Ether Ring Config
=================
Revertive
RPL
Guard
Index Port
Mode
-----------------------------------------------------------1 11/1,12/1 revertive
----1000
=======================
Protocol Type
: 0x8902
===============================================
----------------------------------------------1
1
3000
7
5
*Switch@1#
7-53
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
EtherOAM Function
Disabling EtherRing
Disables the EtherRing function.
together.
Control VLAN, RPL port setting and timer setting are all cleared
Commands
set ether-ring
Setting of EtherRing enable/disable
Disabling the EtherRing function when VLAN setting still remains on the port may cause a frame
loop. To prevent this, it is recommended to disable the function in the following order for every
node.
(1) Clearing the portbase VLAN for user VLAN (tagbase VLAN setting [without VLAN])
(2) Clearing tagbase VLAN for control/user VLAN
(3) Disabling EtherRing
*Switch@1# set vlan tagbase 7/1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# clear vlan tagbase 11/1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# clear vlan tagbase 12/1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# set ether-ring 1 disable
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
Ether Ring Config
=================
=======================
*Switch@1#
7-54
(1)
(2)
(3)
EtherOAM Function
Troubleshooting
When using the EtherRing function, some settings related to other functions or settings between
nodes within a ring may affect the operation of the EtherRing function. Frequently encountered
trouble is given below. If you have encountered the same symptom, check the check points and
action to be taken.
Symptom
EtherRing does not start and is
still in the initial status after the
EtherRing settings.
Check point
Action
Is the network configuration in the Configure the network in the form

of a ring with the ports to be used
form of a ring?
with EtherRing.
Have the VLAN that was
specified as an EtherRing control
VLAN been set with tagbase for
every port to be used with
EtherRing?
Set the VLAN ID that has been

specified for the R-APS control
frame with tagbase for every port
to be used with EtherRing.
Is the value of EtherRing control

VLAN setting the same among all
nodes within the ring?
Set a common value among all

nodes for a ring ID, control VLAN
ID and MEG Level.
Haven't RPL Owner been set, or

have it been set for multiple
nodes?
Set one node within one ring as

the RPL Owner.
7-55
EtherOAM Function
(Blank page)
7-56
Configuration Data
8 Configuration Data
This chapter describes each type of
configuration data and the procedures for
configuration data management.
8.1 About Configuration Data

Management 8-6
8-1
8-2
Configuration Data
8.1 About Configuration Data

This section discusses the following topics.
8.1.1 Structure of configuration data 8-3
The structure of the CX2600/200

configuration data is described.
8.1.2 Types of configuration data
Three types of configuration data

used in CX2600/200 are described.
8-4
8-2
Configuration Data
8.1.1 Structure of configuration data

Configuration data refers to the set of data that determines the behavior of CX2600/200.
The following figure shows the structure of the CX2600/200 configuration data.
Reference
show startup-config command
upload startup-config command
Setting
write memory command
clear startup-config command
download startup-config
command
Reference
show running-config command
upload running-config command
Setting
set/clear commands
download running-config command
Reference
show running-config command
upload running-config command
Setting
set/clear commands
Reference
show startup-config command
upload startup-config command
Setting
write memory command
clear startup-config command
download startup-config command
ACT
Built-in Flash memory
Startup
configuration
data
Copy at
startup
Save
write memory
command
Main memory
Running
configuration
data
Initial
configuration
data
Automatically
set by software if
startup-config
Copy from ACT at SBY startup does not exist in
ACT at startup
SBY
Main memory
Running
configuration
data
Initial
configuration
data
Built-in Flash memory

Startup
configuration
data
8-3
Save
write memory
command
Configuration Data
8.1.2 Types of configuration data

CX2600/200 has three types of configuration data - running configuration data, startup
configuration data, and initial configuration data.
All these types of configuration data can be added, changed, referenced, and cleared as
necessary. The procedures, however, differ depending on the type of configuration data.
Running configuration data

The running configuration data is the setting information used in the current operating status of
CX2600/200.
The running configuration data of the ACT system is all cleared at the time of startup, and the
startup configuration data is copied if it exists.
If the startup configuration data does not exist, the initial configuration data is copied.
The running configuration data of the ACT system is copied to the SBY system at startup.
If you want to use the currently used running configuration data again the next time you start up
CX2600/220, save the configuration data to built-in flash memory by using the "write memory"
command on the ACT system side.
The running configuration data can be added, changed, and cleared by using set/clear commands
and the "download running-config" command.
The set data can be retrieved by using the "show running-config" command or the "upload
running-config" command.
Startup configuration data

The startup configuration data is the setting information that is stored in the CX2600/200 built-in
flash memory for backup purposes.
The startup configuration data is not lost even if the power is turned off.
The startup configuration data is copied to the running configuration data file only to the ACT
system at the time of startup.
As for the SBY system, the startup configuration data is not copied to the running configuration
data file.
If you want to get the currently stored startup configuration data reflected on the operation, you
need to restart the ACT system.
8-4
Configuration Data
The startup configuration data cannot be added.
The startup configuration data can be changed and cleared by using the "write memory"/"clear
startup-config" command and the "download startup-config" command.
The set data can be retrieved by using the "show startup-config" command and the "upload
startup-config" command.
Initial configuration data

The initial configuration data is the setting information applied in the initial status of CX2600/200.
If the startup configuration data of the ACT system has been cleared and is not available or
remains in the factory-set condition, the software copies the initial configuration data to the running
configuration data file.
The initial configuration data cannot be added, changed, cleared, or retrieved.
8-5
Configuration Data

Management
This section discusses the following topics.
8.2.1 Setting and referencing the running configuration data
8-7
This subsection describes how to set and reference the CX2600/200

running configuration data.
8.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup configuration data 8-8
This subsection describes how to set and reference the CX2600/200
startup configuration data.
8.2.3 Managing configuration data using a server
8-10
This subsection describes how to manage the CX2600/200 configuration

data using an FTP server.
8-6
Configuration Data
8.2.1 Setting and referencing the running

configuration data
Setting the running configuration data
The running configuration data is the setting information concerning the current operating status.
Therefore, it can be updated using the relevant setting commands.
These are typically those commands beginning with "set" or "clear" that you can enter in the
privileged mode.
Referencing the running configuration data

The running configuration data can be referenced using the "show running-config" command.
Memo
When a set/clear command is executed from another session during displaying data by
the "show running-config" command, the setting is reflected to the system, but it is not
reflected to the running "show running-config" command. In addition, when the "show
running-config" commands are executed by multiple sessions, the data will not be
reflected until the display for all the sessions is completed.
Note
The "show running-config" command displays data in the set and clear command format.
The setting commands displayed by the "show running-config" command are only those
that differ from the initial configuration data.
Command
show running-config
Display of running configuration
8-7
Configuration Data
8.2.2 Setting and referencing the startup

configuration data
Setting the startup configuration data
The "write memory" command allows you to save the current running configuration data to built-in
flash memory as the startup configuration data.
Also, the "clear startup-config" command clears all the startup configuration data simultaneously.
Commands
write memory
Saving of setting information
clear startup-config
Clearing of startup configuration
Referencing the startup configuration data

The startup configuration data can be referenced using the "show startup-config" command.
Note
The "show startup-config" command displays data in the set and clear command format.
The setting commands displayed by the "show startup-config" command are only those
that differ from the initial configuration data.
Command
show startup-config
Display of startup configuration
8-8
Configuration Data
Displaying differences between the startup and

running configuration data
If there is any difference between the startup configuration data and the running configuration data,
"*" appears in front of the command prompt.
When the "write memory" command saves the running configuration data to built-in flash memory
as the startup configuration data, "*" disappears.
The "show config difference" command lets you check whether there are differences in the
configuration data for both the ACT and SBY systems.
Changing the running configuration data after executing the "write memory" command results in
differences in the configuration data. The configuration data difference indicator is displayed even
if you undo the changes you have made.
Right after the startup, there is no difference from the running configuration data for the ACT
system, because the ACT system copies its own startup configuration data. The SBY system
compares the running configuration data copied from the ACT system with its own startup
configuration data and displays the result.
Memo
If the ACT or SBY system does not have its own startup configuration data, then it cannot
check for configuration data difference at startup. In that case, the SBY system starts
assuming that there are configuration data differences. The ACT system starts with its
initial configuration data and therefore there are no differences.
Memo
If the ACT system starts with corrupted startup configuration data, it is considered that
there are configuration data differences. In that case, it seems that no startup
configuration data is set.
Also, the default configuration is set in the running
configuration data:
Command
show config difference
Display of configuration difference
8-9
Configuration Data
8.2.3 Managing configuration data using a

server
CX2600/200 allows the running and startup configuration data to be uploaded to a server for
backup purposes and to be downloaded from the server for data restoration. The server enables
the files you upload and download to be managed and edited in text format.
Note
If the software version of the client to which the data is downloaded is different from that
used when uploading, the configuration data may not be set properly.
Setting the console port and server

Managing the configuration data requires an FTP server.
Connect the console port and the server via a network.
Either the outbound or inbound console port may be used.
For details, see "3.5 Settings for Remote Maintenance" of this manual.
Uploading and downloading the running configuration

data
The "upload running-config" command allows you to upload the running configuration data to an
FTP server for storage.
The "download running-config" command lets you download the running configuration data from
the FTP server to make additional settings in the current running configuration data.
Note
The "download running-config" command is intended to overwrite or add new settings to

the currently set running configuration data.
Any command that conflicts with the current system configuration results in an execution
error. Only those commands that can be executed will be reflected in the running
configuration data.
In the event of this error, the following reply message is output:
Because there is execution error command in downloaded configuration, this part has
not been reflected. : <number of configuration data items not reflected>. First Error :
<line number of the first configuration data that caused the error>.
Check the downloaded text configuration data, and enter the command again.
8-10
Configuration Data
Note
While the "download running-config" command is being executed, you cannot initialize the
line module.
Note
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as

the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.) Also, if the server resides
in either of the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, that server can
be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.
"10.42.74.25" is assumed as the IP address of the FTP server that stores the CX2600/200
configuration data, and the "config.txt" file stored in "/backup" is downloaded as the running
configuration data.
Input example
*Switch@1# download running-config 10.42.74.25 /backup/config.txt
FTP Login Name
: cx2600
FTP Login Password :
Data Transferring..
Data setting...
*Switch@1#
Commands
upload running-config
Uploading of running configuration to ftp server
download running-config
Downloading of running configuration from ftp server
8-11
Configuration Data
Uploading and downloading the startup configuration

data
The "upload startup-config" command allows you to upload the startup configuration data to an
FTP server for storage.
The "download startup-config" command lets you download the startup configuration data from the
FTP server to set the downloaded data as new startup configuration data replacing all the current
data.
Note
The "download startup-config" command clears all the startup configuration data currently
stored in built-in flash memory and saves the downloaded data to built-in flash memory as
new startup configuration data.
Note
If the downloaded startup configuration data contains any command that causes an
execution error due to an invalid command format or other reason, all the downloaded
configuration data will be discarded and the startup configuration data stored in built-in
flash memory will not be updated.
Note

"10.42.74.25" is assumed as the IP address of the FTP server that stores the CX2600/200
configuration data, and the "config.txt" file stored in "/backup" is downloaded as the startup
configuration data.
Input example
*Switch@1# download startup-config 10.42.74.25 /backup/config.txt
FTP Login Name
: cx2600
Data Transferring..
Data setting..
Writing Flash Memory.........
*Switch@1#
8-12
Configuration Data
Commands
upload startup-config
Uploading of startup configuration to ftp server
Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server
Periodic backup of the running configuration data

By using the "set backup server" command and the "set backup schedule" command, you can
have the currently used running configuration data uploaded automatically to the FTP server at
specified intervals.
The "set backup schedule" command allows you to set the backup file path and the backup
interval. The "set backup server" command lets you set the information on the FTP server used
for periodic backup. The "clear backup server" command terminates this periodic backup
function.
The name of a file stored in the server for periodic backup is determined by the rules described
below. When using the periodic backup function, make sure that the FTP server meets these
rules.
system name_sequential number_YYMMDDHHMM.rcfg
system name: Character string set by the "set system name" command
If the registered character string is longer than 10 characters, only the first 10 characters
are valid.
If any characters other than those defined in "About configuration files in the FTP server"
on the following page are set, those undefined characters are replaced by "_".
If the "set system name" command is not entered, the default string "CX2600_220" will be
assumed.
sequential number: Numbers from 000 to 999 are used sequentially.
number will return to 000.
Upon reaching 999, the
YYMMDDHHMM: Year, month, day, hour, and minute, each represented by a two-digit
number
Memo
There are three intervals you can specify - week, day, and cycle. You can designate the
day of week and the time when specifying week, or the time when specifying day, so that
the backup process occurs automatically at the preset day and time. When cycle is
specified, you can designate the time so that the backup process occurs automatically at
the preset intervals.
8-13
Configuration Data
Note
The periodic backup function for the running configuration data takes effect only when
both the "set backup server" command and "set backup schedule" command have been
entered.
The "show backup information" command lets you check whether this function is enabled
or not.
Note
If the first 10 characters specified by the "set system name" command are the same for
two or more systems and if you want to back up these systems using the same FTP
server, make sure that a different file path is specified in the "set backup schedule"
command for each system.
Note
The periodic backup process takes longer as the size of the loaded running configuration
data increases. The execution of other commands may be restricted during periodic
backup. Adjust the interval according to the size and update frequency of the running
configuration data.
The ongoing periodic backup process can be stopped using the "clear backup server"
command or the "set backup schedule" command (cycle set to 0). The length of time it
takes before the restriction on the execution of other commands is lifted also depends on
the size of the running configuration data.
Note

Commands
set backup server
Setting of backup server
clear backup server
Clearing of backup server
set backup schedule
Setting of backup schedule
show backup information
Display of backup information
8-14
Configuration Data
About configuration files in the FTP server

You can edit the configuration data uploaded to the FTP server by using a text editor.
The edited configuration data can be downloaded as running or startup configuration data.
Note
The file names and path names of the files uploaded to the FTP server are subject to the
limitations shown in the following table.
Characters usable
in file names
Alphanumeric characters plus the following characters:

'%' '&' ',' '.' '=' '[' ']' '^' '_' '{' '}' '~' -
Characters usable
in path names
Alphanumeric characters plus the following characters:

'%' '&' ',' / : '=' '[' ']' '^' '_' '{' '}' '~' -
Memo
The upload and download time may become longer due to such factors as the size of data
being transferred, traffic volume on the network, performance of the FTP server, and LAN
cabling.
You can force the ongoing communication with the FTP server to end, by pressing the Ctrl
+ c key combination.
After checking the size of the data to be downloaded and the conditions of the network
and FTP server, enter the command again.
8-15
Configuration Data
(Blank page)
8-16
Method of Operating Maintenance and Management Functions
Method of Operating Maintenance

and Management Functions
This chapter describes how to operate the
functions for network and system maintenance
as well as the management functions using
monitoring and logging.
9.1 Loopback Test 9-3

9.2 Connection Test 9-21
9.3 SNMP-based Management 9-23
9.4 Counter Monitoring 9-28
9.5 Fault Monitoring 9-53
9.6 Faults 9-56
9.7 M/C Status 9-57
9.8 syslog Functions 9-62
9.9 MAC Learning 9-67
9-1
9.10 Port Mirroring 9-75

9.11 System Reboot 9-80
9.12 Initialization 9-82
9.13 Replacement 9-84
9.14 UGSW Module Redundancy
Control 9-96
9.15 UGSW Clock Redundancy
Control 9-105
9.16 Resource Monitoring 9-111
9.17 Command Mode Functions 9-113
9.18 User Continuity Test 9-115
9.19 NTP Function 9-121
9-2
9.1 Loopback Test

CX2600/200 has the following loopback test functions:
(1) M/C loopback test
This test function checks the link status between the M/C and the CX2600/200 100BASE-FX
port.
(2) ATM transmission path loopback test
This test function checks the status of the transmission path between the CX2600/200 ATM
transmission and the distant device (segment-to-end or end-to-end).
(3) Ether network loopback test
This test function checks the status of the transmission path between the CX2600/200 Ether
port and the distant device.
(4) IMA set line loopback test
This test function checks the normality of the connection between the CX2600/200 IMA set
line and the distant device.
Before conducting the M/C loopback test

Conducting the M/C loopback test requires that the M/C management function be enabled. For
information about the setting of the M/C management function, see "9.7 M/C Status" of this
chapter.
9.1.1 M/C loopback test procedure

Starting the loopback test
Since frames cannot be transferred between CX2600/200 and the user during the loopback test,
do not conduct this test on a line in use. Also note that, depending on the connected M/C, the
loopback test may involve placing the 10/100BASE-TX link on the UTP (M/C) side in the link down
condition. In that case, a network disconnection will be detected on the user side.
If the loopback test ends abnormally, check the following:
(1) Whether the link status between the M/C and the CX2600/200 100BASE-FX port is normal
(2) Whether the specified port number is correct
9-3

(3) Whether the M/C management function is enabled for the specified port
(4) Whether the connected M/C supports a loopback test function compliant with the TTC
TS-1000 standard
If the loopback test still fails after you have checked these items and taken necessary action,
contact your local distributor.
Command
loopback mc
Starting of M/C loopback test
Input example
In the following example, the loopback test is conducted 10 times for line module 3 and port
number 8. (Frame size: 1518 bytes / Response wait time: 610 msec)
*Switch@1# loopback mc 3/8 count 10 frame 1518 wait 610

result 3/8 <seq=1> time=300ms test ok
result 3/8 <seq=3> test start request timeout
loopback statistics for 3/8
request = 10 : test ok = 5 : test fail = 5 (50% failure)
minimum = 300msec, maximum = 305msec, average = 302msec
Switch@1#
9-4
[1]
[2]

[1] The loopback test result is displayed after each test conducted.
Displayed result
Meaning
test ok
Normal end
test start request timeout
During the test start negotiation, a timeout occurred before a

response was received from the terminal-end M/C.
test terminate receive
Forced to be terminated upon receipt of a test termination

notification from the terminal-end M/C.
frame fail
Abnormal loopback frame detected (e.g., data mismatch)
test frame timeout
A timeout occurred before a loopback frame was received.
test close request timeout
During the test close negotiation, a timeout occurred before a

response was received from the terminal-end M/C.
test timeout
A test time (T1) timeout occurred.
other error
Other error (e.g., hardware fault)
[2] The statistics for the loopback tests are shown.

Displayed result
Meaning
request
Number of times the test was conducted
test ok
Number of times the test result was test ok
test fail
Number of times the test result was other than test ok
xx% failed
Ratio of failed tests, calculated by test fail / request X 100
minimum
Minimum time before loopback frame reception (*)
maximum
Maximum time before loopback frame reception (*)
average
Average time before loopback frame reception (*)
(*)
The statistics for those tests whose results are either test ok or frame fail are gathered.
measurement time includes the negotiation times before and after the test.
9-5
The
9.1.2 ATM transmission path loopback test

CX2600/200 has the following functions to check ATM transmission paths:
(1) Loopback test function
(2) Loopback monitoring function
Transmitted loopback cell setting procedure

Setting the source ID for the ATM loopback test
The source ID is the local device ID used when CX2600/200 transmits loopback cells.
common value shared by the loopback test function and loopback monitoring function.
It is a
Upon receipt of a loopback cell from the distant device, the source ID is compared with the location
ID in the received cell. If they match, a response is returned.
Commands
set loopback atm source-id
Setting of ATM loopback source ID
show loopback atm source-id
Display of ATM loopback source ID
Memo
The values, all bits as "0" and all bits as "1" (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff) cannot be set.
9-6
Checking the source ID for transmitted loopback cells

To check the source ID for transmitted loopback cells, use the "show loopback atm source-id"
command.
Input/confirmation example
Example
In the following example, "FFAA33" is set as the source ID for transmitted loopback
cells.
*Switch@1# set loopback atm source-id FFAA33

*Switch@1# show loopback atm source-id
ATM Loopback Source-ID Table
============================
Source-ID : 0x00000000000000000000000000FFAA33
*Switch@1#
Loopback test procedure

You can conduct the ATM transmission path loopback test on a specified connection a specified
number of times (1 to 1000).
Starting the loopback test

To start the loopback test, use the "loopback atm" command.
Parameters are shown below.
level
Either f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level can be specified.
PVC identifier
Line number VPI value

Line number VPI value/VCI value
PVC name
Values can be specified in one of the above three patterns.
Test section
Either "segment" (internode) or "end-end" (termination) can be specified.
Location ID
A value can be specified within the range from 0x1 to

0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff.
Indication check
Either "enable" or "disable" can be specified.
Test count
A value can be specified within the range from 1 to 1000 (counts).
Response wait time
A value can be specified within the range from 5 to 10 (seconds).
Test direction
Output direction of loopback cells can be specified.

outside: Line direction (from UGSW to ATM line module)
inside: SW direction (from ATM line module to UGSW)
9-7

The following parameters are optional.
assumed.
If they are omitted, the values in parentheses will be
Test section (end-end)

Location ID (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)
Indication check (enable)
Test count (1)
Response wait time (5 seconds)
Test direction (outside)
Command
loopback atm
Starting of ATM loopback test
Note
If you execute the "write memory" command during the loopback test, the test status will
not be saved in startup-config.
Note
The loopback test automatically stops if the system is rebooted or the "change switch"
command is entered.
Memo
Multiple loopback tests (by specifying 0x0 as the location ID) are not available.
9-8
Terminating the loopback test

To terminate the loopback test, press Ctrl +
Memo
c.
If the loopback test count is 1, the test will stop automatically; you do not need to perform
this step.
Input example
Example
The following example conducts the loopback test.
*Switch@1#
result 3/1
result 3/1
result 3/1
loopback atm f4 3/1 0 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10

<seq=1> time=465ms ok
<seq=2> time=460ms ok
<seq=3> timeout
loopback statistics for 3/1 0

level
f4
section
segment
indication-check enabled
wait
10(s)
location-ID
0x00000000000000000000000000001234
direction
outside
test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure)
minimum = 460, maximum = 465, average = 460
Switch@1# loopback
result 3/1 <seq=1>
result 3/1 <seq=2>
result 3/1 <seq=3>
atm f5 3/1 0/200 segment 0x1234 count 3 wait 10

time=465ms ok
time=460ms ok
timeout
loopback statistics for 3/1 0/200

level
f5
section
segment
indication-check enabled
wait
10(s)
location-ID
0x00000000000000000000000000001234
direction
outside
test count = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure)
minimum = 460, maximum = 465, average = 460
*Switch@1#
9-9
Loopback monitoring procedure

You can perform loopback monitoring on a specified connection.
Setting loopback monitoring

To set loopback monitoring, specify enable or disable in the "set loopback atm keepalive-mode"
command.
Command
set loopback atm keepalive-mode
Note
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring mode
Enabling loopback monitoring clears the monitoring statistics.
Setting the loopback monitoring configuration data

To set the loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "set loopback atm keepalive" command.
level
Either f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level can be specified.
PVC identifier
Line number VPI value

Line number VPI value/VCI value
PVC name
Values can be specified in one of the above three patterns.
Test section
Either "segment" (internode) or "end-end" (termination) can be

specified.
Location ID
A value can be specified within the range from 0x1 to

0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff.
Loopback monitoring result

(success) change threshold
A threshold value can be specified within the range from 1 to 10

(counts).
Loopback monitoring result

(fail) change threshold
A threshold value can be specified within the range from 1 to 10

(counts).
Test direction
Output direction of loopback cells can be specified.

outside: Line direction (from UGSW to ATM line module)
inside: SW direction (from ATM line module to UGSW)
9-10

assumed.
Test section (end-end)

Location ID (0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff)
Loopback monitoring result success change threshold (1)
Loopback monitoring result fail change threshold (1)
Test direction (outside)
Command
set loopback atm keepalive
Setting of ATM loopback monitoring function
Memo
ATM loopback monitoring is performed on a port-by-port basis, beginning with the

smallest VPI/VCI number.
Memo
The timeout value is 5 seconds per PVC.
Memo
Changing the monitoring configuration data deletes the monitoring statistics for the target
PVC.
Memo
Multiple loopback monitoring configuration (by specifying 0x0 as the location ID) is not
available.
Note
If the target PVC is deleted, the setting of this function is cleared.
9-11
The monitoring cycle for all PVCs is 5 minutes.
Clearing the loopback monitoring configuration data

To clear the loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "clear loopback atm keepalive"
command. The parameters are level (f4 for the VP level or f5 for the VC level) and PVC identifier
(line number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC name).
Command
clear loopback atm keepalive
Clearing of ATM loopback monitoring function
Displaying the ATM loopback monitoring configuration data

To display the ATM loopback monitoring configuration data, use the "show loopback atm
keepalive" config command. The parameter is the PVC identifier (line number VPI or VPI/VCI
PVC name).
If the parameter is omitted, the loopback monitoring configuration data for all ports will be
displayed.
Command
show loopback atm keepalive config
Display of ATM loopback monitoring configuration
Displaying the ATM loopback monitoring information

To display the ATM loopback monitoring information, use the "show loopback atm keepalive
information" command. The parameter is the PVC identifier (line number VPI or VPI/VCI PVC
name).
If the parameter is omitted, the loopback monitoring information for all ports will be displayed.
Command
show loopback atm keepalive
information
Display of ATM loopback monitoring information
9-12

Input example
Example
The following example conducts loopback monitoring.
*Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive-mode enable

*Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f4 3/1 0 segment 0x1234 success 10 fail 5
*Switch@1# set loopback atm keepalive f5 4/1 0/32
*Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive config
ATM Loopback Config Table
=========================
Keepalive-Mode : enabled
ATM Loopback Cell F4 Config Table
=================================
Port VPI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
---------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0 segment outside
10
5
ATM Loopback Cell F4 Location-ID
================================
Port VPI Location-ID
--------------------------------------------3/1
0 0x00000000000000000000000000001234
ATM Loopback Cell F5 Config Table
=================================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Success Threshold Fail Threshold
-------------------------------------------------------------------4/1
0/32 end
outside
1
1
ATM Loopback Cell F5 Location-ID
================================
Port VPI/VCI Location-ID
------------------------------------------------4/1
0/32 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show loopback atm keepalive information
ATM Loopback Config Table
=========================
Keepalive-Mode : enabled
ATM Loopback F4 Status Table
============================
Port VPI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0 segment outside
success
ok
10/10
ATM Loopback F5 Status Table
============================
Port VPI/VCI Section Direction Test Status Last Result Count(ok/test)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------4/1
0/32 end
outside
fail
timeout
0/1
*Switch@1#
9-13
9.1.3 Ether network loopback test

Loopback tests for Ether network can be conducted by using ETH-LB of the EtherOAM function.
ETH-LB test procedure

Setting the MEP
A MEP must be set in advance to the device to be tested (local device/distant device) before
conducting the ETH-LB test.
For the setting of MEP, see "Command Reference".
Starting the ETH-LB test

Select one of the following tests for the ETH-LB test.
(1) Unicast ETH-LB test
The loopback test to the specified device on the Ether network can be conducted 1 to 127
times at 1 to 10 seconds interval.
(2) Multicast ETH-LB test
The loopback test to multiple devices can be conducted by transmitting multicast frames.
Memo
The test count for multicast ETH-LB test is fixed to "1".
To start the ETH-LB test, use the "loopback ether-oam" command.
MEP index
A value whose range is from 1 to 1536 can be specified.
Destination MAC address
The MAC address of the distant device port is specified.
LBM transmission count
Transmission period
A value whose range is from 1 to 10 (sec) can be specified.
PDU size
Priority
9-14

assumed.
Destination MAC address (Multicast MAC Address set by set ether-oam frame)
LBM transmission count (4 times)
Transmission period (1 sec)
PDU size (46)
Priority (7)
Memo
When the destination MAC address is omitted, transmission count/ transmission interval
cannot be specified.
Command
loopback ether-oam
Executing of EtherOAM Loop Back test
Memo
Set the transmission of ETH-LB after confirming that the MEP is set. Whether the
transmission direction is inside or outside the switch depends on the MEP setting. For
the setting of MEP, see "Command Reference".
Memo
Even for the link-down port, the MEP of the internal direction of the switch
receives/transmits the ETH-LT.
Note
You cannot activate two or more of this command simultaneously. Also, you cannot
activate this command and either/both of the ETH-LT transmission command, the
ETH-DM transmission command, or/and the ETH-LM transmission command
simultaneously.
9-15
Terminating the ETH-LB test

To terminate the ETH-LB test, press Ctrl +
Memo
c.
If the Multicast ETH-LB test is conducted, the test will stop automatically.
If the Unicast ETH-LB test is conducted, the test will stop automatically when the test
count reaches to the specified count.
Input example
Example
The following example conducts the Unicast ETH-LB test.
*Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 123 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c count 3 period 1 size 46 priority 7

Ether OAM Loopback Port Information
===================================
Port
: 10/1
MAC Address : 00:4c:c4:12:34:56
VID
: 100
MEG ID
: TEST123456789
MEP ID
: 20
MEG Level
: 3
result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=1 bytes=46 time=300ms test ok
result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=2 bytes=46 timeout
result 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c seq=3 bytes=46 time=500ms test ok
Ether OAM Loopback Result Information for 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c
===========================================================
request = 3 : test ok = 2 : test fail = 1 (33% failure)
delay minimum = 300msec maximum = 500msec average = 400msec
delay variation = 100msec
*Swuitch@1#
9-16

Example
The following example conducts the Multicast ETH-LB test.
*Switch@1# loopback ether-oam 123

Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Port Information
=============================================
Port
: 10/1
MAC Address : 00:4c:c4:12:34:56
VID
: 100
MEG ID
: NEC123456789
MEP ID
: 20
MEG Level
: 3
Ether OAM Multicast Loopback Result Information
===============================================
1 00:4c:c4:1e:20:1c
2 00:4c:c4:1e:20:2c
3 00:4c:c4:1e:20:5c
4 00:4c:c4:1e:20:4c
5 00:4c:c4:1e:20:3c
*Switch@1#
9-17
9.1.4 IMA set line loopback test

The IMA loopback test is conducted to check the connectivity of the link set as an IMA group.
(Connectivity check is compliant with "Test Pattern Procedure" in AF-PHY-0086.001 and uses ICP
cells.)
A link where the connectivity is checked transmits ICP cells including a link ID and test pattern.
The reception side of the test pattern loopbacks ICP cells to all the links in the group.
The following figure shows an example that ICP cells including a test pattern are transmitted to the
link ID (LID) 2 of the IMA ID 0. The reception side of the test pattern (IMA ID 1) loopbacks cells to
each link (LID 0 to 2).
LID = 0
IMA ID = 1
IMA ID = 0
LID = 1
LID = 2
9-18
(loopback)
Test procedure
Setting the IMA group
An IMA group must be set in advance to the device to be tested (local device/distant device) before
conducting the IMA loopback test.
For the setting of the IMA group, see "5.6 IMA Function".
Starting the IMA loopback test

To start the IMA loopback test, use the "loopback ima" command.
line number
A line number to be tested is specified.
test pattern
Command
loopback ima
Memo
Starting and result display of IMA loopback test
A command error occurs when the ATMP line module is not mounted.
9-19
Terminating the IMA loopback test

The IMA loopback test terminates when responses from all IMA group destinations are returned.
The IMA loopback test waits a response for up to 5 seconds.
To terminate the IMA loopback test, press Ctrl +
c.
Input example
Example
The following example conducts the loopback test by specifying the test pattern 254 for
the line (10/2) where the IMA group is set.
*Switch@1# loopback ima 10/2 254

result 10/4 time=40ms test ok
result 10/2 time=560ms test ok
result 10/8 timeout
[1]
loopback information for 10/2

IMA-ID
1
test pattern 254
group ports = 3 : ok = 2 : fail = 1 (33% failure)
minimum = 40msec, maximum = 560msec, average = 300msec
[2]
*Switch@1#
[1] The loopback test result for each port is displayed.

Displayed result
Meaning
test ok
Normal end (normal loopback received)
test timeout
A loopback reception timeout (5 seconds)
abort
Abort by pressing Ctrl +
key combination
[2] The statistics result for the loopback tests is displayed.

Displayed result
Meaning
IMA-ID
IMA-ID where the tested port belongs
test pattern
Test pattern
group ports
Number of ports for the IMA group to be tested
Ok/fail
Number of ports the response was normal/number of ports the

response was abnormal (timeout/abort)
minimum/
maximum/
average
Minimum/maximum/average time to receive the response
9-20
9.2 Connection Test

This test lets you check whether CX2600/200 is connected to a specified host properly.
9.2.1 Connection test procedure

Enter the "ping" command.
To suspend the connection test, press the Ctrl+ c
Note
key combination.
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as an

IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, communication to the network addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24
cannot be accomplished normally.
Command
ping
9-21

Input example
The following example tests the connection with 10.40.36.196.
Switch@1# ping 10.40.36.196

Request timed out
Request timed out
Request timed out
Request timed out
[1]
Switch@1# ping 10.40.36.196
ttl=128
ttl=128
ttl=128
ttl=128
time=5.000
time<1.000
time<1.000
time<1.000
ms
ms
ms
ms
[2]
Switch@1#
[1] A timeout occurred 4 times, indicating that the connection failed to be confirmed after 4 test
frame transmissions.
[2] Four packets were transmitted, and 4 packets were received, with the packet loss rate of 0%,
indicating that the connection was successfully confirmed (4 times).
9-22
9.3 SNMP-based Management

As the network management protocol, CX2600/200 supports SNMP v1 (Simple Network
Management Protocol Version 1) defined by RFC 1157 and SNMP v2c (Community-based SNMP
Version 2) defined by RFC 1901.
If the system fails or the need arises to report some event, an SNMP trap can be issued to an
SNMP manager to notify the maintenance personnel of the event.
If you do not intend to perform network management, it is not necessary to make the
SNMP-related settings described below.
CX2600/200 stores its operating status information as objects in an MIB. The SNMP manager
can grasp the CX2600/200 status using reference requests and update the CX2600/200 settings
remotely using set requests.
Note that SNMP-based network management is always done by the ACT-side switch module.
Memo
When performing SNMP-based network monitoring, use the system IP address as the
access destination IP address that is to be set on the manager side. If you use a slot IP
address, you will need to change the access destination IP address set on the manager
side every time a system changeover has occurred.
Community name
One parameter you need to specify when setting SNMP-based network management is a
community name. A community name defines the range of the network (community) to be
managed by the SNMP manager. It is used as an authentication feature to limit access from the
SNMP manager to CX2600/200.
It is also possible to specify more than one SNMP manager and trap manager for a single
community. When adding different addresses, you need to enter the relevant command for each
additional address.
9-23
Setting procedure
Make the settings necessary for SNMP-based network management using the following procedure:
Set SNMP.
Set the SNMP manager.
Set SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission.
Set the trap manager.
Save the set data.
9.3.1 Setting SNMP - set snmp
9-25
9.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager - set snmp manager
9-25
9.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance set snmp authen-trap 9-26
9.3.4 Setting the trap manager - set snmp trap-manager
9.3.5 Saving the set data - write memory
9-24
9-27
9-26
9.3.1 Setting SNMP

CX2600/200 has the function to set SNMP and to display the set SNMP data. Enabling SNMP
allows the SNMP manager to find and set the network management information by means of the
SNMP management functions. Also, CX2600/200 faults can be reported to the trap manager.
Commands
set snmp
Setting of SNMP enable/disable
show snmp
Display of SNMP setting information
9.3.2 Setting the SNMP manager

The "set snmp manager" command sets the community name and access privilege, which are
used to authenticate messages exchanged between networks managed by the SNMP manager, as
well as the IP address of the host of the SNMP manager. As the access privilege, you can set
one of the two options - read-only and read-write.
Up to 20 SNMP managers can be registered.
clear SNMP managers.
Note
CX2600/200 has the functions to set, display, and

the manager IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, if the manager resides in either of the following network addresses,
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although
communication cannot be accomplished normally.
Commands
set snmp manager
Setting of SNMP manager
clear snmp manager
Clearing of SNMP manager settings
show snmp
9-25
9.3.3 Setting SNMP unauthorized access trap

issuance
CX2600/200 can transmit a trap in the event of an unauthorized SNMP access attempt.
the SNMP unauthorized access trap issuance function permits this trap to be issued.
Enabling
Commands
set snmp authen-trap
Setting of SNMP unauthorized access trap transmission
show snmp
9.3.4 Setting the trap manager

The "set snmp trap-manager" command sets a host that serves as the trap manager that manages
traps. The parameters for the trap manager are the community name, IP address, and device
name. Up to 10 trap managers can be registered, each managed by its respective manager
number. CX2600/200 has the functions to set, display, and clear trap managers.
Note

the manager IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, if the manager resides in either of the following network addresses,
192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that manager can be configured although
communication cannot be accomplished normally.
Note
If a large number of events occur simultaneously, no traps may be transmitted, in which

case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be sent. Then, if trap
transmission resumes, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" will be sent.
Commands
set snmp trap-manager
Setting of SNMP trap manager
clear snmp trap-manager
Clearing of SNMP trap manager
show snmp
9-26
9.3.5 Saving the set data

When finished with setting the data, execute the "write memory" command to save the set data to
the startup configuration data file.
Command
write memory
Limitation
About the date
In order for traps to contain the date and time information, you need to set the date and time in
advance. For information about how to set the date and time, see "Method of initial setup".
9-27
9.4 Counter Monitoring

CX2600/200 offers counter monitoring functions that allow monitoring on a per-port basis as well
as on a per-VLAN basis.
9.4.1 Port counters

CX2600/200 has a per-port counter monitoring function to collect and read the number of
transmitted and received frames.
The counter values can be displayed in the following two ways:
Real-time display
Detail display
Note
This function does not work for the ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and TDMP155 line modules.
Real-time display
CX2600/200 provides two real-time display functions - one collects the counter values showing the
number of frames transmitted and received by each port and displays the collected data in real
time, and the other clears the counter values.
The values of the counters shown below are collected.
The transmitted frame counter value and received frame counter value of each port are displayed
in real time.
These counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.
Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding SNMP MIB values as well.
Display item
Description
Pkts(Rx)
Number of received frames
Pkts(Tx)
Number of transmitted frames
Commands
clear counter port
Clearing of port counter
show counter port
Display of port counter
9-28
Detail display
CX2600/200 can collect and display the detail counter values of a specified port.
This function displays the detail counter values of a specified port.
The counter values that are the latest at the time of command input are shown only once.
The values of the counters listed below are collected. For the data collecting conditions for
counter monitoring, see Appendix "13.5 Counter Monitoring Condition List".
CX2600/200 has the functions to display and clear collected counter values.
values clears the corresponding MIB values as well.
Display item
Clearing the counter
Description
RxOctets
Number of received octets
RxPkts
RxDropEvents
Number of drop events
RxErrors
Number of reception error frames
RxUndersizePkts
Number of received frames with data length shorter than 64 octets
RxFragments
Number of received error frames with data length shorter than 64 octets
Rx64octs
Number of received frames with data length of 64 octets
Rx65to127octs
Number of received frames with data length of 65 to 127 octets
Rx128to255octs
Rx256to511octs
Rx512to1023octs
Rx1024to1518octs
RxCRCErrors
Number of alignment or FCS error frames received
RxOversizePkts
Number of received frames with data length of 1519 octets or longer
RxJabbers
Number of received error frames with data length of 1519 octets or longer
RxUcastPkts
Number of received unicast frames
RxMcastPkts
Number of received multicast frames
RxBcastPkts
Number of received broadcast frames
RxUnsupp
Number of unsupported frames that were received and discarded
RxDiscards
Number of frames discarded for reasons other than reception errors
TxOctets
Number of transmitted octets
TxPkts
TxErrors
Number of transmission error frames
TxCollisions
Number of transmitted collision frames
TxUcastPkts
Number of transmitted unicast frames
TxMcastPkts
Number of transmitted multicast frames
TxBcastPkts
Number of transmitted broadcast frames
TxUnsupp
Number of unsupported frames that were transmitted and discarded
TxDiscards
Number of frames discarded for reasons other than transmission errors
9-29

Commands
clear counter port
show counter port
Display of port counter
Discard counter detail display

CX2600/200 can collect and display the detail data about the discard counter values of a specified
port.
The counter values that are the latest at the time of command input are shown only once.
Note
The discard counter values are collected at three points - line module, QoS control, and L2SW.
Line module
QoS control
L2SW
Rx
Tx
Line module discard counters

The following table lists the numbers of discarded frames counted by the line module.
Display item
Description
RxUnknownTPID
Number of unsupported TPID received frames discarded or Ethernet-type

0x8100 received frames discarded at a portbase untagged port
RxUnknownVID
Number of unsupported VID frames received and discarded
TxUnknownTPID
Number of unsupported TPID transmitted frames discarded or

Ethernet-type 0x8100 transmitted frames discarded at a portbase
untagged port
9-30

QoS control discard counters
The following table lists the numbers of discarded frames counted by QoS control.
Display item
Description
RxDisInQoSPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit

function of the input port
RxDisOutQoSPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the output-side fairness control

function
RxFilterPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the input filtering function
RxMACLimitPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the MAC address learning count

restriction function
RxFairnessPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the input-side fairness control

function *not supported
TxDisOutQoSPkts
Number of transmitted frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit

function of the output port
TxFilterPkts
Number of transmitted frames discarded by the output filtering function
L2SW discard counters

The following table lists the numbers of discarded frames counted by the L2SW.
Display item
Description
RxDropPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the L2SW as invalid frames
TxAgePkts
Number of transmitted frames discarded by the L2SW due to aging
TxQueue0DisPkts
Number of transmitted no-class frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue1DisPkts
Number of transmitted Class-D frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue2DisPkts
Number of transmitted Class-C frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue3DisPkts
Number of transmitted Class-B frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue4DisPkts
Number of transmitted Class-A frames discarded by the L2SW
TxQueue5DisPkts
Number of transmitted frames of control frames from the CPU discarded

by the L2SW
Commands
clear counter port
show counter discard
Display of discard counter
9-31
9.4.2 VLAN counters

CX2600/200 has a per-VLAN counter monitoring function to collect and read the number of
transmitted and received frames. The detail VLAN counter information display can show the
collected per-VLAN counter values for a specific priority.
The VLAN counter information can be collected in the following two ways, one of which is specified
when registering a VLAN counter.
Short-interval collection VLAN counter:
The VLAN counter information is collected at intervals of about 1 second.
Long-interval collection VLAN counter:
The VLAN counter information is collected at intervals of about 25 seconds.
Note
Registering a VLAN counter

To use the per-VLAN counter monitoring function requires that VLAN counter collection conditions
be registered in advance.
Commands
set counter vlan entry
Registration of VLAN counter
clear counter vlan entry
Clearing of registered VLAN counter
show counter vlan entry
Display of VLAN counter registration information
The short-interval collection VLAN counter can display collected VLAN counter information in the
following three ways:
Real-time display
Detail display
Real-time detail display
Memo
The long-interval collection VLAN counter does not support real-time display or real-time
detail display.
9-32
Real-time display
CX2600/200 provides two real-time display functions - one collects the counter values showing the
number of frames transmitted and received under registered VLAN counter collection conditions
and displays the collected data in real time, and the other clears the counter values.
The values of the counters shown below are collected.
The transmitted frame counter values and received frame counter values under registered VLAN
counter collection conditions are displayed in real time.
These counter values are updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+ c key combination is pressed.
Clearing the counter values clears the corresponding SNMP MIB values as well.
Note
If the specified line number is operated in line module duplication when the counter
collection interval is short-interval and the information is displayed in real-time, the counter
information of the greater port is also displayed.
Display item
Description
Pkts(Rx)
Number of received packets
Pkts(Tx)
Number of transmitted packets
Commands
clear counter vlan value
Clearing of VLAN counter
show counter vlan value
Display of VLAN counter
Setting of VLAN counter collection conditions
9-33
Detail display/real-time detail display

CX2600/200 can collect and display the detail counter values under registered VLAN counter
collection conditions.
The detail counter values under registered VLAN counter collection conditions are displayed.
collected per-VLAN counter information can also be shown by priority or by class.
The
The detail display shows the counter values only once that are the latest at the time of command
input.
The real-time detail display shows the counter values in real time. These counter values are
updated at every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key combination is pressed.
Note
collection interval is short-interval and the information is displayed in detail or when the
counter collection interval is long-interval, the counter information of the greater port is
also displayed.
Note
collection interval is short-interval and the information is displayed in real-time detail, the
counter information of the port at the operation side is displayed.
Display item
Description
RxOcts
RxUcastOcts
Number of received unicast octets
RxMcastOcts
Number of received multicast octets
RxBcastOcts
Number of received broadcast octets
RxDisInQoSOcts
Number of received octets discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit

RxDisOutQoSOcts
Number of received octets discarded by the output-side fairness control

function
RxFilterOcts
Number of received octets discarded by the input filtering function
RxMACLimitOcts
Number of received octets discarded by the MAC address learning count

RxPkts
RxUcastPkts
Number of received unicast frames
RxMcastPkts
Number of received multicast frames
RxBcastPkts
Number of received broadcast frames
9-34

Display item
Description
RxDisInQoSPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit

RxDisOutQoSPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the output-side fairness control

function
RxFilterPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the input filtering function
RxMACLimitPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the MAC address learning count

RxFairnessPkts
Number of received frames discarded by the input-side fairness control

function *not supported
TxOcts
TxUcastOcts
Number of transmitted unicast octets
TxMcastOcts
Number of transmitted multicast octets
TxBcastOcts
Number of transmitted broadcast octets
TxDisOutQoSOcts
Number of transmitted octets discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit

TxFilterOcts
Number of transmitted octets discarded by the output filtering function
TxPkts
TxUcastPkts
Number of transmitted unicast frames
TxMcastPkts
Number of transmitted multicast frames
TxBcastPkts
Number of transmitted broadcast frames
TxDisOutQoSPkts
Number of transmitted frames discarded by the maximum bandwidth limit

TxFilterPkts
Number of transmitted frames discarded by the output filtering function
Commands
clear counter vlan value
Clearing of VLAN counter
show counter vlan value
Display of VLAN counter
Setting of VLAN counter collection conditions
9-35

Input example
The following example registers VLAN ID 4094 of port 4/8 with the short-interval collection VLAN
counter and displays the detail VLAN counter information regarding priority value 0.
Switch@1# set counter vlan entry short 4/8 4094

*Switch@1# show counter vlan entry short
VLAN Counter Entry (Short Cycle)
================================
Entry Count : 1
Port VID Name
-------------------------------------------4/8 4094 VID-4094
*Switch@1# show counter vlan value short detail 4/8 4094 0
VLAN Counter Table (Short Cycle)
================================
Port : 4/8
VID : 4094
Name : VID-4094
Kind : Priority.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Item
Counts | Item
Counts
=====================================+======================================
RxOcts
:
1000000 | TxOcts
:
0
RxUcastOcts
:
1000000 | TxUcastOcts
:
0
RxMcastOcts
:
0 | TxMcastOcts
:
0
RxBcastOcts
:
0 | TxBcastOcts
:
0
RxDisInQoSOcts
:
0 |
RxDisOutQoSOcts
:
0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts
:
0
RxFilterOcts
:
0 | TxFilterOcts
:
0
RxMACLimitOcts
:
0 |
RxPkts
:
10000 | TxPkts
:
0
RxUcastPkts
:
10000 | TxUcastPkts
:
0
RxMcastPkts
:
0 | TxMcastPkts
:
0
RxBcastPkts
:
0 | TxBcastPkts
:
0
RxDisInQoSPkts
:
0 |
RxDisOutQoSPkts
:
0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts
:
0
RxFilterPkts
:
0 | TxFilterPkts
:
0
RxMACLimitPkts
:
0 |
RxFairnessPkts
:
0 |
*Switch@1#
9-36

Input example
The following example registers VLAN ID 100 of port 2/1 with the long-interval collection VLAN
counter and displays the detail VLAN counter information regarding Class-A.
Switch@1# set counter vlan entry long 2/1 100

*Switch@1# show counter vlan entry long
VLAN Counter Entry (Long Cycle)
===============================
Entry Count : 1
Port VID Name
-------------------------------------------2/1 100 VID-100
*Switch@1#
9-37
*Switch@1# show counter vlan value long 2/1 100 class-a

VLAN Counter Table (Long Cycle)
===============================
Port : 2/1
VID : 100
Name : VID-100
Kind : Class-A
Class Information
=================
In-Maximum
In-Fairness
Out-Fairness
Out-Maximum
Module
(Priority)
(Priority)
(Priority)
(Priority)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Line
: 6,7
6,7
--Switch :
6,7
---------------------------------------------------------------------------Item
Counts | Item
Counts
=====================================+======================================
RxOcts
:
1000000 | TxOcts
:
--RxUcastOcts
:
1000000 | TxUcastOcts
:
--RxMcastOcts
:
0 | TxMcastOcts
:
--RxBcastOcts
:
0 | TxBcastOcts
:
--RxDisInQoSOcts
:
0 |
RxDisOutQoSOcts
:
0 | TxDisOutQoSOcts
:
--RxFilterOcts
:
0 | TxFilterOcts
:
--RxMACLimitOcts
:
0 |
RxPkts
:
10000 | TxPkts
:
--RxUcastPkts
:
10000 | TxUcastPkts
:
--RxMcastPkts
:
0 | TxMcastPkts
:
--RxBcastPkts
:
0 | TxBcastPkts
:
--RxDisInQoSPkts
:
0 |
RxDisOutQoSPkts
:
0 | TxDisOutQoSPkts
:
--RxFilterPkts
:
0 | TxFilterPkts
:
--RxMACLimitPkts
:
0 |
RxFairnessPkts
:
0 |
*Switch@1#
9-38
9.4.3 ATM counters

CX2600/200 has the ATM transmission path counter monitoring function to collect and display the
number of transmitted and received cells, bytes, and frames.
The ATM counter has following functions:
PVC counter registration function
Per-PVC byte/frame counter collection and display function
Cell counter collection and display function
The ATM counter values are collected at points as follows.

1)
Counter collection point at the ATM155 line module
[4]
[5]
AAL5
Termination
[3]
Shaper
[2]
PVC
Counter
OAM
Counter
[1]
OAM
Termination
SDH
Framer
PHY
L2SW
[6]
[1] (Per-port) collection point of cell counter

[2] (Per-PVC) collection point of OAM cell counter
[4] (Per-PVC) collection point of cell/byte/frame counter
[6] (Per-PVC) collection point of ATM discard frame counter
Note
When the PVC is blocked, [3] is the block point. Therefore, the transmission counter of
[4] and the reception counters of [1] and [2] are counted respectively.
Note
Since [2] is the point to discard unregistered PVC, unregistered discard cells received
from the line are also counted at the reception counters of [1].
9-39

2)
Counter collection point at the ATMP line module
[3]
ATM
Capsulation
[2]
PVC
Counter
OAM
Counter
[1]
OAM
Termination
IMA
Processing
PHY
[4]
[6]
L2SW
[1] (Per-IMA group/port) collection point of cell counter

[4] (Per-PVC) collection point of cell counter
Note
Note
Note
When EndPoint is set, the OAM cells transmitted from PHY side are terminated in [3].
Therefore, the number is counted only at reception counters of [2].
Note
When ConnectingPoint is set, the OAM cells received from the line are run through to
L2SW side. Therefore, the number is counted at both reception counters of [2] and [4].
Note
When ConnectingPoint is set, F4/F5-AIS are transmitted from [3] to L2SW direction at line
failure detection. Therefore, the number is counted at reception counters of [4].
9-40

3)
Counter collection point at the ATMP155 line module
[4]
[5]
ATM
Capsulation
[3]
Shaper
[2]
PVC
Counter
OAM
Counter
[1]
OAM
Termination
SDH
Framer
PHY
L2SW
[6]
[1] (Per-port) collection point of cell counter

[4] (Per-PVC) collection point of cell counter
Note
Note
Note
When EndPoint is set, the OAM cells transmitted from PHY side are terminated in [3].
Therefore, the number is counted only at reception counters of [2].
Note
When ConnectingPoint is set, the OAM cells received from the line are run through to
L2SW side. Therefore, the number is counted at both reception counters of [2] and [4].
Note
When ConnectingPoint is set, F4/F5-AIS are transmitted from [3] to L2SW direction at line
failure detection. Therefore, the number is counted at reception counters of [4].
9-41
PVC counter registration

For some per-PVC counters, the update intervals can be shortened by registering a PVC counter.
Up to 256 counters can be registered as a PVC counter.
The following table shows the maximum update intervals for each counter type that may vary
depending on whether a PVC counter is registered or not.
PVC counter
registered
Counter type
(Per-IMA group/per-port) cell counter
PVC counter not

registered
1 second
(Per-PVC) OAM cell counter
12 seconds
Not updated
(Per-PVC) cell counter (other than OAM)
1 second
30 seconds
(Per-PVC) AAL5 discard frame counter
1 second
30 seconds
(Per-PVC) byte/frame counter (other than AAL5 discard)
1 second
30 seconds
Following commands are used for the PVC counter registration.
Commands
set counter pvc entry
Registration of PVC counter
clear counter pvc entry
Clearing of PVC counter registration
show counter pvc entry
Display of PVC counter registration information
Note
These commands can be set to the ATM155, ATMP, and ATMP155 line modules only.
Memo
Clearing a PVC clears all corresponding registered PVC counters as well.
Memo
Clearing a PVC counter clears all corresponding counter values as well.
9-42
Per-PVC byte/frame counter

CX2600/200 has the functions to collect and display the number of transmitted and received bytes
and frames on a per-PVC basis.
The per-PVC byte/frame counter provides real time display as well as detail display and clears the
counter values.
The real-time display function updates the counter values every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key
combination is pressed.
Display items for the real-time display function are shown below.
Display item
Description
Pkts(Rx)
Pkts(Tx)
The detail display function displays more items.

Display items for the detail display function are shown below.
Display item
Description
RxOcts
RxPkts
RxErrors
Number of received discard frames (AAL5 discard)
TxOcts
TxPkts
Following commands are used for the per-PVC byte/frame counter function.
Commands
show counter pvc value
Display of byte/frame counter information per PVC
clear counter pvc value
Clearing of byte/frame counter information per PVC
Note
These commands can be set to the ATM155 line module only.
9-43
Cell counter
CX2600/200 has the functions to collect and display the cell counter on a per-IMA group, per-port,
and per-PVC basis.
The cell counter provides real time display as well as detail display and clears the counter values.
The real-time display function updates the counter values every 2 seconds until the Ctrl+c key
combination is pressed.
Display items for the real-time display function are shown below.
Display item
Description
Cells(Rx)
Number of received cells
Cells(Tx)
Number of transmitted cells
The detail display function displays more items.

Display items for the detail display function are shown below.
Display item
Description
RxCells
Number of received cells
RxErrors
Number of received discard cells (HEC error)
RxF4SegAIS
Received segment VP-AIS cells
RxF4SegRDI
Received segment VP-RDI cells
RxF4SegLoopback
Received F4 level segment loopback cells
RxF4SegOthers
Received F4 level segment other OAM cells
RxF4EndAIS
Received end VP-AIS cells
RxF4EndRDI
Received end VP-RDI cells
RxF4EndLoopback
Received F4 level end loopback cells
RxF4EndOthers
Received F4 level end other OAM cells
RxF5SegAIS
Received segment VC-AIS cells
RxF5SegRDI
Received segment VC-RDI cells
RxF5SegLoopback
Received F5 level segment loopback cells
RxF5SegOthers
Received F5 level segment other OAM cells
RxF5EndAIS
Received end VC-AIS cells
RxF5EndRDI
Received end VC-RDI cells
RxF5EndLoopback
Received F5 level end loopback cells
RxF5EndOthers
Received F5 level end other OAM cells
TxCells
Number of transmitted cells
TxErrors
Number of transmitted discard cells
TxF4SegAIS
Transmitted segment VP-AIS cells
TxF4SegRDI
Transmitted segment VP-RDI cells
TxF4SegLoopback
Transmitted F4 level segment loopback cells
TxF4SegOthers
Transmitted F4 level segment other OAM cells
9-44

Display item
Description
TxF4EndAIS
Transmitted end VP-AIS cells
TxF4EndRDI
Transmitted end VP-RDI cells
TxF4EndLoopback
Transmitted VP-loopback cells-end
TxF4EndOthers
Transmitted F4 level end other OAM cells
TxF5SegAIS
Transmitted segment VC-AIS cells
TxF5SegRDI
Transmitted segment VC-RDI cells
TxF5SegLoopback
Transmitted F5 level segment loopback cells
TxF5SegOthers
Transmitted F5 level segment other OAM cells
TxF5EndAIS
Transmitted end VC-AIS cells
TxF5EndRDI
Transmitted end VC-RDI cells
TxF5EndLoopback
Transmitted F5 level end loopback cells
TxF5EndOthers
Transmitted F5 level end other OAM cells
Following commands are used for the cell counter collection/display function.
Commands
show counter cell
Display of cell counter information
show counter cell ima-port
Display of cell counter information per IMA port
show counter cell f4
Display of cell counter information per F4
show counter cell f5
Display of cell counter information per F5
clear counter cell
Clearing of cell counter information
Note
These commands can be set to the ATM155, ATMP, and ATMP155 line modules only.
Note
When the root port of the IMA group is specified for the ATMP line module with the "show
counter cell" command and the "show counter cell f4/f5" command, counter information on
per-IMA group basis is displayed.
Note
The "show counter cell ima-port" command can be used only for the ATMP line module.
In addition, F4 F5 related counters are not displayed.
9-45

Input example
The following example registers PVC 0/32 of port 3/1 with the PVC counter and displays the detail
per-PVC byte/frame counter information regarding PVC 0/32 of port 3/1.
Switch@1# set counter pvc entry 3/1 0/32

*Switch@1# show counter pvc value detail 3/1 0/32
PVC Counter Table
=================
Port
: 3/1
VPI/VCI : 0/32
Name
: name_3_1_0_32
Entry
: registered
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
------------------------------+--------------------------------------------RxOcts
:
20707310520 | TxOcts
:
164
RxPkts
:
394423650 | TxPkts
:
2
RxErrors :
0 |
*Switch@1#
Input example
The following example registers PVCs 0/200-205 of port 3/1 with the PVC counter and displays the
real-time per-F5 cell counter information regarding PVCs 0/200-205 of port 3/1.
Switch@1# set counter pvc entry 3/1 0/200-205

*Switch@1# show counter cell f5 real 3/1 0/200-205
F5-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port
: 3/1
VPI/VCI
Cells(Rx)
Cells(Tx) Entry
--------------------------------------------------------------------------0/200
2833864
789042
registered
0/201
2833864
2833864
registered
0/202
1638790
0
registered
0/203
17231
17231
registered
0/204
0
0
registered
0/205
120181590
0
registered
Count-End with [Ctrl]+[c]
*Switch@1#
9-46

Input example
The following example registers PVCs 0/200 and 0/300 of port 3/1 with the PVC counter, by
specifying multiple parameters, and displays the detail per-F4 cell counter information regarding
VPI0 of port 3/1.
Switch@1# set counter pvc entry 3/1 0/200,0/300

*Switch@1# show counter cell f4 detail 3/1 0
F4-Cell Counter Table
=====================
Port
: 3/1
VPI
: 0
Entry : registered
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
----------------------------------+--------------------------------------RxCells
:
10490340 | TxCells
:
10490340
RxErrors
:
0 | TxErrors
:
0
RxF4SegAIS
:
281463 | TxF4SegAIS
:
24893
RxF4SegRDI
:
281463 | TxF4SegRDI
:
221
RxF4SegLoopback :
281463 | TxF4SegLoopback :
0
RxF4SegOthers
:
0 | TxF4SegOthers :
0
RxF4EndAIS
:
281463 | TxF4EndAIS
:
24893
RxF4EndRDI
:
281463 | TxF4EndRDI
:
221
RxF4EndLoopback :
281463 | TxF4EndLoopback :
0
RxF4EndOthers
:
281463 | TxF4EndOthers :
0
RxF5SegAIS
:
0 | TxF5SegAIS
:
0
RxF5SegRDI
:
0 | TxF5SegRDI
:
0
RxF5SegLoopback :
0 | TxF5SegLoopback :
0
RxF5SegOthers
:
0 | TxF5SegOthers :
0
RxF5EndAIS
:
21461 | TxF5EndAIS
:
28
RxF5EndRDI
:
876 | TxF5EndRDI
:
2361
RxF5EndLoopback :
0 | TxF5EndLoopback :
0
RxF5EndOthers
:
0 | TxF5EndOthers :
0
*Switch@1#
9-47

Input example
The following example displays the real-time information per-IMA port cell counter information for
port 1/1-4 set by the IMA group regarding port 1/1-4 and the detail information regarding port 1/3.
*Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port real 1/1-4

Cell Counter Table
==================
Port
: 1/1-4
Port
Cell(Rx)
Cell(Tx)
Entry
---------------------------------------------------------------------1/1
147081
142821
--1/2
147091
142830
--1/3
147099
142837
--1/4
147103
142841
--Counter-End with [Ctrl]+[c]
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter cell ima-port detail 1/3
Cell Counter Table
==================
Port
: 1/3
Item
Counts | Item
Counts
--------------------------------+---------------------------------------RxCells
:
184798 | TxCells
:
180538
RxErrors
:
0 | TxErrors
:
0
*Switch@1#
9-48
9.4.4 EtherOAM counters

CX2600/200 has an EtherOAM counter monitoring function to collect and display the number of
transmitted and received EtherOAM frames.
To collect the counter information, register the conditions required for EtherOAM counter collection.
These conditions can be registered for every VLAN, MEG Level and Op-Code of EtherOAM frames
to be counted. Op-Codes for EtherOAM frames supported by this unit are shown below.
OP-Code
EtherOAM frame type
OP-Code
EtherOAM frame type
CMM
LBR
LBM
LTR
LTM
39
E-APS
40
R-APS
42
LMR
43
LMM
46
DMR
47
DMM
Note
Redundant counter registration for an identical line number is invalid. To change the
counter registration information, delete the current registration information first.
Memo
The EtherOAM counter is available only for frames transmitted/received on the outside of
the SW. Counter information of frames transmitted/received within the SW cannot be
collected.
Commands
set counter ether-oam entry
Registration of EtherOAM counter
show counter ether-oam entry
Display of EtherOAM counter registration information
clear counter ether-oam entry
Clearing of EtherOAM counter registration
9-49

The display items of collected counter values are shown below.
Counter display items

Display item
Description
RxPkts
Displays the number of received frames that match the registered

conditions.
TxPkts
Displays the number of transmitted frames that match the registered

conditions.
Command
show counter ether-oam value
Memo
Display of EtherOAM counter
Collected counter values are cleared when they are displayed by the "show counter
ether-oam value" command.
9-50

Input example (1/2)
The following example displays the counter information under the following conditions:
- The EtherOAM counter has been registered for the port 1/1 as VLAN ID: 55, MEG level: 6 and
OP-Code: 1.
- EtherOAM frames that match the above registered conditions are received/transmitted on the
port 1/1.
*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 1/1 55 6 1

*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 12/1 55 6 1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry
Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
--------------------------------1/1
55
6
1
12/1
55
6
1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value
Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port
RxPkts
TxPkts
---------------------------1/1
2307
2307
12/1
2086
2087
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry 1/1
*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry 12/1
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 1/1 all
*Switch@1# set counter ether-oam entry 12/1 all
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam entry
Ether OAM Counter Entry
=======================
Port VLAN-ID MEG Level OP-Code
--------------------------------1/1
all
all
all
12/1
all
all
all
*Switch@1#
9-51

Input example (1/2)
*Switch@1# show counter ether-oam value
Ether OAM Frame Count
=====================
Port
RxPkts
TxPkts
---------------------------1/1
2307
2307
12/1
2086
2087
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# clear counter ether-oam entry
*Switch@1#
9-52
9.5 Fault Monitoring

CX2600/200 monitors devices for hardware faults, as well as line faults, during operation. Upon
detection of a fault, it transmits an SNMP trap to notify the SNMP manager of the fault while at the
same time displaying the relevant message on the local and remote consoles.
For the fault types and actions, see Appendix "13.3 Fault List".
You can check whether a device is experiencing a fault by having its status displayed using the
relevant command.
The fault information can be read using the relevant command.
This section describes the following functions:
Line status
Protection time setting
Fault information
Restart cause
Line status
CX2600/200 lets you check the line status by examining the on/off status of the LED on the line
module.
Protection time setting

CX2600/200 displays a fault message or issues a trap notification when the preset protection time
elapses after a change in the port link status is detected. Using the relevant command, you can
set either a forward protection time (link down) or backward protection time (link up).
Forward protection time:
Time allowed to elapse from the detection of link down in the link up status until a status
transition to link down occurs and a fault message and trap issuance are provided. If the port
link status changes during the protection time, a status transition will not occur and a fault
message and trap issuance will not be provided.
Backward protection time:
Time allowed to elapse from the detection of link up in the link down status until a status
transition to link up occurs and a fault message and trap issuance are provided. If the port link
status changes during the protection time, a status transition will not occur and a fault message
and trap issuance will not be provided.
9-53

Commands
Input example
The following example sets the forward protection time to 2 seconds and the backward protection
time to 1 second.
Switch@1# set port protection-time fe 1/1-3 link-down 2000

*Switch@1# set port protection-time fe 1/1-3 link-up 1000
*Switch@1# show port protection-time 1
Link Protection time Table
==========================
Port Link Up(msec) - Link Down(msec)
------------------------------------------------------------------1/1
1000
2000
1/2
1000
2000
1/3
1000
2000
1/4
3000
500
1/5
3000
500
1/6
3000
500
1/7
3000
500
1/8
3000
500
*Switch@1#
9-54
Fault information
This function displays fault information. The following two types of fault information are provided.
Collect fault information, and contact your local distributor for assistance.
(1) Hardware fault information
Information about hardware-caused faults detected by the monitoring function of
CX2600/200's CPU. The fault information may include external factors such as power and
line cable connections, installation location, and ambient environment.
(2) Software fault information (exception information and error information)
Information storing the CPU's internal status recorded when a software-triggered fault
occurred. These faults are due to CX2600/200's internal factors. Collect the local log data
(using the Input example "show syslog local all" command) along with the fault information,
and contact your local distributor.
As for the existing faults, you can display both the hardware fault information and software fault
information by using the "show fault present" command. The information on the past software
faults can be displayed using the "show fault past" command. If there are no past software faults,
the command will display "No entry in the table.".
Commands
show fault present
Display of current fault and alarm information
show fault past
Display of past fault information
Restart factor
This function displays the cause of the restart.
For details of the restart factors, see Appendix "13.7 Restart Cause List".
Command
show reset
Display of reset factor
9-55
9.6 Faults
In the event of a fault, CX2600/200 transmits an SNMP trap to notify the SNMP manager of the
fault while at the same time displaying the relevant message on the local and remote consoles.
Check the content of the displayed message, and take an action appropriate for the reported fault.
CX2600/200 has the link trap transmission setting function that lets you enable or disable per-port
link status change notification, as well as the setting status display function.
By default, if a WDTOVF or EXCEPTION fault is detected, the module in which that fault is
detected will be rebooted in 10 seconds. You can set CX2600/200 not to reboot the module.
Commands
set port link-trap
Setting of SNMP link trap transmission
set terminal monitor
Setting of autonomous message output
set fault auto-reboot
Setting of autonomous rebooting enable/disable
show port trap
Display of link trap transmission setting
show fault auto-reboot
Display of autonomous rebooting settings
9-56
9.7 M/C Status

CX2600/200 allows you to check the status of the M/C that is the distant device. To do so, you
need to enable the M/C management function. Conducting a loopback test also requires enabling
the M/C management function.
Setting the M/C management function

You can enable or disable the M/C management function for a specified port.
Disabling the M/C management function makes the port unable to transmit or receive
TS-1000-compliant maintenance frames.
You can set the UTP mode together with the M/C management function.
When the UTP mode is set, a trap issuance is provided regarding the status change of the
terminal-side link (UTP) of the M/C.
Command
set mc management
Setting of M/C management function basics
Input example
The following example enables the M/C management function for all the ports of module number 1.
*Switch@1# set mc management 1/1-8 enable

*Switch@1#
9-57
Displaying the M/C information

Displays the M/C status for a specified module or port.
No information is displayed for those ports for which the M/C management function is disabled.
Command
show mc information
Display of M/C status
Input example 1)
The following example displays only the basic information for the specified module.
*Switch@1# show mc information 1

Remote MC Information
=====================
MC ManPower
UTP MC
Rx-OPT Notice
LoopTest
Port agement Option Status Link Fail
Status Rx-OPT Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 enabled utp
normal
up
normal normal fefi
testing
1/2 enabled none
normal
up
normal fail
fefi
idle
1/3 enabled utp
normal
up
normal normal frame
idle
1/4 enabled none
fail
down normal normal frame
idle
1/5 disabled --------------1/6 enabled none
normal
up
normal normal frame
idle
1/7 enabled utp
1/8 enabled none
normal
down normal normal frame
idle
*Switch@1#
9-58

Input example 2)
The following example displays detail information for the specified port.
Switch@1# show mc information 1/1

Remote MC Information
=====================
Port
: 1/1
MC Management
: enabled
Option
: utp
Power Status
: normal
UTP Link Status
: up
MC Fault
: normal
Rx OPT Status
: normal
Notice Rx OPT Down
: fefi
LoopTest Status
: idle
Option B support
: support
Vendor Code
: 0x00004c
Model ID
: 0x113105
UTP I/F
: single
UTP Auto Negotiation
: enabled
UTP Link Speed (Mbps)
: 100
UTP Duplex Mode
: full
Switch@1#
Display item
Meaning
Port
Displays the port number.
MC Management
Displays whether the M/C management function is enabled or disabled.
Option
Power Status
UTP Link Status

*
MC Fault
enabled
: Enabled
disabled
: Disabled
Displays whether the UTP mode is set or not.

none
: Not set
utp
: Set
Displays the M/C power status.

normal
: Power ON
fail
: Power OFF
Displays the M/C terminal-side link (UTP) status.

up
: Link up
down
: Link down
Displays the M/C fault status.

normal
: Normal
fail
: Faulty
9-59

Display item
Rx OPT Status
Notice Rx OPT Down
LoopTest Status
Option B support
*
Meaning
Displays the M/C optical signal reception status.
normal
: Normal
fail
: Optical signal down
Displays the M/C optical signal down notification method.

frame
: Maintenance frame
fefi
: FEFI notification
Displays the M/C loop test status.

idle
: Normal
testing
: Loop test in progress
Displays the M/C Option B support status.

not support : Not supported
support
: Supported
Vendor Code
Displays the M/C vendor code (6-digit hexadecimal number).
Model ID
Displays the M/C model code (6-digit hexadecimal number).
UTP I/F
Displays the number of M/C terminal-side link (UTP) physical interfaces.
UTP Auto Negotiation

*S
UTP Link Speed
*S
UTP Duplex Mode

*S
Note
single
: Single
multi
: Multiple
Displays the M/C terminal-side link (UTP) auto negotiation function status.
disable
: Disabled
enabled
: Enabled
Displays the M/C terminal-side link (UTP) speed.

10
: 10 Mbps
100
: 100 Mbps
1000
: 1000 Mbps
other
: Other
Displays the M/C terminal-side link (UTP) duplex mode.

half
: Half duplex
full
: Full duplex
As for those ports for which the M/C management function is disabled, "---" will be
displayed for all the items. Even if the M/C management function is enabled, the items
appear blank when no information has been retrieved.
* Although the TS-1000 standard does not mention multiple interfaces for "the number of M/C
terminal-side link physical interfaces (UTP I/F)", the CX2600/200 displays the information it
receives.
S When "not support" is set in Option B support, the item appears blank, even if the M/C
management function is enabled.
9-60
Retrieving the M/C information

Issues a request to retrieve the M/C status information.
The status retrieval request will not be made for those ports for which the M/C management
function is disabled.
The M/C status is automatically retrieved as the link is set up and, whenever any change is made
to the M/C status, the M/C autonomously sends a status notification. Under normal conditions,
therefore, you do not need to use this command.
If there is any probability that the M/C may fail to send a status notification autonomously, issue a
status notification request to the M/C by using this command.
If a fault is suspected, use the "loopback mc" command.
Command
update mc information
Prompting of M/C to send M/C status notification
Input example
The following example retrieves the M/C information from port 1 of module number 1.
*Switch@1# update mc information 1/1

*Switch@1#
9-61
9.8 syslog Functions

CX2600/200 implements the syslog functions defined by RFC 3164.
Enabling the syslog functions makes it possible to send information on the CX2600/200 operating
status to a remote server (remote logging) and to save such information in built-in flash memory
(local logging).
This section describes the following functions:
Local logging
Remote logging
Mapping
Local logging
CX2600/200 has the local logging function that records and displays the information described
below together with the occurrence time, as well as the local log clearing function.
About up to 2 MB of log data (about 20000 log records when the length of each character string to
be saved is assumed to be 80 characters) can be recorded.
Local log data is recorded as local system events only by the system that detects or executes the
event. Also, rebooting or powering off the system does not clear the log data.
Local log data can be uploaded to an FTP server.
For information about the settings necessary to use an FTP server, see "3.5 Settings for Remote
Maintenance" of this manual.
For the fault numbers and severity levels displayed in fault information, see Appendix "13.3 Fault
List".
Information to be collected as local log data

1
Setting command execution log excluding terminal setting (normally ended commands only)
Telnet-related log (login, logout, idle timeout, forced disconnection, connection rejection, and
login authentication failure)
Fault information
Device status transition information (ACH, etc.)
9-62

Commands
clear syslog local
Clearing of local log
show syslog local
Display of local syslog
upload local-syslog
Uploading of system log to ftp server
Memo
The upload time may become longer due to such factors as the size of data being
transferred, traffic volume on the network, performance of the FTP server, and LAN
cabling.
You can force the ongoing communication with the FTP server to end, by pressing the Ctrl
+ c key combination.
After checking the conditions of the network and FTP server, enter the command again.
Note

in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, that
manager can be configured although communication cannot be accomplished normally.
Note
If a large number of events occur simultaneously, local log data may not be collected, in
which case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be sent.
Then, if the logging resumes, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" will be sent.
Remote logging
CX2600/200 supports the remote logging function (syslog) that allows it to transmit the same
messages as in local logging to the syslog server.
The remote log data is transmitted by the ACT system.
The syslog server needs to be set up using the "syslogd" command. For information about the
syslogd setup, see the setup method of UNIX (including Linux and FreeBSD).
Up to 5 syslog servers and facilities from Local0 to Local7 can be registered per CX2600/200.
Note

the server IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Also, if the server resides in either of the following network addresses, 192.168.128.0/24
and 192.168.129.0/24, that server can be configured although communication cannot be
accomplished normally.
Note
If a large number of events occur simultaneously, remote log data may not be transmitted,
in which case "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED (CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)" will be sent.
Then, if the logging resumes, "IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER" will be sent.
9-63

Commands
set syslog server
Setting of syslog server and message facility
set syslog remote
Setting of remote log enable/disable
clear syslog server
Clearing of syslog server
show syslog server
Display of syslog server configuration information
Input example
The following example sets the IP address of the syslog server to 192.168.2.200, sets the facility to
local7, and enables remote logging.
Switch@1# set syslog server 1 192.168.2.200 local7

*Switch@1# set syslog remote enable
*Switch@1# show syslog server
Syslog Remote Configuration
===========================
Syslog Remote: enabled
Syslog Server Table
===================
Index IP Address
Facility
------------------------------------------------1 192.168.2.200
local7
*Switch@1#
9-64
Mapping
CX2600/200's remote logging function maps groups of remote logging events to several levels
according to their severity. These levels are listed below.
Groups mapped to a certain level may be remapped to another level.
Level
Meaning
LOG_CRIT
Critical condition
LOG_ERR
Error condition
LOG_WARNING
Warning condition
LOG_INFO
Informational message
The following table shows the groups of remote logging events and their default levels.
Group
TRAP_SYSFLT
Meaning
System status fault message
Level
LOG_CRIT
Reboot fault message

TRAP_SYSMJR
System status fault message
LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSMNR
System status minor fault message
LOG_ERR
TRAP_SYSWAR
System status warning message
LOG_WARNING
TRAP_SYSCLR
System status fault recovery message
LOG_INFO
TRAP_SYSINF
System informational message
LOG_INFO
TRAP_LINEFLT
Line module fault message
LOG_CRIT
TRAP_LINEMJR
Line module fault message
LOG_ERR
Optical module fault message

TRAP_LINEMNR
Line module minor fault message
LOG_ERR
TRAP_LINEWAR
Line module warning message
LOG_WARNING
TRAP_LINECLR
Line module fault recovery message
LOG_INFO
Optical module fault recovery message

TRAP_LINEINF
Line module informational message
LOG_INFO
Optical module informational message

TRAP_PORTMJR
Port fault occurrence message
LOG_ERR
TRAP_PORTCLR
Port recovery message
LOG_INFO
TRAP_PORTINF
Port information message
LOG_INFO
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
Route control fault message
LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
Route control minor fault message
LOG_ERR
TRAP_ROUTEWAR
Route control warning message
LOG_WARNING
TRAP_ROUTECLR
Route control fault recovery message
LOG_INFO
TRAP_ROUTEINF
Route control informational message
LOG_INFO
COMMAND_LOG
Setting command execution log excluding terminal

setting
(Normally ended commands only)
LOG_INFO
9-65

Commands
set syslog map
Setting of syslog message level remapping
clear syslog map
Clearing of syslog message level remapping
show syslog map
Display of syslog message level mapping status
Limitation
The reboot completion message and those logs collected before the NTP server is accessed at the
time of reboot may use the default date value - "2000/01/01".
9-66
9.9 MAC Learning

CX2600/200 has the following MAC learning functions:
1.
UGSW MAC learning function

This function displays and deletes the MAC address information learned by the UGSW.
2.
ATM155 line module MAC learning function

This function displays and deletes the MAC address information learned by ATM155 line
modules.
9.9.1 UGSW MAC learning function

This system learns and stores the source MAC address of each received frame on a per-line and
per-VLAN basis. It references the learned information when transferring frames. Received
frames containing the learned MAC address as the destination address are unicast, while those
whose destination MAC address is not learned are flooded within the same VLAN.
If no frame is received from a source MAC address for a defined period of time, then that MAC
address will age and be deleted from the learning information table.
You can check the current number of learned entries and the learning information on a per-port or
per-VLAN basis, by using the relevant command. It is also possible to delete information stored in
the learning table. For details, see "Command Reference".
The following functions are described:
Setting the maximum MAC learning count mode
Aging function
Displaying the MAC learning count for the UGSW
Displaying the MAC learning information for the UGSW
Clearing the MAC learning information
Memo
The MAC learning information of the ATMP and TDMP line module is displayed by the
smallest port number.
Note
The maximum MAC learning count can be changed to 512K/16K entries. However, there
may be a case where MAC addresses cannot be learned depending on their values. In
this case, the learning information table of MAC addresses cannot be used fully.
9-67

Note
More than the maximum learned MAC entry count may be displayed when information is
registered to and deleted from the MAC learning information repeatedly due to port move
and other operations.
Setting the maximum MAC learning count mode

The maximum learning count of MAC addresses can be changed to 512K/16K. By default, the
512K mode is set.
Commands
set fdb table mode
Setting of maximum MAC learning count mode
show fdb table mode
Display of maximum MAC learning count mode
Note
To enable the maximum MAC learning count mode setting, restart the unit after executing
the "write memory" command. If not restarted, the setting will not be enabled.
Note
If the following operations are executed, the maximum MAC learning count modes vary
between the UGSW in the ACT system and the one in the SBY system: Set the maximum
MAC learning count mode during single operation of a UGSW module, and then, insert
the UGSW module of the other system or restart the UGSW by resetting it. This is
because the restarted UGSW maximum MAC learning count mode setting is reflected to
the restarted UGSW.
Aging function
The aging function is supported to delete learned MAC addresses after a defined period of time.
By default, learned MAC addresses are retained in the table for 5 minutes and automatically
deleted if they are not learned again during the 5-minute period. The period of time to retain
learned MAC addresses can be changed in the range of 10 to 1000000 seconds by using the
relevant command.
Commands
set fdb agingtime
Setting of aging time
show fdb agingtime
Display of aging time
9-68
Displaying the MAC learning count for the UGSW

Displays the MAC learning count per device, per port, or per VLAN.
Commands
show fdb count all
Display of MAC learning count per device
show fdb count port
Display of MAC learning count per port
show fdb count vid
Display of MAC learning count per VLAN
Displaying the MAC learning information for the UGSW

Displays the MAC learning information per port, per VLAN, or without sorting.
Commands
show fdb table port
Display of MAC learning information per port
show fdb table vid
Display of MAC learning information per VLAN
show fdb table
Display of MAC learning information (no sorting)
Memo
The information sorted by the MAC addresses per-port basis is displayed for the per-port
basis display.
Clearing the MAC learning information

Clears the MAC learning information per port or per VLAN.
Commands
clear fdb table port
Clearing of MAC learning information per port
clear fdb table vid
Clearing of MAC learning information per VLAN
Memo
As for the all MAC learning information clearing event, a trap is sent indicating that all
entries have been cleared after the input of the command.
9-69
9.9.2 ATM line module MAC learning function

The ATM line module learns and stores the source MAC address of each received frame on a
per-PVC and per-VLAN basis. It references the learned information when transferring frames.
Received frames containing the learned MAC address as the destination address are looped back
within the ATM line module without being transferred to the UGSW, while those whose destination
MAC address is not learned by the ATM line module of the input port are transferred to the UGSW.
If no frame is received from a source MAC address for a defined period of time, then that MAC
address will age and be deleted from the learning information table.
You can check the current number of entries learned by the ATM line module and the learning
information on a per-PVC or per-VLAN basis, by using the relevant command. It is also possible
to delete information stored in the learning information table. For details, see "Command
Reference".
The following functions are described:
Aging function
Displaying the MAC learning count for the ATM line module
Displaying the MAC learning information for the ATM line module
Clearing the MAC learning information for the ATM line module
Note
The MAC addresses of those frames that are looped back within the line module are not
learned by the UGSW.
Note
While the ATM line module can learn up to 8K MAC addresses per line, there may be
cases where MAC addresses cannot be learned depending on their values and the 8K
table cannot be used fully.
The ATM line module learns both the source MAC addresses of input frames from the
ATM transmission paths and those of frames transferred from the UGSW. If the
combined number of addresses exceeds 8K, MAC addresses will not be learned any
longer. The MAC addresses displayed by this function are the source MAC addresses of
input frames from the ATM transmission paths.
Note
If a port move occurs, each ATM line module associated with that port move learns the
MAC address.
Note
More than the maximum learned MAC entry count may be displayed when information is
registered to and deleted from the MAC learning information repeatedly due to port move
and other operations.
Note
The MAC learning function of the ATM line module uses the ATM155 line module.
9-70
Displaying the MAC learning count for the ATM line module
Displays the MAC learning count per PVC or per VLAN.
Commands
show atm-fdb count pvc
Display of MAC learning count per PVC
show atm-fdb count vid
Display of MAC learning count per VLAN
Input example
Display of the number of learned MAC entries on a per-PVC basis
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc

Total Learned Entry
===================
Port Learned-Entry
----------------------------------3/1
2000
10/1
1000
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name
Learned-Entry
------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
0/32 ab012345678901234567890123456789
1500
3/1
1/32
500
10/1 255/255
1000
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count pvc 10/1 255/255
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VPI/VCI PVC-Name
Learned-Entry
------------------------------------------------------------------10/1 255/255
1000
*Switch@1#
9-71

Input example
Display of the number of learned MAC entries on a per-VLAN basis
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid

Total Learned Entry
===================
Port Learned-Entry
-------------------------------5/1
600
9/1
1000
10/1
1500
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VID VLAN-Name
Learned-Entry
------------------------------------------------------------------5/1
1 ab012345678901234567890123456789
100
5/1 4094
500
9/1 4093
1000
10/1
1 ab012345678901234567890123456789
1500
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb count vid 5/1 4094
FDB Learned Entry
=================
Port VID VLAN-Name
Learned-Entry
------------------------------------------------------------------5/1 4094
500
*Switch@1#
9-72
Displaying the MAC learning information for the ATM line

module
Displays the MAC learning information per port or per VLAN.
Commands
show atm-fdb table pvc
Display of MAC learning information per PVC
show atm-fdb table vid
Display of MAC learning information per VLAN
Input example
Display of the MAC learning information on a per-PVC basis
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table pvc 10/1

FDB Learning Table
==================
Port VPI/VCI MAC Address
VID VLAN-Name
------------------------------------------------------------------10/1
1/32 00:00:00:00:00:01 4093 ab123456789012345678901234567890
10/1 255/255 00:00:00:00:00:02 4094 cd123456789012345678901234567890
*Switch@1#
9-73

Input example
Display of the MAC learning information on a per-VLAN basis
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vid

FDB Learning Table
==================
Port
VID MAC Address
VPI/VCI PVC-Name
-----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1
1 00:00:00:00:00:0a
0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890
3/1
2 00:00:00:00:00:0b
0/33
10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01
0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890
10/1 4094 00:00:00:00:00:02 255/255 cd123456789012345678901234567890
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show atm-fdb table vid 10/1 4093
FDB Learning Table
==================
Port
VID MAC Address
VPI/VCI PVC-Name
-----------------------------------------------------------------------10/1 4093 00:00:00:00:00:01
0/32 ab123456789012345678901234567890
*Switch@1#
Clearing the MAC learning information for the ATM line

module
Clears the MAC learning information per port or per VLAN.
Command
clear atm-fdb table pvc
Clearing of MAC learning information per PVC
9-74
9.10 Port Mirroring

This system has a function that allows traffic from a specific port to be mirrored to a port that is
specified as the mirroring destination. The use of this function enables you to monitor traffic on
the network.
Setting conditions
The mirroring function allows you to set one mirroring destination port per system.
The function can be set for line module numbers from 1 to 12.
Note
Be careful about the bandwidth of the mirroring source port. If you set multiple mirroring
target ports that use much bandwidth, mirrored frames may cause congestion and may be
discarded.
Note
This function cannot be set to ATM155, ATMP, TDMP, ATMP155, and TDMP155 line
modules.
Mirroring setting
To start mirroring, set the following:
(1) Mirroring destination port
Traffic from the specified mirroring target port or ports is mirrored to this port.
(2) Mirroring target (in-port) port
Frames input from the specified port are mirrored.
(3) Mirroring target (out-port) port
Frames output from the specified port are mirrored.
The start of mirroring cannot be set in the following cases:
The same port is specified as both the mirroring destination port and the mirroring target port.
VLAN is set for the mirroring destination port.
Link aggregation is set for the mirroring destination port.
Different line modules are set for GbE-MUX line module mirroring.
More than one input-side (in-port) ports are specified for GbE-MUX line module mirroring.
More than one output-side (out-port) ports are specified for GbE-MUX line module mirroring.
9-75

Note
The "write memory" command does not save the setting of mirroring.
Frames to be mirrored
(1) When the mirroring target port is a port base VLAN port
When mirroring is applied to the input-side (in-port) port, Ethernet-type (0x8100) frames used
within the system to which port base VLAN ID tags have been added are output to the
mirroring destination port.
Also, frames to which QoS control and filtering have been applied are mirrored.
CX2600/200
Portbase VLAN
(Tagging)
Input-side
mirroring
Bandwidth/priority
control and filtering
Mirroring output
Bandwidth/priority
Line module
Portbase VLAN
(Tag removal)
Line module
Switch module
Line module
When mirroring is applied to the output-side (out-port) port, frames are output to the mirroring
destination port before their tags are removed, as with the input-side (in-port) port.
Frames are mirrored before QoS control and filtering are applied to them.
CX2600/200
Portbase VLAN
(Tagging)
Line module
Output-side
mirroring
Switch module
9-76
Bandwidth/priority
Mirroring output
Bandwidth/priority
Line module
Portbase VLAN
(Tag removal)
Line module

(2) When the mirroring target port is a tag base VLAN port
When mirroring is applied to the input-side (in-port) port, the Ethernet type is converted to
0x8100 and, if VLAN tag replacement is set, frames are output to the mirroring destination port
after their tags are replaced.
Also, frames to which QoS control and filtering have been applied are mirrored.
CX2600/200
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag replacement setting)
Line module
Input-side
mirroring
Bandwidth/priority
Mirroring output
Bandwidth/priority
Line module
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag replacement
setting)
Line module
Switch module
When mirroring is applied to the output-side (out-port) port, the Ethernet type is converted to
0x8100 and, if VLAN tag replacement is set, frames are output to the mirroring destination port
before their tags are replaced.
Frames are mirrored before QoS control and filtering are applied to them.
CX2600/200
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag replacement
setting)
Note
Output-side
mirroring
Bandwidth/priority
Line module
Bandwidth/priority
Mirroring output
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag replacement
setting)
Line module
Switch module
If the frame size is set for the mirroring destination port, the frame size setting value will
be the allowable frame size of destination side. Frames exceeding this size will not be
mirrored.
9-77

(3) When mirroring is applied to the GbE-MUX line module
When mirroring is applied to the GbE-MUX line module, input frames are directed to the
output port of the same line module as they are.
Even if VLAN tag replacement is set, frames are output to the output port before their tags are
replaced.
Frames from the switch module are not allowed to reach the output port.
CX2600/200
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag replacement
setting)
Bandwidth/priority
Bandwidth/priority
Input-side
mirroring
Tagbase VLAN
(Tag replacement
setting)
Line module
Mirroring output
GbE-MUX Line module
Switch module
9-78
Line module

Commands
mirror port
Setting of mirroring start or stop
show mirror port
Display of mirroring settings
Input example
The following example mirrors input traffic from mirroring target port 8/1 to mirroring destination
port 7/1.
*Switch@1# mirror port start 7/1 in-port 8/1

*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# show mirror port
Mirror Information
==================
Mirror To
----------------Port: 7/1
[1]
Mirror From
----------------In Port: 8/1
Out Port:
[2]
[3]
*Switch@1#
*Switch@1# mirror port stop
*Switch@1#
[1] The mirroring destination port is shown.

[2] The mirroring target (in-port) port is shown.
[3] The mirroring target (out-port) port is shown.
Note
Protocol control frames can be monitored only at the mirroring target ingress port.
9-79
9.11 System Reboot

There are two methods to reboot CX2600/200, as described below. Since the rebooting
procedure differs with the method, choose the appropriate reboot method as needed.
Rebooting procedure
Power off/on
Reset
Self diagnosis
Program load
Startup configuration data load
Clearing of DRAM
{: To be done
: Not to be done
Rebooting by turning the power off and then on

This reboot method involves self diagnosis, program load, startup configuration data load, and
clearing of DRAM.
Reboot method
Make sure that no command is running, and then turn all the power switches to OFF. Wait for
about 30 seconds. Then, turn the power switches to ON again, and the system will automatically
reboot.
9-80
Rebooting by using the reset command

This reboot method involves program load, startup configuration data load, and clearing of DRAM.
Command
reset system
Resetting of entire device
Reboot method
Reboot the system by executing the "reset system" command.
*Switch@1# reset system

Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y
System is under closing....
System Reset Process is running. Please wait....
[1]
[2]
System Boot
<Omitted>
Switch@1>
[1] Enter the command.

[2] You will be asked to confirm your intention to reboot the system.
9-81
Press y and then Enter.
9.12 Initialization
To reset all the data to their factory-set values, initialize CX2600/200.
CX2600/200 can be accessed only from the local console.
Once initialized,
Initializing CX2600/200 clears the running configuration and startup configuration data settings.
The license key, however, will remain undeleted.
To maintain the current running configuration and startup configuration data settings, back up the
data before initialization, as described in "6 Configuration Data".
The time and date settings will remain unchanged even after initialization.
Initialization procedure
Take the following two steps:
(1) Clear the startup configuration data.
(2) Reboot the system by using the reset command.
(1) Clearing the startup configuration data

Clears the startup configuration data.
Command
clear startup-config
Clearing of startup configuration
(2) Rebooting the system by using the reset command

To validate the clearing of the startup configuration data in (1), reboot CX2600/200.
Command
reset system
9-82

Input example
Switch@1# clear startup-config all
Would you like to delete config data? :(Y/N): y
Clearing Flash Memory...
*Switch@1#
Would you like to reboot System? :(Y/N): y
System is under closing....
System Reset Process is running. Please wait....
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
System Boot
<Omitted>
Switch@1>

[2] You will be asked to confirm your intention to delete the configuration data.
Enter.
Press y and then

[4] You will be asked to confirm your intention to reboot the system.
9-83
Press y and then Enter.
9.13 Replacement
This section describes how to replace, add, and remove UGSW modules, line modules, power
modules, and fan modules.
Replacing a duplicate UGSW module
Replacing a line module
9-92
Replacing a power module
Replacing a fan module
9-85
Describes the procedure for

replacing a duplicate UGSW
module.

replacing a line module.
9-94

replacing a power module.
9-95

replacing a fan module.
Memo
If you remove or insert a UGSW module or line module, the ENTITY-MIB (RFC 2037) trap
will be sent indicating a change in the mounting status.
Note
When performing any task described in this section, be sure to wear the wrist strap
connected to the ESD terminal of the system for electrostatic protection.
Note
When replacing UGSW modules or line modules, remove and insert the modules one by
one while checking the status of the ALM and INS lamps. Removing or inserting multiple
modules in a row may cause the system to malfunction.
Note
Removing a duplicate UGSW module without placing its ACT system out of service may
result in a fault.
9-84
Replacing a duplicate UGSW module

Screw
Screw
UGSW C
INS ALM SW -ACT SW-SEL
INS lamp
EXT-M
CONSOLE-LAN
CONSOLE-RS232C
ACT lamp
EXTCLK-IN
EXTCLK-ACT
EJECT lever
EXTCLK-ACT lamp
ALM lamp
Module removal procedure
SBY
Enter the ous switch
command.
ACT
OUS
ACT
Remove the OUS module.
UNMOUNT
ACT
Command
ous switch
OUS setting of UGSW module
9-85

Module replacement procedure when one system is faulty
SBY-FLT
ACT
Remove the SBY-FLT (faulty) module.
UNMOUNT
ACT
Insert the replacement module.
INIT
ACT
SBY
ACT
9-86

Module replacement procedure when both systems are faulty (system reboot required)
SBY-FLT
ACT-FLT
UNMOUNT
ACT-FLT
INIT
ACT-FLT
OUS
Set the IP address.*
ACT-FLT
OUS
Download the startup configuration data.
ACT-FLT
OUS
Enter the reset system command.*2
ACT-FLT
Connection disabled
INIT
INIT
ACT
Enter the ous switch command.
SBY
9-87
ACT
OUS
Remove the OUS (faulty) module.
ACT
UNMOUNT
ACT
INIT
ACT
INIT
*1: When a replacement module is inserted with the other system in the ACT-FLT status, the
module enters the ACT-FLT/OUS status. In this case, the OUS module has the default
configuration data.
Therefore, set the IP address before downloading the startup
configuration data.
*2: A reset error may occur after the "reset system" command is entered, causing the system
reboot to fail, if any of the following faults remains unsolved:
CLK error (any of the several types)
SRAM read parity error
Main CPU error (any of the several types)
Sub CPU error (any of the several types)
PCI-Bus error (any of the several types)
If the system reboot fails due to a reset error, remove the suspect UGSW module and then
reboot the system again.
Commands
Downloading of startup configuration from ftp server
reset system
ous switch
9-88

Module replacement procedure when both systems are faulty (system reboot not
required)
SBY-FLT
ACT-FLT
UNMOUNT
ACT-FLT
Save binary configuration data

to an external memory.*1
Insert the replacement module
(with an external memory inserted).*2
INIT
ACT-FLT
SBY-ASYNC
ACT-FLT
Enter the change switch force

command.
ACT
OUS
ACT
UNMOUNT
ACT
INIT
ACT
SBY
9-89

*1
To save the binary configuration data to the external memory, use the "write memory
external-memory binary-config" command from the maintenance mode.
*2
If the binary configuration data is not contained in the external memory, the module enters the
ACT-FLT/OUS status.
In this case, the OUS module has the default configuration data.
Depending on the type of fault, there may be cases where you cannot save the configuration
data (binary configuration data) to the external memory. This is irrelevant, however, if you
have the configuration data (binary configuration data) saved to the USB memory in advance.
Note, however, that the system cannot be guaranteed to operate normally if the configuration
data in the external memory is not the same as that stored in the ACT-FLT module.
The following table shows whether recovery is possible or not for each case where both systems of
the module are faulty.
Whether Recovery Is Possible
NO
Fault
Level
Recovery
Switch module error
CR
UNote 2
Temperature error (upper end of temperature range: 80C or higher)
CR
CLK error (Main CPU)
CR
UNote 3
CLK error (Sub CPU)
CR
U Note 3
CLK error
CR
U Note 2, 3
SRAM ECC error
CR
Main CPU error (SYSERR)
CR
U Note 3
Sub CPU error (SYSERR)
CR
PCI-Bus error (Main CPU)
CR
U Note 3
10
PCI-Bus error (Sub CPU)
CR
11
CPU error (Main CP)
CR
U Note 1, 3
12
CPU error (SubCPU)
CR
U Note 1
13
Software error CR (Main CPU)
CR
U Note 2, 3
14
Software error CR (Sub CPU)
CR
U Note 2
15
Device error CR (Switch module)
CR
U Note 3
16
Device error CR (Line module)
CR
17
Internal communication error
CR
18
L2SW error
CR
19
QoS memory parity error
CR
20
Software error at reboot
CR
21
Mate socket communication error
CR
22
Mate memory transmission error
CR
9-90

Note 1 Recovery is possible only when auto reboot is disabled.
Note 2 Recovery may not be possible depending on the type of fault.
Note 3 If the external memory cannot be recognized, recovery is not possible, because the
configuration data cannot be saved to the external memory. Recovery is possible,
however, if you use the configuration data saved in advance using the "write memory"
command (binary configuration data).
Commands
write memory external-memory
Saving of setting information to external memory
change switch
Changeover of UGSW module system
9-91
Replacing a line module

Screw
Screw
Tx
GbE-PV
ALM
Rx
LINK
LINE-ACT
INS
1000BASE-X
ALM lamp
INS lamp
ACT
1000BASE-T
EJECT lever
Removal
1.
When the power of the system is on, take one of the following steps, (a) and (b), as
appropriate for the system status.
(a) If the INS lamp of the line module to be removed is lit in green, enter the "ous line"
command from the console. This turns off the INS lamp, making the module ready to be
removed.
(b) If the ALM lamp of the line module to be removed is lit in red due to a fault or for some
other reason, the module is ready to be removed.
Note
Do not remove a line module while its INS lamp is lit in green.
system to be stuck or malfunction.
Note
When removing a line module at system startup, wait until the INS lamp of the line module
lights in green.
2.
Loosen the screws on both sides of the line module completely using a screwdriver, and then
pull the EJECT lever outward.
Note
3.
Doing so may cause the
Depending on the time of shipment, the line module may have EJECT levers on both
sides. In that case, be sure to pull the two levers simultaneously with equal force;
otherwise, the system may be warped or damaged.
Pull out the line module toward you.
Note
When replacing multiple line modules, remove and insert them one by one.
removing multiple line modules and then inserting new line modules in a row.
Note
If you remove a line module while a duplicate UGSW module is undergoing the system
changeover, there may be rare occasions when the line module status displayed by the
"show system status" command remains unchanged. To solve this problem, insert a line
module into the line slot or enter the "reset line" command.
9-92
Avoid
Insertion
1.
Insert the line module horizontally into the slot, with its EJECT lever sticking out.
2.
Push the line module a little so that its EJECT lever is tucked slightly inside (make sure it
engages with the chassis).
3.
Push the EJECT lever into place by pressing it toward the center.
Note
Depending on the time of shipment, the line module may have EJECT levers on both
sides. In that case, be sure to push in the two levers simultaneously with equal force;
otherwise, the system may be warped or damaged.
4.
Tighten the screws on both sides of the line module, using the screwdriver.
5.
If the power of the system is on, you can verify that you have replaced the line module
successfully by checking that the INS lamp on the new line module is lit in green.
Note
If the mounted module changes to the OUS status due to processing contention or for
some other reason, initialize the module again by entering the "reset line" command.
9-93
Replacing a power module
Screw
Power switch
OPE lamp
Screw
Removal
1.
If power is being supplied to the power module to be replaced, first turn off the power switch to
cut off the power.
2.
Loosen the screws on the power module completely.
3.
Hold the handles of the power module to be replaced, and pull out the module.
Insertion
1.
Insert a new power module and push it all the way into place.
2.
Tighten the screws on the power module firmly.
3.
Connect the power cable, and then turn on the power switch
For more information on the connection method, see "3.4 Power on and Login" of this manual.
4.
Check that the OPE lamp of the power module is lit in green to verify that the module has
been replaced successfully.
9-94
Replacing a fan module

(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
CX2600/220
CX2600/210
CX2600/202
Removal
1.
Loosen the screws (1) on the fan module completely.
2.
Pull the screws toward you, and take the fan module about 2 cm out of the chassis. Doing so
turns off the power and stops the fans. At the same time, the ALM lamp on the switch
module starts to blink.
3.
Wait until the rotation of the fans comes to a complete halt, and then pull out the fan module
entirely.
Note
Keep your hands away from the rotating fans; otherwise, you may get your fingers caught
and be injured. Make sure that the rotation of the fans comes to a complete halt, before
removing the module.
Insertion
1.
Insert a new fan module, and tighten the screws c firmly.
2.
If the power of the system is on, check that the ALM lamp on the switch module is blinking to
verify that the module has been replaced successfully.
Note
When replacing the fan module, make sure that the fans are removed (the fans are at a
complete halt) for not longer than 2 minutes. Normal operation cannot be guaranteed if
the fans are removed for over 2 minutes.
9-95
9.14 UGSW Module Redundancy

Control
CX2600/200 can have a redundant configuration by mounting two UGSW modules. The UGSW
module redundancy allows you to replace the UGSW module or to update software and FPGAs
while keeping the system running. Also, in the event of a fault, you can continue the system
operation by switching the UGSW modules.
Memo
For information about how to replace the UGSW module, see "9.13 Replacement".
This section describes how to control the redundant UGSW modules for system maintenance.
UGSW module management
Manual system changeover
9-97
9-98
Fault-triggered system changeover
Reset
Describes the management

functions for maintenance.
Describes the system changeover

procedures for maintenance.
9-108
9-103
Describes the fault-triggered

system changeover processing.
Describes the reset operation for

maintenance.
9-96
UGSW module management

The statuses of a redundant UGSW module are described below.
UGSW status
unmount
LED status
Outline
Not mounted.
INS
ALM
SW-ACT
Blinking in
yellow
Off
Lit in
green /
Off
Off
Off
Off
Lit in green
Off
Off
Lit in green
Off
Lit in
green
Off
Lit in red
Off
Off
Lit in red
Lit in
green
Blinking in
green and
yellow
alternately
Lit in
red / Off
Lit in
green /
Off
(UNMOUNT)
initializing
Preparing to be ready for service.
(INIT)
No commands can be set.
out of service
Out of service.
(OUS)
Some commands can be set.

Not synchronized with the other UGSW system.
standby
Standing by in the in-service status.
(SBY)

Synchronized with the other UGSW system.
active
Running.
(ACT)
All commands can be set.
standby-fault
Standing by in a faulty status.
(SBY-FLT)

Normal operation not guaranteed.
Active-fault
Running in a faulty status.
(ACT-FLT)
All commands can be set.

Normal operation not guaranteed.
Downloading
Software or FPGA being downloaded.
Memo
The downloading status cannot be verified with the "show system status" command.
Memo
For information about whether commands can be entered in each UGSW status, see
"Command Reference".
Note
If the module changes to the ACT-FLT or SBY-FLT status during downloading, the
download will continue while the INS LED will go off.
9-97

Command
show system status
Display of device installation status and various statuses
Manual system changeover

The functions are described below that allow the maintenance personnel to change the UGSW
module status in the redundant UGSW module configuration.
Memo
If a UGSW module status transition occurs, the ENTITY-MIB (RFC 2037) trap will be sent
indicating a change in the status.
Changing the status by using the "change switch" command

The "change switch" command can be entered from both the ACT and SBY systems.
SBY
Enter the "change switch" command.
ACT
ACT
SBY
9-98

Changing the status by using the "change switch force" command
The "change switch force" command changes the module status in two ways, one of which is
chosen according to the UGSW status. The command can be entered from both the ACT and
SBY systems.
When entering the command in the ACT/SBY status

SBY
ACT
Enter the "change switch force" command.
ACT
OUS
When entering the command in the ACT-FLT/SBY-FLT status
SBY-FLT
ACT-FLT
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
Changing the status by using the "ous switch" command

SBY
ACT
Enter the "ous switch" command.
OUS
ACT
Note
You cannot change the ACT system to the OUS status.
9-99

Changing the status by pressing SW-SEL
There are two ways to change the module status by pressing SW-SEL, one of which is chosen
according to the UGSW status. The SW-SEL button is effective only on the ACT system.
The status transition patterns are the same as with the "change switch force" command.
When pressing SW-SEL in the ACT/SBY status
SBY
ACT
Press SW-SEL.
ACT
OUS
When pressing SW-SEL in the ACT-FLT/SBY-FLT status

SBY-FLT
ACT-FLT
Press SW-SEL.
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
Commands
change switch
ous switch
9-100
Fault-triggered system changeover

The functions are described below that change the UGSW module status in the redundant UGSW
module configuration in response to a fault. For fault types and actions, see "9.5 Fault
Monitoring".
Memo
In the case of a fault not involving reset

If the ACT system fails in the ACT/SBY status
SBY
Fault
ACT
ACT
SBY-FLT
If the SBY system fails in the ACT/SBY status

Fault
SBY
ACT
SBY-FLT
ACT
9-101

In the case of a fault involving reset
SBY
Fault
ACT
ACT
SBY-FLT
ACT
INIT
ACT
SBY
9-102
Reset
The functions are described below that allow the maintenance personnel to reset the UGSW
module in the redundant UGSW module configuration.
Memo
Changing the status by using the "reset switch" command

SBY
ACT
Enter the "reset switch" command.
INIT
ACT
SBY
ACT
Changing the status by using the "reset system" command

After you have reset the module with the "reset system" command, the system on which you
entered the command will assume the ACT status.
SBY
Enter the "reset system" command.
ACT
INIT
Connection disabled
INIT
ACT
SBY
9-103

Commands
reset system
reset switch
Resetting of UGSW module
9-104
9.15 UGSW Clock Redundancy

Control
By operating UGSW modules in redundant configuration, the reference clock of the SBY UGSW
module can be synchronized with that of the ACT UGSW module.
Memo
For UGSW module redundant configuration, see "9.14 UGSW Module Redundancy
Control".
This section describes how to control the redundant UGSW reference clocks for system
maintenance.
UGSW clock management
Manual clock changeover
9-106
9-106
Fault-triggered_clock_changeover
Reset
Describes the management

functions for maintenance.
Describes the clock changeover

procedures for maintenance.
9-108
9-109
Describes the fault-triggered clock

changeover processing.
Describes the reset operation for

maintenance.
9-105
UGSW clock management

When an external clock is selected as the reference clock, EXTCLK-ACT-LED on the UGSW
connecting to the external clock interface selected for the reference is ON. In other cases,
EXTCLK-ACT-LED is OFF.
EXTCLK-ACT-LED does not interlock with ACT-LED/INS-LED/ALM-LED on the UGSW.
Manual clock changeover

The following describes the functions with which the maintenance personnel can switch the
reference clock between two UGSW modules in redundant UGSW module configuration.
Changing the status by using the "change external-clock" command

The "change external-clock" command can be entered from the ACT UGSW. This command is
available when the reference clock priority is assigned to external clock for both ACT and SBY
UGSW modules and clock is supplied from external clock device to both UGSW modules.
The external clock of ACT UGSW is

selected as the reference clock.
SBY
ACT
Enter the "change external-clock" command.
SBY
The external clock of SBY UGSW

becomes the reference clock.
ACT
Changing the status by using the "change switch" command

Executing the "change switch" command switches between ACT and SBY systems of UGSW
modules, but does not change the reference clock in use by the system between both systems.
9-106

Changing the status by using the "change switch force" command
The external clock of the UGSW module that has been placed in OUS using the "change switch
force" command becomes unavailable as the reference clock.
The status transition pattern by entering the "ous switch" command or pressing SW-SEL is the
same with the "change switch force" command.

SBY
ACT
The ACT UGSWs external clock in use

as the reference clock is deselected.
ACT
OUS
Changing the status by using the "ous switch" command

The external clock of SBY UGSW is
SBY
ACT
Enter the "ous switch" command.
The SBY UGSWs external clock in use

OUS
ACT
Changing the status by pressing SW-SEL

SBY
ACT
Press SW-SEL.

ACT
OUS
9-107

Commands
change external-clock
Change of external clock
change switch
ous switch
Fault-triggered clock changeover

The following describes the function that switches the reference clock between two UGSW
modules in redundant UGSW module configuration in response to a fault. For fault types and
actions, see "9.5 Fault Monitoring".
In the case of a fault

The external clock of the UGSW module that has failed (FLT) becomes unavailable as the
reference clock.
If the ACT system fails in the ACT/SBY status
SBY
Fault
ACT

ACT
SBY-FLT
If the SBY system fails in the ACT/SBY status

Fault
SBY

ACT
SBY-FLT
ACT
9-108
The SBY UGSWs external clock in use

Reset
The following describes the functions that switch the reference clock between two UGSW modules
in response to UGSW module reset operation by the maintenance personnel.
Changing the status by using the "reset switch" command

When the SBY UGSW is restarted with the "reset switch" command, the external clock of the SBY
UGSW remains available as the reference clock.
selected as the referene clock.
SBY
ACT
Enter the "reset switch" command.
During INIT, the SBY UGSWs external clock

remains selected as the reference clock.
INIT
ACT
SBY
After SBY restart is completed, the SBY

UGSWs external clock remains selected
as the reference clock.
ACT
9-109

Changing the status by using the "reset system" command
After you have reset the system with the "reset system" command, the reference clock is selected
in the descending order of priority, from the candidates of source clocks assigned reference-clock
priority.
SBY
SBY
ACT
ACT
Enter the "reset system" command.
INIT
No-continuity interval
INIT
ACT
SBY
Commands
reset system
reset switch
9-110
9.16 Resource Monitoring

CX2600/200 monitors the rate of CPU use and the rate of memory use.
Displaying the rate of CPU use

The rate of CPU use is measured at 5-second, 1-minute, and 5-minute intervals, and the latest
average CPU use rates, as well as the peak values of the average CPU use rates measured
between the last read time and the current time, are displayed, respectively.
Memo
Each time this command is entered, the previously stored peak values are deleted.
Command
show resource cpu
Display of CPU usage
Input example (1/2)

The following example displays the rate of CPU use.
*Switch@2# show resource cpu

CPU Activity Information
========================
Last Read Time :--/--/---- --:--:-Current Time
:01/01/2004 03:39:27
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
The Rate of CPU Use
===================
Module
Type Measure Time Current(%) Peak(%) (Last Read ->Current)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : main
5 (sec)
7
11
(01/01/2004 03:36:40)
1 (min)
6
7
(01/01/2004 03:39:15)
5 (min)
6
6
(01/01/2004 03:39:04)
Switch#1 : sub
5 (sec)
13
79
(01/01/2004 03:31:29)
1 (min)
12
22
(01/01/2004 03:32:20)
5 (min)
12
14
(01/01/2004 03:36:27)
Switch#2 : main
5 (sec)
----(--/--/---- --:--:--)
1 (min)
----(--/--/---- --:--:--)
5 (min)
----(--/--/---- --:--:--)
9-111

Input example (2/2)
Switch#2 : sub
5 (sec)
1 (min)
5 (min)
-------
-------
(--/--/---- --:--:--)
(--/--/---- --:--:--)
(--/--/---- --:--:--)
*Switch@2#
[1] The last read time is displayed.

[2] The current time is displayed.
[3] The average CPU use rate measurement time is displayed.
[4] The latest average CPU use rate is displayed.
[5] The peak value of the average CPU use rates measured between the last read time and the
current time is displayed.
[6] The time when the peak value in [5] was recorded is displayed.
Displaying the rate of memory use

The rate of memory use, the size of memory space currently used, and the size of memory space
actually available are displayed.
Command
show resource memory
Display of memory usage
Input example
The following example displays the rate of memory use.
*Switch@1# show resource memory

The Rate of Memory Use
======================
Module
Type
Rate(%)
Used Size(byte) / Actual Size(byte)
--------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : main
39
17042776 / 42925880
Switch#1 : sub
34
14333992 / 41138696
Switch#2 : main
----- /
--Switch#2 : sub
----- /
--*Switch@1#
9-112
9.17 Command Mode Functions

The command mode functions give you the abilities to maintain the sequence of commands, to
check the execution and to prevent data overwriting for particular commands.
Setting the command mode functions

For the command mode functions, you can select one of two modes - normal mode and safety
mode.
When the command mode is the safety mode, the command sequence control, execution check,
and overwrite prevention functions are enabled. The following table shows the commands to
which these functions are applicable.
Function
Command
Sequence control:
1st command
2nd command
This function controls the

sequence of input commands
and, if the sequence is not
followed, generates an error.
set qos cos-map profile
set qos in-port cos-map

set qos out-port cos-map
set filter profile
set filter in-port

set filter out-port
clear qos in-port cos-map
clear qos cos-map profile
clear qos out-port cos-map

clear filter in-port
clear filter profile
clear filter out-port

Execution check:
set qos initial-priority
This function displays a dialog

message when a command is
executed, letting you check its
execution.
set qos initial-class-map
Overwrite prevention:
set vlan portbase
This function generates an error

if the executed command will
overwrite the existing data.
set vlan tagbase
set vlan tagbase (when only ports are specified)

set pvc port admin
set vlan swap

set vlan member
9-113

Commands
set command-mode
Setting of command mode
show command-mode
Display of command mode settings
Input example
* Switch@1# set command-mode safety
* Switch@1#
* Switch@1# show command-mode
Command Mode Configuration
==========================
Command Mode : safety
* Switch@1#
9-114
9.18 User Continuity Test

The user continuity test function allows you to check subscriber network continuity using ping by
having CX2600/200 serve as a virtual IP host.
User continuity test

More than one virtual IP address can be assigned to the 16 VLANs on the user network.
The ping signal can be sent to and received from the user network.
To conduct the user continuity test, change the in-band mode to the user continuity test mode.
Fig. 1-1 shows how the in-band user continuity test function is implemented.
CX2600/200
VLAN-A
Virtual IP host
Up stream GbE, etc.
Downstream
Ether
ATM network
VLAN-C
IP network
VLAN-A
VLAN-B
Continuity test
IP network
IP network
Continuity test
Fig. 1-1
In-band User Continuity Test Function
9-115
Assigning virtual IP addresses

One virtual IP address can be assigned to CX2600/200 per VLAN on the user network.
VLANs and virtual IP addresses can be set, respectively.
Up to 16
Memo
You can assign an identical virtual IP address to different VLANs.

Also, virtual IP addresses may be the same as out-band IP addresses.
Memo
The "set ip virtual-address" command can be executed only on the ACT side.
Note
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as

an IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Command
set ip virtual-address
Setting of virtual IP address
Input example
*Switch@1# set ip virtual-address 3 1.1.1.10 300
*Switch@1# set ip virtual-address 5 1.1.2.20 test-vlan-1
*Switch@1#
9-116
User continuity test mode

To conduct the user continuity test, change the in-band mode from the real mode (normal) to the
virtual mode (user continuity test mode).
When the user continuity test function is enabled, the in-band management port control function is
disabled.
Note
Enabling the user continuity test disables the in-band telnet/SNMP/NTP/syslog/ftp

maintenance functions.
Note
Changing the in-band mode disconnects in-band connected telnet sessions.
Memo
The in-band mode and virtual IP address settings can be checked by using the "show ip
config" command.
Memo
The "set ip in-band mode" command can be executed only on the ACT side.
Command
set ip in-band mode
Setting of in-band mode
9-117

Input example
*Switch@1# set ip in-band mode virtual
*Switch@1#
Out-Band IP Table
=================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
------------------------------------------------------------------System
: 00:00:4c:b4:7c:3f
192.168.2.151
255.255.255.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:7c:3f
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
In-Band IP Table
================
Module
MAC Address
IP Address
Netmask
------------------------------------------------------------------System
: 00:00:4c:b4:7c:3f
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#1 : 00:00:4c:b4:7c:3f
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Switch#2 : 00:00:00:00:00:00
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
IP Routing Table
================
Destination
Gateway
Index Address
Netmask
Address
Port
------------------------------------------------------------------No entry in the table.
In-Band Mode
============
Mode : virtual
==========================
Index VID Name
Address
------------------------------------------------------------------3 300
1.1.1.10
5 1011 test-vlan-1
1.1.2.20
9-118
Conducting the user continuity test

To check user network continuity, a continuity test can be conducted. When conducted from the
user network side, such as a PC, the continuity test uses ping. When the test is conducted from
the CX2600/200 side, the "virtual-ping" command is used.
Note
Before conducting the continuity test, enable the user continuity test function by using the
"set ip in-band mode" command.
Continuity test from the user side

When conducting the continuity test from the user network side, execute the regular "ping"
command from a PC or other terminal. Tags are added to the ARP and ICMP ECHO packets in
the "ping" command by the intermediate switches, and they are delivered to CX2600 as tagged
ARP and ICMP ECHO packets. CX2600/200 has the function to respond to these packets.
Memo
The user continuity test does not support fragmented packets. With the general ping
method, fragmentation occurs when the ICMP data length exceeds 1473 bytes.
Memo
Packets from a user network connected to a port for which portbase VLAN is set are
accepted only when they are untagged.*
Memo
Packets from a user network connected to a port for which tagbase VLAN is set have only
one VLAN tag.*
*: For details, see the following:
"4 Setting of Basic Functions, 4.1.2 VLAN"
Note
In the case of ping from the user side, request timeout may occur depending on the timing
of ARP aging timeout of the terminal.
9-119
Continuity test from CX2600/200

CX2600/200 allows the ARP and ICMP ECHO packets to be sent to and received from a PC or
other terminal on the user network by using the "virtual-ping" command.
Memo
The size of the ICMP ECHO packet to send is fixed to 64 bytes.
Memo
The number of consecutive transmissions can be specified between 1 and 65535.

default, 4 times will be assumed.
By
Memo
The response wait timeout value can be specified between 1 and 60 seconds.
default, 1 second will be assumed.
By
Note
CX2600 does not permit its own virtual IP address to be specified for the test.
Note
The "virtual-ping" command can be executed only on the ACT side.
Note
The test cannot be conducted beyond a gateway.
Note
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx, and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be set as

an IP address. ("xxx" is a string of arbitrary numbers.)
Command
virtual-ping
Confirmation of connection with host
Input example
*Switch@1# virtual-ping 1.1.1.17 300
64 bytes from 1.1.1.17: icmp_seq=0 ttl=128 time<5ms
*Switch@1#
9-120
9.19 NTP Function

The CX2600/200 supports the NTP function. NTP is a protocol for synchronizing the network
times between the NTP server and the CX2600/200. On the CX2600/200, the ACT system
synchronizes with the NTP server, and the SBY system receives the time from the ACT system for
synchronization. Two NTP servers can be set including the priority (primary) server and alternate
(secondary) server, and this ensures correct network time synchronization. Time synchronization
makes it possible to associate events by using the time information when a system log is written or
a certain event occurs.
The NTP function of the CX2600/200 uses SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Version3.
Make sure that the server you want to specify supports SNTP.
When the network time is synchronized, the console shows the execution result.
shows the list of trap messages.
Execution result
Normal termination for
priority server
The following
Display
IF NTP SERVER ACCESS SUCCEEDED
Abnormal termination for IF NTP SERVER ACCESS FAILED

priority server
(SWITCH#%d,PRIMARY:%s,SECONDARY:%s)
If the synchronization with the priority server terminates abnormally, synchronization with the
network time of the alternate server is executed and the execution result of the priority server and
the alternate server is displayed as additional information. The following shows the content of
additional information.
Additional
information 1
Switch module number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Priority server error factor
Alternate server error

factor
NO ENTRY
NO ENTRY
NO MEMORY
NO MEMORY
BAD ARGUMENT
BAD ARGUMENT
DEVICE ADDRESS
SETTING ERROR
DEVICE ADDRESS
SETTING ERROR
NO SERVER
NO SERVER
SOCKET ERROR
SOCKET ERROR
ADDRESS ALREADY IN
USE
ADDRESS ALREADY IN
USE
BIND ERROR
BIND ERROR
IOCTL ERROR
IOCTL ERROR
TIMER ERROR
TIMER ERROR
SIGNAL ERROR
SIGNAL ERROR
9-121
Meaning
NTP server access
error

Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
SYNCHRONIZATION
FAILED
SYNCHRONIZATION
FAILED
OTHER ERROR
OTHER ERROR
Meaning
SUCCEEDED
When (SUCCEEDED) is displayed as the alternate server error factor of additional information 3,
synchronization with the network time is successful.
Set up the NTP server as follows. If the NTP server is inaccessible, network time synchronization
cannot be performed. It is recommended to confirm accessibility using the "ping" command.
Synchronize the network time after setting the IP address of the NTP server when the NTP access
time is already set on the NTP server, or after setting the access time to the NTP server when the
IP address of the NTP server is already set.
If the IP addresses of both the priority and alternate servers of the NTP server are set, first
synchronize the network time with the priority server. Only if it fails, synchronize the network time
with the alternate server.
Set the IP address of the NTP server (set ntp server).
Set the NTP access time to the NTP server (set ntp access-time).
To disable the NTP function, set the access time to 0.
Note
When the ACT system and SBY system cannot communicate, the time of the SBY system
is not corrected. If the system is switched when the time of the SBY system is not
corrected, the new ACT system synchronizes with the NTP server for time
synchronization.
Note
As the server IP address, you cannot set 0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx or 224.xxx.xxx.xxx

to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx ("xxx" can be any number). If a server exists at the network address
of 192.168.128.0/24 or 192.168.129.0/24, you can set up the server but you cannot make
it communicate correctly.
9-122

Commands
set ntp server
Setting of IP address of NTP server
set ntp access-time
Setting of NTP access time
show ntp
Display of NTP server setting information
clear ntp server
Clearing of IP address of NTP server
Input example
The IP address of the priority server is set to 192.168.2.212, the IP address of the alternate server
to 192.168.2.201, and the access time to eight hours.
CX2600/202
9-123
(Blank page)
9-124
Useful Functions
10 Useful Functions
This chapter describes the procedures for
system information registration and upgrade of
the CX2600/200.
10.1 Upgrade
10-2

Function 10-8
Function 10-10
10.4 Trap Transmission Selection
Function 10-16
10-1
Useful Functions
10.1 Upgrade
When a new version software program or new-version hardware data is released, update is
possible. For the upgrade, the new program file is downloaded from the ftp server through a
network, using the ftp client function of the CX2600/200.
You can use either a local console or a remote console to access the CX2600/200, as long as it can
access the CX2600/200.
Upgrade procedure
When the program file is updated, the unit needs to be restarted.
At this time,
automatically-created statistical information and MAC learning table information are lost.
Perform the upgrade by the following procedure.
1 Pre-preparation
10-3
Check that the network between the CX2600/200

and the ftp server is normal.
2 Executing download command
3 Specifying user name
4 Specifying password
5 Executing update
6 Confirming version
7 Executing Restart
8 Confirming version
10-4
10-4
10-4
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-3
Specify the ftp server IP address and the file to be

updated.
Specify user name of the ftp server.
Input password of the specified user name.
Execute update.
Confirm that the write was executed normally.
Restart the CX2600/200.
Confirm that update was performed successfully.
10-2
Useful Functions
Pre-preparation
(1) Send a ping to the ftp server to check that the network between this unit and the ftp server is
normal.
(2) Save the running configuration in the startup configuration by the "write memory" command.
Memo
It is recommended to display the startup configuration or the running configuration on the

screen by the "show running-config" command and to save the data in a file such as an
editor log file for the worst.
Commands
ping
Checking of connection with host
write memory
Executing download command
Specify the IP address of the ftp server and the name of the file to be updated.
composed of a software version and a model name.
Note
The file name is
0.xxx.xxx.xxx/127.xxx.xxx.xxx and 224.xxx.xxx.xxx to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx cannot be specified

for the server IP address. ("xxx" is any number.) If the server exists in network
addresses 192.168.128.0/24 and 192.168.129.0/24, the server can be set but correct
Commands
download software
Downloading of software
download fpga switch
Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module
download fpga line
Downloading of FPGA of line module
10-3
Useful Functions
Specifying user name
Specify the user name of the server in which the file is saved.
Specifying password
Specify the password of the user account specified by the user name.
Executing update
Read the update software from the server and write it in the built-in flash memory.
Memo
The down load time may become longer depending on any reasons such as the size of
data to be transferred, network traffic, ftp server performance, and LAN cable cabling.
The communication with the ftp server can be stopped forcibly by pressing Ctrl + c key
combination during download.
Confirm the size of data to be downloaded and the statuses of the network and ftp server.
Then, re-enter the command.
Note
If the update does not terminate normally due to a network load, ftp server problems, or the
like, try the procedure again from step 1.
Note
If the ACT system switches during execution of the "download fpga line" command due to
an unexpected failure, the INS LED of the Line module may not stop flashing.
If this happen, try the procedure again from step 1 before extracting and inserting the Line
module or entering the "reset line" command.
10-4
Useful Functions
Confirming version
Confirm the displayed version to see if the write in the built-in flash memory was executed normally.
Use the "show system revision" command for the confirmation.
By checking the Latest Soft Ver or Latest Hard Ver, confirm that the version downloaded by steps 2
to 5 is displayed.
Note
If the Latest Hard Ver indicates ff.ff.ff even though the "download fpga switch" command or
the "download fpga line" command was executed, the version is not updated. Try the
procedure again from step 2.
Command
show system revision
Display of various version information
Executing Restart
Execute a restart to validate the updated software.
Commands
reset system
reset switch
reset line
Resetting of line module
Note
When executing the "download fpga switch" command (downloading of FPGA of UGSW
module), specify fpga-version-up for the second parameter of the "reset switch" command.
Note
When executing the "download fpga line" command (downloading of FPGA of line
module), execute the "reset line" command.
Note
If the hardware is reset after the "download fpga" command was executed and the result
(of writing processing) was abnormal, the following message is displayed and the resetting
processing is interrupted. In this case, repeat the procedures from step 2 again.
10-5
Useful Functions
Input example
Line#1 fpga-download was not succeed.
Retry after fpga download
*Switch@1#
Confirming version
Confirm the version display to see if the update was executed normally.
Use the "show system revision" command for the confirmation.
By checking the Current Soft Ver or Current Hard Ver, confirm that the version downloaded by steps
2 to 5 is indicated.
Upgrade procedure example

The following network is assumed for explanation.
The program file of a new version is named FILE123.
Higher switch
ftp server (192.168.0.10)
CX2600/200
Remote console
CX2600/220
Local console
10-6
Useful Functions
Input example
*Switch@1# download software 192.168.0.10 FILE123
FTP Login Name
: cx2600
Data Transferring.................
Download Data Processing.....................
Writing Flash Memory.............
*Switch@1# show system revision
System Revision
===============
Current
Latest
Backup
Current
Latest
Module
Install Soft Ver Soft Ver Soft Ver Hard Ver Hard Ver
----------------------------------------------------------------------Switch#1 : ugswc
01.00.00 01.00.01 01.00.00 01.00.00 01.00.00
Switch#2 : ------------Line#1
: ------------Line#2
: ------------Line#3
: ------------Line#4
: fx8
------01.00.00 01.00.00
Line#5
: ------------Line#6
: ------------Line#7
: gbe
------01.00.00 01.00.00
Line#8
: fe8
------01.00.00 01.00.00
Line#9
: gbe
------01.00.00 01.00.00
Line#10 : ------------Line#11 : ------------Line#12 : ------------*Switch@1#
10-7
Useful Functions

Function
The CX2600/200 enables line module-related settings, in a state in which the module is not
installed, by assigning a type to the line module.
Assigning line module type

The line module type assign function is described.
Assign state
Install state
Configuration setting enabled/disabled
Type assigned
Uninstalled
Setting is enabled with the assigned type.
Type assigned
Installed
Setting is enabled.
No type assigned
Installed
Setting is enabled with the installed type.
No type assigned
Uninstalled
Setting is disabled.
Memo
When no line module type is assigned, command setting is enabled if the line module is
installed. In this case, the line module type is automatically assigned when the setting is
performed.
Note
The line module type cannot be modified in a state in which configuration is set in the line
module. To modify the type, return the settings for the line module to the default
configuration.
Note
Settings for the line module can be performed by download startup-config even if no line
type is assigned. If the startup configuration does not match the line module install state
when the unit is restarted, the configuration set for the line module is cleared.
Commands
set line type
Setting of line module type
show system status
Display of device installation status and other various statuses
10-8
Useful Functions
Initializing line module configuration

This function returns all configuration set in the line module to the default configuration.
Memo
Because the line module type cannot be modified in a state in which configuration is set in
the line module, return the setting in the line module to the default configuration.
Note
If this function is executed for a line in a redundant configuration, the line module
redundant mode is canceled and the line module with the greater number is reset.
Commands
clear running-config line
Clearing of line module configuration
show running-config
Display of running configuration
10-9
Useful Functions

Function
The CX2600/200 provides commands for controlling external memory.
used in maintenance mode.
The commands can be
Logging in into maintenance mode

Log in into the maintenance mode by the "maintenance" command and log out from the
maintenance mode by the "end" command. Login is available only from the privilege mode and
only one user can log in for one UGSW module.
Input example
Switch@1# maintenance
Switch@1%
Switch@1% end
Switch@1#
External memory
Use USB flash memory formatted by FAT16 or FAT32 as external memory. USB standard
USB1.1 is supported. For the devices recommended or the devices of which operation was
verified for the CX2600/200, see "13.13 External Memory List" in Appendix.
Note
Connection of another device (including HDD) or connection of USB flash memory through
a USB hub is not supported.
Note
USB standard USB2.0 is not supported.
10-10
Useful Functions
Mounting and removing external memory
To mount external memory on the CX2600/200, insert the memory into the maintenance port
(EXT-M). To remove the external memory, enter the "ous external-memory" command. Then
remove the memory after an autonomous message is displayed.
Note
If the external memory is mounted or removed while the unit is being started, the unit may
not start normally. So mount or remove the memory after confirming that starting the unit
is completed.
Note
When a memory control command is entered, the "disk cache error" message may be
displayed. If this message is displayed, remove the memory once and then mount it
again.
Command
ous external-memory
Removing of external memory
Memo
When the "ous external-memory" command is entered, the external memory is

disconnected from the unit. So you need to insert the external memory again to access it.
Memo
The "ous external-memory" command can be executed also in the privilege mode.
Note
If the external memory is removed in a state in which the "ous external-memory" command
has not been entered or before the autonomous message is displayed after the command
is entered, the external memory may be faulty.
10-11
Useful Functions
External memory control command

The external memory control command can be executed only while external memory is connected.
When a path is specified by a command parameter, either an absolute path based on a route or a
relative path based on the current directory can be specified. "." indicates a current directory, ".."
indicates a parent directory, and "/" indicates a directory delimiter in the specification. When no
path is specified, the current directory is assumed to be specified.
Note
The following table lists limitations on a path, a director name, and file name to be entered.
Number of characters entered as a

path
* A specified directory name and file
name are included.
127 characters
* Even when a relative path includes 127 characters or less if the
converted absolute path contains 246 characters or more, an error
occurs.
Directory layer count
20 layers
Number of characters of a
newly-created directory name or file
name
99 characters
* Even if the number of characters is 99 or less, if the total of the
number of characters of a directory name and file name to be
created and the number of characters of a path (absolute path)
indicating a creation location exceeds 246 characters, an error
occurs.
Characters usable as directory and

file names
Alphanumeric characters and the following characters:

'%' '&' ',' '.' '=' '[' ']' '^' '_' '{' '}' '~' -
* '.' can be used only when it is used as an extension of a file name
of when a parent directory and current directory are specified.
Note
When a directory or a file whose name contains unusable characters is created by a PC,
the CX2600/200 displays the unusable characters with "?". A directory and a file whose
name contains unusable characters cannot be cleared or moved to the directory.
10-12
Useful Functions
Operating directory and file in external memory

The CX2600/200 allows operation of a directory and a file in external memory.
Changing current directory

Change the current directory and display the path to the current directory.
Command
cd
Memo
Change of current directory
When the parameter is omitted, the path to the current directory is displayed.
Operating directory
Create a new directory in a specified directory in external memory or clear a specified directory.
Commands
mkdir
Creating of directory
rmdir
Removing of directory
dir
Display of list of contents in directory
Note
A directory containing a directory or a file cannot be cleared.
10-13
Useful Functions
Operating file
Copy or clear a specified file in external memory, or change its name.
Commands
copy
Copying file
rename
Change of file name
del
Deleting file
dir
Display of list of contents in directory
Memo
When a file is copied or its name is changed, if the same file name has already existed in
the directory, the file or the name is overwritten.
Uploading and downloading file

The CX2600/200 can upload and download various types of files to and from external memory..
Uploading file
Upload the running configuration, startup configuration, system log, and failure information to
external memory.
Commands
upload running-config external-memory
Uploading of running configuration to external memory
upload startup-config external-memory
Uploading of startup configuration to external memory
upload local-syslog external-memory
Uploading of system log to external memory
upload fault external-memory
Uploading of failure information to external memory
Note
If you execute uploading using the external memory with too short capacity, the uploading
may not complete normally. Confirm the content of the uploaded files after executing
uploading.
10-14
Useful Functions
Downloading file
Download the running configuration, startup configuration, software programs, and hardware data
from external memory.
Commands
download running-config
external-memory
Downloading of running configuration from external

memory
external-memory
Downloading of startup configuration from external

memory
download software external-memory
Downloading of software
(downloading from external memory)
download fpga switch external-memory
Downloading of FPGA of UGSW module

download fpga line external-memory
Downloading of FPGA of line module

Saving setting status

The CX2600/200 allows you to save the running configuration in external memory. The running
configuration is saved as start up configuration in a file named startup_config.scfg in the
/auto_reflect directory in external memory. When the unit is restarted with the external file storing
the file inserted into the ACT system, the data is reflected on the operation. Execute the "show
running-config" command or relevant show command to confirm that the configuration saved in the
external memory is reflected on the operation correctly. If the unit is restarted with the external
memory inserted into the SBY system, the data is not reflected on the operation.
Command
write memory external-memory
Saving of setting status in external memory
Memo
If the /auto_reflect directory is not found, it is created automatically.
Memo
If startup_config.scfg has already existed, it is overwritten.
Note
If you execute this command using the external memory with too short capacity, the setting
status may not be saved normally. Confirm the content of the file after executing this
command.
10-15
Useful Functions
10.4 Trap Transmission Selection

Function
The CX2600/200 groups messages by function and enables and disables each group to be sent as
autonomous messages, Trap messages, local log messages, or remote log messages.
Trap groups
A group is composed of two or more members.
classified according to their functions.
Group
fault
Group explanation
Each member is composed of messages
Member
Failure message
Member explanation
critical
Critical error *1
major
Major error *1
minor
Minor error
warning
Warning error *1
mc
MC information
sfp
SFP change information
ntp
NTP access error
telnet
Telnet message
connect
fail
maintenance-network
Maintenance network
message
backup
Periodic config upload
external-memory
External memory
Telnet login and logout

Telnet abnormal
out-band
Maintenance network load

(Out-band)
in-band
Maintenance network load

(In-band)
status
fault
External memory status change

External memory failure
spantree
Spanning tree
fdb
MAC learning
aggregation
Link aggregation
atm-oam
ATM-OAM alarm
detect-f1f3
F1/F2/F3 alarm detection
detect-f4f5
F4/F5 alarm detection
detect-minor
MN alarm detection
loopback-atm
ATM loop back event
aps
APS event
atm-loop
ATM loop occurrence

failure
10-16
Useful Functions
Group
ether-oam
Group explanation
EtherOAM alarm
Member
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpectperiod
Member explanation
Unexpect MEG Level
Mismerge
Unexpect MEP
Unexpect Period
loc
LOC
rdi
RDI
ether-ps
EtherPS event
t1e1
T1E1OAM information
tdmop
TDMoP information
ima
IMA group
stm
STM-1 line control
detect-rs
RS alarm detection
detect-ms
MS alarm detection
detect-hp
high-order path alarm detection
detect-lp
low-order path alarm detection
detect-pdh
PDH alarm detection
ether-ring
EtherRing event
command
Command
(only for remote-log/
local-log)
*1. When disabled is set for the member, note that fatal failures are not notified.
10-17
Useful Functions
Some groups have elements. Elements indicate message additional information such as line
module numbers and port numbers (including information such as individual Trap number and
Trap-ID).
Group
Group explanation
Element
Element explanation
private-trap
Individual Trap
1-999
Individual Trap number
trap-id
Trap-ID
1-999
Trap-ID number *1
line
Line message
1-12
Line module number
port
Port message
1/1-12/8
Line number
link
Link change *2
1/1-12/8
Line number
*1. Element number 10 of the trap-id group corresponds to the SNMP authentication error
notification message. This message can be set only for Trap messages. (Other settings
cause setting errors.) In addition to this setting, also the "set snmp authen-trap" command
can enables/disables the sending. No Trap messages are sent if either this function or this
command disables the sending.
*2. In addition to this function, the "set port link-trap" command can enable/disable the sending.
Either this function or this command disables the sending, no Trap messages are sent.
Note
When a message belongs to two or more members/elements, the message is sent only if
enabled is set for all of the members.
Memo
For Trap messages corresponding to each group, see "the group correspondence table for
each specific trap and group correspondence table for each standard trap" in Appendix.
Enabling/disabling Trap transmission selection

Trap transmission selection can be enabled and disabled for each message type, each group, and
each member/element. Sending of all messages can be enabled or disabled by omitting message
types and groups when the command is entered.
Command
set message transmit
Setting of trap transmission selection
10-18
Useful Functions
Displaying trap transmission selection setting status

The trap transmission selection setting status can be displayed.
Command
show message transmit config
Display of trap transmission selection setting status
Input example (1/2)

Display the trap transmission selection setting status
*Switch@1# show message transmit config

Message Transmit Configuration(Member)
======================================
Group
Member
Monitor
Trap
Remote-log
Local-log
-----------------------------------------------------------------------fault
: critical
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
major
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
minor
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
warning
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
mc
: --enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
sfp
: --enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
10-19
Useful Functions
Input example (2/2)
ntp
telnet
: --enabled enabled
: connect
enabled enabled
fail
enabled enabled
maintenance-network : out-band
enabled enabled
in-band
enabled enabled
backup
: --enabled enabled
external-memory
: status
enabled enabled
fault
enabled enabled
spantree
: --enabled enabled
fdb
: --enabled enabled
aggregation
: --enabled enabled
atm-oam
: detect-f1f3
enabled enabled
detect-f4f5
enabled enabled
detect-minor
enabled enabled
loopback-atm
: --enabled enabled
aps
: --enabled enabled
atm-loop
: --enabled enabled
ether-oam
: unexpect-level enabled enabled
mismerge
enabled enabled
unexpect-mep
enabled enabled
unexpect-period enabled enabled
loc
enabled enabled
rdi
enabled enabled
ether-ps
: --disabled disabled
t1e1
: --disabled disabled
tdmop
: --enabled enabled
ima
: --enabled enabled
stm
: detect-rs
enabled enabled
detect-ms
enabled enabled
detect-hp
enabled enabled
detect-lp
enabled enabled
detect-pdh
enabled enabled
command
: -------
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
disabled
disabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
disabled
disabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
enabled
Message Transmit Configuration(Element)

=======================================
Group
Element Monitor Trap
Remote-log Local-log
----------------------------------------------------------------private-trap :
10 disabled disabled disabled
disabled
trap-id
:
12 --disabled ----line
:
1 enabled disabled disabled
disabled
port
:
1/1 enabled disabled disabled
disabled
link
:
1/1 enabled disabled disabled
disabled
*Switch@1#
Memo
Whether to enable or disable message transmission cannot be set for monitor and trap of
the command group and monitor, remote-log, and local-log of the trap-id group element 12,
so "---" is displayed.
10-20
Troubleshooting
11 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the solution method to
be applied when expected operations cannot
be obtained and the procedure to return to the
status set when the unit was purchased.
11-1
Troubleshooting
When the local console cannot be used

Confirm the following points:
1)
Is a straight cable used as the console cable?
2)
Is local console communication set correctly?
3)
Are the CX2600/200 power cables connected?
When communication is disabled

When communication to a specific network is disabled
Confirm continuity by using the "ping" command to the routers of the network with which
communication is disabled.
Check the continuity with the routers one by one, starting from the nearest to the using terminal to
the network with which continuity is disabled.
Thus, which router disables the communication can be determined.
address, and cable of the determined router.
Confirm the routing table,
When communication is disabled intermittently

Confirm the traffic and load of the line. Also confirm that the cables are connected correctly and
that the used cables conform to the standard.
When communication is disabled completely

Confirm that all routers in the route are turned on and operate normally, or the communication
cables are not loose.
11-2
Troubleshooting
When the unit does not start

When the unit does not start, confirm the following items and take appropriate action:
When the ALM lamp on the front of the unit is turned on

When this lamp is turned on, confirm the installation environment of the unit (temperature,
humidity, etc.). If this lamp is turned on even though the installation environment is correct,
contact the distributor of the product or the NEC account sales person.
When the PALM lamp on the rear of the unit is turned on

When this lamp is turned on, confirm that both of the two power cords are connected correctly.
If the PALM lamp is turned on even though the cords are connected correctly, either of the power
supplies mounted on the unit may be faulty.
Even when one power supply is faulty, if the other power supply operates normally, the operation
of the unit can be assured, however, contact the distributor of the product or the NEC account
sales person.
When none of the lamps on the front of the unit are not turned on
Confirm that power cords are connected correctly. If none of the lamps do not go on even though
the power cords are connected correctly, contact the distributor of the product or the NEC account
sales person.
11-3
Troubleshooting
When the unit restarts automatically

When the unit restarts automatically due to a failure of this unit, the following information items as
well as the status when the failure occurred are required.
Before contact the distributor of the product or the NEC account sales person, collect the
information.
1)
Status when the failure occurred

Were installation works, such as network installation and terminal addition, being performed?
2)
Statuses of the lamps on the front of this unit

Are the lamps on the front of this unit, such as the ALM, PWR, and PALM lams, turned on?
3)
Network configuration
In which network configuration and in which location, is the CX2600/200 used?
4)
Setting information and failure information

Failure information collected immediately before the restart is automatically saved in RAM.
Collect the information by the following "failure information collection method".
If such an automatic restart occurs, your setting information and failure information are required.
The information is surely required for software failure analysis. If the information is not provided,
the failure cannot be analyzed.
5)
Event information
If event information collection is set, collect the event information at occurrence of the failure.
Failure information collection method

Display the failure information by the "show fault" command to confirm the information.
11-4
Troubleshooting
To delete configuration data

To return running configuration data settings to startup configuration
data settings
To delete running configuration data settings and to return to startup configuration data settings,
restart the unit by the "reset system" command. In this case, the data settings are not saved in
the built-in flash memory.
Note
Note that temporary data (including statistical information and automatically-collected

routing tables) is also deleted.
To return running configuration data settings to factory-set settings

To delete running configuration data settings and return to factory-set settings, delete the data in
the built-in flash memory by the "clear startup-config all" command and restart the unit by the "reset
system" command.
When self diagnosis does not terminate

normally
When the INS lamp indicating that the self diagnosis is in progress is kept turned on in yellow,
confirm the installation environment (temperature and humidity).
When the environment is normal, contact the distributor of the product or the NEC account sales
person.
When there is no command response

In addition to the contents displayed by the "show fault" command, collect the system log
information displayed by entering a relevant command (such as the "show syslog local" command)
and contact the distributor of the product or the NEC account sales person.
11-5
Troubleshooting
When software failure information occurs

When any information excluding "No entry in the table" is displayed for Exception Information, by
entering the "show fault past" command, a software failure has occurred. Automatic restore has
already been executed; however, service will be deteriorated if the same phenomenon occurs in
the future. So in addition to the contents displayed by the "show fault" command, collect the
system log information displayed by entering a relevant command (such as the "show syslog local"
command) and contact the distributor of the product or the NEC account sales person.
When external memory is not recognized

Confirm that the external memory is not destroyed. If the external memory is not recognized even
after it is reinstalled, collect the system log information displayed by entering a relevant command
(such as the "show syslog local" command) and contact the distributor of the product or the NEC
account sales person.
11-6
Specifications
12 Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications and
standards of lines to be connected and
supported functions.
12.1 Unit Specifications
12-2
12.2 Interface Specifications
12-1
12-4
Specifications
12.1 Unit Specifications

The following table lists the CX2600/220, CX2600/210, and CX2600/202 specifications.
For specifications regarding MPLS, refer to the "Instruction Manual (MPLS)".
Specifications
Function
Line
module *1
Interface
Switch
module
CX2600/220
CX2600/210
CX2600/202
10/100BASE-TX x8 (RJ-45)
32
32
16
100BASE-FX x8
(Single conductor: SC)
32
32
16
1000BASE-T/X x1
(RJ-45 or SFP)
12
TDM Channelized T1/E1 x8

(RJ-45)
96
48
16
TDM Channelized STM-1 x1

(SFP)
12
ATM T1/E1 x8 (RJ-45)
96
48
16
ATM STM-1/OC-3c x1 (SC or

SFP)
12
10/100BASE-TX x1 (RJ-45)
RS-232C x1 (DB9 male)
USB2.0 x1 (female)
12
Number of line module slots

Packet switching capacity
Switch
24Gbps
Packet forwarding performance
17.9Mpps
TDM cross connection capacity
2Gbps (32K x 32K 64kbps)
MAC learning
128K entries
4094 VLANs
(Portbase VLAN, tagbase VLAN [802.1Q],
Extended VLAN [802.1ad], VLAN tag swap,
port isolation)
VLAN
Maximum bandwidth limit, Minimum bandwidth

guarantee, fairness control, broadcast/multicast
bandwidth control, CoS mapping (Ethertype,
802.1q CoS, IPv4 ToS, IPv6 TrafficClass), class
mapping (4 classes)
QoS
Ethernet
Flow control
Flow control (802.3x)
Filtering
MAC DA, MAC SA, Ethertype,

IP Protocol, IP DA, IP SA
Multicast
IGMP/MLD snooping (RFC4541)
OAM
Ethernet OAM (Y.1731/802.1ag),

MC OAM (TS-1000)
Protection
GbE 1:1 APS (G.8031)
Link Aggregation (802.3ad),

Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1D/w)
Link, Route redundancy
12-2
Specifications
Specifications
Function
TDM
CX2600/220
CX2600/202
Protection
STM-1 1+1 APS (G.841)
Circuit emulation
SAToP (RFC4553), CESoPSN (RFC5086)
Clock synchronization
External clock, line clock, Adaptive clock
Link redundancy
ATM
CX2600/210
IMA (AF-PHY-0086.001/ I.761)
QoS
CLP/ToS mapping, VP/VC/VP-VC hierarchical

shaper (EPD/PPD), CBR/UBR/GFR Traffic Class
OAM
F4/F5 Fault Management (I.610)
Protection
STM-1 1+1 APS (G.841)
ATM/Ethernet bridge
Ethernet/802 over AAL5 (RFC2684)
Circuit emulation
ATM over Ether, ATM over UDP/IP

ATM over MPLS (RFC4717) *2
SNMPv1/v2c (RFC1157,1902), MIB-II (RFC1213),
syslog (RFC3164), RMON (RFC1757)
Network management
CLI, TELNET (RFC854), FTP (RFC959),

SNTPv3 (RFC2030), remote file updating
Maintenance and operation
Switch module, line module, power module and

FAN module
Hot swap
Module redundancy
Switch/line/power module
DC -48V
(DC -40.5
to 57V)
Power supply
Power module
DC -48V (DC -40.5 to 57V)
AC 100 to
240V
-48VDC/13A
100VAC/8.8A
120VAC/7.4A
220-230VAC/
4.0A
Common
Input rating
-48VDC/11A
-48VDC/5.4A
240VAC/3.7A
50/60Hz
<Temperature>
Working: -5 to 45C, Short term: -5 to 50C (96h)
Environment conditions
<Humidity>
5 to 90% (no condensation)
Storage/transport environment condition

External dimensions (WxDxH)
Weight (for maximum mounting)
Temperature:-20C to 65C,
humidity: 5% to 90% (no condensation)
440470265
mm
440470176
mm
44047087
mm
40kg
25kg
15kg
*1: Indicates the number of the ports for maximum mounting of the identical type modules.
*2: This function requires a purchase of a separate MPLS license.
12-3
Specifications
12.2 Interface Specifications

Line interface specifications
100BASE-FX interface (single conductor)
The 100BASE-FX port mounts the SFF-type optical module.
the line module: CLASS-S, CLASS-Ar, and CLASS-B.
There are three types according to
The following table lists the physical standard of the CLASS-S, CLASS-Ar, and CLASS-B classes
of the 100BASE-FX.
Interface Standard
Item
Standard value
Standard
CLASS-S
Interface speed (Mbits/sec)
CLASS-Ar
CLASS-B
125.00
Number of conductors
Transmission medium
SMF
SMF
SMF
Sending bandwidth (nm)
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
1480 to 1580
Max. output power (dBm)
Min. output power (dBm)
14
Extinction ratio (dB)
8.2 or more
9 or more
10 or more
Receiving Receiving bandwidth (nm)

part
Min. received light power (dBm)
1260 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1260 to 1360
30
30
31
Max. received light power (dBm)
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.5
0.2
0
-0.2
0
15
35
65
85
100
Normalized Time (% of Unit Interval)
100BASE-FX Eye Mask
12-4
Normalized Amplitude
Sending
part
Specifications
10/100/1000BASE-T interface
10/100/1000BASE-T and Pin Assignment
10/100/1000BASE-T Straight Connection

Port of this unit
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
D0+
Straight cable
Internal
connection
Terminal port
Signal
name
Contents
Pin No
Send/receive+
D0+
Send/receive+
D0-
Send/receive-
D0-
Send/receive-
D1+
Send/receive+
D1+
Send/receive+
D1-
Send/receive-
D1-
Send/receive-
D2+
Send/receive+
D2+
Send/receive+
D2-
Send/receive-
D2-
Send/receive-
D3+
Send/receive+
D3+
Send/receive+
D3-
Send/receive-
D3-
Send/receive-
12-5
Specifications
10/100/1000BASE-T Cross Connection

Port of this unit
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
D0+
Crossing
cable
Internal
connection
Terminal port
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Send/receive+
D0+
Send/receive+
D0-
Send/receive-
D0-
Send/receive-
D1+
Send/receive+
D1+
Send/receive+
D1-
Send/receive-
D1-
Send/receive-
D2+
Send/receive+
D2+
Send/receive+
D2-
Send/receive-
D2-
Send/receive-
D3+
Send/receive+
D3+
Send/receive+
D3-
Send/receive-
D3-
Send/receive-
Note: Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not cross-connected in some cases.
12-6
Specifications
1000BASE-X interface
The 1000BASE-X port is the SFP (mini GBIC) connector. Switching between 1000BASE-SX,
1000BASE-LX, 1000BASE-ZX or 1000BASE-BX is possible by changing the SFP module.
Use the recommended products in CX2K series as SFP.
NEC sales offices.
For the recommended products, contact
The following table lists the physical standard of the 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX/BX.

Note
To remove a SFP module, pull the module out straight with moving an ejector in a
horizontal position.
Interface Standard
Item
Standard value
1000BASESX
(802.3z)
Standard
1000BASELX
(802.3z)
1000BASEZX
Conductor count
MMF
Transmission medium
SMF
8B10B
Encoding system
RMS value (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1520 to 1580
1480 to 1500
1260 to 1360
spectrum width (nm)
0.85 (RMS)
4 (RMS)
1 (20)
0.88
3.5
+5
9
6 or more
9.5
11
9 or more
9 or more
7 or more
RMS value (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1520 to 1580
Min. received light power

(dBm)
17
19
24
19.5
Max. received light power

(dBm)
1260 to 1360
1.3
1.0
0.8
0.5
0.2
0
-0.2
0
22
37.5
62.5 78
100
1000BASE-X Eye Mask
12-7
Receiving
part
1000BASEBX10-U
(802.3ah)
1250
Sending
part
1000BASEBX10-D
(802.3ah)
1480 to 1500
Specifications
STM-1 ATM interface

There are two types: SMF line module (ATM155S) and MMF line module (ATM155M).
The following table lists the physical standard of the ATM155S and ATM155M.
Interface Standard
Standard value
Item
Transmission medium
Interface type
ATM155S
ATM155M
SMF
MMF
SDH base: STM-1

(conforming to ITU-T and TTC JT G707)
155.520
Conductor count
Bandwidth (nm)
1261 to 1360
1270 to 1380
14
15
23.5
8.2 or more
10 or more
1261 to 1360
1260 to 1360
28
31

Receiving
part
Bandwidth (nm)
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.5
0.2
0
-0.2
0
0.15
0.35
0.65
0.85

STM-1 ATM Eye Mask
12-8
1.00
Sending
part
Specifications
T1/E1 interface (RJ-45)
T1/E1 Interface
T1/E1 Line Pin Assignment

Port of this unit
Pin No.
NT
Contents
TX_RING
Send-
TX_TIP
Send+
Shield (T)
TX_Shield
RX_RING
Receive-
RX_TIP
Receive+
Shield (R)
RX_Shield
7
8
Note
Connect the No.3 and No.6 pins to shield coat of the cable respectively, if necessary.
T1/E1 Interface Electrical Conditions

Item
T1
E1
1544
2048
B8ZS, AMI
HDB3, AMI
Impedance ()
100
120/75
Support frame
ESF
CRC4 multiframe
SF
CRC4 multiframe-no-CAS
Interface speed (kbps)

Transmission code
non-CRC-4 (G.704 basic)

unframed
12-9
Specifications
STM-1/OC-3 interface
There are two types: TDMP155 module and ATMP155 module
SFP which has the following interface types can be mounted.
Use the recommended products in CX2K series as SFP.
NEC sales offices.
Note
For the recommended products, contact
To remove a SFP module, pull the module out straight with moving an ejector in a
horizontal position.
Interface Standard
SFP module type item
Standard value
SONET OC3
IR-1
LR-1
LR-2
ITU-T G.957
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Transmission medium
SMF

Sending
part
Bandwidth (nm)
155.520
1270 to 1360
1270 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-8
-15
-5
-5
8.2 or more
10 or more
10 or more
Receiving Bandwidth (nm)

part
1270 to 1360
1270 to 1580
1480 to 1580
-28
-34
-34
-8
-10
-10
12-10
Specifications
1.2
0.8
0.5
0.2
1.0
0
-0.2
0
0.15
0.35
0.65
0.85
1.00
STM-1/OC-3 Eye Mask
Correspondence to SPF Module Type

SONET OC3 IR-1
OC3 Singlemode Interreach 15Km
SONET OC3 LR-1
OC3 Singlemode Longreach 40Km
SONET OC3 LR-2
OC3 Singlemode Longreach 80Km
12-11
Specifications
Maintenance interface
Console port (RS-232C)
Console Port (RS-232C) and Pin Assignment
Console Port (RS-232C) Cross Connection

Port of this unit (9 pins, male)
Crossing
cable
Pin
No.
Signal
name
CTS
CTS
DSR
DSR
RxD
RxD
GND
GND
TxD
TxD
DTR
DTR
RTS
RTS
Contents
Internal
connection
Terminal port (9 pins, male)
12-12
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Specifications
Console port (Ether)
Console Port (Ether) and Pin Assignment
Console Port (Ether) Straight Connection

Port of this unit
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
D0+
Straight cable
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Send/receive+
D0+
Send/receive+
D0
Send/receive
D0
Send/receive
D1+
Send/receive+
D1+
Send/receive+
D1
Send/receive
D1
Send/receive
D2+
Send/receive+
D2+
Send/receive+
D2
Send/receive
D2
Send/receive
D3+
Send/receive+
D3+
Send/receive+
D3
Send/receive
D3
Send/receive
7
8
Internal
connection
Terminal port
12-13
7
8
Specifications
Console Port (Ether) Cross Connection

Port of this unit
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Contents
D0+
Crossing
cable
Signal
name
Contents
Pin
No.
Send/receive+
D0+
Send/receive+
D0
Send/receive
D0
Send/receive
D1+
Send/receive+
D1+
Send/receive+
D1
Send/receive
D1
Send/receive
D2+
Send/receive+
D2+
Send/receive+
D2
Send/receive
D2
Send/receive
D3+
Send/receive+
D3+
Send/receive+
D3
Send/receive
D3
Send/receive
7
8
Internal
connection
Terminal port
Note: Pins 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not cross-connected in some cases.
12-14
7
8
Specifications
Clock interface
Clock interface (D-sub9-pin)
Clock Interface and Pin Assignment
Clock Interface Terminal Accommodation

Port of this unit
Pin No.
BITS
DCS
Signal name
Contents
Signal name
Contents
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
DCSX
DCS Receive X
FG
Frame Ground
N.C
N.C
TIP
External Clock Input T Lead
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
DCSY
DCS Receive Y
FG
Frame Ground
N.C
N.C
RING
External Clock Input R Lead
N.C
N.C
Note
Connect the No.2 and No.7 pins when DCS (Digital Clock Supply) is used.
Note
Connect the No.3, No.4, No.8, and No.9 pins when BITS (Building Integrated Timing
Supply) is used.
12-15
Specifications
DCS Interface Standard
Standard value
Item
(64kHz+8kHz)
hybrid bipolar signal (AMI)
(64kHz+8kHz-0.4kHz)
hybrid bipolar signal (AMI)
Amplitude
0.63 to 1.1 Vo-p
Half width
7.8 0.78s
110 balanced
Impedance ()
T1 Interface (G.703.5) Electrical Conditions

Item
Standard value
Transmission medium
Twisted pair (shielded)
1544
Transmission code
B8ZS, AMI
100
Impedance ()
Amplitude
3 Vo-p
Pulse duration
324ns
Support frame
SF/ESF
E1 Interface (G.703.9) Electrical Conditions

Item
Transmission medium
Standard value
Coaxial
Twisted pair (shielded)
2048
Transmission code
Impedance ()
Amplitude
B8ZS, AMI
75
120
2.37 Vo-p
3 Vo-p
Pulse duration
244ns
Support frame
FAS/CRC4
2048 kHz synchronization Interface (G.703.13) Electrical Conditions

Item
Transmission medium
Standard value
Coaxial

Impedance ()
Amplitude
Twisted pair
2048
75
120
0.75 to 1.5 Vo-p
1.0 to 1.9 Vo-p
12-16
Appendix
13 Appendix
This appendix lists faults, counter monitoring conditions, command errors,
restart causes, and restrictions.
13.1 Alarm Transfer Mechanism 13-3

13.2 (TTC) TS-1000 Standard 13-33
13.3 Fault List 13-37
13.4 Trap List 13-43
13.5 Counter Monitoring Condition List 13-164
13-1
Appendix
13.6 Command Error List 13-179

13.7 Restart Cause List 13-214
13.8 UGSW Switchability List 13-215
13.9 APS State List 13-219
13.10 APS Protection Time List 13-225
13.11 IMA State List 13-226
13.12 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed
Connection List 13-228
13.13 External Memory List 13-231
13-2
Appendix
13.1 Alarm Transfer Mechanism

CX2600/200 monitors the line status of each port on the ATM155/ATMP/ATMP155/TDMP/TDMP155 line module.
CX2600/200 sends an alarm to the maintenance interface and sends a notification to the remote device.
In alarm detection, F1 to F3 levels have higher priority than the F4/F5 level.
If an error occurs,
Priority decreases from left to right in the figure below.
* For each of F4 and F5 on ATM ports, there are two types of alarms: segment-segment alarms and end-segment alarms.
13-3
Appendix
Alarm transfer mechanism of ATM155 line module

LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
LOP (F3)
* Whether to transfer
VC-RDI upon reception
of VP-AIS can be
chosen, depending on
alarm transfer mode.
P-AIS (F3)
LCD (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
Device fault
: Alarm output point, z: Alarm detection point
13-4
Appendix
Alarm transfer mechanism of ATMP line module

1. Alarm transfer operation with VP connection setting
1.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4 END POINT setting
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
AIS (F1) & VP-AIS (F4)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
* : Alarm output point, z: Alarm detection point, {: Alarm pass-through point, : Alarm discard point
* If an SW module failure or an ATMP module failure (MJ level) is detected, F1 AIS alarm is not sent out.
13-5
Appendix
1.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 CONNECTING POINT setting
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI( F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
AIS (F1) & VP-AIS (F4)
VP-AIS (F4)
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
* F4 level alarms include both segment and End-to-End flows.
13-6
Appendix
1.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
AIS (F1)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
* F4 level alarms include only segment flow.
13-7
Appendix
2. Alarm transfer operation with VC connection setting

2.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4/F5 END POINT settings
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
F4 to F5
Option setting
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
AIS(F1) & VC-AIS (F5)
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
* F4/F5 level alarms include only segment flow.
13-8
Appendix
2.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 END POINT and F5 CONNECTING POINT settings
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
F4 to F5
Option setting
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
VC-AIS (F5)
AIS (F1) & VC-AIS (F5)

LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
* F4/F5 level alarms include both segment and End-to-End flows.
13-9
Appendix
2.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 END POINT and F5 flow point settings
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
AIS (F1)
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-10
Appendix
2.4. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting and with F5 END POINT setting
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD( F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-11
Appendix
2.5. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting and with F5 CONNECTING POINT setting
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-AIS (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
VC-AIS (F5)

LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-12
Appendix
2.6. Alarm transfer operation without F4/F5 flow point settings
LOS (F1)
AIS (F1)
LOF (F1)
RAI (F1)
RAI (F1)
LCD (F3)
LODS (F3)
LIF (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
IMA-RDI (F3)
RDI-IMA (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
AIS (F1)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-13
Appendix
Alarm transfer mechanism of TDMP line module

1. Alarm transfer operation with TDM mode setting
LOS
AIS
LOF
RAI
RAI
LOS/AIS/LOF detection (*1) at associated paths
AIS
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR ALARM
*1
When two or more TDMoP paths exist on one line, AIS is transmitted only if LOS/AIS/LOF are detected on all the paths.
13-14
Appendix
2. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (SAToP) setting

L bit
LOS
AIS
AIS
Detected only when the frame

format is other than "unframed" (*1)
LOF
RAI
R bit
L bit
AIS (ALL1 data
transmission (*2))
CESoP Buffer Underrun
R bit
ACT-FLT
* L bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.
* CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected when there are no packets received at the Ether side.
*1
*2
When the frame format is "unframed", LOF and RAI are not monitored because F-bit and F-byte are handled as user data.
In the SAToP mode, a frame of all '1' pattern is inserted to notify the other unit of AIS.
ALL1 data transmission (*2)

13-15
Appendix
3. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (CESoPSN) setting

L bit (*1)
LOS
AIS
LOF
RAI
M bit (*1)
RAI
M bit
R bit
L bit (*2)
CESoP Buffer Underrun (*2)
AIS
R bit
ACT-FLT
* : Alarm output point, z: Alarm detection point, : Alarm discard point

* L bit, M bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.
*1
*2
When two or more TDMoP paths exist on one line, line alarm transfer operations are executed for all the paths.
When two or more TDMoP paths exist on one line, AIS is transmitted only if L bits or CESoP Buffer Underruns are detected on all the
paths.
13-16
Appendix
Alarm transfer mechanism of ATMP155 line module

1. Alarm transfer operation with VP connection setting
1.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4 END POINT setting
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LOP (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
LCD (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-RDI(F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
VP-AIS (F4)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-17
Appendix
1.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 CONNECTING POINT setting
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LOP (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
LCD (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
VP-AIS (F4)
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
* F4 level alarms include both segment and End-to-End flows.
13-18
Appendix
1.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LOP (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
LCD (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-19
Appendix
2. Alarm transfer operation with VC connection setting

2.1. Alarm transfer operation with F4/F5 END POINT settings
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LOP (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
LCD (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
F4 to F5
Option
setting
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-20
Appendix
2.2. Alarm transfer operation with F4 END POINT and F5 CONNECTING POINT settings
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
LOP (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
LCD (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
F4 to F5
Option
setting
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
* F4/F5 level alarms include both segment and End-to-End flows.
13-21
Appendix
2.3. Alarm transfer operation without F4 END POINT and F5 flow point settings
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
LOP (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LCD (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-22
Appendix
2.4. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting and with F5 END POINT setting
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
LOP (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LCD (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-23
Appendix
2.5. Alarm transfer operation without F4 flow point setting and with F5 CONNECTING POINT setting
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
LOP (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LCD (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-AIS (F5)
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-24
Appendix
2.6. Alarm transfer operation without F4/F5 flow point settings
LOS (F1)
LOF (F1)
MS-AIS (F2)
MS-SD (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-RDI (F2)
MS-ERR (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
MS-REI (F2)
LOP (F3)
P-AIS (F3)
Ether-LOC (F3)
LCD (F3)
Ether-RDI (F3)
VP-AIS (F4)
VP-RDI (F4)
VC-AIS (F5)
VC-RDI (F5)
SW: ACT-FLT
LINE: CR/MJ ALARM
13-25
Appendix
Alarm transfer mechanism of TDMP155 line module

1. Alarm transfer operation of RS and MS
LOS
LOF
OOF
RS-TIM
RS-BIP
MS-AIS
MS-EXC
MS-DEG
MS-REI
MS-RDI
MS-RDI
MS-BIP
MS-REI
HP-RDI
LP-RDI
PDH-AIS
RDI
MS-AIS
SWACT-FLTLINECR ALARM
13-26
Appendix
2. Alarm transfer operation of High-Order Path

AU-AIS
AU-LOP
HP-TIM
HP-UNEQ
HP-PLM
HP-EXC
HP-DEG
HP-REI
HP-RDI
HP-RDI
HP-BIP
HP-REI
LP-RDI
PDH-AIS
RDI
13-27
Appendix
3. Alarm transfer operation of Low-Order Path

TU-AIS
TU-LOP
TU-LOM
LP-TIM
LP-UNEQ
LP-PLM
LP-EXC
LP-DEG
LP-REI
LP-RDI
LP-RDI
LP-BIP
LP-REI
PDH-AIS
RDI
13-28
Appendix
4. Alarm transfer operation of PDH

AIS
LOF
RAI
SEF
FAS
CRC
PDH-AIS
RDI
13-29
Appendix
5. Alarm transfer operation with TDM mode setting

PDH-AIS
PDH-LOF
PDH-RDI
PDH-AIS (*1)
PDH-RAI
PDH-SEF
PDH-FAS
PDH-CRC
*1
When two or more TDM paths exist on one line, PDH-AIS is transmitted only if line alarms are detected on all the paths.
13-30
Appendix
6. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (SAToP) setting

PDH-AIS
PDH-LOF
PDH-SEF
PDH-FAS
Maps PDH alarm monitoring and TDMop path.
PDH-CRC
L bit
All data transmission (*1)
R bit

R bit
* : Alarm output point, z: Alarm detection point, , {: Alarm pass-through point, : Alarm discard point
* L bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.
*1
In the SAToP mode, a frame of all '1' pattern is inserted to notify the other unit of AIS.
13-31
Appendix
7. Alarm transfer operation with TDMoP mode (CESoPSN) setting

PDH-AIS
Transfers alarm detected in PDH circuit side to Ether side
PDH-LOF
PDH-RDI
L bit (*1)
PDH-RAI
M bit (*1)
PDH-SEF
PDH-FAS
Maps PDH alarm monitoring and TDMoP path.
PDH-CRC
L bit
PDH-AIS (*2)
M bit
R bit

R bit
* : Alarm output point, z: Alarm detection point, : Alarm discard point

* L bit, M bit and R bit are bits for failure notification in the CESoP Control word field in an Ether packet.
* CESoP Buffer Underrun is detected when there are no packets received at the Ether side in a given period of time.
*1
*2
When two or more TDMoP paths exist on one line, line alarm transfer operations are executed for all the paths.
When two or more TDMoP paths exist on one line, AIS is transmitted only if L bits or CESoP Buffer Underruns are detected on all the
paths.
13-32
Appendix
13.2 (TTC) TS-1000 Standard

The table below defines the bits of the TS-1000 maintenance frame.
Signal
position
Item
Description
Remarks
F0-F7
Preamble
1010 1010
Fixed
C0
Maintenance signal identifier
Fixed
C1
Direction identifier
0: Up (Terminal side MC Center side MC)

1: Down (Center side MC Terminal side MC)
C2-C3
Instruction identifier
00: Reserved
01: Display
10: Request
11: Response
C4-C7
Version
0000
Others ignore the S and M fields.
C8-C15
Control signal
10 00 00 00: Loop test start

00 00 00 00: Loop test end
01 00 00 00: State notification
Others: Reserved
S0
Power state
0: Normal
1: Power failure
S1
S2
Receive optical state

Terminal side/network side link
0: Normal
Ignored when S4=1 (binary)
1: Abnormal
(Determined by FEFI)
0: Link established
Not defined when S11=1 (binary)
1: Link disconnected
13-33
Appendix
Signal
position
S3
Item
MC fault
Description
Remarks
0: Normal
1: Fault
S4
S5
Receive optical disconnection

notification method
0: Maintenance frame
Loop test state display
0: Normal
1: FEFI
1: Under loop test
S6
Terminal side link setting state

notification
0: Does not support option B.
1: Supports option B.
Whether option B is supported

S7-8
Terminal side link speed
00: 10Mbit/sec
01: 100Mbit/sec
10: 1Gbit/sec
0 always when S6=0 (binary)
11: Other speeds

S9
Terminal side link

communication method
0: Half-duplex
1: Full-duplex

Not defined when S7-8=11 (binary)
S10
Terminal side link

auto-negotiation function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Not defined when S7-8=11 (binary)
S11
Number of physical interfaces of

terminal side/network side link
0: One
S12
Reversed
0000
M0-M23
Vendor code
Bit 1 to bit 24 of OUI
M24-M47
Model number
Assigned by vendor
E0-E7
FCS
CRC-8
1: Two or more
At the time of transmission from this

device, 1 (binary) is always set.
The calculation range is C0-M47.
13-34
Appendix
(TS-1000) Loopback test sequence

In response to a loopback test request from the center side MC, a loopback test can be conducted at an arbitrary position of the terminal side
MC. During a test, user frame transmission is prohibited.
The TS-1000 maintenance frame transfer sequence time specification (loopback test) is indicated below.
13-35
Appendix
Item
Time specification
Value
min(A)=Timer T1
Center side MC user frame transmission

prohibition time
(min) 2010msec
min(C)=Timer T2
Terminal side MC loop test state guarantee

time
(min) 900msec
max(D)
Terminal side MC loop test state permission

time
(max) 2000msec
max(F)=Timer TF
Center side MC loop test permission time
(max) 890msec
Remarks
=max(D)+10msec
=max(C)-10msec
Result of loopback mc
Priority High
Low
other error
Hardware fault, etc.
test start request timeout
Start response wait (TE) time-out
test terminate receive
Forced termination based on reception of a test termination

indication from the terminal side MC
frame ng
Test frame error
frame timeout
Test frame response wait (TE) time-out
test close request timeout
Termination response wait (TE) time-out
test timeout
Test timer (T1) time-out
test ok
Normal termination
13-36
Appendix
13.3 Fault List

The table below indicates the meanings of the importance levels used in the fault list.
Meanings of importance levels

Importance level
CR (Critical)
MJ (Major)
MN (Minor)
WR (Warning)
CL (Cleared)
IF (Information)
Meaning
Critical fault
Major fault
Minor fault
Warning
Fault recovery
Information
Fault level
High
Low
13-37
Appendix
Details of device fault importance levels
Function name
CR (Critical): Critical fault
Function details
Indicates that a situation affecting the continuity and device state has occurred and that immediate recovery processing
is required. This level is reported, for example, when the continuity of the management object is stopped and its
capability must be recovered.
The device notifies the maintenance personnel and takes immediate actions (switch module changeover, line module
changeover, and power shutdown).
ALM-LED is turned on. This level of fault is recovered only when the pertinent module is extracted/reset.
MJ (Major): Major fault
Indicates that a situation affecting the continuity and device state is worsening and that urgent recovery processing is
required. This level is reported, for example, when the capability of the management object is materially degraded and
the capability must be recovered to the normal state.
The device notifies the maintenance personnel of a partial fault only and takes an action (line module changeover).
A partial fault causes ALM-LED to blink and is recovered.
is extracted/reset.
MN (Minor): Minor fault
Other faults are recovered only when the pertinent module
Indicates that there is a fault not affecting the continuity and device state and that recovery processing is required to
protect against the occurrence of a more serious fault (e.g., a fault that affects the continuity or device state). This
level is reported, for example, when the state of a detected alarm has not affected the capability of the management
object yet.
ALM-LED is not turned on. The state already recovered is indicated.
WR (Warning): Warning
Indicates a situation where a latent or imminent fault that affects the continuity or device state is detected before a
serious influence emerges. If necessary, a detailed diagnosis should be made and a corrective action should be taken
to prevent the situation from further worsening to a serious fault that affects the continuity and device state.
A partial fault causes ALM-LED to blink and is recovered.
is extracted/reset.
Other faults are recovered only when the pertinent module
CL (Cleared): Fault recovery
Indicates a situation recovered from a fault that affects the continuity or device state or a situation recovered from a
latent or imminent fault that affects the continuity or device state before a serious influence emerges.
IF (Information): Information
Posts information about node autonomous/remote controlled results, state changes, and actions.
13-38
Appendix
Switch module/line module state transitions for each importance level
For each importance level, the table below indicates switch module/line module state transitions made when a fault has occurred.
Switch module fault
CR (Critical): Critical fault
MJ (Major): Major fault
Line module fault
The switch module makes a transition to the fault state

(FAULT).
The line module makes a transition to the fault state

(FAULT).
A changeover occurs when duplicate operation is in use and

the other switch module is placed in the SBY state.
A changeover occurs, if possible, when the line module is in

duplicate operation and the ACT system is faulty.
No line module state transition and changeover occur.
No switch module state transition and changeover occur.
No line module state transition occurs.
A changeover occurs, if possible, when the line module is in

duplicate operation and the ACT system is faulty.
MN (Minor): Minor fault

WR (Warning): Warning
CL (Cleared): Recovery
The switch module, if faulty, is recovered.
The line module, if faulty, is recovered.
No changeover occurs.
No changeover occurs.
13-39
Appendix
Fault list
No.
Fault description
Level
SwitchLED
LineLED
Switch
changeover
Line
changeover
Suspect
component
Fan module fault
MJ
Fan
Fan module fault recovery
CL
Fan
Power supply module fault
MJ
Power supply
Power supply module fault recovery
CL
Power supply
External memory fault
WR
External
memory
External memory fault recovery
CL
External
memory
Switch module CPU fault (CR)
CR
Switch
Switch module CPU fault recovery
CL
Switch
Switch module device fault (CR)
CR
Switch
10
Switch module device fault (MJ)
MJ
Switch
11
Switch module device fault (MN)
MN
Switch
12
Switch module device fault (WR)
WR
Switch
13
Switch module device fault recovery
CL
Switch
14
Switch module software fault (CR)
CR
Switch
15
Switch module software fault (WR)
WR
Switch
16
Switch module software fault

recovery
CL
Switch
17
Switch-line interface fault (MJ)
MJ
Line
18
Switch-line interface fault (MN)
MN
Line
19
Switch-line interface fault recovery
CL
Line
20
Line module device fault (CR)
CR
Line
13-40
Remarks
The switch is autonomously

reset 10 to 20 seconds later.
(Note 1)
Appendix
No.
Fault description
Level
SwitchLED
LineLED
Switch
changeover
Line
changeover
Suspect
component
21
Line module device fault (MJ)
MJ
- /{
Line
22
Line module device fault (MN)
MN
Line
23
Line module device fault (WR)
WR
Line
24
Line module device fault recovery
CL
Line
25
Switch module temperature fault

(CR)
CR
Switch
26

(WR)
WR
Switch
27

recovery
CL
Switch
Line module temperature fault (CR)
CR
Line
29
Line module temperature fault (WR)
WR
Line
30
Line module temperature fault

recovery
CL
Line
28
*1) When the "set fault auto-reboot" function to be used for autonomous reset upon a fault is disabled, no reset occurs.
However, a reset occurs at the time of detection before restart completion, regardless of whether the function is disabled.
* Switch/line-LED column:
{: ALM turned on, U: ALM blinking, : ALM blinking canceled
* Switch/line changeover column:
{: Switched in the redundant operation mode
13-41
Remarks
Depending on fault contents,
the LED is turned on.
The power is shut down 10

seconds later.
The power is shut down 10

seconds later.
Appendix
APS control function K1K2 alarm detection
Alarm
Operation at alarm
detection time
Detection condition
CMF
(Channel Mismatch Failure)
K1K2 transmit request channel information

(K1 Bits 5-8) and receive request channel
information do not match.
None
TAF
(Type of Architecture Failure)
K1K2 transmit architecture information (K2

Bit 5) and receive architecture information
do not match.
None
TDF
(Type of Direction Failure)
K1K2 transmit status information (K2 Bits

6-8) and receive status information (K2 Bits
6-8) do not match. Detection is performed
in Bi-Directional mode only.
None
MMF
(APS Mode Match Failure)
OR of TAF with TDF
None
FPF
K1K2 receive request level information (K1
(Far end Protection Line Failure) Bits 1-4) is SF and receive request channel
information (K1 Bits 5-8) is 0.
PSBF
(Protection Switch Byte Failure )
Detection
Annex.A-SDH
Acquisition by
MIB
Trap issue
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Annex.A-SONET
Annex.A-SDH
Annex.A-SONET
Annex.B
Annex.A-SONET
None
Operates as standby
port SF for remote
side detection.
Annex.A-SDH
Invalid K1K2 inconsistent with the operation Operates as standby

mode is received.
port SF.
Inconsistent K1K2 detection (Three matches
of K1K2 cannot be detected in 12 frames.)
Annex.A-SDH
13-42
Annex.A-SONET
Annex.A-SONET
Annex.B
Appendix
13.4 Trap List

Specific trap number definition
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
cx26-mbhTrapSessionStatus
IF
User login state
TRAP_SYSINF
cx26-mbhTrapNtpAccess
IF
NTP access result
TRAP_SYSINF
cx26-mbhTrapMessageDiscarded
IF
TRAP message discard state
TRAP_SYSINF
cx26-mbhTrapNetworkOverload
WR
Blocking due to network overload
TRAP_SYSWAR
cx26-mbhTrapNetworkOverloadRcv
CL
Unblocking due to network overload recovery
TRAP_SYSCLR
cx26-mbhTrapConfigBackup
IF
Periodical configuration upload result
TRAP_SYSINF
cx26-mbhTrapExternalMemoryStatus
IF
External memory state
TRAP_SYSINF
10
cx26-mbhTrapStpProtocolMigration
IF
STP frame received from remote side during

RSTP operation
TRAP_ROUTEINF
11
cx26-mbhTrapStpInvalidBpduReceived
IF
Invalid BPDU detected during STP operation
TRAP_ROUTEINF
12
cx26-mbhTrapFdbTableClearStatus
IF
All FDB table clearing request completed
TRAP_ROUTEINF
13
cx26-mbhTrapLagPortStatusChange
IF
Operation verification in LACPDU

reception/non-reception
TRAP_ROUTEINF
14
cx26-mbhTrapLagLoopDetect
IF
Loopback detected
TRAP_ROUTEINF
15
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchDevice
CR
Switch module device fault occurred
TRAP_SYSFLT
MJ
TRAP_SYSMJR
MN
TRAP_SYSMNR
WR
TRAP_SYSWAR
16
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchDeviceRecover
WR
Switch module device fault recovered
TRAP_SYSWAR
17
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchSoftware
CR
Switch module software fault occurred
TRAP_SYSFLT
WR
Switch module software fault occurred
TRAP_SYSWAR
13-43
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
18
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchSoftwareRecover
CL
Switch module software fault recovered
TRAP_SYSCLR
19
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchTemp
CR
Switch module temperature fault occurred
TRAP_SYSFLT
WR
TRAP_SYSWAR
20
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchTempRecover
CL
Switch module temperature fault recovered
TRAP_SYSCLR
21
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchLineDevice
MJ
Switch-line interface fault occurred
TRAP_LINEMJR
MN
TRAP_LINEMNR
22
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchLineDeviceRecover
CL
Switch-line interface fault recovered
TRAP_LINECLR
23
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfLineDevice
CR
Line module fault occurred
TRAP_LINEFLT
MJ
TRAP_LINEMJR
MN
TRAP_LINEMNR
WR
TRAP_LINEWAR
24
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfLineDeviceRecover
CL
Line module fault recovered
TRAP_LINECLR
25
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfLineTemp
CR
Line module temperature fault occurred
TRAP_LINEFLT
WR
Line module temperature fault occurred
TRAP_LINEWAR
26
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfLineTempRecover
CL
Line module temperature fault recovered
TRAP_LINECLR
27
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfPower
MJ
Power fault occurred
TRAP_SYSMJR
28
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfPowerRecover
CL
Power fault recovered
TRAP_SYSCLR
29
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfFan
MJ
Fan fault occurred
TRAP_SYSMJR
30
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfFanRecover
CL
Fan fault recovered
TRAP_SYSCLR
31
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfExternalMemory
WR
External memory fault occurred
TRAP_SYSWAR
32
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfExternalMemoryRecover
CL
External memory fault recovered
TRAP_SYSCLR
33
cx26-mbhTrapSystemSwitch
IF
Line module state transition
TRAP_SYSINF
34
cx26-mbhTrapSystemLine
IF
Line module state transition
TRAP_SYSINF
35
cx26-mbhTrapSystemPower
IF
Power module state transition
TRAP_SYSINF
36
cx26-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpStatus
IF
SFP module state transition notification
TRAP_PORTINF
37
cx26-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpRxError
MJ
Receive optical disconnection error detection

notification
TRAP_PORTMJR
13-44
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
38
cx26-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpRxErrorRecover
CL
Receive optical disconnection error recovery

notification
TRAP_PORTCLR
39
cx26-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpTxError
MJ
Transmit optical disconnection error detection

notification
TRAP_PORTMJR
40
cx26-mbhTrapInterfaceSfpTxErrorRecover
CL
Transmit optical disconnection error recovery

notification
TRAP_PORTCLR
41
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedLevel
MJ
Ether OAM Unexpected MEG Level detection

notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
42
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedLevelRecov
er
CL
Ether OAM Unexpected MEG Level recovery

notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
43
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamMismerge
MJ
Ether OAM Mismerge detection notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
44
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamMismergeRecover
CL
Ether OAM Mismerge recovery notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
45
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedMep
MJ
Ether OAM Unexpected MEP detection

notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
46
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedMepRecove
r
CL
Ether OAM Unexpected MEP recovery

notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
47
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedPeriod
MJ
Ether OAM Unexpected Period detection

notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
48
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamUnexpectedPeriodReco
ver
CL
Ether OAM Unexpected Period recovery

notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
49
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamLoc
MJ
Ether OAM LOC detection notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
50
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamLocRecover
CL
Ether OAM LOC recovery notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
51
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamRdi
MJ
Ether OAM RDI detection notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
52
cx26-mbhTrapEtherOamRdiRecover
CL
Ether OAM RDI recovery notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
53
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisDetect
MJ
End-to-End VP-AIS detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
54
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisRecover
CL
End-to-End VP-AIS recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
55
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisImmediateR
ecover
MN
End-to-End VP-AIS immediate recovery

detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
56
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiDetect
MJ
Segment VP-AIS detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
13-45
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
57
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisRecover
CL
Segment VP-AIS recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
58
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisImmediateR
ecover
MN
Segment VP-AIS immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
59
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiDetect
MJ
End-to-End VP-RDI detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
60
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiRecover
CL
End-to-End VP-RDI recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
61
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN
End-to-End VP-RDI immediate recovery

detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
62
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiDetect
MJ
Segment VP-RDI detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
63
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiRecover
CL
Segment VP-RDI recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
64
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN
Segment VP-RDI immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
65
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisDetect
MJ
End-to-End VC-AIS detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
66
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisRecover
CL
End-to-End VC-AIS recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
67
x26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisImmediateRe
cover
MN
End-to-End VC-AIS immediate recovery

detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
68
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisDetect
MJ
Segment VC-AIS detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
69
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisRecover
CL
Segment VC-AIS recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
70
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisImmediateR
ecover
MN
Segment VC-AIS immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
71
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiDetect
MJ
End-to-End VC-RDI detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
72
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiRecover
CL
End-to-End VC-RDI recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
73
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN
End-to-End VC-RD immediate recovery

detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
74
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiDetect
MJ
Segment VC-RDI detected
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
75
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiRecover
CL
Segment VC-RDI recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
76
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcRdiImmediateR
ecover
MN
Segment VC-RDI immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
77
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisGenerate
MJ
End-to-End VP-AIS transmitted
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
13-46
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
78
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4EndVpAisGenerateSto
p
MJ
End-to-End VP-AIS transmission stopped
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
79
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisGenerate
MJ
Segment VP-AIS transmitted
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
80
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF4SegVpAisGenerateSto
p
CL
Segment VP-AIS transmission stopped
TRAP_ROUTECLR
81
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisGenerate
MJ
End-to-End VC-AIS transmitted
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
82
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5EndVcAisGenerateSto
p
CL
End-to-End VC-AIS transmission stopped
TRAP_ROUTECLR
83
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisGenerate
MJ
Segment VC-AIS transmitted
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
84
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamF5SegVcAisGenerateSto
p
CL
Segment VC-AIS transmission stopped
TRAP_ROUTECLR
85
cx26-mbhTrapStpNewRootBridge
IF
New root switch detected
TRAP_ROUTEINF
86
cx26-mbhTrapStpTopologyChange
IF
Network topology change detected
TRAP_ROUTEINF
87
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusApsStateChange
IF
APS change notification
TRAP_PORTINF
88
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusApsNameChange
IF
APS name change notification
TRAP_PORTINF
89
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusPsbf
MJ
APS PSBF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
90
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusPsbfRecover
CL
APS PSBF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR.
91
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusCmf
MJ
APS CMF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
92
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusCmfRecover
CL
APS CMF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
93
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusFpf
MJ
APS FPF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
94
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusFpfRecover
CL
APS FPF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
95
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusTaf
MJ
APS TAF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
96
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusTafRecover
CL
APS TAF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
97
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusTdf
MJ
APS TDF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
98
cx26-mbhTrapAtmApsStatusTdfRecover
CL
APS TDF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
99
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosDetect
MJ
LOS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
100
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosRecover
CL
LOS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
13-47
syslog group
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
101
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LosImmediateR
ecover
MN
LOS immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
102
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofDetect
MJ
LOF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
103
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofRecover
CL
LOF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
104
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF1LofImmediateRe
cover
MN
LOF immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
105
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisDetect
MJ
MS-AIS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
106
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisRecover
CL
MS-AIS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
107
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsAisImmediate
Recover
MN
MS-AIS immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
108
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdDetect
MJ
MS-SD detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
109
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdRecover
CL
MS-SD recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
110
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsSdImmediate
Recover
MN
MS-SD immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
111
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiDetect
MJ
MS-RDI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
112
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiRecover
CL
MS-RDI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
113
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsRdiImmediat
eRecover
MN
MS-RDI immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
114
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrDetect
MJ
MS-ERR detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
115
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrRecover
CL
MS-ERR recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
116
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsErrImmediate
Recover
MN
MS-ERR immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
117
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiDetect
MJ
MS-REI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
118
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiRecover
CL
MS-REI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
119
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF2MsReiImmediat
eRecover
MN
MS-REI immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
120
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopDetect
MJ
LOP detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
121
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopRecover
CL
LOP recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
13-48
syslog group
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
122
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LopImmediateR
ecover
MN
LOP immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
123
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisDetect
MJ
P-AIS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
124
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisRecover
CL
P-AIS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
125
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3PAisImmediate
Recover
MN
P-AIS immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
126
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdDetect
MJ
LCD detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
127
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdRecover
CL
LCD recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
128
cx26-mbhTrapAtmOamStatusF3LcdImmediateR
ecover
MN
LCD immediate recovery detected
TRAP_ROUTEMNR
129
cx26-mbhTrapAtmLoopOverload
WR
Loopback cell discard notification
TRAP_LINEWAR
130
cx26-mbhTrapAtmLoopDetect
MJ
ATM loop guard detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
131
cx26-mbhTrapAtmLoopRecover
CL
ATM loop guard detection cleared
TRAP_PORTCLR
132
cx26-mbhTrapReferenceClockExternalStatusCh
ange
IF
External clock status change
TRAP_SYSINF
133
cx26-mbhTrapReferenceClockChange
IF
Reference clock change
TRAP_SYSINF
134
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsStatusChange
IF
EtherPS transmission path status change

notification
TRAP_ROUTEINF
135
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPmb
MJ
EtherPS transmission path status PMb

detection notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
136
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPmbRecover
CL
EtherPS transmission path status PMb recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

notification
137
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPma
MJ
EtherPS transmission path status PMa

138
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPmaRecover
CL
EtherPS transmission path status PMa recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

notification
139
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPmd
MJ
EtherPS transmission path status PMd

140
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPmdRecover
CL
EtherPS transmission path status PMd recovery TRAP_ROUTECLR

notification
13-49
syslog group
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
141
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPmr
MJ
EtherPS transmission path status PMr detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

notification
142
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectPmrRecover
CL
EtherPS transmission path status PMr recovery

notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
143
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectCm
MJ
EtherPS transmission path status CM detection

notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
144
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectCmRecover
CL
EtherPS transmission path status CM recovery

notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
145
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectNr
MJ
EtherPS transmission path status NRI detection TRAP_ROUTEMJR

notification
146
cx26-mbhTrapEtherPsDefectNrRecover
CL
EtherPS transmission path status NR recovery

notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
147
cx26-mbhTrapT1E1OamPortDetect
MJ
A line alarm for the TDMP/ATMP line module

occurred. (LOS/AIS/LOF/RAI)
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
148
cx26-mbhTrapT1E1OamPortRecover
CL
A line alarm for the TDMP/ATMP line module

recovered. (NORMAL)
TRAP_ROUTECLR
149
cx26-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunDetect
MJ
Reception amount of Ether frames to be carried

on T1/E1 frame for the TDMoP underrun
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
150
cx26-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunRecover
CL
Underrun reception amount of Ether frames to

be carried on T1/E1 frame for the TDMoP
recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
151
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchProcessor
CR
CPU fault occurred
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
152
cx26-mbhTrapFltInfSwitchProcessorRecover
CL
CPU fault recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
153
cx26-mbhTrapImaGroupTrafficDown
MJ
IMA group traffic state DOWN detection

notification
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
154
cx26-mbhTrapImaGroupTrafficDownRecover
CL
IMA group traffic state DOWN recovery

notification
TRAP_ROUTECLR
155
cx26-mbhTrapAtmKeepaliveF4StatusChange
IF
F4 loopback monitoring result change

notification
TRAP_ROUTEINF
156
cx26-mbhTrapAtmKeepaliveF5StatusChange
IF
F5 loopback monitoring result change

notification
TRAP_ROUTEINF
13-50
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
157
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsLosDetect
MJ
SECTION(RS) LOS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
158
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsLosRecover
CL
SECTION(RS) LOS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
159
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsLofDetect
MJ
SECTION(RS) LOF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
160
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsLofRecover
CL
SECTION(RS) LOF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
161
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsOofDetect
MJ
SECTION(RS) OOF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
162
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsOofRecover
CL
SECTION(RS) OOF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
163
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsTimDetect
MJ
SECTION(RS) RS-TIM detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
164
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsTimRecover
CL
SECTION(RS) RS-TIM recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
165
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsBipDetect
MJ
SECTION(RS) RS-BIP detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
166
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusRsBipRecover
CL
SECTION(RS) RS-BIP recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
167
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsAisDetect
MJ
LINE(MS) MS-AIS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
168
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsAisRecover
CL
LINE(MS) MS-AIS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
169
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsDegDetect
MJ
LINE(MS) MS-DEG detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
170
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsDegRecover
CL
LINE(MS) MS-DEG recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
171
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsExcDetect
MJ
LINE(MS) MS-EXC detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
172
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsExcRecover
CL
LINE(MS) MS-EXC recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
173
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsRdiDetect
MJ
LINE(MS) MS-RDI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
174
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsRdiRecover
CL
LINE(MS) MS-RDI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
175
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsReiDetect
MJ
LINE(MS) MS-REI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
176
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsReiRecover
CL
LINE(MS) MS-REI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
177
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsBipDetect
MJ
LINE(MS) MS-BIP detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
178
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusMsBipRecover
CL
LINE(MS) MS-BIP recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
179
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusAuAisDetect
MJ
High-order path AU-AIS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
180
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusAuAisRecover
CL
High-order path AU-AIS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
181
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusAuLopDetect
MJ
High-order path AU-LOP detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
182
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusAuLopRecover
CL
High-order path AU-LOP recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
13-51
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
183
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpTimDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-TIM detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
184
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpTimRecover
CL
High-order path HP-TIM recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
185
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpUneqDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-UNEQ detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
186
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpUneqRecover
CL
High-order path HP-UNEQ recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
187
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpPlmDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-PLM detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
188
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpPlmRecover
CL
High-order path HP-PLM recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
189
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpDegDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-DEG detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
190
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpDegRecover
CL
High-order path HP-DEG recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
191
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpExcDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-EXC detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
192
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpExcRecover
CL
High-order path HP-EXC recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
193
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpRdiDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-RDI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
194
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpRdiRecover
CL
High-order path HP-RDI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
195
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpReiDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-REI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
196
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpReiRecover
CL
High-order path HP-REI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
197
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpBipDetect
MJ
High-order path HP-BIP detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
198
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusHpBipRecover
CL
High-order path HP-BIP recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
199
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusTuAisDetect
MJ
Low-order path TU-AIS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
200
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusTuAisRecover
CL
Low-order path TU-AIS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
201
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusTuLopDetect
MJ
Low-order path TU-LOP detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
202
cx26-mbhTrapAtmAlarmStatusTuLopRecover
CL
Low-order path TU-LOP recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
203
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusTuLomDetect
MJ
Low-order path TU-LOM detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
204
cx26-mbhTrapAtmAlarmStatusTuLomRecover
CL
Low-order path TU-LOM recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
205
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpTimDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-TIM detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
206
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpTimRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-TIM recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
207
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpUneqDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-UNEQ detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
208
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpUneqRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-UNEQ recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
13-52
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
209
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpPlmDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-PLM detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
210
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpPlmRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-PLM recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
211
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpDegDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-DEG detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
212
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpDegRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-DEG recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
213
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpExcDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-EXC detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
214
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpExcRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-EXC recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
215
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpRdiDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-RDI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
216
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpRdiRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-RDI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
217
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpReiDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-REI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
218
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpReiRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-REI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
219
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpBipDetect
MJ
Low-order path LP-BIP detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
220
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusLpBipRecover
CL
Low-order path LP-BIP recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
221
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhAisDetect
MJ
PDH AIS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
222
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhAisRecover
CL
PDH AIS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
223
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhOofDetect
MJ
PDH LOF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
224
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhOofRecover
CL
PDH LOF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
225
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhRaiDetect
MJ
PDH RAI detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
226
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhRaiRecover
CL
PDH RAI recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
227
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhSefDetect
MJ
PDH SEF detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
228
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhSefRecover
CL
PDH SEF recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
229
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhFasDetect
MJ
PDH FAS detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
230
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhFasRecover
CL
PDH FAS recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
231
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhCrcDetect
MJ
PDH CRC detected
TRAP_PORTMJR
232
cx26-mbhTrapStmAlarmStatusPdhCrcRecover
CL
PDH CRC recovered
TRAP_PORTCLR
233
cx26-mbhTrapReferenceClockFreerun
IF
Reference clock status change (free run)
TRAP_SYSINF
234
cx26-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunStmDetect
MJ
Reception amount of Ether frames to be carried

on T1/E1 frame for the TDMoP underrun
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
13-53
Appendix
Specific
trap number
Trap name
Level
Description
syslog group
235
cx26-mbhTrapTdmBufferunderrunStmRecover
CL
Underrun reception amount of Ether frames to

be carried on T1/E1 frame for the TDMoP
recovered
TRAP_ROUTECLR
236
cx26-mbhTrapTdmT1E1AdaptiveClockStatusCh
ange
MJ
Adaptive Clock status change (TDMP)
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
237
cx26-mbhTrapTdmStmAdaptiveClockStatusCha
nge
CL
Adaptive Clock status change (TDMP155)
TRAP_ROUTECLR
238
cx26-mbhTrapCesopDeviceFaultDetect
WR
CESoP device fault occurred
TRAP_SYSWAR
239
cx26-mbhTrapCesopDeviceFaultRecover
CL
CESoP device fault recovered
TRAP_SYSCLR
240
cx26-mbhTrapEtherRingStatusChange
IF
Notification of an EtherRing transmission path

status change
TRAP_ROUTEINF
241
cx26-mbhTrapEtherRingDetectLoop
MJ

status loop detection
TRAP_ROUTEMJR
242
cx26-mbhTrapEtherRingDetectLoopRecover
CL

status loop recovery
TRAP_ROUTECLR
13-54
Appendix
Specific trap list
Output character string
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
15
IF TELNET LOGIN
(SWITCH#%d,TERMINAL:%s)
Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
telnet login
16
IF TELNET LOGOUT
Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
telnet logout
17
IF TELNET ACCESS DENIED

Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
telnet connection reject
18
IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR

(SWITCH#%d,TERMINAL:%s,EXECUTION
TERMINAL:%s)
Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
19
IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (SWITCH

STATUS CHANGED)
Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
telnet session clear due

to switch module state
transition
20
IF TELNET AUTO LOGOUT

Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
telnet timeout
21
IF TELNET LOGIN AUTHENTICATION FAILED

Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
telnet login failure five

times
22
IF TELNET LOGIN
(SWITCH#%d,TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s)
Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
telnet login (account

name login)
23
IF TELNET LOGOUT
Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
telnet logout (account

name login)
10
24
IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR

Switch module
(SWITCH#%d,TERMINAL:%s,USER:%s,EXECU number
TION TERMINAL:%s)
Additional
information 4
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
telnet session clear

(account name login)
(Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous message)
Clear session
entry terminal IP
address
13-55
Clear session
entry terminal
address
Description
telnet session clear
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
11
25
IF TELNET SESSION CLEAR (SWITCH

STATUS CHANGED)
Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
telnet session clear due

to switch module state
transition (account
name login)
12
26
IF TELNET AUTO LOGOUT

Switch module
number
Terminal IP
address
Terminal login
account name
telnet timeout (account

name login)
13
27
IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGIN
(SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Serial login
14
28
IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGOUT
(SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Serial logout
15
29
IF LOCAL-CONSOLE AUTO LOGOUT

(SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Serial timeout
16
30
AUTHENTICATION FAILED (SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Serial login failure five

times
17
31
(SWITCH#%d,USER:%s)
Switch module
number
Terminal login
account name
Serial login (account

name login)
18
32
IF LOCAL-CONSOLE LOGOUT
(SWITCH#%d,USER:%s)
Switch module
number
Terminal login
account name
Serial logout (account

name login)
19
33
IF LOCAL-CONSOLE AUTO LOGOUT

(SWITCH#%d,USER:%s)
Switch module
number
Terminal login
account name
Serial timeout (account

name login)
20
34
IF NTP SERVER ACCESS FAILED

(SWITCH#%d,PRIMARY:%s,SECONDARY:%s)
Switch module
number
Primary access
result
Secondary access NTP access result

result
NO ENTRY
NO ENTRY
NO MEMORY
NO MEMORY
BAD ARGUMENT
BAD ARGUMENT
DEVICE
DEVICE
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
SETTING ERROR SETTING ERROR
13-56
NO SERVER
NO SERVER
SOCKET ERROR
SOCKET ERROR
Description
Appendix
No.
Trap ID

Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
ADDRESS
ADDRESS
ALREADY IN USE ALREADY IN USE
BIND ERROR
BIND ERROR
IOCTL ERROR
IOCTL ERROR
TIMER ERROR
TIMER ERROR
SIGNAL ERROR
SIGNAL ERROR
SYNCHRONIZATI SYNCHRONIZATI
ON FAILED
ON FAILED
OTHER ERROR
OTHER ERROR
SUCCEEDED
21
35
IF NTP SERVER ACCESS SUCCEEDED

(SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
NTP access result

(success)
22
36
IF MESSAGE DISCARDED
(CAUSE:RESOURCE BUSY)
TRAP message discard

state
23
37
IF MESSAGE DISCARDED RECOVER
TRAP message discard

state
24
38
WR NETWORK OVERLOAD OUTBAND PORT

DOWN (SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Blocking due to network

overload
25
39
WR NETWORK OVERLOAD INBAND PORT

DOWN (SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Blocking due to network

overload
26
40
CL NETWORK OVERLOAD OUTBAND PORT

UP (SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Unblocking due to
network overload
recovery
27
41
CL NETWORK OVERLOAD INBAND PORT UP

(SWITCH#%d)
Switch module
number
Unblocking due to
network overload
recovery
28
42
IF RUNNING-CONFIG BACKUP FAILED

(CAUSE:%s)
Error cause
Periodical configuration
upload result
29
43
IF RUNNING-CONFIG BACKUP SUCCEEDED
Periodical configuration
upload result
13-57
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
30
44

IF EXTERNAL MEMORY STATUS CHANGED
(SWITCH#%d, STATUS:%s)
Additional
information 1
Switch module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
External memory state
UNMOUNTED
MOUNTED
FAULT
31
45
IF STP PROTOCOL MIGRATION

(%s/%d,VERSION:%s)
Line module
number
Port number
STP version
STP
RSTP
32
46
IF STP INVALID BPDU RECEIVED

(%s/%d,CAUSE:%s,DETAIL:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Detailed cause of
invalid BPDU
information
PROTOCOL_ID
Outputs when a port

receives an STP frame
from the remote side
during RSTP operation
Outputs the cause of
each invalid BPDU
detected on a port during
STP operation
BPDU_TYPE
TCN_LENGTH
RST_LENGTH
CONFIG_LENGT
H
MAX_AGE
FWD_DELAY
HELLO_TIME
Additional
information 4
Detailed value of
invalid BPDU
information
33
47
IF ALL CLEAR FDB TABLE ENTRY FINISHED
Posts that all FDB table

entries have been
cleared in response to a
request.
13-58
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
34
48

IF LAG PORT STATUS CHANGED
(%s/%d,INDEX:%d,STATUS:%s)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Port number
Additional
information 3
LAG index
Additional
information 4
ACTIVE
Description
Confirmation of recovery
in
reception/non-reception
of LAG:LACPDU
STANDBY
DOWN
BLOCK
35
49
IF LAG LOOPBACK DETECTED

(%s/%d,INDEX:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
LAG index
LAG: loopback detection

(supporting
dot3ad/passive mode)
36
50
CR SWITCH DEVICE FAULT

(SWITCH#%d, CATEGORY:%x, DETAIL:%x)
Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information
Posts that switch module

device fault has occurred
37
51
MJ SWITCH DEVICE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

38
52
MN SWITCH DEVICE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

39
53
WR SWITCH DEVICE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

40
54
CL SWITCH DEVICE FAULT

(SWITCH#%d, CATEGORY:%x)
Switch module
number
Fault category

device fault has
recovered
41
55

Switch module
number
Fault category

device fault has
recovered
42
56

Switch module
number
Fault category

device fault has
recovered
43
57

Switch module
number
Fault category

device fault has
recovered
13-59
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
44
58
CR SWITCH SOFTWARE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

software fault has
occurred
45
59
WR SWITCH SOFTWARE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

software fault has
occurred
46
60
CL SWITCH SOFTWARE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category

software fault has
recovered
47
61
CL SWITCH SOFTWARE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category

software fault has
recovered
48
62
CR SWITCH TEMPERATURE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

temperature fault has
occurred
49
63
WR SWITCH TEMPERATURE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

occurred
50
64
CL SWITCH TEMPERATURE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category

recovered
51
65
CL SWITCH TEMPERATURE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category

recovered
52
66
MJ SWITCH-LINE DEVICE FAULT

(SWITCH#%d, LINE:#%d, CATEGORY:%x,
DETAIL:%x)
Switch module
number
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
Detailed
information
13-60
Fault category
Description
Posts that switch-line

interface fault has
occurred
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
53
67

MN SWITCH-LINE DEVICE FAULT
(SWITCH#%d, LINE:#%d, CATEGORY:%x,
DETAIL:%x)
Additional
information 1
Switch module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Line module
number
Fault category

interface fault has
occurred
Additional
information 4
Detailed
information
54
68
CL SWITCH-LINE DEVICE FAULT

(SWITCH#%d, LINE:#%d, CATEGORY:%x)
Switch module
number
Line module
number
Fault category

interface fault has
recovered
55
69
CL SWITCH-LINE DEVICE FAULT

(SWITCH#%d, LINE:#%d, CATEGORY:%x)
Switch module
number
Line module
number
Fault category

interface fault has
recovered
56
70
CR LINE DEVICE FAULT

(LINE:#%d, CATEGORY:%x, DETAIL:%x)
Line module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information
Posts that line module

57
71
MJ LINE DEVICE FAULT

Line module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

58
72
MN LINE DEVICE FAULT

Line module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

59
73
WR LINE DEVICE FAULT

Line module
number
Fault category
Detailed
information

60
74
CL LINE DEVICE FAULT

(LINE:#%d, CATEGORY:%x)
Line module
number
Fault category

device fault has
recovered
61
75

Line module
number
Fault category

device fault has
recovered
63
77

Line module
number
Fault category

device fault has
recovered
64
78
CR LINE TEMPERATURE FAULT

Line module
number
Fault category
13-61
Detailed
information

occurred
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
65
79
WR LINE TEMPERATURE FAULT

Line module
number
Fault category
66
80
CL LINE TEMPERATURE FAULT

Line module
number
Fault category

recovered
67
81
CL LINE TEMPERATURE FAULT

Line module
number
Fault category

recovered
68
82
MJ POWER DEVICE FAULT

(POWER#%d, CATEGORY:%x, DETAIL:%x)
Power module
number
Fault category
69
83
CL POWER DEVICE FAULT

(POWER#%d, CATEGORY:%x)
Power module
number
Fault category
70
84
MJ FAN DEVICE FAULT

(FAN#%d, CATEGORY:%x, DETAIL:%x)
FAN number
Fault category
71
85
CL FAN DEVICE FAULT

(FAN#%d, CATEGORY:%x)
FAN number
Fault category
72
86
WR EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
73
87
CL EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE FAULT

Switch module
number
Fault category
206
CR SWITCH PROCESSOR FAULT

(SWITCH#%d,CATEGORY:%x,DETAIL:%x)
Switch module
number
Fault category
207
CL SWITCH PROCESSOR FAULT

(SWITCH#%d,CATEGORY:%x)
Switch module
number
Fault category
IF SWITCH STATUS CHANGED

(SWITCH#%d,STATUS:%s,CAUSE:%s)
Switch module
number
State after
transition
State transition
cause
UNMOUNTED
UNMOUNTED
INIT
INITIALIZING
74
75
76
88
13-62
Detailed
information
Detailed
information
Description
occurred
Posts that power module

fault has occurred
fault has recovered
Detailed
information
Posts that fan module

fault has occurred
Posts that fan module
fault has recovered
Detailed
information
Posts that external

memory device fault has
occurred
Posts that external
memory device fault has
recovered
Detailed
information
Posts that CPU fault has

occurred
Posts that CPU fault has
occurred
state has changed
Appendix
No.
Trap ID

Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
ACT
COMMAND WAS
INPUTTED
SBY
SELF SIDE
RESTARTED
OUS
COMMAND WAS
INPUTTED
ACT-FLT
SW-SEL PUSHED
SBY-FLT
OTHER SIDE
UNMOUNTED
Description
OTHER SIDE
FAULT
OCCURRED
SELF SIDE
RESTARTED
COMMAND WAS
INPUTTED
SELF SIDE
FAULT
OCCURRED
OTHER SIDE
UNMOUNTED
OTHER SIDE
RESTARTED
SELF SIDE
RESTARTED
AFTER SYNC
PREVIOUS SYNC
77
89
IF LINE STATUS CHANGED

(LINE#%d,STATUS:%s,CAUSE:%s)
Line module
number
13-63
State after
transition
State transition
cause
UNMOUNTED
NORMAL

state has changed
Appendix
No.
Trap ID

Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
INIT
COMMAND WAS
INPUTTED
ACT
FAULT
OCCURRED
SBY
INITIALIZING
FAULT
OUS
MOUNTED
MISMATCH
UNMOUNTED
ACT-FLT
LINK DOWN
SBY-FLT
LINK UP
Description
APS EVENT
ETHER PS
EVENT
78
90
IF POWER STATUS CHANGED

(POWER#%d,STATUS:%s)
Power module
number

state has changed
State after event

UNMOUNTED
MOUNTED
(NORMAL)
MOUNTED
(FAULT)
79
91
IF SFP STATUS CHANGED

(%s/%d,STATUS:%s)
Line module
number
Port number
UNMOUNTED
MOUNTED
Posts that SFP module

state has changed
80
92
MJ SFP RX ERROR (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
SFP optical input

fault
Posts that receive optical

disconnection error has
occurred
81
93
CL SFP RX ERROR (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
SFP optical input

fault recovery
Posts that receive optical

disconnection error has
recovered
13-64
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
82
94
MJ SFP TX ERROR (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
SFP optical output Posts that transmit

optical disconnection
fault
error has occurred
83
95
CL SFP TX ERROR (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
SFP optical output Posts that transmit

optical disconnection
fault recovery
error has recovered
84
96
MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL

DETECTED
(MEG INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG
LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d)
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEG Level
Trap to be transmitted
when MEP of EtherOAM
is transited to the
Unexpected MEG Level
state
MEG Level
recovers from the
state
MEG Level
is transited to the
Mismerge state
MEG Level
recovers from the
Mismerge state
MEG Level
is transited to the
Unexpected MEP state
85
86
87
88
97
98
99
100
CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL

DETECTED
MJ ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED
CL ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED

MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED

Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
Additional
information 4
MEG ID
13-65
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
Description
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
89
101

CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED
Additional
information 1
MEG Index
Additional
information 4
MEG ID
90
102
MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED MEG Index

Additional
information 4
MEG ID
91
92
93
94
95
103
104
105
106
107
CL ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED MEG Index

Additional
information 4
MJ ETHER LOC DETECTED
LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:%s,MEP ID:%d,PEER MEP
ID:%d)
CL ETHER LOC DETECTED
ID:%d)
MJ ETHER RDI DETECTED
ID:%d)
CL ETHER RDI DETECTED
ID:%d)
Additional
information 2
MEP Index
recovers from the
MEG Level
is transited to the
Unexpected Period state
MEG Level
recovers from the
MEG Level
is transited to the LOC
state
MEP ID
MEP Index
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
MEP Index
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
MEG ID
MEP ID
PeerMEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEG Level
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
MEG ID
MEP ID
PeerMEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEG Level
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
MEG ID
MEP ID
PeerMEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEG Level
Additional
information 4
MEG ID
13-66
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
Description
MEG Level
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 6
PeerMEP ID
recovers from the LOC
state
is transited to the RDI
state
recovers from the RDI
state
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
96
108
MJ END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VP-AIS is detected
97
109
CL END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
upon recovery from the
End-to-End VP-AIS state
98
110
MN END-TO-END VP-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VP-AIS immediate
recovery is detected
99
111
MJ SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VP-AIS
is detected
100
112
CL SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
Segment VP-AIS state
101
113
MN SEGMENT VP-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VP-AIS
immediate recovery is
detected
102
114
MJ END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VP-RDI is detected
103
115
CL END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
End-to-End VP-RDI
state
104
116
MN END-TO-END VP-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VP-RDI immediate
13-67
Description
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
105
117
MJ SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VP-RDI
is detected
106
118
CL SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
Segment VP-RDI state
107
119
MN SEGMENT VP-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VP-RDI
detected
108
120
MJ END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VC-AIS is detected
Port number
VPI value
End-to-End VC-AIS state
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VC-AIS immediate
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VC-AIS
is detected
Additional
information 4
Description
VCI value
109
121
CL END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
110
122
MN END-TO-END VC-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
111
123
MJ SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
13-68
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
112
124

CL SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED
(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Port number
VPI value
Segment VC-AIS state
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VC-AIS
detected
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VC-RDI is detected
Port number
VPI value
End-to-End VC-RDI
state
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VC-RDI immediate
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VC-RDI
is detected
Additional
information 4
VCI value
113
125
MN SEGMENT VC-AIS DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
114
126
MJ END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
115
127
CL END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
116
128
MN END-TO-END VC-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
117
129
MJ SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
13-69
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
118
130

CL SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED
(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Port number
VPI value
Segment VC-RDI state
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VC-RDI
detected
Additional
information 4
VCI value
119
131
MN SEGMENT VC-RDI DETECTED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
120
132
MJ END-TO-END VP-AIS GENERATED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VP-AIS is transmitted
121
133
CL END-TO-END VP-AIS GENERATED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VP-AIS transmission is
stopped
122
134
MJ SEGMENT VP-AIS GENERATED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VP-AIS
is transmitted
123
135
CL SEGMENT VP-AIS GENERATED

(%s/%d VPC:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VP-AIS
transmission is stopped
124
136
MJ END-TO-END VC-AIS GENERATED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VC-AIS is transmitted
Additional
information 4
VCI value
13-70
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
125
137

CL END-TO-END VC-AIS GENERATED
(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Port number
VPI value
when End-to-End
VC-AIS transmission is
stopped
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VC-AIS
is transmitted
Port number
VPI value
when Segment VC-AIS
transmission is stopped
Port number
Port roll state
When a new root switch

is detected, the MAC
address of the root
switch is output as well
Additional
information 4
VCI value
126
138
MJ SEGMENT VC-AIS GENERATED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
127
139
CL SEGMENT VC-AIS GENERATED

(%s/%d PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
128
13
IF STP NEW ROOT BRIDGE DETECTED

(%s/%d, STATUS:%s, BRIDGE:%s,CAUSE:%s)
Line module
number
ROOT PORT
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
Bridge identifier
New root switch

detection cause
(Switch priority +
MAC address)
BRIDGE
INITIALIZATION
PORT PRIORITY
CHANGE
BRIDGE
PRIORITY
CHANGE
13-71
Appendix
No.
Trap ID

Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
PORT INFO
AGING
PORT INFO
AGING
PORT
PATHCOST
CHANGE
PORT ADMIN
EDGE CHANGE
PORT DEFAULT
PATH COST
CHANGE
SPANTREE
DISABLE
129
14
IF STP TOPOLOGY CHANGED

(%s/%d, STATUS:%s)
Line module
number
Port number
Port state
DISCARDING
FORWARDING
1301
141
IF APS CHANGED (%s/%d,CAUSE:%s)
Line module
number
Port number
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY FS
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY SF
RCF
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY SD
RCD
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY WR
13-72
Outputs when a network

topology change is
detected
Outputs when APS
change has occurred
Appendix
No.
Trap ID

Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
NORMAL STATE
1302
141
Line module
number
Port number
STANDBY
TROUBLE IS
STEADY CF
STANDBY
TROUBLE IS
STEADY CD
STANDBY
TROUBLE IS
STEADY RCF
CHANGE IN
SWITCH BY SF
CF
CHANGE IN
SWITCH BY SD
SD
FORCED
SWITCH
SWITCH BY SF
CF
SWITCH BY SD
CD
SWITCH BY WR
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY SF
CF
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY SD
CD
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY WR
13-73
Outputs when APS

change has occurred
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
1303
141

Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Port number
Additional
information 3
PROTECTION
ACT NORMAL
STATE
PARTIAL DOWN
LOCKOUT OF
PROTECTION
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY
LKOP
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY
LKOP
MANUAL
SWITCH
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY MS
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY MS
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY FS
FORCED
SWITCH TO
WORK
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY FS
W
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY FS
W
13-74
Description
Outputs when APS
change has occurred
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
1304
141

Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Port number
Additional
information 3
SIGNAL FAIL
SWITCH TO
WORK
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY SF
W
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY SF
W
SWITCH BY SD
W
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY SD
W
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY SD
W
CHANGE IN
SWITCH BY SF
W
CHANGE IN
SWITCH BY SD
W
MANUAL
SWITCH TO
WORK
REMOTE
EXCHANGE
SWITCH BY MS
W
13-75
Description
Outputs when APS
change has occurred
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
1305
141
Line module
number
Port number
SIMULTANEOUS
SWITCH BY MS
W
Outputs when APS

change has occurred
131
142
IF APS NAME CHANGED (%s/%d,NAME:%s)
Line module
number
Port number
WORKING
Outputs when APS

name has changed
PROTECTION
Description
132
143
MJ APS PSBF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS

PSBF is detected
133
144
CL APS PSBF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS

PSBF is recovered
134
145
MJ APS CMF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS CMF

is detected
135
146
CL APS CMF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS CMF

is recovered
136
147
MJ APS FPF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS FPF

is detected
137
148
CL APS FPF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS FPF

is recovered
138
149
MJ APS TAF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS TAF

is detected
139
150
CL APS TAF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS TAF

is recovered
140
151
MJ APS TDF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS TDF

is detected
141
152
CL APS TDF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when APS TDF

is recovered
142
153
MJ LOS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOS is

detected
143
154
CL LOS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOS is

recovered
144
155
MN LOS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOS is

immediately recovered
13-76
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
145
156
MJ LOF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOF is

detected
146
157
CL LOF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOF is

recovered
147
158
MN LOF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOF is

148
159
MJ MS-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-AIS is

detected
149
160
CL MS-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
150
161
MN MS-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

151
162
MJ MS-SD DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-SD is

detected
152
163
CL MS-SD DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
153
164
MN MS-SD DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

154
165
MJ MS-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-RDI is

detected
155
166
CL MS-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
156
167
MN MS-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

157
168
MJ MS-ERR DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-ERR

is detected
158
169
CL MS-ERR DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-ERR

is recovered
159
170
MN MS-ERR DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-ERR

is immediately recovered
13-77
Description
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
160
171
MJ MS-REI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-REI is

detected
161
172
CL MS-REI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
162
173
MN MS-REI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

163
174
MJ LOP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOP is

detected
164
175
CL LOP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOP is

recovered
165
176
MN LOP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOP is

166
177
MJ P-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when P-AIS is

detected
167
178
CL P-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
168
179
MN P-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

169
180
MJ LCD DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LCD is

detected
170
181
CL LCD DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LCD is

recovered
171
182
MN LCD DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LCD is

172
183
WR ATM LOOPBACK CELL OVERLOAD (%s)
Line module
number
173
184
MJ ATM LOOP DETECTED

(%s/%d,PVC:%d/%d)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
13-78
Description
Outputs when loopback

cell is discarded
Port number
VPI value
Outputs when ATM loop

is detected
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
174
185

CL ATM LOOP DETECTED
(%s/%d,PVC:%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Port number
Additional
information 3
VPI value
Description
Outputs when ATM loop
detection is cleared
Additional
information 4
VCI value
175
176
186
187
IF EXTERNAL CLOCK STATUS CHANGED

(SWITCH#%d,STATUS:%s)
Switch module
number
IF REFERENCE-CLOCK CHANGED
(SWITCH#%d,PRIORITY:%d,STATUS:%s)
Switch module
number
NORMAL
Priority
188
(SWITCH#%d,%s)
178
189
IF ETHER PS STATUS CHANGED

(%s/%d,STATUS:%s,REQUEST:%s)
FAIL
NORMAL
STANDALONE
177
when an external clock
input status has changed
FAIL
ACQUIRING
when the reference clock
has changed
has changed
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
NO REQUEST
DO NOT REVERT LOCAL-DNR

REVERSE
REQUEST
Port number
13-79
LOCAL-NR
LOCAL-RR
LOCAL-EXER
EXERCISE
LOCAL-WTR
WAIT TO
RESTORE
LOCAL-MS
MANUAL
SWTICH
LOCAL-FS
SIGNAL FAIL
FOR WORKING
LOCAL-SF-P
FORCED
SWTICH
REMOTE-NR
LOCAL-SF
LOCAL-LO
when EtherPS status
has changed
Appendix
No.
Trap ID

Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
SIGNAL FAIL
FOR
PROTECTION
REMOTE-DNR
LOCKOUT OF
PROTECTION
REMOTE-EXER
Description
REMOTE-RR
REMOTE-WTR
REMOTE-MS
REMOTE-SF
REMOTE-FS
REMOTE-SF-P
REMOTE-LO
179
190
MJ ETHER PS PM-B DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMb is
detected
180
191
CL ETHER PS PM-B DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMb is
recovered
181
192
MJ ETHER PS PM-A DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMa is
detected
182
193
CL ETHER PS PM-A DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMa is
recovered
183
194
MJ ETHER PS PM-D DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMd is
detected
184
195
CL ETHER PS PM-D DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMd is
recovered
185
196
MJ ETHER PS PM-R DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMr is
detected
13-80
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
186
197
CL ETHER PS PM-R DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS PMr is
recovered
187
198
MJ ETHER PS CM DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS CM is
detected
188
199
CL ETHER PS CM DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS CM is
recovered
189
200
MJ ETHER PS NR DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS NR is
detected
190
201
CL ETHER PS NR DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
when EtherPS NR is
recovered
191
202
MJ LINK ALARM DETECTED (%s/%d

STATUS:%s)
Line module
number
Port number
Line alarm
occurrence status
Description
Outputs when line alarm

occurrence is detected
LOS
AIS
LOF
RAI
192
203
CL LINK ALARM DETECTED

(%s/%d,STATUS:%s)
Line module
number
Port number
Line alarm
occurrence status
Outputs when line alarm

occurrence is recovered
NORMAL
193
204
MJ TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED

(%s/%d,GROUP:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Group number
Outputs when Buffer

Underground has
occurred
194
205
CL TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED

(%s/%d,GROUP:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Group number
Outputs when Buffer

Underrun is recovered
13-81
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
195
208
MJ IMA GROUP TRAFFIC DOWN DETECTED

(INDEX:%d)
IMA group number

(1-48)
Outputs when traffic

down of IMA group has
occurred
196
209
CL IMA GROUP TRAFFIC DOWN DETECTED

(INDEX:%d)
IMA group number

(1-48)
Outputs when traffic

down of IMA group is
recovered
197
210
IF ATM KEEPALIVE STATUS CHANGE

(%s/%d,VPC:%d,%s)
Line module
number
Description
Port number
VPI
Outputs when the F4

loopback monitoring
result has changed
Port number
VPI
Outputs when the F5

loopback monitoring
result has changed
Additional
information 4
SUCCESS
FAIL
198
211
IF ATM KEEPALIVE STATUS CHANGE

(%s/%d,PVC:%d/%d,%s)
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
VCI value
Additional
information 5
SUCCESS
FAIL
199
212
MJ STM LOS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOS is

detected
200
213
CL STM LOS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOS is

recovered
201
214
MJ STM LOF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOF is

detected
202
215
CL STM LOF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when LOF is

recovered
203
216
MJ STM OOF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when OOF is

detected
13-82
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
204
217
CL STM OOF DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when OOF is

recovered
205
218
MJ STM RS-TIM DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when RS-TIM is

detected
206
219
CL STM RS-TIM DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when RS-TIM is

recovered
207
220
MJ STM RS-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when RS-BIP is

detected
208
221
CL STM RS-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when RS-BIP is

recovered
209
222
MJ STM MS-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

detected
210
223
CL STM MS-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
211
224
MJ STM MS-DEG DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-DEG

is detected
212
225
CL STM MS-DEG DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-DEG

is recovered
213
226
MJ STM MS-EXC DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-EXC

is detected
214
227
CL STM MS-EXC DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-EXC

is recovered
215
228
MJ STM MS-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

detected
216
229
CL STM MS-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
217
230
MJ STM MS-REI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

detected
218
231
CL STM MS-REI DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number

recovered
13-83
Description
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
219
232
MJ STM MS-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-BIP is

detected
220
233
CL STM MS-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Outputs when MS-BIP is

recovered
221
234
MJ STM AU-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when AU-AIS is

detected
222
235
CL STM AU-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when AU-AIS is

recovered
223
236
MJ STM AU-LOP DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when AU-LOP

is detected
224
237
CL STM AU-LOP DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when AU-LOP

is recovered
225
238
MJ STM HP-TIM DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-TIM is

detected
226
239
CL STM HP-TIM DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-TIM is

recovered
227
240
MJ STM HP-UNEQ DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-UNEQ

is detected
228
241
CL STM HP-UNEQ DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-UNEQ

is recovered
229
242
MJ STM HP-PLM DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-PLM

is detected
230
243
CL STM HP-PLM DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-PLM

is recovered
231
244
MJ STM HP-DEG DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-DEG

is detected
232
245
MJ STM HP-DEG DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-DEG

is recovered
233
246
MJ STM HP-EXC DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-EXC

is detected
13-84
Description
Appendix
Additional
information 1
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
No.
Trap ID
234
247
CL STM HP-EXC DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-EXC

is recovered
235
248
MJ STM HP-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-RDI is

detected
236
249
CL STM HP-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-RDI is

recovered
237
250
MJ STM HP-REI DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-REI is

detected
238
251
CL STM HP-REI DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-REI is

recovered
239
252
MJ STM HP-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-BIP is

detected
240
253
CL STM HP-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d %d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when HP-BIP is

recovered
241
254
MJ STM TU-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when TU-AIS is

detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when TU-AIS is

recovered
Additional
information 4
242
255
STM CL TU-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Additional
information 4
Lower path
number
13-85
Description
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
243
256

MJ STM TU-LOP DETECTED (%s/%d
%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
244
257
CL STM TU-LOP DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
258
MJ STM TU-LOM DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
259
CL STM TU-LOM DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
247
260
MJ STM LP-TIM DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
13-86
Outputs when TU-LOP is

detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when TU-LOP is

recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when TU-LOM

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when TU-LOM

is recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-TIM is

detected
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Lower path
number
Higher path
number
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Description
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Additional
information 4
246
Port number
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
245
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
248
261

CL STM LP-TIM DETECTED (%s/%d
%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
249
262
MJ STM LP-UNEQ DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
263
CL STM LP-UNEQ DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
264
MJ STM LP-PLM DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
252
265
CL STM LP-PLM DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
13-87
Outputs when LP-TIM is

recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-UNEQ

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-UNEQ

is recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-PLM is

detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-PLM is

recovered
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Lower path
number
Higher path
number
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Description
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Additional
information 4
251
Port number
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
250
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
253
266

MJ STM LP-DEG DETECTED (%s/%d
%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
254
267
CL STM LP-DEG DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
268
MJ STM LP-EXC DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
269
CL STM LP-EXC DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
257
270
MJ STM LP-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
13-88
Outputs when LP-DEG

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-DEG

is recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-EXC is

detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-EXC is

recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-RDI is

detected
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Lower path
number
Higher path
number
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Description
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Additional
information 4
256
Port number
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
255
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
258
271

CL STM LP-RDI DETECTED (%s/%d
%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
259
272
MJ STM LP-REI DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
273
CL STM LP-REI DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
274
MJ STM LP-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
262
275
CL STM LP-BIP DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
13-89
Outputs when LP-RDI is

recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-REI is

detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-REI is

recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-BIP is

detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when LP-BIP is

recovered
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Lower path
number
Higher path
number
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Description
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Additional
information 4
261
Port number
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
260
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
263
276

MJ STM PDH-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d
%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
264
277
CL STM PDH-AIS DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
278
MJ STM PDH-OOF DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
279
CL STM PDH-OOF DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
267
280
MJ STM PDH-RAI DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
13-90
Outputs when PDH AIS

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH AIS

is recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH OOF

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH OOF

is recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH RAI

is detected
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Lower path
number
Higher path
number
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Description
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Additional
information 4
266
Port number
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
265
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
268
281

CL STM PDH-RAI DETECTED (%s/%d
%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
269
282
MJ STM PDH-SEF DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
283
CL STM PDH-SEF DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
284
MJ STM PDH-FAS DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
272
285
CL STM PDH-FAS DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
13-91
Outputs when PDH RAI

is recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH SEF

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH SEF

is recovered
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH FAS

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH FAS

is recovered
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Lower path
number
Higher path
number
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Description
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Additional
information 4
271
Port number
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
270
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
273
286

MJ STM PDH-CRC DETECTED (%s/%d
%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 4
274
287
CL STM PDH-CRC DETECTED (%s/%d

%d/%d/%d)
Additional
information 2
Port number
Logical port
number
Line module
number
Port number
Logical port
number
275
188
(SWITCH#%d,%s)
Switch module
number
STANDALONE
276
288
MJ TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED

(%s/%d,LOGICAL
PORT:%d/%d/%d,GROUP:%d)
Line module
number
Port number
277
289
CL TDMOP BUFFER UNDERRUN DETECTED

(%s/%d,LOGICAL
PORT:%d/%d/%d,GROUP:%d)
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH CRC

is detected
Higher path
number
Outputs when PDH CRC

is recovered
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 5
has changed to free run
Higher path
number
Logical port
number
Group number
Line module
number
Port number
Higher path
number
Lower path
number
13-92
Additional
information 5
Logical port
number
Outputs when a buffer

underrun has occurred
Additional
information 6
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Description
Additional
information 5
Lower path
number
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 6
Group number
Outputs when a buffer

underrun is recovered
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
278
290

IF ADAPTIVE-CLOCK STATUS CHANGED
(%s/%d,GROUP:%d,STATUS:%s)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Port number
Group number
Outputs when the

adaptive clock state has
changed
Port number
Higher path
number
Outputs when the

adaptive clock state has
changed
Additional
information 4
Adaptive clock
status
NOT-RUNNING
FREERUN
HOLDOVER
ACQUIRING
ACQUIRED
279
291
IF ADAPTIVE-CLOCK STATUS CHANGED

(%s/%d,LOGICAL
PORT:%d/%d/%d,GROUP:%d,STATUS:%s)
Line module
number
Additional information 4
Lower path
number
Additional
information 7
Adaptive clock
status
NOT-RUNNING
FREERUN
HOLDOVER
ACQUIRING
ACQUIRED
13-93
Logical port
number
Group number
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
280
292
281
282
283
284
293
294
295
296

MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL
DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP
INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:0x%x,MEP
ID:%d)
CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEG LEVEL

DETECTED (MEG INDEX:%d,MEP
INDEX:%d,MEG LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:0x%x,MEP
ID:%d)
MJ ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG

INDEX:%d,MEP INDEX:%d,MEG
LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:0x%x,MEP ID:%d)
CL ETHER MISMERGE DETECTED (MEG

MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED

Additional
information 1
MEG Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 2
MEP Index
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
Additional
information 4
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEG ID
13-94
recovers from the
state
(MEG ID: Hex. display is
supported)
MEG Level
has transited to the
Mismerge state
supported)
MEG Level
recovers from the
Mismerge state
supported)
MEG Level
supported)
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
Additional
information 4
MEG Level
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
Additional
information 4
state
supported)
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
Description
MEG Level
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
285
297

CL ETHER UNEXPECTED MEP DETECTED
Additional
information 1
MEG Index
Additional
information 4
MEG ID
286
298
MJ ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED MEG Index

Additional
information 4
MEG ID
287
288
289
299
300
301
CL ETHER UNEXPECTED PERIOD DETECTED MEG Index

Additional
information 4
MJ ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG

LEVEL:%d,MEG ID:0x%x,MEP ID:%d,PEER
MEP ID:%d)
CL ETHER LOC DETECTED (MEG

MEP ID:%d)
Additional
information 2
MEP Index
recovers from the
supported)
MEG Level
supported)
MEG Level
recovers from the
supported)
MEG Level
has transited to the LOC
state
supported)
MEP ID
MEP Index
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
MEP Index
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 6
MEG ID
MEP ID
PeerMEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEG Level
Additional
information 4
MEG ID
13-95
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
Description
MEG Level
Additional
information 5
MEG ID
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 3
Additional
information 6
PeerMEP ID
recovers from the LOC
state
supported)
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
290
302
291
303

MJ ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG
MEP ID:%d)
CL ETHER RDI DETECTED (MEG

MEP ID:%d)
Additional
information 1
MEG Index
Additional
information 4
Additional
information 2
MEP Index
Additional
information 5
Additional
information 3
MEG Level
Additional
information 6
MEG ID
MEP ID
PeerMEP ID
MEG Index
MEP Index
MEG Level
Additional
information 4
MEG ID
Additional
information 5
MEP ID
Additional
information 6
PeerMEP ID
Description
has transited to the RDI
state
supported)
recovers from the RDI
state
supported)
292
304
WR CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (%s)
Line module
number
Outputs when a CESoP

device fault has
occurred
293
304
CL CESOP DEVICE FAULT DETECTED (%s)
Line module
number
Outputs when a CESoP

device fault is recovered
294
305
IF ETHER RING STATUS CHANGED

(INDEX:%d,%s/%d,PORT STATUS:%s,NODE
STATUS:%s,REQUEST:%s)
Ring Index
Additional
information 4
Line module
number
Additional
information 5
Port number
Additional
information 6
Port status
Node status
Status change
trigger
RPL-BLOCK
IDLE
LOCAL-NR
FORWARD
PROTECTION
LOCAL-SF
SIGNAL-FAIL
REMOTE-NR
RECOVERY
REMOTE-SF
Outputs when the port

status or node status in
the ring is changed
WAIT-TO-RESTO
RE
295
306
MJ ETHER RING LOOP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Line module
number
13-96
Port number
Outputs when a loop of

the control frame occurs
at the port in the ring
Appendix
No.
Trap ID
296
307

CL ETHER RING LOOP DETECTED (%s/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
13-97
Additional
information 2
Port number
Additional
information 3
Description
Outputs when a loop of
the control frame has
recovered at the port in
the ring
Appendix
Standard trap list
Trap
ID
1
Standard
trap MIB
coldStart

(Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous
message)
IF DEFAULT CONFIG BOOT UP
(SWITCH#%d,CAUSE:%s)
Additional
information 1
Switch module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Completion of restart by
default config
Restart cause
POWER-ON
RESET
(When default config is

used, SNMP is not set.
So, coldStart-Trap is not
issued with this device.)
COMMAND
RESET
PROCESSOR
FAILURE
MATE
COMMAND
RESET
2
warmStart
IF RECOVER CONFIG BOOT UP

(SWITCH#%d,CAUSE:%s,BOOT:%s)
Switch module
number
Restart cause
Target of recover
config
POWER-ON
RESET
FLASH MEMORY
COMMAND
RESET
EXTERNAL
MEMORY
PROCESSOR
FAILURE
PART OF
EXTERNAL
MEMORY
MATE
COMMAND
RESET
COPY ACT
CONFIG
Completion of restart by
recover config
EMERGENCY
CONFIG
3
linkDown
MJ LINK DOWN (%s/%d)
Line module
number
LINE#1-12
13-98
Port number
Port Link Down of a line

module
Appendix
Trap
ID
4

(Trap/syslog/local log/autonomous
message)
Standard
trap MIB
linkUp
CL LINK UP 10M HALF DUPLEX (%s/%d)
Additional
information 1
Line module
number
Additional
information 2
Additional
information 3
Description
Port number
Port Link Up of a line

module
Port number

module
Port number

module
Port number

module
Port number

module
Port number

module
LINE#1-12
5
linkUp
CL LINK UP 10M FULL DUPLEX (%s/%d)
Line module
number
LINE#1-12
linkUp
CL LINK UP 100M HALF DUPLEX (%s/%d) Line module

number
LINE#1-12
linkUp
CL LINK UP 100M FULL DUPLEX (%s/%d) Line module

number
LINE#1-12
linkUp
CL LINK UP 1000M FULL DUPLEX

(%s/%d)
Line module
number
LINE#1-12
linkUp
CL LINK UP 155M (%s/%d)
Line module
number
LINE#1-12
10
linkUp
CL LINK UP T1 1.5M (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
LINE#1-12
11
linkUp
CL LINK UP E1 2.048M (%s/%d)
Line module
number
Port number
LINE#1-12
12
authentica-
Access from an
unauthorized manager
tionFailure
(Only the SNMP trap is

issued.)
13-99
Appendix
Group correspondence table for each specific trap
No. 1 to 10 (1/2)
No.
10
Trap-ID
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Specific trap number
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-100
Appendix
No. 1 to 10 (2/2)
No.
10
Trap-ID
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the specific trap list.
13-101
Appendix
No. 11 to 20 (1/2)
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Trap-ID
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
z
z
z
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-102
z
z
z
z
Appendix
No. 11 to 20 (2/2)
No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Trap-ID
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-103
Appendix
No. 21 to 30 (1/2)
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Trap-ID
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
z
z
fault
spantree
13-104
Appendix
No. 21 to 30 (2/2)
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Trap-ID
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-105
Appendix
No. 31 to 40 (1/2)
No.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Trap-ID
140
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
15
15

private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
z
z
z
z
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-106
Appendix
No. 31 to 40 (2/2)
No.
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Trap-ID
140
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
15
15

ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-107
Appendix
No. 41 to 50 (1/2)
No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Trap-ID
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
16
16
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
z
z
warning
-
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
minor
mc
13-108
Appendix
No. 41 to 50 (2/2)
No.
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Trap-ID
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
16
16
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-109
Appendix
No. 51 to 60 (1/2)
No.
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Trap ID
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
23
23
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
z
z
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-110
z
z
z
z
Appendix
No. 51 to 60 (2/2)
No.
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Trap ID
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
23
23
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-111
Appendix
No. 61 to 70 (1/2)
No.
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Trap ID
74
75
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
24
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
28
29
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-112
Appendix
No. 61 to 70 (2/2)
No.
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Trap ID
74
75
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
24
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
28
29
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-113
Appendix
No. 71 to 80 (1/2)
No.
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Trap ID
85
86
87
206
207
88
89
90
91
92
30
31
32
151
152
33
34
35
36
37
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-114
Appendix
No. 71 to 80 (2/2)
No.
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Trap ID
85
86
87
206
207
88
89
90
91
92
30
31
32
151
152
33
34
35
36
37
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-115
Appendix
No. 81 to 90 (1/2)
No.
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
Trap ID
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-116
Appendix
No. 81 to 90 (2/2)
No.
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
Trap ID
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
z
z
z
z
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-117
Appendix
No. 91 to 100 (1/2)
No.
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Trap ID
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-118
Appendix
No. 91 to 100 (2/2)
No.
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
Trap ID
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
z
z
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-119
Appendix
No. 101 to 110 (1/2)
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Trap ID
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
z
z
aps
atm-loop
z
z
f5-generation
loopback-atm
13-120
z
z
z
z
Appendix
No. 101 to 110 (2/2)
No.
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
Trap ID
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-121
Appendix
No. 111 to 120 (1/2)
No.
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
Trap ID
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
z
z
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
z
z
z
z
z
13-122
Appendix
No. 111 to 120 (2/2)
No.
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
Trap ID
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-123
Appendix
No. 121 to 130 (1/2)
No.
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
Trap ID
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
13
14
141
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
z
z
13-124
Appendix
No. 121 to 130 (2/2)
No.
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
Trap ID
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
13
14
141
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-125
Appendix
No. 131 to 140 (1/2)
No.
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
Trap ID
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-126
Appendix
No. 131 to 140 (2/2)
No.
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
Trap ID
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-127
Appendix
No. 141 to 150 (1/2)
No.
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
Trap ID
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-128
Appendix
No. 141 to 150 (2/2)
No.
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
Trap ID
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-129
Appendix
No. 151 to 160 (1/2)
No.
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
Trap ID
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
z
z
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-130
Appendix
No. 151 to 160 (2/2)
No.
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
Trap ID
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-131
Appendix
No. 161 to 170 (1/2)
No.
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
Trap ID
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-132
Appendix
No. 161 to 170 (2/2)
No.
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
Trap ID
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-133
Appendix
No. 171 to 180 (1/2)
No.
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
Trap ID
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-134
Appendix
No. 171 to 180 (2/2)
No.
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
Trap ID
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-135
Appendix
No. 181 to 190 (1/2)
No.
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
Trap ID
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-136
Appendix
No. 181 to 190 (2/2)
No.
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
Trap ID
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-137
Appendix
No. 191 to 200 (1/2)
No.
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
Trap ID
202
203
204
205
208
209
210
211
212
213
147
148
149
150
153
154
155
156
157
158
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-138
Appendix
No. 191 to 200 (2/2)
No.
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
Trap ID
202
203
204
205
208
209
210
211
212
213
147
148
149
150
153
154
155
156
157
158
z
z
z
z
z
z
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-139
Appendix
No. 201 to 210 (1/2)
No.
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
Trap ID
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-140
Appendix
No. 201 to 210 (2/2)
No.
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
Trap ID
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
z
z
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-141
Appendix
No. 211 to 220 (1/2)
No.
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
Trap ID
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-142
Appendix
No. 211 to 220 (2/2)
No.
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
Trap ID
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-143
Appendix
No. 221 to 230 (1/2)
No.
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
Trap ID
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-144
Appendix
No. 221 to 230 (2/2)
No.
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
Trap ID
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-145
Appendix
No. 231 to 240 (1/2)
No.
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
Trap ID
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-146
Appendix
No. 231 to 240 (2/2)
No.
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
Trap ID
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-147
Appendix
No. 241 to 250 (1/2)
No.
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
Trap ID
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-148
Appendix
No. 241 to 250 (2/2)
No.
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
Trap ID
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-149
Appendix
No. 251 to 260 (1/2)
No.
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
Trap ID
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-150
Appendix
No. 251 to 260 (2/2)
No.
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
Trap ID
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-151
Appendix
No. 261 to 270 (1/2)
No.
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
Trap ID
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-152
Appendix
No. 261 to 270 (2/2)
No.
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
Trap ID
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
z
z
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-153
Appendix
No. 271 to 280 (1/2)
No.
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
Trap ID
284
285
286
287
188
288
289
290
291
292
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
41
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-154
Appendix
No. 271 to 280 (2/2)
No.
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
Trap ID
284
285
286
287
188
288
289
290
291
292
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
41
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-155
Appendix
No. 281 to 290 (1/2)
No.
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
Trap ID
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-156
Appendix
No. 281 to 290 (2/2)
No.
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
Trap ID
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
z
z
z
z
z
z
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-157
Appendix
No. 291 to 295 (1/2)
No.
291
292
293
294
295
296
Trap ID
303
304
305
306
307
308
52
238
239
240
241
242
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-158
Appendix
No. 291 to 295 (2/2)
No.
291
292
293
294
295
296
Trap ID
303
304
305
306
307
308
52
238
239
240
241
242
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
13-159
Appendix
Group correspondence table for each standard trap
No. 1 to 10 (1/2)
No.
10
Trap ID
10
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
z
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-160
Appendix
No. 1 to 10 (2/2)
No.
10
Trap ID
10
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the standard trap list.
13-161
Appendix
No. 11 to 12 (1/2)
No.
11
12
Trap ID
11
12
z
private-trap
1-99
trap-id
1-999
line
1-12
port
1/1-12/8
link
1/1-12/8
fault
critical
major
minor
warning
mc
sfp
ntp
telnet
connect
fail
maintenance-network
out-band
in-band
backup
external-memory
status
fault
spantree
fdb
aggregation
atm-oam
detect-f1f3
detect-f4f5
detect-minor
f5-generation
loopback-atm
aps
atm-loop
13-162
Appendix
No. 11 to 12 (2/2)
No.
11
12
Trap ID
11
12
ether-oam
unexpect-level
mismerge
unexpect-mep
unexpect-period
loc
rdi
ether-ps
t1e1
tdmop
ima
stm
detect-rs
detect-ms
detect-hp
detect-lp
detect-pdh
ether-ring
* The numbers in the "No." row match those on the standard trap list.
13-163
Appendix
13.5 Counter Monitoring Condition List

Port counter collection details
The port counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Indicates the type of a counter.
Octs/Pkts/Events:
Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O), the number of frames (F), or the number of event
occurrences (Ev).
Bit width:
Indicates the bit width of a counter.
Error:
Indicates whether error octets/frames are included in a counter value.

included.)
Function details:
Indicates the function details of a counter.
("E" is indicated when error octets/frames are
Collection port counter

Octs /
Pkts /
Events
Bit width
Error
RxOctets
64bit
Number of receive octets
RxPkts
32bit
Number of receive frames
RxDropEvents
Ev
32bit
RxErrors
32bit
RxUndersizePkts
32bit
RxFragments
32bit
Number of receive error frames with data consisting of less than 64 octets
Rx64octs
32bit
Number of receive frames with data consisting of 64 octets
Rx65to127octs
32bit
Number of receive frames with data consisting of 65 to 127 octets
Rx128to255octs
32bit
Rx256to511octs
32bit
Type
Function details
Number of discard event occurrences

E
Number of receive error frames

Number of receive frames with data consisting of less than 64 octets
13-164
Appendix
Collection port counter
Octs /
Pkts /
Events
Bit width
Error
Rx512to1023octs
32bit
Rx1024to1518octs
32bit
RxCRCErrors
32bit
Number of receive frames including an alignment/FCS error
RxOversizePkts
32bit
RxJabbers
32bit
RxUcastPkts
64bit
Number of receive unicast frames
RxMcastPkts
64bit
Number of receive multicast frames
RxBcastPkts
64bit
Number of receive broadcast frames
RxUnsupp
32bit
Number of unsupported frames received and discarded
RxDiscards
32bit
Number of frames discarded for a cause other than a receive error
TxOctets
64bit
Number of transmit octets
TxPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames
TxErrors
32bit
Number of transmit error frames
TxCollisions
32bit
TxUcastPkts
64bit
Number of transmit unicast frames
TxMcastPkts
64bit
Number of transmit multicast frames
TxBcastPkts
64bit
Number of transmit broadcast frames
TxUnsupp
32bit
Number of unsupported transmit frames discarded
TxDiscards
32bit
Number of frames discarded for a cause other than a transmit error
Type
Function details
Number of receive frames with data consisting of 1519 octets or more

E
Number of receive error frames with data consisting of 1519 octets or more
Number of collision frames at transmission time
13-165
Appendix
Discard counter collection details
The discard counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Octs/Pkts:
Indicates whether the unit of a counter is the number of octets (O) or the number of frames (F).
Bit width:
Error:

included.)
Priority unit:
Indicates whether priority unit indication is supported.
Function details:
("P" is indicated when priority unit indication is supported.)
Collection discard counter

Type
Octs /
Pkts
Bit
Error
width
Function details
Priority
unit
RxUnknownTPID
32bit
Number of unsupported TPID receive frames discarded or receive frames of Ethertype

0x8100 at a portbase Untag setting port that are discarded (*1)
RxUnknownVID
32bit
Number of unsupported VID frames received and discarded (*1)
TxUnknownTPID
32bit
Number of unsupported TPID transmit frames discarded or transmit frames of Ethertype

0x8100 at a portbase Untag setting port that are discarded (*2)
RxDisInQoSPkts
32bit
Number of receive frames discarded by the maximum band limitation function for input
ports (*3)
RxDisOutQoSPkts
32bit
Number of receive frames discarded by the output side fairness control function (*3)
RxFilterPkts
32bit
Number of receive frames discarded by the input filtering function (*3)
32bit
Number of receive frames discarded by the MAC address learning count limitation
function (*3)
32bit
Number of receive frames discarded by the input side fairness control function * Not
supported (*3)
TxDisOutQoSPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames discarded by the maximum band limitation function for output
ports (*4)
TxFilterPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames discarded by the output filtering function (*4)
RxMACLimitPkts
RxFairnessPkts
13-166
Appendix
Collection discard counter
Type
Octs /
Pkts
Bit
Error
width
Function details
Priority
unit
RxDropPkts
32bit
Number of receive frames discarded by L2SW as invalid frames (*3)
TxDropPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames discarded by L2SW before accumulated in transmit queue

(*4)
TxQueue0DisPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames with no class discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue1DisPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames of Class-D discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue2DisPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames of Class-C discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue3DisPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames of Class-B discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue4DisPkts
32bit
Number of transmit frames of Class-A discarded by L2SW (*4)
TxQueue5DisPkts
32bit
Number of control frame transmit frames from the CPU that are discarded by L2SW (*4)
*1
*2
*3
*4
Counter included in "RxUnsupp" indicated in the port counter collection details

Counter included in "TxUnsupp" indicated in the port counter collection details
Counter included in "RxDiscards" indicated in the port counter collection details
Counter included in "TxDiscards" indicated in the port counter collection details
13-167
Appendix
VLAN counter collection details
The VLAN counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Octs/Pkts:
Bit width:
Error:

included.)
Priority unit:
Indicates whether priority unit indication is supported.
Card support:
Indicates the type of a counter supported only with the PV version/GbE-MUX card.
(PV is indicated for support by the PV version only. GM is indicated for support by the GbE-MUX card only.
PV/ATM is indicated for support by the PV version/ATM card only. PV/GM/ATM is indicated for support by the PV
version/GbE-MUX/ATM card only.)
Function details:
("P" is indicated when priority unit indication is supported.)
Collection VLAN counter

Bit
width
RxOcts
64bit
RxUcastOcts
64bit
Number of receive unicast octets
RxMcastOcts
64bit
Number of receive multicast octets
RxBcastOcts
64bit
Number of receive broadcast octets
RxDisInQoSOcts
64bit
RxDisOutQoSOcts
64bit
RxFilterOcts
64bit
PV/GM/ATM
RxMACLimitOcts
64bit
PV/ATM
Error
Priority
unit
Function details
Octs /
Pkts
Type
Card
support
PV/GM
Number of receive octets discarded by the maximum band limitation function

for input ports
Number of receive octets discarded by the output side fairness control
function
Number of receive octets discarded by the input filtering function
Number of receive octets discarded by the MAC address learning count
limitation function
13-168
Appendix
Collection VLAN counter
Bit
width
RxPkts
64bit
RxUcastPkts
64bit
Number of receive unicast frames
RxMcastPkts
64bit
Number of receive multicast frames
RxBcastPkts
64bit
Number of receive broadcast frames
RxDisInQoSPkts
64bit
RxDisOutQoSPkts
64bit
RxFilterPkts
64bit
PV/GM/ATM
RxMACLimitPkts
64bit
PV/ATM
RxFairnessPkts
64bit
GM
TxOcts
64bit
TxUcastOcts
64bit
Number of transmit unicast octets
TxMcastOcts
64bit
Number of transmit multicast octets
TxBcastOcts
64bit
Number of transmit broadcast octets
TxDisOutQoSOcts
64bit
PV/GM
Number of transmit octets discarded by the maximum band limitation function

for output ports
TxFilterOcts
64bit
PV/ATM
Number of transmit octets discarded by the output filtering function
TxPkts
64bit
TxUcastPkts
64bit
Number of transmit unicast frames
TxMcastPkts
64bit
Number of transmit multicast frames
TxBcastPkts
64bit
Number of transmit broadcast frames
TxDisOutQoSPkts
64bit
PV/GM
Number of transmit frames discarded by the maximum band limitation

function for output ports
TxFilterPkts
64bit
PV/ATM
Number of transmit frames discarded by the output filtering function
Error
Priority
unit
Function details
Octs /
Pkts
Type
Card
support
PV/GM
Number of receive frames discarded by the maximum band limitation

function for input ports
Number of receive frames discarded by the output side fairness control
function
Number of receive frames discarded by the input filtering function
Number of receive frames discarded by the MAC address learning count
limitation function
Number of receive frames discarded by the input side fairness control
function Not supported
13-169
Appendix
PVC byte/frame counter collection details
The PVC byte/frame counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Octs/Pkts:
Bit width:
Interval
:Indicates an update interval used when a PVC counter is registered/when no PVC counter is registered.
Function details:

Collection counter
Function details
Octs /
Pkts
Bit
width
Interval
RxOcts
64bit
1sec/30sec
RxPkts
64bit
1sec/30sec
RxErrors
64bit
1sec/30sec
Number of frames discarded at reception time
TxOcts
64bit
1sec/30sec
TxPkts
64bit
1sec/30sec
Type
13-170
Appendix
Cell counter collection details
The cell counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Bit width:
Interval:
Indicates an update interval used when a PVC counter is registered/when no PVC counter is registered.
update operation is performed, "-" is indicated.
Function details:

Collection counter
Function details
Bit
width
Interval
RxCells
64bit
1sec/1sec
Number of receive cells
RxErrors
64bit
1sec/1sec
Number of cells discarded at reception time
RxF4SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive segment VP-AIS cell
RxF4SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive segment VP-RDI cell
RxF4SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive F4 level segment loopback cell
RxF4SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive F4 level segment other cell
RxF4EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive end VP-AIS cell
RxF4EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive end VP-RDI cell
RxF4EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive F4 level end loopback cell
RxF4EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive F4 level end other cell
RxF5SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive segment VC-AIS cell
RxF5SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive segment VC-RDI cell
RxF5SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive end VC-AIS cell
RxF5EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Receive end VC-RDI cell
Type
13-171
When no
Appendix
Collection counter
Function details
Bit
width
Interval
RxF5EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxCells
64bit
1sec/1sec
Number of transmit cells
TXErrors
64bit
1sec/1sec
Number of cells discarded at transmission time
TxF4SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit segment VP-AIS cell
TxF4SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit segment VP-RDI cell
TxF4SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit F4 level segment loopback cell
TxF4SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit end VP-AIS cell
TxF4EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit end VP-RDI cell
TxF4EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit VP-loopback cell-end
TxF4EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit F4 level end other cell
TxF5SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit segment VC-AIS cell
TxF5SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit segment VC-RDI cell
TxF5SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit F5 level segment other cell
TxF5EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit end VC-AIS cell
TxF5EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit end VC-RDI cell
TxF5EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
Transmit F5 level end loopback cell
TxF5EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
Type
13-172
Appendix
F4 unit cell counter collection details
The F4 unit cell counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Bit width:
Interval:
Function details:

Collection counter
Function details
Bit
width
Interval
RxCells
64bit
1sec/30sec
RxErrors
64bit
1sec/30sec
RxF4SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Type
13-173
When no
Appendix
Collection counter
Function details
Bit
width
Interval
RxF5EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxCells
64bit
1sec/30sec
TXErrors
64bit
1sec/30sec
TxF4SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
Type
13-174
Appendix
F5 unit cell counter collection details
The F5 unit cell counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Bit width:
Interval:
Function details:

Collection counter
Function details
Bit
width
Interval
RxCells
64bit
1sec/30sec
RxErrors
64bit
1sec/30sec
RxF4SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF4EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
Type
13-175
When no
Appendix
Collection counter
Function details
Bit
width
Interval
RxF5EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
RxF5EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxCells
64bit
1sec/30sec
TxErrors
64bit
1sec/30sec
TxF4SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF4EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5SegOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndAIS
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndRDI
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndLoopback
64bit
12sec/ -
TxF5EndOthers
64bit
12sec/ -
Type
13-176
Appendix
IMA per-port cell counter collection details
The IMA per-port cell counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Bit width:
Interval
Function details:

Collection counter
Function details
Bit
width
Interval
RxCells
64bit
1sec/1sec
RxErrors
64bit
1sec/1sec
TxCells
64bit
1sec/1sec
TxErrors
64bit
-/-
Type
13-177
When no
Appendix
EtherOAM frame counter collection details
The EtherOAM frame counters collect the following counter information:
Type:
Bit width:
Function details:

Collection counter
Type
Function details
Bit width
RxPkts
32bit
TxPkts
32bit
13-178
Appendix
13.6 Command Error List

This section describes the indications and causes of command execution errors together with corrective actions required for those errors.
Indication
No.
Cause
Corrective action
00002
Invalid parameter %s
The specified parameter is invalid.
Check the input command then reenter the

command.
00003
Invalid parameter %s : %s
The specified parameter is invalid. (A reason is

provided.)
Check the input command then reenter the

command.
00004
Specified %s has already been registered.
The setting has already been registered.
Check the state of setting.
00005
%s is not registered.
The setting is not registered yet.
00006
Invalid number of parameters
There is an excess/shortage in the parameters

needed for processing.
Check the specified parameters then reenter the

command.
00007
Specified %s is being used by %s.
The specified device is being used by another

interface, protocol, or the like.
Check the device state.
00008
Too many %s entries
There are too many registered entries.
00009
%s does not exist.
The indicated item is missing.
00010
Non-supported parameter %s.
The parameter is not supported.
Check the specified parameter then reenter the

command.
00011
Command forcibly stopped.
The command was terminated forcibly.
Reenter the command after a while.
00012
Command conflict occurred.
A command conflict occurred.
00013
%s is already in service.
Service is in progress.
00014
%s is already out of service.
Service is stopped.
00015
%s start-up failed.
Service activation failed.
00016
Already %s
The indicated state is already set.
00017
Line type does not match to the specified

line module.
The type of the specified line module is not

matched.
13-179
Appendix
Indication
No.
Cause
Corrective action
00018
Device failure
A device fault occurred.
00019
Resource temporarily unavailable
Resources for command execution are

insufficient.
00020
Resource temporarily unavailable %s %s

%s %s %s
Resources for command execution are

insufficient. (with additional information)
00021
%s failed.
An attempt for the indicated operation failed.
00022
This command cannot be executed on the

specified line.
This command cannot be executed with the

specified line.
00023
Non-supported command
This command is not supported presently.
This command is reserved for a future function.

This command cannot be used presently.
00024
The reading of %s went wrong.
The reading of the operation data failed.
00025
The writing of %s went wrong.
The setting of the operation data failed.
00026
Timeout occurred during command

execution.
A time-out occurred during command execution.
00027
Data communication error
An internal communication error occurred.
00028
Because %s has already been registered,

%s cannot be enabled. %s
The indicated item has already been registered,

so that it cannot be enabled.
00029

%s cannot be disabled. %s

so that it cannot be disabled.
00030

%s cannot be changed. %s

so that it cannot be changed.
00031
Because %s has not been registered, %s

cannot be changed. %s
The indicated item has not been registered, so

that it cannot be changed.
00032
%s cannot be changed. %s
The indicated item cannot be changed.
00033
Specified %s is invalid %s. %s
An invalid parameter was set.
00034
Command not found.
An invalid command was entered.
Enter the correct command.
00035
Parameter is invalid.
An invalid parameter was entered.
Enter the correct parameter.
00036
Buffer temporarily busy
Resources for command analysis are insufficient. Reenter the command after a while.
00037
Specified command conflicted : %s
A contention occurred. "%s" processing is

being executed.
13-180
Reexecute after a while.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
00038
The other switch module is being

initialized.
Command execution is disabled because the

other system is being initialized.
Reexecute after initialization of the other system.
00039
Data communication error between switch

modules (Switch#x)
An error occurred in communication between

switches.
Check the switch state.
00040
The specified command cannot be

executed due to the mixed configuration of
duplicated lines.
An intermingling duplicate line configuration is

Cancel the intermingling duplicate line
employed, so that the specified command cannot configuration then enter the command.
be executed.
00041
The complemented command line is over

600 characters.
A command entered in the complemented

command line is longer than 600 characters.
Divide the command into multiple commands so

that the command line is not exceeded.
00042
The total size of the specified VPI and VCI

is over 16 bits.
The total size of the specified VPI and VCI is

longer than 16 bits.
Check the specified VPI and VCI then register

the VPI and VCI again.
00043
The order of input commands is not

correct in the safety mode.
The command entry order in the safety mode is

incorrect.
Check whether the command entry order is

correct.
00044
Change settings cannot be done for the

safety mode.
Change settings cannot be made in the safety

mode.
Check whether the entered command specifies a

change setting.
00045
The line mode is not set.
The line mode is not set.
00046
Because the APS mode is enabled, the

specified command cannot be executed.
Because the APS mode is enabled, the specified

command cannot be executed.
Disable the APS mode before execution.
00047
Specified %s is not installed.
Specified device is not installed.
00048
Because Ether-PS mode is enabled, the

higher numbered slot cannot be specified.
Because the EtherPS mode is enabled, the

higher numbered slot cannot be executed.
Enter the command with the lower numbered slot

specified.
00049

lower numbered slot and higher numbered
slot cannot be specified at the same time.
Because EtherPS mode is enabled, the lower

numbered slot and higher numbered slot cannot
be specified at the same time.
Enter the command without the lower numbered

slot and higher numbered slot simultaneously
specified.
00050
When Ether-PS mode is enabled, the

same VLAN number cannot be assigned
to the lower numbered slot and higher
numbered slot at the same time.
When EtherPS mode is enabled, the same VLAN Enter the command so that different VLAN
number cannot be assigned to the lower
numbers are assigned to the lower numbered
numbered slot and higher numbered slot at the
slot and higher numbered slot.
same time.
00051
Because running-configuration has been

entered for the higher numbered slot, this
mode cannot be configured.
Because the configuration has already been

entered for the higher numbered slot of the
specified line module, this mode cannot be
configured.
13-181
Delete the configuration of the higher numbered

slot before execution.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
00052

Because EtherPS mode is enabled, the specified Disable the EtherPS mode before execution.
00053
Because line mode of the specified line

modules does not match, the specified
Because GbE line mode is included in the

specified line modules, this command cannot be
specified.
Enter the command without including GbE line

mode in the specified line modules.
00054
VPI registered with VP connection cannot

be specified with F5 setting.
VPI registered with VP connection cannot be

specified with F5 setting.
Specify PVC connection with F4 setting.
00055
VPI registered with VC connection cannot

be specified with F4 setting.
VPI registered with VC connection cannot be

specified with F4 setting.
Specify PVC connection with F5 setting.
00056
Invalid parameter is specified for VPI that

is registered with VP connection.
Invalid parameter is specified for VPI that is

registered with VP connection.
Check the entered command line.
00057
PVC name registered for VP connection

PVC name registered for VP connection cannot

be specified.
Enter F5 level specification.
00058
Invalid parameter is specified for VCI that

is registered with VC connection.
Invalid parameter is specified for VCI that is

registered with VC connection.
00059
PVC name registered for VC connection

PVC name registered for VC connection cannot

be specified.
Enter F4 level specification.
01000
Invalid password
The entered password is incorrect.
Reexecute the command and enter the correct

password.
01001
The password you entered does not

match. Try again.
A new password does not match.

password.
01002
Password is too short - must be at least 4

characters.
The password is too short.
Enter a password consisting of 4 characters or

more.
01003
Password is too long - must be less than

16 characters.
The password is too long.
Enter a password consisting of 16 characters or

less.
01004
Password contains some of unusable

characters.
The password includes unusable characters.
For a password character string, two-octet codes

and control codes must not be used.
password.
01005
Because the number of accounts reaches

the maximum value, this setting cannot be
made.
Accounts as many as the maximum allowable

number of accounts are registered, so that
execution is disabled.
Check the number of registered accounts.
13-182
Appendix
Indication
No.
Cause
Corrective action
01006
The account which has not been

registered is specified.
An account not registered is specified.
Check the account registration status.
01007
This account cannot be deleted.
The default account cannot be deleted.
Specify another account.
01008
Because login is done with the account

name, mode shift cannot be carried out.
Login is performed using an account name, so

that mode shifting is disabled.
Check the authority of the account.
01009
Since there is a session in maintenance

mode, mode shift cannot be carried out.
There is a session in the maintenance mode, so

that mode shifting is disabled.
Check whether there is another session in the

maintenance mode.
02201
%s transmission failed.
virtual-ping could not be executed.
Check the network setting and configuration.
02202
Hardware address not resolved.
A hardware address could not be acquired.
Check the network setting and configuration.
02203
Status mismatch : %s
virtual-ping is not executable.
Check whether virtual-ping is executed in

another session.
02204
The combination of specified parameters

%s and %s is not an effective setting.
The specified combination of parameters is not a

valid setting.
02205
Specified network address cannot be used

for %s.
The specified network address cannot be used.
Check the specified network address.
02206
Start date and end date are the same must be different dates.
When setting daylight saving time, the same

date, or the same week/day of week/month,
cannot be specified for start and end dates or
weeks.
Enter a different date, week, day of week or

month for start and end date/week of daylight
saving time.
02300
Command with invalid parameter in

downloaded configuration : %s.
The downloaded configuration includes a

command with an invalid parameter.
Check the contents of the configuration to be

downloaded.
02301
Because command execution error

occurred in downloaded configuration, the
entire configuration was discarded. : %s.
First Error : %s.
A command execution error occurred in the

downloaded configuration, so that the entire
configuration was discarded.

downloaded.
02302
FTP %s failed.
ftp upload/download operation failed.
Check the state of the ftp server.
02303
Failed in writing to FRAM
An attempt to write to FRAM failed.
Replace the device.
02304
No data in downloaded file.
The downloaded file includes no data.
Check the contents of the file to be downloaded.
02305
Invalid characters in downloaded

configuration
The downloaded configuration includes invalid

characters.

downloaded.
13-183
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
02306
File size is over the maximum size.
The downloaded file is larger than the maximum

allowable size.
Check the size of the file to be downloaded.
02308

executed on the present status.
In the current status, the specified command

cannot be executed.
Check the state of UGSW.
02309
The specified file to be downloaded is not

appropriate.
The downloaded file is not proper.
Check whether the file to be downloaded

matches the command.
02310
FPGA update failed.
An attempt to update FPGA failed.
Check the installation of the line module.
02311
An attempt to open a file in the

external-memory failed.
An attempt to open a file in the external memory

failed.
Check the specified parameter, the directory

structure of the external memory, and file status.
02312
An attempt to read a file in the

An attempt to read a file in the external memory

failed.
Check the status of the file in the external

memory.
02313
An attempt to write to a file in the

An attempt to write to a file in the external

memory failed.
Check the status of the file in the external

memory.
02314
The configuration data setting is failed

because the specified FTP server does
not support necessary command.
The ftp server does not support a necessary

command, so that an attempt to reflect the entire
configuration failed.
Use an ftp server conforming to RFC-1123.
02315
External-memory %s failed.
Data transfer from the external memory failed.
Check the status of the external memory.
02400
Specified name has already been used by

%s.
The specified name is already used as a file

name/directory name.
Use a new name.
02401
Desired deletion directory is not empty.
The directory to be deleted contains a directory

or file.
Check the deleted to be deleted directory.
02402
The length of the name of %s is over the

range.
The length of the indicated name exceeds the

allowable range.
Check the length of the entered name or path.
02403
Access to the external-memory failed. %s

%s
An attempt to access the external memory failed.
Check the external memory and entered

parameter.
03000
Because %s is specified, the ACT switch

module cannot be reset via the SBY
switch module.
The ACT system cannot be reset via the SBY

system.
To reset the ACT system, reset must be done on

the local system.
03001
Because the status of SBY switch module

is not UNMOUNT or OUS, the ACT switch
module cannot be reset.
The ACT system cannot be reset when the SBY

system is not installed or is in other than OUS
state.
Reset the ACT system when the other system is

not installed or is in the OUS state.
13-184
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
03002
Because the line module is in service, the

line module cannot be reset.
The line module is in service, so that the line

module cannot be reset.
Place the line module in the OUS state before

resetting the line module.
03003
The backup software does not exist.
When there is no backup plane, backup plane

specification is disabled.
Check whether there is a backup plane.
03004
Self switch module cannot be set to out of

service.
The local system cannot be placed in the OUS

state.
Check whether an attempt is made to place the

local system in the OUS state.
03005
Because the type of the specified line

module is GbE, this setting cannot be
made for LINE#1/#2.
GbE cannot be set for slot numbers 1 and 2.
Check whether GbE is specified for slot number

1 and 2.
03006
Because running-configuration has

already been registered to the specified
line module, the Line type cannot be
changed.
Because configuration is already entered for the

specified line module, the type cannot be
changed.
Check whether running-configuration is already

entered for the specified line module.
03014
Because the other switch module is writing The other system cannot be reset during writing
to FRAM, the other switch module cannot
to FRAM.
be reset.
Check whether the other system is executing an

FRAM write command. If no FRAM write
command is being executed, autonomous FRAM
write operation is being performed. Reenter the
command after a while.
03015
GbE-MUX cannot be set for LINE#1/#2.
GbE-MUX cannot be set for slot numbers 1 and

2.
Check whether GbE-MUX is set for slot number

1 and 2.
03016
ATM cannot be set for LINE#1/#2.
ATM cannot be set for slot numbers 1 and 2.
Check whether ATM is set for slot number 1 and

2.
03017
The command cannot be executed other

than the ACT switch module.
The command cannot be executed on a system

other than the ACT system.
Execute the command on the ACT system.
03019
Invalid parameter %s. Please specify the

value in multiples of 500 msec.
The specified parameter is not a multiple of

500msec.
Specify the parameter in a multiple of 500msec.
03020

module is FE, this setting cannot be
executed for LINE#5-#12.
FE cannot be set to slot numbers 5 to 12.
Check if FE is specified for slots 5 to 12.
03021

module is FX, this setting cannot be
executed for LINE#5-#12.
FX cannot be set to slot numbers 5 to 12.
Check if FX is specified for slots 5 to 12.
13-185
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
03022
Because the related configuration setting

exists, this command cannot be executed.
Because the related configuration setting exists,

this command cannot be executed.
03200
Invalid switch module status. Please check The state of the switch module is invalid. Check Check the state of the switch module.
redundancy status of the switch module.
the state of the switch module.
03201
Communication error occurred between

switch modules.
An error occurred in communication between

switches.
Check the state of the switch modules and

whether a fault has occurred.
04100
Because the line module is not dual mode,

port admin cannot be set.
The specified line module is not placed in the

redundant operation mode, so that "port admin"
cannot be set.
Check whether the specified line module is

placed in the redundant operation mode.
04102
Since fault has occurred in the specified

line module, port unblocking cannot be
made.
The specified line module is faulty, so that port

unblocking is disabled.
Check the fault data and port data of the

specified line.
04200
Because MC management for the

specified port is in disabled mode, the
Because MC management for the specified port

is placed in the disable mode, the specified
Check whether MC management for the

specified port is placed in the enable mode.
04201
Because loopback test is being performed, A loopback test is being conducted, so that the
the specified command cannot be
executed.
Terminate the loopback test.
04300
The index of a non-registered filtering

profile cannot be deleted.
The index of a filtering profile not registered

cannot be deleted.
Check the registered profiles.
04301
Since the specified setting has already

been made for another index, this
registration cannot be processed for the
same profile.
Because of registration already done with

another index, this profile does not allow
registration.
04302
The filtering profile is not registered.
The filtering profile is not registered.
Check the filtering information.
04303
Since all indexes are registered, this

filtering profile does not allow registration.
Because all indexes are registered, this filtering

profile does not allow registration.
Check the filtering profiles then set it with an

index specified.
04304
The number of mapped filtering profiles

exceeds the limit value. Please input the
number of mapped filtering profiles within
20000 for a switch.
No more than 20000 filtering profiles may be

mapped.
Ensure that the number of mapped filtering

profiles does not exceed 20000 for each device.
13-186
Corrective action
Delete the related configuration setting and set
the default value.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
04305
Since all-VLAN-ID registration has been

made on the port, the specific VLAN ID or
VLAN Name cannot be registered.
For a port specified with an ALL VLAN ID, the

set/clear command cannot be executed
individually.
Execute the clear command with an ALL VLAN

ID specified then set a VLAN ID individually.
04309
Since the specific VLAN ID has been

registered, the all-VLAN-ID registration
cannot be made.
For a port specified with an individual VLAN ID,

the set/clear command with an ALL VLAN ID
specified cannot be executed.
After executing the VLAN clear command, set an

ALL VLAN ID.
04406
The number of the registered VLAN

counters exceeds the maximum
registration number for the short cycle or
long cycle for each system, or exceeds the
maximum registration number for each
port or slot.
The number of registered VLAN counters

exceeds the maximum number of registered
short-cycle VLAN counters per device or
registered long-cycle VLAN counters per device
or the maximum number of registered VLAN
counters per port or per slot.
Check the maximum number of registered

short-cycle VLAN counters per device and the
number of registered long-cycle VLAN counters
per device and ensure that each of the maximum
numbers of registered VLAN counters is not
exceeded.
04407
The VLAN counters of the same VLAN ID

cannot be registered in the GbE-MUX
module.
VLAN counters of the same VLAN-ID may not be In the same GbE-MUX line module, register a
registered in the same GbE-MUX line module.
VLAN counter of a different VLAN-ID.
05000

value in multiples of 25 Kbps.
A band control value that is not a multiple of 25

kbps may not be entered.
Enter a band control value that is a multiple of 25

kbps.
05001
The rate value for the specified VLAN ID

or VLAN Name is not set.
For the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name, band

control is not set.
Set band control for the specified VLAN ID or

VLAN name beforehand.
05005
The number of entries exceeds the limit

value. Please set the number of entries
within %s for a FE port.
No more VLAN-by-VLAN band control entries

than a certain limit may be registered per FE
port.
Ensure that the number of band control entries

set on a VLAN-by-VLAN basis does not exceed
a certain limit per FE port.
05006
The number of entries exceeds the limit

value. Please set the number of entries
within %s for a GbE port.

than a certain limit may be registered per GbE
port.

a certain limit per GbE port.
05008
Non-supported command in %s mode.

Please check the available command.
This command cannot be executed in the current

QoS mode.
Change the QoS mode or use a command that

supports the current QoS mode.
05010

value in multiples of 1000 Kbps.
A maximum band limitation value that is not a

multiple of 1000 kbps may not be entered.
Enter a maximum band limitation value that is a

multiple of 1000 kbps.
05012
The rate value for the specified

Remaining-VLAN is not set.
Band control is not set for the specified

Remaining-VLAN.
Set band control for the Remaining-VLAN of the

specified port beforehand.
05013
The same priority value cannot be

specified twice in priority assignment.
In priority specification for each class, no

duplicate value may be specified.
Specify priority values again.
13-187
Corrective action
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
05014
Priority value must be specified for at least

1 class. "none" cannot be specified for all
classes.
Specification of None for all classes is not

allowed.
Specify a priority value for at least one class.
05015
Since the specified setting has already

been made for another index, this
registration cannot be processed for the
same CoS profile.
Because of registration already done with

another index, this CoS profile does not allow
registration.
05016
Since VLAN is registered,

Remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted.
The VLAN is registered, so that the

Remaining-VLAN cannot be deleted.
Check information about the VLAN registered

with the specified port.
05017
Since the rate value has been specified

with %s mode, the specified command
cannot be executed in %s mode.
Execution is disabled in a mode other than the

one specified with band control.
Check the band setting of the specified VLAN.
05018
The index of a non-registered CoS profile

cannot be deleted.
The index of a CoS profile not registered cannot

be deleted.
05019

executed in the present engine mode of
QoS.
Execution is disabled in the current QoS engine

mode.
Check the QoS engine mode.
05021
When the separate mode or separate-red

mode is not specified, %s cannot be
specified in priority mapping.
If the separate mode or separate-red mode is not For specification based on priority mapping,
specified, specification based on priority mapping specify the separate mode or separate-red
is not allowed.
mode.
05022
When broadcast and multicast are

specified for multiple classes, both
broadcast and multicast must not be
specified for the same class.
When broadcast/multicast is specified for

multiple classes, both broadcast and multicast
must not be specified for the same class.
Ensure that when broadcast/multicast is

specified for each class, both broadcast and
multicast are not specified for the same class.
05023
All priorities are not assigned to a class.
All priorities are not assigned to a class.
Specify all priorities for any of CLASS-A through

CLASS-D.
05025
The CoS profile is not registered.
The CoS profile is not registered.
Check CoS priority mapping information.
05026
Since all indexes are registered, this CoS

Because all indexes are registered, this CoS

Check the CoS profiles then set it with an index

specified.
05027
The number of mapped CoS profiles

exceeds the limit value. Please input the
number of mapped CoS profiles within
20000 for a switch.
No more than 20000 CoS profiles may be

mapped.
Ensure that the number of mapped CoS profiles

does not exceed 20000 for each device.
13-188
Corrective action
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
05028
Remaining-VLAN cannot be specified for

this line module.
For this line module, specification of

Remaining-VLAN is not allowed.
Check the line module information.
05029
Since the specific VLAN ID has been

registered on the port, all-VLAN-ID
registration cannot be made.
For a port specified with an individual VLAN ID,

the set/clear command with an ALL VLAN ID
specified cannot be executed.
After executing the clear command, set an ALL

VLAN ID.
05030
The specified VLAN ID or VLAN Name is

not registered with the GbE-MUX module.
The specified VLAN ID or VLAN name is not

registered with the GbE-MUX module.
Register VLAN on the GbE-MUX module.
05031
Since all-VLAN-ID registration has been

made on the port, the specific VLAN ID or
VLAN Name cannot be registered.
For a port specified with an ALL VLAN ID, the

set/clear command cannot be executed
individually.
Execute the clear command with an ALL VLAN

ID specified then set a VLAN ID individually.
05035
The total of burst values is over the

maximum burst value.
The total of allowable burst values exceeds the

maximum allowable priority control value.
Check the input side fairness control information.
05036
The class in input fairness needs to be set

to None, or the maximum burst value
needs to be set to 0.
The priority of a class in input side fairness

control needs to be set to None, or the allowable
burst value for multiport priority transmission
control needs to be set to 0.
When setting the allowable burst value for

multiport priority transmission control to 0, set a
class with None specified in priority setting for
input side fairness control.
For a class with None specified in priority setting
for input side fairness control, set the allowable
burst value for multiport priority transmission
control to 0.
05039
Since the MUX VLAN and the maximum

rate settings cannot be configured on the
same port, this setting cannot be made.
The MUX VLAN and input/output VLAN-by-VLAN Check that a MUX setting and an input/output
maximum band limitation may not be set with the VLAN-by-VLAN maximum band limitation setting
are not made with the same port then make
same port.
another setting.
05041
The minimum burst value is equal to or

greater than the maximum burst value.
The specified minimum allowable burst value is

equal to or greater than the upper limit, or the
specified maximum allowable burst value is
equal to or less than the lower limit.
Check the minimum allowable burst value or the

maximum allowable burst value.
05043
The setting cannot be executed in the

present maximum rate mode.
Registration is disabled because of the set

maximum band limitation mode.
Check the setting of the maximum band

operation mode.
05046
The separate-red mode cannot be set

when GbE-MUX is specified.
When the GbE-MUX line module type is

specified, specification of the separate-red mode
is not allowed.
When specifying the GbE-MUX line module type,

cancel the specification of the separate-red
mode.
13-189
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
05047
The multicast or broadcast-and-multicast

specification cannot be made when
GbE-MUX is specified.
When the GbE-MUX line module type is

specified, specification of multicast and
specification of both of broadcast and multicast
are not allowed.
When specifying the GbE-MUX line module type,

specify only priority or broadcast.
05048
The entry is exceeded. Please set the

entry within %s.

than a certain limit may be registered per
port/module.

a certain limit per port/module.
05049
The maximum rate value is registered for

the specified line module.
For the specified line module, the input/output

maximum band limitation function is registered.
Delete the input/output maximum band limitation

function.
05050
The total fairness rate value is more than

the rate value for the specified port.
The total of rate values set for output side

fairness control exceeds the band of the port.
Ensure that the total of rate values set for output

side fairness control does not exceed the band of
the port.
05054
Remaining-VLAN cannot be configured for

the higher numbered slot when Ether-PS
is enabled in the specified line module.
Remaining-VLAN cannot be configured for the

higher numbered port when EtherPS is enabled.
Disable the EtherPS mode before execution.
05055
Because Remaining-VLAN is not

registered for the lower numbered slot,
VLAN cannot be configured for the higher
numbered slot with Ether-PS enabled in
When Remaining-VLAN is not set for the lower

numbered port with EtherPS enabled, the
command cannot be executed for the higher
numbered port.
When the EtherPS mode is enabled, set the

maximum band limitation function command for
the lower numbered port first.
05056
Because VLAN is registered for the higher

numbered slot, Remaining-VLAN cannot
be deleted from the lower numbered slot
with Ether-PS enabled in the specified line
module.
When VLAN is set for the higher numbered port

with EtherPS enabled, Remaining-VLAN of the
lower numbered port cannot be deleted..
To delete the lower numbered side while keeping

the higher numbered side when the EtherPS
mode is enabled, delete the lower numbered
side only.
06201
Since Exterior VLAN ID and Interior VLAN

ID are the same, this setting cannot be
made.
Registration is disabled because the swap

source VLAN ID and swap destination VLAN ID
are the same.
Specify a swap source VLAN ID and a swap

destination VLAN ID that are different from each
other.
06202
Tagbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted.
The tagbase VLAN ID cannot be deleted.
Specify a VLAN ID set for VLAN tag swapping.
06203
Tagbased VLAN ID with VLAN tag

swapping set cannot be deleted.
The tagbase VLAN ID for which a swap

destination VLAN ID is set cannot be deleted.
Specify a tagbase VLAN ID.
To delete both lower and higher numbered sides,

delete the higher numbered side first, and then
delete the lower numbered side collectively.
13-190
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
06204
Portbased VLAN ID cannot be deleted.
The portbase VLAN ID cannot be deleted.
Specify a tagbase VLAN ID.
06205
Since the specified VLAN ID is the same

as the Exterior VLAN ID, the VLAN ID
cannot be registered.
The specified VLAN ID duplicates a swap

destination VLAN ID, so that the specified VLAN
ID cannot be registered.
Specify a tagbase VLAN ID that does not

duplicate a swap destination VLAN ID.
06206
Since the specified VLAN ID is the same

as the tagbased VLAN ID, the VLAN ID
The specified VLAN ID duplicates a tagbase

VLAN ID, so that the specified VLAN ID cannot
be registered.
Specify a tag swap destination VLAN ID that

does not duplicate a tagbase VLAN ID.
06207
The specified Exterior VLAN ID has

already been registered.
The specified swap destination VLAN ID is

already registered.
Specify another swap destination VLAN ID.
06208
Since the VLAN ID for the specified

Interior VLAN Name is 0, the VLAN ID
The VLAN ID corresponding to the specified

swap source VLAN name is 0, so that the VLAN
ID cannot be registered.
In VLAN tag swap setting, register a swap

source VLAN ID from 1 to 4094.
06209
Portbased VLAN registration cannot be

executed for GbE-MUX.
With a GbE-MUX line module, portbase VLAN

registration cannot be performed.
When setting a VLAN ID with a GbE-MUX line

module, set a tagbase VLAN ID.
06210
Since the number of VLAN IDs configured

on this port is over 32, this setting cannot
be made.
With a GbE-MUX line module, 32 or more

tagbase VLAN IDs may not be set for a port.
Delete a tagbase VLAN ID.
06211
Since the same VLAN ID must not be

duplicated in GbE-MUX, this setting
cannot be made.
Within the specified GbE-MUX line module, no

duplicate VLAN ID may be set.
Specify a different VLAN ID.
06212
The VLAN tag swap setting is not allowed

on multiple ports in GbE-MUX module.
With a GbE-MUX line module, VLAN tag swap

setting for multiple ports is not allowed.
Specify a single port for VLAN tag swap setting

with a GbE-MUX module.
06213
Since the specified VLAN ID has already

been registered as the Interior VLAN ID or
Interior swap VLAN ID, this setting cannot
be made.
The Interior VLAN ID to be set is already

registered as a tagbase VLAN ID or an Interior
VLAN ID for VLAN tag swap setting.
Before registration, delete the tagbase VLAN ID

or Interior VLAN ID for VLAN tag swap setting.
06216
Since this VLAN setting conflicts with the

other setting in the same GbE-MUX
module, this setting cannot be made.
When a pair of an Interior VLAN ID and an

Exterior VLAN ID is set within the same
GbE-MUX line module, the Interior VLAN ID or
Exterior VLAN ID is paired differently on another
port.
Before registration, delete the registered VLAN

IDs.
13-191
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
06217
Since the total burst value is over the

The total of allowable burst values exceeds the
maximum burst value due to VLAN setting, maximum allowable burst value as the result of
this setting cannot be made.
VLAN setting, so that the VLAN cannot be set.
Make a setting again after checking that the total

of allowable burst values does not exceed the
maximum allowable burst value as the result of
VLAN setting.
06218
Since the total of burst values is 0 and

priority is assigned to the class, the VLAN
setting cannot be made.
The total of burst tolerance is 0 and priority is

assigned to the class, so the VLAN cannot be
set.
When the total of burst tolerance with priority

control is 0, check that priority is not assigned to
the class then make a setting again.
06219
Since the EtherType value is not 0x8100,

For a port with an Ethertype other than 0x8100

set, portbase untag specification is not allowed.
Before untag specification, set Ethertype 0x8100

with the "set vlan ethertype" command.
06220
Since portbased untag mode is configured

on this port, this setting cannot be made.
For a port with portbase VLAN untag specified,

specification of an Ethertype other than 0x8100
is not allowed.
Before Ethertype specification, set admit-all for

the frametype with the "set vlan portbase"
command.
06221
The portbased mode allows only 0x8100

in an ATM module. Please change the
mode or specify another value.
For an ATM line module with the PVC-VLAN

module set to portbase, specification of an
Ethertype other than 0x8100 is not allowed.
Before Ethertype specification, set tagbase with

the "set pvc-vlan mode" command.
06222
Since both portbased and tagbased

modes cannot be specified at the same
time, this command cannot be executed.
When a duplicate line number is specified with a

portbase VLAN and tagbase VLAN, the setting
cannot be made with the command.
Check the ports for which the portbase VLAN

and tagbase VLAN are set.
06223
Since 100 VLAN IDs have already been

registered, tagbased VLAN cannot be
changed to portbased VLAN.
When more than 100 VLAN IDs are set,

switching from tagbase to portbase is disabled.
For switching from tagbase to portbase when

more than 100 VLAN IDs are set, use the "set
vlan portbase" command, or make a setting
again after VLAN deletion.
06224
When Ether-PS mode is enabled and

Tagbased or VLAN tag swapping mode is
configured for the higher numbered slot,
Portbased mode cannot be set for the
lower numbered slot.
When EtherPS is enabled and a tagbase VLAN

is assigned to the higher numbered line module,
a portbase VLAN cannot be assigned to the
lower numbered line module.
Cancel the EtherPS setting, or delete the VLAN

setting of the higher numbered line module.
06225
When Ether-PS mode is enabled and

Portbased mode is configured for the
lower numbered slot, Tagbased or VLAN
tag swapping mode cannot be set for the
higher numbered slot.
When EtherPS is enabled and a portbase VLAN Cancel the EtherPS setting, or delete the VLAN
is assigned to the lower numbered line module, a setting of the lower numbered line module.
VLAN cannot be assigned to the higher
numbered line module.
13-192
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
06302

value in multiples of 16.
When a number greater than 16 is entered as an

MAC learning limitation value, only a multiple of
16 may be entered.
A number from 1 to 16 may be specified freely.

When entering a number greater than 16,
however, enter a multiple of 16.
06303
The total limit is exceeded. Please set the

limit within 8192 for a line module.
For each line module, specification of a learning

count limit of 8193 or more is not allowed.
For each line module, set a learning count limit

not exceeding 8192.
06304
The MAC limiter is not set for the VLAN ID

or VLAN name.
For the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name, no

MAC learning count limit is set.
For the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name, set an

MAC learning count limit beforehand.
06305
The total number of static MAC addresses

is exceeded. Please register static MAC
addresses within 16 for a VLAN.
No more than 16 static MAC addresses may be

registered for each VLAN.
Register 16 or less static MAC addresses.
06306
The static MAC address has not been

registered for the specified VLAN ID or
VLAN Name.
For the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name, no

static MAC address is registered.
For the specified VLAN ID or VLAN name,

register a static MAC address.
06307
The number of registered static MAC

addresses is more than the registered
MAC limit.
The number of registered static MAC addresses

exceeds the MAC learning count limit.
Delete the static MAC addresses then change

the MAC learning count limit to a value greater
than the number of registered static MAC
addresses.
06308
The specified VLAN ID cannot be changed The specified VLAN ID cannot be changed
because static MAC address registration
because of static MAC address registration.
has been made.
Delete the static MAC address then change the

MAC learning count limit.
06309
Data transfer error.
Data transfer failed.
06310
Because the deletion process of all MAC

address learning information is running,
The specified command cannot be executed

during the deletion process of all MAC address
learning information.
Wait for a while and then reenter the command.
06500
The same port cannot be both mirror-from

port and mirror-to port simultaneously.
No mirroring target port may duplicate a

mirroring output destination port.
Make a setting so that no mirroring target port

duplicates a mirroring output destination port.
06501
This port cannot be configured as a

mirror-to-port. Please delete the VLAN
setting.
The mirroring output destination port cannot be

specified. Delete the VLAN from the port.
Delete the VLAN from the port beforehand.
06502

mirror-to-port. Please delete link
aggregation.

specified. Delete the link aggregation from the
port.
Delete the link aggregation from the port

beforehand.
13-193
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
06503
This command is not allowed. The

The command cannot be executed. A mirroring
mirror-to port has already been configured. output destination port is already set.
Before making the setting, delete the setting of

the mirroring output destination port.
06504

mirror-to-port. Please check if mirror
from-port and to-port belong to the same
GbE-MUX module.

specified. Check whether the mirroring target
port and output destination port belong to the
same GbE-MUX line module.
Ensure that mirroring settings are made within

the same GbE-MUX line module.
06505

mirror-to-port. Only one pair of mirror-from
port and mirror-to port is allowed in the
GbE-MUX module.

Check that there is no existing mirroring setting
specified. Check that there is no more than one within the same GbE-MUX module then make a
pair of a mirroring target port and mirroring
setting again.
output destination port in the GbE-MUX module.
06506
This mirror port cannot be configured.

Please check if the mirror-from port is not
specified as out-port in the GbE-MUX
module.
The mirroring setting cannot be made. Check

that the mirroring target port is not specified as
an output side port in the GbE-MUX module.
07000
The link aggregation cannot be configured. The link aggregation is not generated. Specify
Please specify two or more ports.
multiple ports.
Specify multiple ports again to generate a LAG.
07001
The link aggregation is not configured.

Because the specified ports belong to
different line module types, these ports
cannot be in the same group.
When generating a LAG, make a setting again

by specifying the same line module type for all
ports. (However, a mixture of FE and FX is
allowed.)
07003
The link aggregation is not configured. The The link aggregation is not generated. The port
specified ports have already been used in is already used with a different LAG.
other aggregation group.
When generating a LAG, check whether the port

is already used with another LAG.
07004
The link aggregation is not configured. The The link aggregation is not generated. The
maximum number of aggregation ports in
maximum allowable number of ports is 8.
a group is 8.
Check that the number of ports generated as link

aggregations is 8 or less then make a setting
again.
07005
The link aggregation cannot be deleted.

The specified group does not exist.
Check the specified link aggregation.
07006
The link aggregation is not configured. The The link aggregation is not generated. A
specified ports belong to different VLAN.
different VLAN is set for a specified port.
Make a setting again by specifying the same

VLAN for the ports to be specified as a group.
07007
The link aggregation is not configured. The The link aggregation is not generated. The
specified name has already been used by specified name is already used by another
another aggregation group.
group.
Make a setting again by specifying a name

different from those already used by any other
group.
The link aggregation is not generated. The

specified port belongs to a different line module
type in the same group.
The link aggregation is not deleted. The

specified group is not found.
13-194
Check that the mirroring target port is not

specified as an output side port in the GbE-MUX
module then make a setting again.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
07008
The line module configuration data cannot

be deleted. Please delete link aggregation
configuration of the line module in
advance.
The line module configuration cannot be deleted.

First, delete the aggregation setting of the line
module.
Clear all LAG settings that include the specified

line module port as a member port then reenter
the "clear running-config line" command.
07009
The line redundancy feature and link

aggregation are not allowed at the same
time.
The reserve line function and the link

aggregation function cannot be used
simultaneously.
Check that the link aggregation function and the

reserve line function are not used for the same
line module simultaneously then reenter the
command.
07010
The standby-admit setting cannot be

made. The standby-admit is allowed only
in the local mode.
No standby-admit setting is made. The setting

of standby-admit is allowed in the local mode
only.
Check that the mode of the link aggregation to

be set is the local mode then make a setting
again.
07011
The Port-Isolate feature and link

aggregation are not allowed together on
the same port.
The port isolation function and the link

aggregation function cannot be used
simultaneously.
Execute the command again after checking that

the port isolation function and the link
aggregation function are not set for the same
port.
07012
The aggregation protection time is not set.

Please specify the value in multiples of
100.
The link aggregation protection time is not set.

Set a value that is a multiple of 100.
Make a setting again after checking that a value

to be set is a multiple of 100.
07013
The system priority cannot be configured.

Please specify the system priority before
the aggregation is configured.
The system priority cannot be set. Set a system Make a setting again after checking that no link
priority before link aggregation setting.
aggregation is set for the device.
07014
The port priority cannot be configured.

The port priority cannot be set. Set the port
Please specify the port priority for a link-up priority for a link-up port of the link aggregation
port in an aggregation group.
group.
Make a setting again after checking that the

specified port belonging to the link aggregation
group is not a link-down port.
07100
The STP mode cannot be changed. STP

needs to be disabled before the mode
change.
The STP mode cannot be changed. Disable

STP before setting.
Before making a mode change, disable STP.
07101
The specified time value does not satisfy

the formulas of the IEEE standard.
The formulas defined by the IEEE need to be

satisfied.
Make a setting to satisfy the following formulas:

2 x (Bridge Forward Delay - 1) >= Bridge Max
Age
Bridge Max Age >= 2 x (Bridge Hello Time + 1)
07102
The priority value cannot be updated.

Please specify the value in multiples of
4096.
The priority is not updated. Set a value that is a

multiple of 4096.
13-195

to be set is a multiple of 4096 in the RSTP mode.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
07103
The port priority value cannot be updated.

Please specify the value in multiples of 16.
The priority is not updated. Set a value that is a

multiple of 16.
07104
This command is not supported in the STP This command is not supported in the STP
mode. The current mode is not the RSTP
mode. The current mode is not the RSTP
mode.
mode.
This command is not supported in the STP

mode. This command can be used when the
RSTP mode is set.
07200
Because the IGMP mode is disabled,

IGMP members cannot be deleted.
The IGMP mode is disabled, so that IGMP

members cannot be cleared.
To execute the IGMP member clear command,

enable the IGMP mode.
07201
Because the VLAN ID of the specified

VLAN name is 0, IGMP members cannot
be deleted.
The VLAN ID of the specified VLAN name is 0,

so that IGMP members cannot be cleared.
To execute the IGMP member clear command,

specify a VLAN ID other than 0.
09000
The specified MEG has already been

associated with MEP.
The specified MEG has already been associated

with MEP.
Make a setting again after checking MEP is not

registered to the MEG.
09001
The specified MEG ID has already been

used in this system.
The specified MEG ID has already been used in

this system.
Make a setting again after checking the MEG ID

already used is not specified.
09002
The MEG cannot be specified. The MEG

specified does not exist.
The MEG cannot be specified. The MEG

Make a setting again checking the MEG is set.
09003
The MEP index cannot be changed. The

MEP has already been used.
The MEP index cannot be changed. The MEP

has already been used.
Make a setting again after checking the MEP

index is not used.
09004
The MEP cannot be added. The number of The MEP cannot be added. The number of
registered MEPs for this port reaches the
MEPs registered for this port reaches the limit.
maximum number.
Make a setting again after checking the number

of MEPs registered for this port does not exceed
the limit.
09005
The MEP has already been used on the

same port, the same VLAN and the same
MEG level.
The MEP has already been used on the same

port, the same VLAN, and the same MEG level.
Make a setting again after checking the MEP has

not been used on the same port, the same
VLAN, and the same MEG level.
09006
The same MEP ID which belongs to the

same MEG cannot be registered.
The same MEP ID cannot be registered within a

MEG.
Make a setting again after checking the same

MEP ID is not registered within the MEG.
09007
The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP

The MEP cannot be specified. The MEP

Make a setting after checking the MEP is set.
09008
Since the ETH-CC setting is enabled

currently, the MEP cannot be deleted.
The MEP cannot be deleted. The ETH-CC

setting is enabled.
Delete the MEP after checking the ETH-CC for

the MEP is not enabled.
09009
The peer MEP cannot be added. The

number of registered peer MEPs exceeds
the maximum number allowed.
The peer MEP cannot be added. The number

of registered peer MEPs exceeds the maximum
number allowed.

of peer MEPs registered for 8 ports does not
exceed the maximum number allowed.
13-196
Corrective action
to be set is a multiple of 16 in the RSTP mode.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
09010
The peer MEP ID is the same as the MEP

ID registered.
The peer MEP ID is the same as the self MEP

ID.
Make a setting again after checking the peer

MEP ID is not the same as the self MEP ID.
09011
The peer MEP cannot be deleted. The

specified peer MEP does not exist.
The peer MEP cannot be deleted. The

specified peer MEP does not exist.
Delete the peer MEP after checking it is set.
09012
The MAC address cannot be configured.

The Unicast MAC address must be
specified.
The MAC address cannot be configured. The

Unicast MAC address must be specified.
Make a setting again with the Unicast MAC

address specified as MAC address.
09013

The Multicast address must be specified.

Multicast MAC address must be specified.
Make a setting again with the Multicast MAC

address specified as MAC address.
09015

The most significant byte must be 0x01.

most significant byte must be 0x01.
Make a setting again after checking the most

significant byte of the MAC address is 0x01.
09016

The specified MAC address is invalid.

specified MAC address is invalid.
Make a setting again after checking the MAC

address value is not invalid.
09017
The specified MIP index has already been

The specified MIP index has already been used

in this system.
Make a setting again after checking the MIP

index is not used.
09018
The MIP has already been used on the

same port, the same VLAN, and the same
MEG level.
The MIP has already been used on the same

port, the same VLAN, and the same MEG level.
Make a setting again after checking the MIP has

not been used on the same port, the same
VLAN, and the same MEG level.
09019
The MIP cannot be added. The number of

registered MIPs exceeds the maximum
number allowed.
The MIP cannot be added. The number of

MIPs registered for the port reaches the limit

of MIPs registered for this port does not exceed
the limit.
09020
The MIP cannot be specified. The MIP

does not exist.
The MIP cannot be specified. The MIP does

not exist.
Make a setting after checking the MIP is set.
09021
The specified MEG ID is invalid.
The specified MEG ID is invalid.
Make a setting again after checking the specified

MEG ID is correct.
09022
The transmission interval cannot be set.

The setting value is not based on the
allowed granularity.
The transmission interval cannot be set. The

granularity of the set value is invalid.
Make a setting again after checking the

granularity of the set value is correct.
09023
The target MEP already exists in this

system.
The test target MEP cannot be specified. The

test target MEP is already set in the device.
After checking that the test target MEP is not set

in the device, reenter the command.
09024
The target MEP does not exist.
The test target MEP does not exist.
After checking the test target MEP is registered,

reenter the command.
13-197
Corrective action
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
09025
The MIP is not set in the specified VLAN.
The MIP is not set in the specified VLAN.
Reenter the command after checking the VLAN

in which the MIP is set.
09026
The specified position is invalid.
The MEP cannot be set. The specified position

is invalid.
Make a setting again after checking the position

for the MEP is correct.
09027
The MEP has already been used on the

same port, the same VLAN, the same
MEG level, and the same direction.
The MEP has already used on the same port, the Make a setting again after checking the MEP has
same VLAN, the same MEG level, and the same not been used on the same port, the same
VLAN, the same MEG level and the same
direction.
direction.
09028

The specified MAC address is source
MAC address.

specified MAC address is source MAC address.

address is not the source MAC address.
09030
The line mode of the specified line module

is invalid.
The line mode of the specified line module is

invalid.
Make a setting again after checking the line

mode is TDMoP.
09031
The specified port number is invalid.
The specified port number is invalid.
Make a setting again after checking the port

number is 1.
09033
The specified value of the size cannot be

configured. It exceeds the allowable range
of a line module.
The specified value of the size cannot be

configured. It exceeds the allowable range of a
line module.
Make a setting again after checking the value of

the size is correct.
09034
The specified MEP is not the target MEP.
The specified MEP is not a test target MEP.

MEP is registered as a test target MEP.
09035
The MEP cannot be specified. Because

the Ether-PS mode is already enabled in
the specified line module, the untagMEP
cannot be configured.
The MEP cannot be specified. An untag MEP

cannot be set because EtherPS mode is enabled
for the specified line module.
Make a setting again after checking UntagMEP

is not specified.
09036
The MEP cannot be specified. The VLAN

The MEP cannot be specified because the VLAN Make a setting again after checking the VLAN ID
ID configured for MEP is different from that ID specified for MEP is different from that for
is the same as that for EtherPS.
for Ether-PS in the specified line module.
EtherPS on the specified line module.
09037
The MEP cannot be specified. The MEG

level configured for MEP is different from
that for Ether-PS in the specified line
module.
The MEP cannot be specified because the MEG

level specified for MEP is different from that for
EtherPS on the specified line module.
13-198
Make a setting again after checking the MEG

level is the same as that for EtherPS.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
09038
The MEP cannot be specified. The

specified line module does not support the
specified CC period.
The MEP cannot be specified because the

specified line module does not support the
specified CC period.

line module supports the specified CC period.
09039
Because APS mode is enabled, the

The command cannot be executed because the

APS mode is enabled.
Make a setting again after checking the APS

mode is not enabled.
09040
The MEP cannot be specified. The VLAN

The MEP cannot be specified. The VLAN ID of
ID configured for MEP is different from that the EtherRing of the specified port is different
for Ether-Ring on the specified port.
from the one for the MEP setting.
09041
The Ether-OAM frame counter has already The EtherOAM frame counter setting has already Check that the EtherOAM frame counter setting
has not been registered to the specified port, and
been registered on the specified port.
been registered to the specified port.
reenter the command.
09042
The Ether-OAM frame counter is not

registered on the specified port.
The EtherOAM frame counter setting has not

been registered to the specified port.
Check that the EtherOAM frame counter setting

has already been registered to the specified port,
and reenter the command.
09043
The MIP cannot be specified. The VLAN

ID configured for MIP and that for
Ether-Ring on the specified port are the
same.
The MIP cannot be specified. The VLAN ID of

the EtherRing of the specified port is same as
the one for the MIP setting.
Check that the VLAN ID is different from the

EtherRing VLAN ID, and set it again.
09300
Ether-PS feature and link aggregation are

not allowed on the same port.
EtherPS and link aggregation features cannot be

used on the same port at the same time.
Check EtherPS setting and link aggregation

setting, and enable either one.
09301
Ether-PS feature and RSTP/STP are not

allowed on the same port.
EtherPS feature and RSTP/STP cannot be used

on the same port at the same time.
Check EtherPS setting and RSTP/STP setting,

and enable either one.
09302
Ether-PS cannot be set for the specified

line module with the current MEP
configuration.
EtherPS cannot be set for the specified line

module with the current MEP configuration.
With a line module using EtherPS, set only one

outside MEP.
09303
The VLAN ID configured for Ether-PS is

different from that for MEP in the specified
line module.
The VLAN ID configured for EtherPS is different

from that for MEP in the specified line module.
Specify the same VLAN ID as that for MEP

setting.
09304
The MEG level configured for Ether-PS is

different from that for MEP in the specified
line module.
The MEG level configured for EtherPS is

different from that for MEP in the specified line
module.
Specify the same MEG level as that for MEP

setting.
09305
Ether-PS mode is set to non-revertive

mode in the specified line module.
EtherPS switchback mode for the specified line

module is not revertive mode.
Enter the command setting EtherPS switchback

mode to revertive for the specified line module.
13-199
Corrective action
Check that the VLAN ID is the same as the

EtherRing VLAN ID, and set it again.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
09306
Because lockout mode is enabled,

Ether-PS cannot be configured for the
specified line module.
This setting is not allowed because lockout mode Reenter the command after disabling lockout
for the specified line module is enabled.
mode for the specified line module.
09307
Ether-PS command failed because priority

denied.
This command was canceled because of another Check the EtherPS setting and status of the local
higher priority EtherPS in the local office or
office and associated office.
associated office.
09308
The Ether-PS status cannot be cleared.
The EtherPS status of the specified line module

cannot be cleared.
Remove the cause of the EtherPS status failure

and restore EtherPS of the specified line module.
09309
Ether-PS command failed because of

response time-out.
The command failed because no response is

returned from the associated office.
Check the EtherPS setting and status of the local

09310
Ether-PS command failed because the

same command has already been
executed.
This command was canceled because the same

command has already been executed.

09311
Ether-PS command failed because

switchover has occurred due to a fault.
This command failed because a switchover has

occurred due to a fault during command
execution.

09312
Because the Ether-PS mode is already

enabled, the parameters cannot be
changed.
The setting cannot be changed because the

EtherPS mode is already enabled.
Reenter the command after disabling the

EtherPS mode.
09313
Because Ether-PS mode is disabled, the

This command cannot be executed because the

EtherPS mode is disabled.
Reenter the command after enabling the

EtherPS mode.
09314
Because the specified line module is set to This command cannot be executed because the
FE mode, the specified command cannot
FE mode is set to the GbE line mode of the
be executed.
specified line module.
Check the GbE line mode.
09315
Invalid parameter for WTR timer value.

Please specify 0 or 5-12 minutes for the
timer value.
An invalid value is specified for WTR timer.

Specify 0 or 5 to 12 for the WTR timer value.
Check the specified WTR timer value.
09316
Because Ether-PS mode is different, the


EtherPS mode is different.
Check the EtherPS mode.
09317
Because the SBY Line module is in fault

status, the ACT Line module cannot be
changed.
Switchover is unavailable because some fault

occurs in the line module to be switched to.
Check the fault status of the line module to be

switched to.
13-200
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
09318
The protection time is not set. Please

specify the value in multiples of 500.
Switchover protection time cannot be set. Set

the value in multiples of 500.
Check that the setting value is multiples of 500,

and set it again.
09319
Ether-PS and Ether-Ring are not allowed

together on the same port.
EtherPS and EtherRing cannot be used together

on one port.
Check the settings of EtherPS and EtherRing,

and enable one of them.
09401
The same port cannot be specified twice in Another same port cannot be set as the port
Ether-Ring.
used in the EtherRing.
Set other port as the port to be used.
09402
Ether-Ring and link aggregation are not

allowed together on the same port.
Check the settings of EtherRing and link

aggregation, and enable one of them.
09403
Ether-Ring and RSTP/STP are not allowed EtherRing and RSTP/STP cannot be used
together on one port.
09404
The specified index has already been

09405
Two or more MEPs are set to the specified Two or more MEPs have been set to the
port.
specified port.
Set only one MEP for the port where the

EtherRing function is enabled.
09406
Two or more peer MEPs are set to MEP of

the specified port.
Two or more associated MEPs have been set for

the MEP of the specified port.
Set only one associated MEP for the MEP of the

port where the EtherRing function is enabled.
09407
The Ring ID allows only "1".
Only "1" can be set for the Ring ID.
Set "1" for the Ring ID.
09408
Because Ether-Ring mode is disabled, the


EtherRing mode is disabled.
Enable the EtherRing mode, and reenter the

command.
09409
Because the Ether-Ring mode is enabled,

the parameters cannot be changed.
The setting cannot be changed because the

EtherRing mode is enabled.
Disable the EtherRing mode, and reenter the

command.
09410
The specified VLAN ID and the VLAN ID

set to MEP do not match.
The specified VLAN ID is different from the one

set for the MEP.
Use the VLAN ID which has been set for the

MEP, or use untag MEP.
09411
Because the RPL Port is enabled, the

parameters cannot be changed.
The setting cannot be changed because the RPL Disable the RPL port, and reenter the command.
port is enabled.
09412
The guard time is not configured. Please

The status change protection time cannot be set.

Set the value in multiple of 10.
Check that the setting value is multiples of 10,

and set it again.
09413
The RPL port is not configured in this

system.
The RPL port has not been set.
Set the RPL port, and reenter the command.
09414
Ether-Ring and Ether-PS are not allowed

EtherRing and EtherPS cannot be used together

on one port.
Check the settings of EtherRing and EtherPS,

EtherRing and link aggregation cannot be used

together on one port.
Check the settings of EtherRing and RSTP/STP,

The specified index has already been used in the Check that the index is not used.
device.
13-201
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
09415
Inside MEP is set to the specified port.
Inside MEP has been set for the specified port.
Set Outside MEP for the port where the

EtherRing function is enabled.
09416
The specified port does not exist in the

specified index.
The specified port has not been set to the

specified index.
Specify the port which has been set to the

specified index.
09417
The specified VLAN ID and the VLAN ID

set to MIP are the same.
The same VLAN ID as the one set to the MIP

cannot be set.
Use other VLAN ID than the one which has been

set for the MIP.
11000
VLAN ID is not assigned to the specified

PVC.
No VLAN ID is set with the specified PVC.
Check the VLAN registration state of the

specified PVC.
11001
Because loopback is being employed,

PVC cannot be deleted.
A loopback test is under way, so that the PVC

cannot be deleted.
End the loopback test.
11002
Since the EtherType value is not 0x8100,

portbased configuration cannot be
specified for the ATM port.
Portbase specification is not allowed for an ATM

port for which an Ethertype other than 0x8100 is
set.
Set Ethertype 0x8100 with the "set vlan

ethertype" command then set portbase for the
ATM port.
11003
The specified destination MAC address is

invalid.
The specified destination MAC address is invalid. Make a setting again after checking the
destination MAC address to be registered.
11004
The specified PVC is not registered in the

ATMoP format.
The ATMoP format is not registered to the

specified PVC.
Check the setting state of the ATMoP format with

the "show atmop format" command.
11005
The combination of parameters is invalid.
The specified combination of parameters is

invalid.

the "show atmop format" command. Check the
setting state of the ATM path connection with the
"show pvc connection" command.
11006
The ATMoP format has already been set.
The ATMoP format has already been set.

the "show atmop format" command.
11007
The number of VLAN tags or the protocol

header is different from the designated
mode.
The number of VLAN tags or the protocol header

to be added to Ether frame is different from the
designated format.
Check the number of VLAN tags added or the

protocol header with the "show atmop format"
command.
11008
The specified VLAN ID has already been

set for %s feature.
The specified VLAN ID has already been set for

another feature (PVC-VLAN, ATMoP, or
TDMoP).
Check the specified VLAN ID is not used for

another feature.
11009
The specified PVC is not registered in the

ATM connection table.
The specified PVC is not registered for an ATM

connection.
Check the ATM connection setting status with

the "show pvc connection" command.
11010
The ATM connection has already been

set.
The ATM connection has already been

established.
Check the ATM connection path setting with the

"show pvc connection" command.
13-202
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
11011
The registered PVC connection type and

the specified PVC connection type do not
match.
The specified PVC connection type differs from

the registered PVC connection type.
Check the registered PVC connection type.
11012
The specified IP address is invalid.
Enter the command with another IP address

specified.
11013
The combination of parameters is not

allowed in this case.

invalid.
Make the PVCs of the source and destination

agree with VLAN ID or UDP port number.
Or, change either of the following values:
- PVCs of the source or destination
- VLAN ID or UDP port number
11014
Only ATMoP format or PVC connection

can be set for one PVC on a port, and
another PVC connection cannot be made
for the same PVC.
The ATMoP format and the ATM path connection Enter the command with the port number or PVC
cannot be set for one PVC on a port, and
changed. Check the setting state with the
"show atmop format" and "show pvc connection"
multiple ATM path connections cannot be set.
commands.
11015
The specified line module does not

support VP connection.
No VP connection can be set for the specified

line module type.
Check the line module type and connection type.
11300
The number of the registered PVC

counters exceeds the maximum
registration number per system.
The number of registered PVC counters exceeds

the maximum registrable number of PVC
counters per device.
Check the number of registered PVC counters

and make a setting so that the maximum
registrable number of PVC counters is not
exceeded.
11301
If %s for which PVC counter has not been

registered is specified, PVC counter
registration cannot be deleted.
When a PVC or PVC name for which no PVC

counter is registered is specified, PVC counter
registration deletion is impossible.
Check the state of PVC counter registration.
11302
Because the specified port is not IMA

group root port, this command cannot be
executed.

specified port is not IMA group root port.
When setting an IMA group, enter the command

with the root port specified as a port belonging to
the IMA group.
12000
Because %s value that is less than 384

Kbps is registered, the high bit rate mode
cannot be changed.
A PCR value less than 384 kbps is set.
Delete the setting of a PCR value less than 384

kbps or set a PCR value of 384 kbps or more,
then make a setting again.
12001
Because the high bit rate mode is

registered, %s value cannot be changed.
The high bit rate mode is set.
Make a setting again after setting the low bit rate

mode.
13-203
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
12002
The entry exceeds the limited number.

Please set ATM shaper entry up to 128 for
one port.
No more than 128 shaper mode entries may be

registered per port.
Set no more than 128 shaper mode entries per

port.
12003
Because the specified shaper mode does

not match the registered shaper mode,
The specified shaper mode does not match a

registered shaper mode.
Make a setting again after checking the shaper

mode.
12004
It is necessary to set %s for the specified

shaper mode and class.
A rate setting necessary for the specified shaper

mode and class is missing.
Add a rate setting necessary for the shaper

mode and class then make a setting again.
12005
This vcpcr value exceeds vppcr value.
The PCR value per VC exceeds the PCR value

per VP.
Make a setting again after checking the set

values.
12006
This mcr value exceeds %s value.
The MCR value exceeds the PCR value.

values.
12007
The total effective bandwidth of VPI

exceeds the PCR value of VPI.
The total effective bandwidth under VPI control

exceeds the PCR value per VP.

values.
12008

value based on the allowed granularity.
The set PCR value or MCR value is not within

the allowable granularity value range.
Specify a PCR value or MCR value within the

allowable granularity value range then make a
setting again.
12009
The total effective bandwidth for ATM

shaper setting exceeds the bandwidth for
the port.
The total effective bandwidth for ATM shaper

setting exceeds the allowable bandwidth range.

value.
12010
ATM shaper for the specified %s is not

registered.
For the specified PVC or PVC name, no ATM

shaper is registered.
Check the ATM shaper registration.
12011
The total of MCR value of VPI exceeds the The total MCR value under VPI control exceeds
PCR value of VPI.
the PCR value per VP.

values.
12012
CLP for the specified %s is not registered.
For the specified PVC or PVC name, CLP is not

set.
Check the CLP setting.
13100

is invalid.
The combination of the specified parameters is

invalid.
Check the command line entered.
13101
Because the ATM-OAM loopback test for

the specified PVC or VP connection is
being performed, the specified command
cannot be executed.

specified PVC or VP connection is under
ATM-OAM loopback test.
Reenter the command after the loopback test is

finished.
13-204
Corrective action
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
This command cannot be executed because
ATM-OAM loopback keepalive is set for the
specified PVC or VP connection.
Corrective action
13102
Because the ATM-OAM loopback

keepalive for the specified PVC or VP
connection is registered, the specified
13200
VPI specified with the F5 setting cannot be A VPI for which F5 monitoring is already set
specified with the F4 setting.
cannot be specified with F4 monitoring setting.
Check the loopback monitoring setting.
13201
VPI specified with the F4 setting cannot be A VPI for which F4 monitoring is already set
specified with the F5 setting.
cannot be specified with F5 monitoring setting.
13202
The specified keepalive configuration is

not registered.
The specified loopback monitoring setting is not

registered yet.
13203
The inside cannot be set when ATM155 is

specified.
inside (switch direction) cannot be set for the

ATM155 line module.
Set outside (line direction) when ATM155 line

module is specified.
13204
The ATM-OAM flow for the specified PVC

or VP connection is set to none.
The ATM-OAM flow is set to none for the

Reenter the command after setting ATM-OAM

flow with the "set atm-oam flow" command.
13205
Because the ATM-OAM flow for the

specified PVC or VP connection is set to
end-point, the inside cannot be set.
inside (switch direction) cannot be set because

ATM-OAM flow is set to end-point for the
Reenter the command after setting ATM-OAM

flow to connecting-point with the "set atm-oam
flow" command.
13206
Because the ATM connection for the

specified PVC is registered, the inside
cannot be set.
inside (switch direction) cannot be set because

an ATM connection is established for the
specified PVC.
Reenter the command after deleting the ATM

connection with the "clear pvc connection"
command.
13500
Because the APS mode is disabled, the

The APS mode is disabled, so that the specified

Execute the command after enabling the APS

mode with the "set aps" command.
13501
The recover time is not updated. Please

The changeback standby protection time is not

set. Set a value that is a multiple of 30.
Check that the value to be set is a multiple of 30

then make a setting again.
13502
The response time is not set. Please

The changeover response wait time is not set.

Set a value that is a multiple of 500.
Check that the value to be set is a multiple of

500 then make a setting again.
13503
Because APS mode is enabled, the

The APS mode is enabled, so that the specified

Execute the command after disabling the APS

mode with the "set aps" command.
13504
Because the APS mode is set to Annex.B,

%s cannot be specified.
The APS mode is set to Annex.B, so that the

specified parameter cannot be set.
Execute after setting the APS mode to Annex.A

with the "set aps" command.
13505
Because the frame mode is SONET,

annex-b cannot be specified.
The frame mode is SONET, so that the specified

parameter cannot be set.
Execute after setting the frame mode to SDH

with the "set port frame" or "set line mode
tdmp155" command.
13-205
Reenter the command after deleting the

loopback keepalive setting with the "clear
loopback atam keepalive" command.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
13506
Because the APS mode is set to Annex.A,

parameter cannot be omitted.
The APS mode is set to Annex.A, so that

parameter omission is not allowed.
Specify parameters then execute the command.
13507
APS command failed because the same

command has already been executed.
The command was canceled because the

command is already executed.
None
13508
APS command failed because priority

denied.
In the local or remote office, the command was

canceled due to another high-priority APS state.
Check the APS setting and state of the local and

remote offices.
13509
APS command failed because of response There was no response from the remote office,
time-out.
so that the command failed.
Check the APS setting and state of the local and

remote offices.
13510
Because the APS mode is set to Annex.A,

the recover parameter cannot be
specified.
The APS mode is set to Annex.A, so that the

specified parameter cannot be set.
Execute after setting the APS mode to Annex.B

with the "set aps" command.
13511
Because running-configuration has been

entered for the higher numbered slot, APS
mode cannot be configured.
The APS mode cannot be set because the

configuration has already been entered for the
higher numbered slot of the specified line
module.
Check whether running-config is already entered

for the higher numbered slot of the specified line
module.
13512
Because MEP has been registered for the

lower numbered slot, the specified
The APS mode cannot be set because MEP has

already been registered for the lower numbered
slot of the specified line module.
Check whether MEP is already registered for the

lower numbered slot of the specified line module.
13513
Because TDMP155 line mode is not

configured, the specified command cannot
be executed.

TDMP155 line mode is not configured.
Execute the command after setting the

TDMP155 line mode.
15001
Since the specified ports belong to two or

more line modules, the IMA group cannot
be created.
Since the specified ports use two or more line

modules, the IMA group cannot be created.
Specify the ports of the same line module for

configuring the IMA group.
15002
Since the specified ports already belong to

other IMA groups, the IMA group cannot
be created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The ports

are already used for other IMA groups.
Check whether the ports are used for other IMA

groups before creating an IMA group.
15003
Since the specified IMA ID has already

been registered in other IMA groups, the
IMA group cannot be created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The IMA ID

is already used for other IMA groups.
Check whether the IMA ID is used for other IMA

groups before creating an IMA group.
15004
Since the number of Minimum Required

Links exceeds the specified number of
ports, the IMA group cannot be created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The

specified number of Minimum Required Links
exceeds the specified number of ports.
Specify the number of Minimum Required Links

within the specified number of ports.
13-206
Corrective action
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
15005
Since the specified delay value exceeds

the maximum size of E1 mode, the IMA
group cannot be created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The delay

value exceeds the maximum value of E1 mode.
Specify the delay value so as not to exceed the

maximum value of E1 mode.
15006
The index of a non-registered IMA group

cannot be deleted.
The index of a non-registered IMA group cannot

be deleted.
Check the content of the registered IMA groups.
15007
Since the specified port is not registered in

any IMA groups, the IMA loopback test
cannot be performed.
The IMA loopback test cannot be performed.

The specified port is not registered in any IMA
groups.
Check the contents of the registered IMA groups.
15008
Since the specified root port does not

belong to the IMA group, the IMA group
cannot be created.
The IMA group cannot be created. The

specified port is not registered in the IMA group.
Specify one of the ports registered in the IMA

group as the root port.
20000
Since the specified port is not TDM mode,

Since the specified port is not in the TDM mode,

Reenter the command after setting the port to

the TDM mode.
20001

executed due to the frame type
disagreement.
The specified command cannot be executed

because of the frame type mismatch.
Reenter the command after matching the frame

type.
20002
Since consecutive TS numbers are

required, this group setting cannot be
performed.
Consecutive TS numbers must be specified.
Reenter the command with range specification of

consecutive TS numbers.
20005
The specified path setting has already

been configured on the same port.
The specified path setting has already been

made on the same port.
Specify another line for path setting.
20006
Since the frame types of the specified

groups are different, the path setting
cannot be configured.
Since the frame types of the specified groups are Set the path with the same frame type.
different, the path cannot be set.
20008
The specified group has already been

used.
The specified group number has already been

used.
Use another group number or delete the group

setting.
20009
The specified TS has already been

grouped.
The specified time slot number has already been

grouped.
Use another time slot number or delete the group

setting.
20010
The specified group does not have any

configuration.
The specified group does not have the setting.
Reenter the command specifying a group

number that is grouped.
20012
The numbers of TSs of the specified

groups are different.
The numbers of time slots (TSs) of the specified

groups are different.
Select groups with the same number of time

slots (TSs).
13-207
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
20013
The path setting cannot be overwritten.
Path setting cannot be overwritten.
Reenter the command after deleting the path

setting or specifying a group number to which a
path is not set.
20014
The path setting has already been

configured for the specified group.
A path has already been set to the specified

group number.
Reenter the command after deleting the path

setting.
20016
TS0 cannot be specified except in

unframed mode.
TS0 cannot be specified except in unframed

mode.
Change the frame format to unframed or use

another time slot number.
20017
The specified path setting has been

configured in the same logical port.

configured for the same logical port.
Specify another logical port for path setting.
20018
Logical port cannot be specified when

TDMP module is running.
Logical port number cannot be used for any

TDMP line module.
Reenter the command omitting logical port

number.
20019
Logical port cannot be omitted when

TDMP155 module is running.
Logical port number cannot be omitted for any

Reenter the command with a logical port number

specified.
20020
TU-12 only supports the range of 1 to 3 in

SDH mode.
It is not permitted to specify 4 for TU-12 in SDH

mode.
Reenter the command with 1 to 3 specified for

TU-12.
20021
The specified group name has already

been used.
The specified group name has already been set.
Reenter the command with another group name

specified.
20022
Since line mode has not been configured,

This command cannot be executed because line

mode setting has not been configured.
Execute the command after setting the line

mode.
20023
Since frame format has not been

configured, this command cannot be
executed.

frame format has not been set.
Execute the command after setting the frame

format.
21000
Since the related configurations exist, this


Delete the related configuration setting and set

the default value.
21003
TDMoP mode has not been configured for

The specified line number has not been assigned Execute the command after setting the TDMoP
to the TDMoP mode.
operation mode.
21004
Since the specified line module is in

CESoPSN mode, unframed cannot be
specified.
unframed cannot be specified because the

specified line module is set to CESoPSN mode.
Reenter the command after setting another

frame format.
21005
Since TDMP155 line mode has not been

configured for the specified line module,

TDMP155 line mode has not been configured for
Execute the command after setting the tdmp155

line mode.
13-208
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
This command cannot be executed because of a
frame type mismatch.
Corrective action
21006
Since the frame type for the specified line

module is not appropriate, this command
cannot be executed.
21008
Since the related configurations are stored This command cannot be executed because a
on the specified logical port, this command related configuration exists for the specified
cannot be executed.
logical port number.
Reenter the command after deleting the related

configuration.
21009
Frame type of the specified line module is

not T1.

frame type of the specified line module is not T1.
Reenter the command specifying a line mode

whose frame type is T1 mode.
21010
The frame type in the specified line is not

E1.

frame type of the specified line module is not E1.
Reenter the command specifying a line mode

whose frame type is E1 mode.
21011
Since the number of line modules reaches

the maximum number, this command
cannot be executed.

number of the line modules reaches the
maximum limit.
Check the line mode setting.
21012
Since the specified line module is in TDM

mode, unframed cannot be specified.
unframed cannot be set because the specified

line is in the TDM mode.
Specify another frame format, and reenter the

command.
21100
Since the line mode is not TDMoP mode,

Since the line mode is not the TDMoP mode, this

Enter the command after setting the line mode to

the TDMoP mode.
21102
The specified group number has already

been registered.

registered to a group.

setting.
21103
The specified group number has not been

configured.
The specified group number is not set.
Check the group number.
21106
The frame type of the specified line

module is different from that configured on
the specified port.
The frame type specified by the command is

different from that configured on the specified
port.
Use the same frame type.
21107
Since consecutive TS numbers are

required, this group setting cannot be
performed.
Consecutive TS numbers must be specified.
Reenter the command with range specification of

consecutive TS numbers.
21108
The specified TS has already been

grouped.

used.

setting.
21110
The specified ECID has already been

configured in the same line module.
The specified ECID has already been configured

in the same line module.
Reenter the command with another ECID

specified.
21112
The specified VLAN name has not been

registered.
The specified VLAN name has not been

registered.
Reenter the command with a registered VLAN

name specified.
13-209
Reenter the command with the frame type

matched.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
21117

The specified MAC address is invalid.

specified MAC address is invalid.

address value is not invalid.
21121
Since the related configurations exist, this


Reenter the command after deleting the related

configuration setting.
21122
Since the specified line module number

has already been set as TDMoP
application mode, this command cannot
be executed.
The specified line module number has already

been assigned to TDMoP operation mode.
Reenter the command with another line module

number specified, or execute the command after
deleting the TDMoP operation mode setting.
21123
Since the specified line module number

has NOT been set as TDMoP application
mode, this command cannot be executed.
The specified line module number has not been

assigned to TDMoP operation mode.
Reenter the command specifying a line module

for which TDMoP operation mode has been set,
or execute the command after setting the
TDMoP operation mode.
21125
IP address cannot be specified when the

packet format is MEF8.
IP address cannot be specified when the packet

format is MEF8.
Reenter the command without IP address

specified.
21126
ECID cannot be specified when the packet

format is UDP-IP.
ECID cannot be specified when the packet

format is UDP-IP.
Reenter the command with an IP address

specified, or execute the command after
specifying CES-VLAN in setting the TDMoP
mode.
21128
The specified VLAN ID has already been

set for %s feature.
The specified VLAN ID has already been set for

the PVC-VLAN or ATMoP function.
Check that the specified VLAN ID is not set for

the other function.
21129
The same IP address has been set for

both source and destination.
The source IP address and destination IP

address have the same value assigned.
Reenter the command with different values

specified for the source IP address and
destination IP address.
21131
TS cannot be specified when the TDMoP

application mode is SAToP.
TS cannot be specified when the TDMoP

operation mode is SAToP.
Reenter the command with all for time slot

number specified.
21134
Reenter the command with another IP address

specified.
21137
The reverse path setting is NOT permitted

in the same port.
A path which loops back on the same port

cannot be set.
Reenter the command with a group of another

port specified.
21138
The path setting has NOT been configured The path setting has not been configured for the
for the specified group.
specified group.
21140
The Group configuration allows only 120

groups per line module unit.
Reenter the command specifying a group for

which the path setting has been configured.
For group configuration, up to 120 groups can be An existing group needs to be deleted when
set on a per line module basis.
adding a new group.
13-210
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
21141
The Format setting has already been

The format setting has already been configured

for the specified group.
Delete the format setting, or reenter the

command with another group specified.
21142
The Connection setting has already been

The connection setting has already been

Delete the connection setting, or reenter the

command with another group specified.
21143
Since the number of Adaptive-clock mode

settings exceeds the limit for the system,
This setting is not permitted because it exceeds

Execute the command after deleting an
the maximum number of Adaptive-clocks allowed Adaptive-clock that has already been set.
to be set in the entire system.
21144
The Adaptive-clock has already been

configured for the specified line module
number.
Adaptive-clock has already been configured for

the specified line module number.
Execute the command after deleting the

Adaptive-clock, or reenter the command with
another line module number specified.
21145
Line mode has already been configured

for the specified line module.
Line mode has already been configured for the

specified line module number.
Execute the command after changing the line

mode to None.
21146
The numbers of TSs of the specified

groups are inappropriate.
The specified groups do not have the same

number of TSs.
Select the groups that have the same number of

TSs.
21147
Logical port cannot be specified when

TDMP module is running.
No commands specifying logical port can be

entered for any TDMP line module.
Reenter the command without a logical port

number specified.
21148
Logical port cannot be omitted when

TDMP155 module is running.
No commands omitting logical port can be

entered for any TDMP155 line module.
Reenter the command with a logical port number

specified.
21149
Group setting must be specified based on

"TUG-3/STS-1", and must be less than 29
configurations.
For group configuration, up to 28 groups can be

set on a per TUG-3/STS-1 basis.
An existing group needs to be deleted when

adding a new group.
21150
TU-12 only supports the range of 1 to 3 in

SDH mode.
It is not permitted to specify 4 for TU-12 in SDH

mode.
Reenter the command with 1 to 3 specified for

TU-12.
21151
The specified path setting has been

configured in the same logical port.

configured for the same logical port.
Specify another logical port for path setting.
21152
Since frame format has not been

configured, this command cannot be
executed.
Frame format has not been configured for the

specified logical port.
Execute the command after setting the frame

format.
21153
The specified UDP port(s) have already

been configured in the same line module.
The specified UDP port number has already

been configured in the same line module.
Reenter the command with another UDP port

number specified.
21154
The combination of the specified jitter

buffer value and the configured number of
frames is invalid.
The combination of the specified jitter buffer

value and the configured number of frames is
invalid.
Check the combination of the specified jitter

buffer value and the configured number of
frames.
13-211
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
21155
The specified number of frames is invalid.
The specified number of transmit frames are

invalid.
Check the setting of the number of transmit

frames.
21156
The specified jitter buffer value is invalid.

Only 2 msec, 4 msec, or 8 msec can be
configured in dynamic mode.
Values from 16ms to 128ms cannot be specified

for the jitter buffer in dynamic mode.
Check the setting of jitter buffer value.
21157
UDP port cannot be specified when the

packet format is MEF8 or MPLS.
No UDP port number can be specified when the

packet format is MEF8 or MPLS.
Reenter the command without specifying any

UDP port number.
21158
MAC address cannot be specified when

the packet format is MPLS.
No MAC address can be specified when the

packet format is MPLS.

MAC address.
21159
EXP value of the Label cannot be

specified when the packet format is MEF8
or UDP-IP.
No EXP value of a label can be specified when

the packet format is MEF8 or UDP-IP.

EXP value of a label.
21160
The MAC address cannot be omitted when A MAC address must be specified when the
the packet format is MEF8 or UDP-IP.
packet format is MEF8 or UDP-IP.
21161
The combination of the packet formats of

the specified line is invalid.
The combination of the packet formats set for the Reconfigure either the source or destination
packet format so that an identical value is set for
specified lines is invalid.
both of the source and destination packet
formats.
22000
The specified priority has already been

set.
The specified priority has already been set.
Reenter the command with another priority

specified, or execute the command after deleting
the priority setting.
22001
Priority setting has already been made for

the specified clock source.
Priority setting has already been configured for

the specified source clock.
Reenter the command with another source clock

specified, or execute the command after deleting
the priority setting.
22002
The specified clock source cannot be set

for the specified priority.
The specified clock source cannot be set for the

specified priority.
Reenter the command with an appropriate clock

source selected.
22003
The specified port is not registered into

Adaptive-clock mode.
The specified port has not been registered to

adaptive-clock mode.
Execute the command after registering the port

to adaptive-clock mode.
22004
The external clock mode has already been

set.
An external clock mode has already been set.
Execute the command after deleting the external

clock mode.
22005
The external clock has already been set

for the reference clock priority.
The reference clock priority has already been

assigned to the external clock.
Execute the command after clearing the

reference clock priority of the external clock.
13-212
Corrective action
Reenter the command specifying a MAC

address.
Appendix
No.
Indication
Cause
Corrective action
22006
The external clock mode has not been set. No external clock mode is set.
Execute the command after setting an external

clock mode.
22007
Invalid external clock status or external

clock setting. Please check external clock
status and external clock setting.
The external clock status or external clock

setting is invalid. Check the external clock
status and setting.
Check the external clock status and external

clock setting.
23000

is invalid.

invalid.
23001
The message length is over %s bytes.
The specified message is too long.
Check the specified message size and reenter a

message within the allowed number of
characters.
13-213
Appendix
13.7 Restart Cause List

The table below lists the restart causes.
Type of fault pattern
Meaning
Power On Reset or Switch Module Insertion
Normal start by power-on operation or switch module insertion
Command Reset (reset system)
Restart by entering the "reset system" command
Command Reset (reset switch)
Restart by entering the "reset switch" command
The status of WDT is abnormal
Autonomous restart by hardware decision
The fatal error has occurred
Autonomous restart by software decision
Command Reset by mate (reset system)
Restart by the "reset system" command entered from the other UGSW module
Command Reset by mate (reset switch)
Restart by the "reset switch" command entered from the other UGSW module
13-214
Appendix
13.8 UGSW Switchability List

The table below provides a list of UGSW ACT/SBY state switchability for each command and event.
1. Change switch
State of the other system
Switch state of the

command entry system
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
(Legend) : Unexecutable, without ACH,
z: ACT/SBY changeover
13-215
Appendix
2. Change switch force
Switch state of the

command entry system
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
(1)
(2)
SBY
(1)
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
(2)
(Legend) : Unexecutable, without ACH, z: ACT-FLT/SBY-FLT changeover,

(1): Old ACTOUS, Old SBYACT (2): Old ACTOUS, Old SBY-FLTACT-FLT
3. SW-SEL
Switch state of the SW-SEL

pressing system
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
(1)
(2)
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
(Legend) : Unexecutable, without ACH, z: ACT-FLT/SBY-FLT changeover,

(1): Old ACTOUS, Old SBYACT (2): Old ACTOUS, Old SBY-FLTACT-FLT
13-216
Appendix
4. (CR) Fault occurrence
Switch state of the (CR) fault

occurrence system
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
(3)
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
(Legend) : Unexecutable, without ACH, (3): Old ACTSBY-FLT, Old SBYACT
5. Extraction on the other system

Switch state
Switch state of the extraction system

UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
UNMOUNT
INIT
OUS
ACT
SBY
ACT-FLT
SBY-FLT
(4)
(4)
(Legend) : Unexecutable, without ACH,
z: Switch state changed to ACT, (4): Switch state changed to ACT-FLT
13-217
Appendix
6. SW state after restart dependent on state of the other system (reference)
Switch state after restart
UNMOUNT
ACT
INIT
SBY
OUS
ACT
ACT
SBY
SBY
ACT-FLT
OUS
SBY-FLT
13-218
Appendix
13.9 APS State List

The table below lists the APS states.
No
01
02
APS state
remote-exchange-switch-by-fs
remote-exchange-switch-by-sf(RCF)
Description
remote-exchange-switch-by-sd(RCD)
(Remote office) FS-P switching
(Remote office) FS switching
- (Remote office) A transition is made

to Protection ACT Normal State by
cancellation of forced switching.
- (Remote office) A name change is

made and a transition is made to
Normal State by cancellation of forced
switching.
Remote office
switching by SF
(Remote office) SF-P switching
(Remote office) SF switching
Remote office
switching by SD
(Remote office line
degradation)
04
remote-exchange-switch-by-wr
Annex-B
Remote office
switching by FS
(Remote office line

fault)
03
Annex-A
- A transition is made to Protection ACT - A transition is made to Remote

Normal State by recovery of the active Exchange Switch by WR by recovery of
system.
the SBY system.
(Remote office) SD-P switching
(Remote office) SD switching
- A transition is made to Protection ACT - A transition is made to Remote

Normal State by recovery of the active Exchange Switch by WR by recovery of
system.
the SBY system.
Remote office
switching by WR
(Remote office) SBY system recovery

after SF/SD switching
- (Remote office) A name change is
Normal State after elapse of a recover
time.
05
normal-state
Active system placed in The active system line is placed in the

ACT state, and the lines of both
ACT state and normal
systems are normal.
13-219
The active system line is placed in the

ACT state, and the lines of both
systems are normal.
Appendix
No
07
APS state
standby-trouble-is-steady(CF)
Description
SBY in steady fault
Annex-A
Annex-B
(Local office) The ACT system line is

normal, and SF is in progress on the
SBY system line.
(Line fault)
- A transition is made to Normal State

by recovery of the SBY system.
08
standby-trouble-is-steady(CD)
SBY in steady fault
(Line degradation)
(Local office) The ACT system line is

normal, and SD is in progress on the
SBY system line.
09
standby-trouble-is-steady(RCF)
SBY in steady fault

(Remote office line
fault)
14
change-in-switch-by-sf(CF)
SF switching change
(Line fault)
16
change-in-switch-by-sd
SD switching change
(Line degradation)
20
forced-switch
FS switching
(Remote office) The active system

(Remote office) The ACT system line
line is normal, and SF/SD is in progress is normal, and SF/SD is in progress on
on the line of system 1.
the SBY system line.
- A transition is made to normal-state
by recovery of the standby system.

(Local office) Switching by SF-P is

being requested.
(Local office) Switching by SF is

being requested.
*This state is a transient state.

However, this state continues stably
when the remote office is in the lockout
state.

state.
(Local office) Switching by SD-P is

being requested.
(Local office) Switching by SD is

being requested.

state.

state.
(Local office) Switching by FS-P
(Local office) FS switching
- (Local office) A transition is made to

Protection ACT Normal State by
cancellation of forced switching.
*(Local office) A name change is

switching.
13-220
Appendix
No
22
23
24
APS state
switch-by-sf(CF)
switch-by-sd(CD)
switch-by-wr
Description
Annex-A
Annex-B
SF switching
(Local office) SF-P switching
(Line fault)
- A transition is made to Protection ACT - A transition is made to Switch by WR

Normal State by recovery of the
standby system.
SD switching
(Local office) SD-P switching
(Line degradation)
- A transition is made to Protection ACT - A transition is made to Switch by WR

standby system.
WR switching
(Local office) SF switching
(Local office) SD switching
(Local office) Recovery of the SBY

system after SF/SD switching
- (Local office) A name change is
Normal State after elapse of a recover
time.
26
simultaneous-switch-by-sf(CF)
Simultaneous SF
switching
(Line fault)
27
simultaneous-switch-by-sd(CD)
Simultaneous SD
switching
(Line degradation)
28
simultaneous-switch-by-wr
When the local office and remote office

simultaneously make a request for
SF-P switching and switching is
performed in response to a request
from the other office

simultaneously make a request for SF
switching and switching is performed in
response to a request from the other
office

SD-P switching and switching is

simultaneously make a request for SD
office
Simultaneous WR
switching
Recovery of the SBY system after

simultaneous SF/SD switching
- A name change is made and a
transition is made to Normal State after
elapse of a
recover time.
35
protection-act-normal-state
Standby system placed The line of the standby system

in ACT state and
(reserve) is placed in the ACT state
and the lines of both systems are
normal
normal.
13-221
Appendix
No
36
APS state
partial-down
Description
Annex-A
Fault on both systems
Annex-B
SF occurred on both systems.
*A changeback occurs to place the line
of the active system in the ACT state.
37
Lockout (LKOP) state
(Local office) LKOP state

Normal State by cancellation of LKOP.
38
remote-exchange-switch-by-lkop
Remote office lockout

(LKOP) state
(Remote office) LKOP state

to Normal State by cancellation of
LKOP.
39
simultaneous-switch-by-lkop
Simultaneous lockout
(LKOP)

lockout (LKOP) and switching is
40
manual-switch
MS switching
(Local office) MS-P switching

Protection ACT Normal State by
cancellation of manual switching.
41
remote-exchange-switch-by-ms
Remote office MS
switching
(Remote office) MS-P switching

to Protection ACT Normal State by
cancellation of manual switching.
42
simultaneous-switch-by-ms
Simultaneous MS
switching

MS-P switching and switching is
43
simultaneous-switch-by-fs
Simultaneous FS
switching

FS-P switching and switching is

simultaneously make a request for FS
office
13-222
Appendix
No
44
APS state
forced-switch-to-work
Description
FS-W switching
Annex-A
(Local office) FS-W switching
Annex-B
-

switching.
45
remote-exchange-switch-by-fs-w
Remote office FS-W

switching
(Remote office) FS-W switching

forced switching.
46
simultaneous-switch-by-fs-w
Simultaneous FS-W
switching

FS-W switching and switching is
47
signal-fail-switch-to-work
SF-W switching
(Local office) SF-W switching

standby system.
48
50
remote-exchange-switch-by-sf-w
switch-by-sd-w
Remote office SF-W

switching
(Remote office) SF-W switching
SD-W switching
(Local office) SD-W switching

to Normal State by recovery of the
standby system.
-

standby system.
51
remote-exchange-switch-by-sd-w
Remote office SD-W

switching
(Remote office) SD-W switching

to Normal State by recovery of the
standby system.
13-223
Appendix
No
APS state
Description
Annex-A
Annex-B
52
simultaneous-switch-by-sd-w
Simultaneous SD-W
switching

SD-W switching and switching is
54
change-in-switch-by-sd-w
SD-W switching
change
(Local office) Switching by SD-W is

being requested.
* This state is a transient state.

state.
55
manual-switch-to-work
MS-W switching
(Local office) MS-W switching

Normal State by cancellation of manual
switching.
56
57
remote-exchange-switch-by-ms-w
simultaneous-switch-by-ms-w
Remote office MS-W

switching
(Remote office) MS-W switching
Simultaneous MS-W
switching

MS-W switching and switching is

manual switching.
* The numbers in the "No" column indicate the state numbers at MIB acquisition time.
13-224
Appendix
13.10 APS Protection Time List

The table below lists the protection time used for the APS switching operation.
Timer
Description
Set value
Annex-B
Annex-A
Modification
RGT (Request Guard Time)

Fault occurrence protection time
Protection time from fault detection to switchover start. An event is

not regarded as a fault when it is recovered within the RGT.
1sec
0sec
Disabled
FFCT (Fault Free Confirmation Time)

Fault recovery protection time
Protection time from fault recovery detection to recovery action start.

When a fault occurs within the FFCT, it is not regarded as recovery.
1sec
10.5sec
Disabled
WRT (Wait Response Time)

Switchover response waiting time
Time waiting for a response to a switchover request by a command

from the remote side. If it timed out, the command fails.
1000msec
1000msec
500 or
1000msec
WTR (Wait to Restore)

Recovery waiting protection time
Time from WTR transmission after FFCT to K1K2 bytes (NR)

transmission for name change without a fault within FFCT.
300sec
30-600sec
(in increments
of 30sec)
1sec
Disabled
TX
Waiting time from K1K2 bytes (NR) reception for name switchover or
Waiting time for change of transmission name change request by a command to name change start.
line name
13-225
Appendix
13.11 IMA State List

The table below lists the IMA states.
No
IMA transmission link

state
01
Not In Group
No link is set to the IMA group.
02
Unusable
The link is set to the group, but cannot be used. The following sub-states are available.
03
Usable
Description
NoGivenReason
: IMA group is not registered.
Fault
: User-specific fault occurred.
Misconnected
: Misconnect fault occurred.
Inhibited
: Link operation stopped due to local or implementation reason.
Failed
: Fault such as LCD, LIF, or LODS occurred.
The link is in the standby state and is waiting for Active report from the remote side.
(Not round-robin object)
04
Active
The link is activated and cells can be transmitted from the ATM layer.
(Round-robin object)
IMA reception link

state
Description
01
Not In Group
No link is set to the IMA group.
02
Unusable
The link is set to the group, but cannot be used. The following sub-states are available.
NoGivenReason
: IMA group is not registered.
Fault
: User-specific fault occurred.
Misconnected
: Misconnect fault occurred.
Inhibited
: Link operation stopped due to local or implementation reason.
Failed
: Fault such as LCD, LIF, or LODS occurred.
13-226
Appendix
03
Usable
The link is in the standby state and is waiting for Usable/Active report from the remote side.
(Not round-robin object)
04
Active
The link is activated and cells can be transmitted to the ATM layer.
(Round-robin object)
IMA group state
Description
01
Not Configured
No IMA group exists.
02
Start-up
Waiting for start-up report from the remote IMA. When the IMA group makes valid communication with the remote IMA,
the group parameters are recorded and the IMA group moves to Start-up-Ack.
03
Start-up-Ack
This is a temporary state.

state.
04
Config-Aborted
This is the state when the remote IMA tries to use an unacceptable configuration parameter.
05
Insufficient-Links
The IMA group accepts the remote group parameter and the remote side accepts the IMA group parameter, but there are
no sufficient links to move to the Operational state.
06
Blocked
The IMA group is blocked. When valid links of both directions are active, an IMA group can be blocked for
maintenance.
07
Operational
There are valid links of both Tx and Rx directions. The IMA interface can perform reception form the ATM layer cell and
can perform transmission from the IMA sub-layer to the ATM layer.
When the groups of both directions start up, they moves to the Insufficient-Links after this
13-227
Appendix
13.12 Remote Device Interface Speed-by-Speed

Connection List
(1) 10/100BASE-TX interface connection specifications
Setting of this device
Fixed
Auto-negotiation
Fixed
Setting of remote device

10BASE-T/
Full-duplex
100BASE-TX/
Full-duplex
Auto- negotiation
10BASE-T: Half-duplex
10BASE-T: Full-duplex
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex
100BASE-TX: Full-duplex
10BASE-T: Half-duplex only
10BASE-T: Full-duplex only
10BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex only
100BASE-TX: Full-duplex only
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/Full-duplex
10/100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/Full-duplex
1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex
10/100/1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/Full-duplex
(Legend)
: Not covered by continuity guarantee
(Caution)
In the case of fixed speed setting, connection is disabled, depending on the remote device. So, auto-negotiation is recommended.
13-228
Appendix
2) 1000BASE-T interface connection specifications
Fixed
Auto-negotiation
Fixed
1000BASE-T full-duplex
Auto-negotiation
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex
10BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex only
100BASE-TX: Full-duplex only
100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/full-duplex
10/100BASE-TX: Half-duplex/full-duplex
1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex
10/100/1000BASE-T: Half-duplex/full-duplex
(Legend) : Not covered by continuity guarantee

(Caution) In the case of fixed speed setting, connection is disabled, depending on the remote device. So, auto-negotiation is recommended.
13-229
Appendix
3) 1000BASE-X interface connection specifications
Setting of remote device
Fixed
1000BASE-T full-duplex
Fixed
Auto-negotiation
(Legend)
Auto-negotiation
: Not covered by continuity guarantee
13-230
Appendix
13.13 External Memory List

The table below indicates the media recommended for use with CX2600/200 and the media whose operations have been verified.
Manufacturer name
Model
Recommended
device
Operation-verified
device
FAT16
FAT32
Hagiwara Sys-Com Co., Ltd.
HUD-256PJ
Buffalo Inc.
RUF-C32M
Buffalo Inc.
RUF-X/U2
13-231
Appendix
(Blank page)
13-232
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

Please read the following terms and conditions carefully before using CX2600/200.
This Software License Agreement (the Agreement) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single
entity) and NEC Corporation (NEC) for the software identified herein (the Software).
This Software is pre-installed to NEC CX2600/200 (the Device); using the Device with this Software pre-installed, you
are agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Software License Agreement. If you are not willing to be bound by the
terms of this Software License Agreement, NEC does not grant your use or copy of this Software; you may return the
unused Device to your place of purchase, NEC or NEC authorized dealer, within fifteen days of the purchase date for a
full refund. Only the person or entity that originally purchased the Device has the right to return the device and ask for a
refund.
DEFINITION OF SOFTWARE: Software means a suite of computer programs pre-installed to the Device, related
printed materials (including documentations such as manuals), and electric files. Under this agreement, the Software
includes upgraded, bug-fixed, and revised versions (collectively, Upgraded Version) or back-up copies of this Software
provided to you by NEC or its authorized dealers.
GRANT OF LICENSE: This Agreement grants you the rights specified herein;
You may use this Software in this Device only for the purpose of the self-use (internal-use).
You may make single copy of this Software on arbitrary device or medium only for back-up purpose.
NO REVERSE ENGINEERING, NO DECOMPILING, NO DISASSEMBLING: You may not reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble this Software.
NO UNBUNDLING: This Software is designed and provided to you as a single product; you may not unbundle its
component parts for use on multiple Devices.
NO RENTING: You may not rent, lease, or lend this Software.
NO SHARING: You may not share this Software with other users by remote access or any other ways.
ASSIGNMENT OF THE SOFTWARE: You may assign all the rights under this Agreement permanently to another
person or entity when you transfer the Software with the Device of your purchase on a permanent basis, provided that
you retain no copies of the Software (including a copy for back-up) and the transferee agrees to the terms of this
Agreement.
TERMINATION: NEC may immediately terminate the license granted to you hereunder, without prejudice to any other
rights, upon notice for failure to comply with the terms and conditions of this Agreement. In the event that this Agreement
shall be terminated, you agree to stop using the Software and destroy all copies and components of this Software.
WARRANTY: Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, NEC provides this Software without warranty of any
kind. Warranty to the Device is provided by Product Maintenance Contract executed separately.
In no event shall NEC or its suppliers, regardless of its legal compositions, be liable to you for any revenues or profits,
loss of data, or any special, indirect, consequential, incidental, or punitive damages arising out of the use or inability to
use this Software, even if NEC has been advised of the possibility of such loss or damages. In no event shall NEC or
its suppliers liability arising under this license, act of tort (including negligence), or other grounds of action exceed the
amount paid by you for the Device.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: The copyright and other intellectual property rights of this Software and any
copies are owned by NEC or its supplier. Subject to this Agreement does not assign you any intellectual rights of this
Software.
EXPORT RULES: You may not export this Software or any copies from Japan without proper permission from the
government of Japan and any related foreign governments.
This Agreement shall be governed by and construed under the laws of Japan.
(Blank page)
CX2600/200
Multi-Service Aggregation Switch
Instruction Manual
NWD-063220-004
2004 NEC Corporation
Edition: 7.6
Revision B
May 2009
NEC Corporation
(Unauthorized copying is strictly prohibited.)

CX2600-200 Instruction Manual v7.6B Eng PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CX2600-200 Instruction Manual v7.6B Eng PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CX2600/200

Multi-Service Aggregation Switch

About This Product iii

Document Structure xii

About This Product

EU Emission (EMI) Standards

Safety Standard (FDA) for Laser Products

Use in Medical Institutions

Outside the European Union

Regarding Software License Agreement

The touching of a rotating object may cause

Indicates that the prohibition of the use of

Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this

Indicates that the prohibition of the

disassembly of the equipment for safety.

The handling of the equipment with a wet

Indicates that incorrect handling by neglecting this

hand is prohibited for safety reasons.

mark may cause injury to a human body and damage

for safety reasons.

Indicates that the prohibition of general

Indicates the supplementary explanation that is not

actions that are not specified.

related to personal safety or equipment damage.

Be sure to disconnect the power cord from

the power terminal (main body) for safety

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause

AC power supply module and the DC power

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause

Gives a direction for surely connecting the

ground cable to equipment having a ground

Connect or disconnect the power cable

described in this manual.

When using a DC power supply module in

Mishandling may cause fire or electric

this equipment, make sure that only a

voltage range of DC-40.5V to -57V is used

Always disconnect the external power

as the input range and when using an AC

source before connecting/disconnecting the

power supply module, AC100V, 120V,

power cable from the power terminal.

220V-230V, or 240V is used as the input

Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be

Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be

Be sure to connect the ground wire to the

Securely insert the power cable into the

Otherwise, electric shock may be caused.

power terminal (main body).

Connection of the ground wire reduces

If metal or the like makes contact with the

damage during lighting or prevents noise.

power terminal, fire or electric shock may

Do not use a damaged power cable.

Do not put any object on the power cable.

Otherwise, fire or electric shock may be

Damage to the power cable may cause fire

Do not pull or insert the power cable from or

For the DC power supply, securely connect

the DC power cable to the power terminal at

Otherwise, electric shock may be caused.

identifying -48V side and RTN(G) side and